Guideline on Air Quality Models; Enhancements to the AERMOD Dispersion Modeling System, 72826-72868 [2023-22876]
Download as PDF
72826
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
AGENCY
40 CFR Part 51
[EPA–HQ–OAR–2022–0872; FRL–10391–01–
OAR]
RIN 2060–AV92
Guideline on Air Quality Models;
Enhancements to the AERMOD
Dispersion Modeling System
Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA).
ACTION: Proposed rule; notification of
public hearing and conference.
AGENCY:
In this action, the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
proposes to revise the Guideline on Air
Quality Models (‘‘Guideline’’). The
Guideline has been incorporated into
EPA’s regulations, satisfying a
requirement under the Clean Air Act
(CAA) section 165(e)(3)(D) for the EPA
to specify, with reasonable particularity,
models to be used in the Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) program.
It provides EPA-preferred models and
other recommended techniques, as well
as guidance for their use in predicting
ambient concentrations of air pollutants.
In this action, the EPA is proposing
revisions to the Guideline, including
enhancements to the formulation and
application of the EPA’s near-field
dispersion modeling system, AERMOD,
and updates to the recommendations for
the development of appropriate
background concentration for
cumulative impact analyses. Within this
action, the EPA is also announcing the
Thirteenth Conference on Air Quality
Modeling and invites the public to
participate in the conference. The
conference will focus on the proposed
revisions to the Guideline, and part of
the conference will also serve as the
public hearing for these revisions.
DATES: Comments must be received on
or before December 22, 2023.
Public hearing and conference: The
public hearing for this action and the
Thirteenth Conference on Air Quality
Modeling will be held November 14–15,
2023, from 8:30 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.
Eastern Standard Time (EST).
ADDRESSES: Submit your comments,
identified by Docket ID No. EPA–HQ–
OAR–2022–0872, by one of the
following methods:
• Federal eRulemaking Portal:
https://www.regulations.gov. Follow the
online instructions for submitting
comments.
• Email: a-and-r-docket@epa.gov.
Include Docket ID No. EPA–HQ–OAR–
2022–0872 in the subject line of the
message.
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
SUMMARY:
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
• Fax: (202) 566–9744.
• Mail: Environmental Protection
Agency, EPA Docket Center, Office of
Air and Radiation Docket, Mail code
28221T, Attention Docket No. EPA–HQ–
OAR–2022–0872, 1200 Pennsylvania
Ave. NW, Washington, DC 20460.
• Hand/Courier Delivery: EPA Docket
Center, Room 3334, EPA WJC West
Building, 1301 Constitution Ave. NW,
Washington, DC. The Docket Center’s
hours of operations are 8:30 a.m.–4:30
p.m., Monday–Friday (except Federal
Holidays).
Instructions: All submissions received
must include the Docket ID No. for this
rulemaking. Comments received may be
posted without change to https://
www.regulations.gov, including any
personal information provided. For
detailed instructions on sending
comments and additional information
on the rulemaking process, see the
‘‘Public Participation’’ heading of the
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION section of
this document.
The public hearing will be held at 109
T.W. Alexander Drive, Research
Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
The hearing will convene at 8:30 a.m.
(local time) and will conclude at 5:00
p.m. (local time). Refer to the
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION section
below for additional information.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Mr.
George M. Bridgers, Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Air
Quality Assessment Division, Air
Quality Modeling Group, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Mail
code C439–01, Research Triangle Park,
NC 27711; telephone: (919) 541–5563;
email: Bridgers.George@epa.gov. (and
include ‘‘2023 Revisions to the
Guideline on Air Quality Models’’ in the
subject line of the message).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
The information in this preamble is
organized as follows:
Table of Contents
I. General Information
A. Does this action apply to me?
B. Where can I get a copy of this
document?
II. Background
A. The Guideline on Air Quality Models
and EPA Modeling Conferences
B. The Twelfth Conference on Air Quality
Modeling
C. Alpha and Beta Categorization of NonRegulatory Options
III. Public Participation
A. Written Comments
B. Notice of Public Hearing and the
Thirteenth Conference on Air Quality
Models
IV. Proposed Revisions to the Guideline
A. Proposed Revisions
V. Ongoing Model Development
PO 00000
Frm 00002
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
VI. Statutory and Executive Order Reviews
A. Executive Order 12866: Regulatory
Planning and Review and Executive
Order 14094: Modernizing Regulatory
Review
B. Paperwork Reduction Act (PRA)
C. Regulatory Flexibility Act (RFA)
D. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act
(UMRA)
E. Executive Order 13132: Federalism
F. Executive Order 13175: Consultation
and Coordination With Indian Tribal
Governments
G. Executive Order 13045: Protection of
Children From Environmental Health
Risks and Safety Risks
H. Executive Order 13211: Actions
Concerning Regulations That
Significantly Affect Energy Supply,
Distribution, or Use
I. National Technology Transfer and
Advancement Act
J. Executive Order 12898: Federal Actions
To Address Environmental Justice in
Minority Populations and Low-Income
Populations
I. General Information
A. Does this action apply to me?
This action applies to Federal, State,
territorial, and local air quality
management programs that conduct air
quality modeling as part of State
Implementation Plan (SIP) submittals
and revisions, New Source Review
(NSR), including new or modifying
industrial sources under Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD),
Conformity, and other air quality
assessments required under EPA
regulation. Categories and entities
potentially regulated by this action
include:
NAICS a
code
Category
Federal/State/territorial/local/Tribal government .........................
a North
American
Industry
924110
Classification
System.
B. Where can I get a copy of this
document?
In addition to being available in the
docket, an electronic copy of this
proposed rule and relative supporting
documentation will also be available on
EPA’s Support Center for Regulatory
Atmospheric Modeling (SCRAM)
website. Following signature, these
materials will be posted on SCRAM at
the following address: https://
www.epa.gov/scram/13th-conferenceair-quality-modeling.
II. Background
A. The Guideline on Air Quality Models
and EPA Modeling Conferences
The Guideline is used by the EPA,
other Federal, State, territorial, and local
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
air quality agencies, and industry to
prepare and review preconstruction
permit applications for new sources and
modifications, SIP submittals and
revisions, determinations that actions by
Federal agencies are in conformity with
SIPs, and other air quality assessments
required under EPA regulation. The
Guideline serves as a means by which
national consistency is maintained in
air quality analyses for regulatory
activities under CAA regulations,
including 40 CFR 51.112, 51.117,
51.150, 51.160, 51.165, 51.166, 52.21,
93.116, 93.123, and 93.150.
The EPA originally published the
Guideline in April 1978 (EPA–450/2–
78–027), and it was incorporated by
reference in the regulations for the PSD
program in June 1978. The EPA revised
the Guideline in 1986 (51 FR 32176) and
updated it with supplement A in 1987
(53 FR 32081), supplement B in July
1993 (58 FR 38816), and supplement C
in August 1995 (60 FR 40465). The EPA
published the Guideline as Appendix W
to 40 CFR part 51 when the EPA issued
supplement B. The EPA republished the
Guideline in August 1996 (61 FR 41838)
to adopt the CFR system for labeling
paragraphs. The publication and
incorporation of the Guideline by
reference into the EPA’s PSD regulations
satisfies the requirement under the CAA
section 165(e)(3)(D) for the EPA to
promulgate regulations that specify with
reasonable particularity models to be
used under specified sets of conditions
for purposes of the PSD program.
To support the process of developing
and revising the Guideline during the
period of 1977 to 1988, we held the
First, Second, and Third Conferences on
Air Quality Modeling as required by
CAA section 320 to help standardize
modeling procedures. These modeling
conferences provided a forum for
comments on the Guideline and
associated revisions, thereby helping us
introduce improved modeling
techniques into the regulatory process.
Between 1988 and 1995, we conducted
the Fourth, Fifth, and Sixth Conferences
on Air Quality Modeling to solicit
comments from the stakeholder
community to guide our consideration
of further revisions to the Guideline,
update the available modeling tools
based on the current state-of-thescience, and advise the public on new
modeling techniques.
The Seventh Conference was held in
June 2000 and also served as a public
hearing for the proposed revisions to the
recommended air quality models in the
Guideline (65 FR 21506). These changes
included the CALPUFF modeling
system, AERMOD Modeling System,
and ISC–PRIME model. Subsequently,
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
the EPA revised the Guideline on April
15, 2003 (68 FR 18440), to adopt
CALPUFF as the preferred model for
long-range transport of emissions from
50 to several hundred kilometers and to
make various editorial changes to
update and reorganize information and
remove obsolete models.
We held the Eighth Conference on Air
Quality Modeling in September 2005.
This conference provided details on
changes to the preferred air quality
models, including available methods for
model performance evaluation and the
notice of data availability that the EPA
published in September 2003, related to
the incorporation of the PRIME
downwash algorithm in the AERMOD
dispersion model (in response to
comments received from the Seventh
Conference). Additionally, at the Eighth
Conference, a panel of experts discussed
the use of state-of-the-science prognostic
meteorological data for informing the
dispersion models. The EPA further
revised the Guideline on November 9,
2005 (70 FR 68218), to adopt AERMOD
as the preferred model for near-field
dispersion of emissions for distances up
to 50 kilometers.
The Ninth Conference on Air Quality
Modeling was held in October 2008 and
emphasized the following topics:
reinstituting the Model Clearinghouse,
review of non-guideline applications of
dispersion models, regulatory status
updates of AERMOD and CALPUFF,
continued discussions on the use of
prognostic meteorological data for
informing dispersion models, and
presentations reviewing the available
model evaluation methods. To further
inform the development of additional
revisions to the Guideline, we held the
Tenth Conference on Air Quality
Modeling in March 2012. The
conference addressed updates on: the
regulatory status and future
development of AERMOD and
CALPUFF, review of the Mesoscale
Model Interface (MMIF) prognostic
meteorological data processing tool for
dispersion models, draft modeling
guidance for compliance
demonstrations of the fine particulate
matter (PM2.5) National Ambient Air
Quality Standards (NAAQS), modeling
for compliance demonstration of the 1hour nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and sulfur
dioxide (SO2) NAAQS, and new and
emerging models/techniques for future
consideration under the Guideline to
address single-source modeling for
ozone and secondary PM2.5, as well as
long-range transport and chemistry.
The Eleventh Conference on Air
Quality Modeling was held August 12–
13, 2015, and included the public
hearing for the most recently proposed
PO 00000
Frm 00003
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72827
version of the Guideline. The conference
included presentations summarizing the
proposed updates to the AERMOD
Modeling System, replacement of
CALINE3 with AERMOD for modeling
of mobile sources, incorporation of
prognostic meteorological data for use
in dispersion modeling, the proposed
screening approach for long-range
transport for NAAQS and PSD
increments assessments with use of
CALPUFF as a screening technique
rather than an EPA-preferred model, the
proposed 2-tiered screening approach to
address ozone and PM2.5 in PSD
compliance demonstrations, the status
and role of the Model Clearinghouse,
and updates to procedures for singlesource and cumulative modeling
analyses (e.g., modeling domain, source
input data, background data, and
compliance demonstration procedures).
Additionally, the 2015 proposed
action included a reorganization of the
Guideline to make it easier to use and
to streamline the compliance
assessment process (80 FR 45340), and
also included additional clarity in
distinguishing requirements from
recommendations while noting the
continued flexibilities provided within
the Guideline, including but not limited
to use and approval of alternative
models (82 FR at 45344). These
proposed revisions were adopted and
reflected in the latest version of the
Guideline, promulgated on January 17,
2017 (82 FR 5182).
B. The Twelfth Conference on Air
Quality Modeling
The most recent EPA modeling
conference was the Twelfth Conference
on Air Quality Modeling, which was
held in August 2019 in continuing
compliance with CAA section 320.
While not associated with a regulatory
action, the Twelfth Conference was held
with the intent to inform the ongoing
development of EPA’s preferred air
quality models and potential revisions
to the Guideline. The conference
included expert panel discussions and
invited presentations covering the
following model/technique
enhancements: treatment of low wind
conditions, overwater modeling, mobile
source modeling, building downwash,
prognostic meteorological data, nearfield and long-range model evaluation
criteria, NO2 modeling techniques,
plume rise, deposition, and single
source ozone and PM2.5 modeling
techniques. At the conclusion of the
expert panels and invited presentations,
there were several presentations given
by the public, including industrial trade
groups, on recommended areas for
additional model development and
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
72828
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
future revision in the Guideline. The
proposed regulatory updates to the
AERMOD Modeling System in this
action address topics on which there
was focused discussion and engagement
with the stakeholder community
through these expert panels and invited
and public presentations during the
Twelfth Conference.
All the presentations, along with the
transcript of the conference
proceedings, are available in the docket
for the Twelfth Conference on Air
Quality Models (Docket ID No. EPA–
HQ–OAR–2019–0454). Additionally, all
the materials associated with the
Twelfth Conference and the public
hearing are available on the EPA’s
SCRAM website at https://www.epa.gov/
scram/12th-conference-air-qualitymodeling.
C. Alpha and Beta Categorization of
Non-Regulatory Options
With the release of AERMOD version
18181 in 2018, the EPA adopted a new
paradigm for engagement with the
scientific community to facilitate the
continued development of the AERMOD
Modeling System. Previously, updates
to the scientific formulation of the
model were not made available to the
public for review, testing, evaluation,
and comment prior to the proposal stage
of the formal rulemaking process when
an update was made to the Guideline.
This limited the public’s engagement
and feedback to a short, predefined
comment period, typically only one to
two months. The new approach enables
the EPA to release potential formulation
updates as non-regulatory ‘‘alpha’’ and
‘‘beta’’ options as they are being
developed. As non-regulatory options,
they can be made available during any
release cycle, thereby enabling feedback
as they are being developed. This
approach allows for more robust testing
and evaluation during development,
benefitting from the experience of a
broad expert community. In addition,
the EPA developed a protocol to enable
the external community to submit
model updates to the EPA for review
and consideration for inclusion as new
alpha or beta options. A pathway such
as this that facilitates more frequent and
active engagement with the external
community allows for a more informed
and timely regulatory update process
when the EPA has determined an
update has met the criteria required for
consideration as a science formulation
update to the regulatory version of the
model.
In this alpha/beta construct, alpha
options are updates to the scientific
formulation that are thought to have
merit but are considered experimental,
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
still in the research and development
stage. Alpha options have not yet been
fully tested, evaluated, or vetted through
peer review and should not be
considered for use as an alternative
model for regulatory applications of the
model.
Beta options, on the other hand, have
been demonstrated to be applicable on
a theoretical basis, have undergone
scientific peer review, and are
supported with performance evaluations
using available and adequate databases
that demonstrate unbiased, improved
model performance. In general, beta
options have met the necessary criteria
to be formally proposed and adopted as
updates to the regulatory version of the
model but have not yet been proposed
through the required rulemaking
process, which includes a public
hearing and formal comment period.
Beta options are mature enough in the
development process to be considered
for use as an alternative model,
provided an appropriate site-specific
modeling demonstration is completed to
show the alternative model is
appropriate for the site and conditions
where it will be applied and the
requirements of the Guideline, section
3.2, are fully satisfied, including formal
concurrence by the EPA’s Model
Clearinghouse.
III. Public Participation
Interested persons may provide the
EPA with their views on the proposed
revisions to the Guideline in several
ways. This includes submitting written
comments to the EPA, participating in
the Thirteenth Conference on Air
Quality Modeling, and speaking at the
public hearing that will be conducted as
part of the conference. Additional
information on where to submit written
comments on the proposed revisions to
the Guideline is provided in the
ADDRESSES section above.
A. Written Comments
Submit your comments, identified by
Docket ID No. EPA–HQ–OAR–2022–
0872, at https://www.regulations.gov
(our preferred method), or the other
methods identified in the ADDRESSES
section. Once submitted, comments
cannot be edited or removed from the
docket. The EPA may publish any
comment received to its public docket.
Do not submit to EPA’s docket at
https://www.regulations.gov any
information you consider to be
Confidential Business Information (CBI),
Proprietary Business Information (PBI),
or other information whose disclosure is
restricted by statute. Multimedia
submissions (audio, video, etc.) must be
accompanied by a written comment.
PO 00000
Frm 00004
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
The written comment is considered the
official comment and should include
discussion of all points you wish to
make. The EPA will generally not
consider comments or comment
contents located outside of the primary
submission (i.e., on the web, cloud, or
other file sharing system). Please visit
https://www.epa.gov/dockets/
commenting-epa-dockets for additional
submission methods; the full EPA
public comment policy; information
about CBI, PBI, or multimedia
submissions; and general guidance on
making effective comments.
B. Notice of Public Hearing and the
Thirteenth Conference on Air Quality
Models
The public hearing for this action and
the Thirteenth Conference on Air
Quality Modeling will be held on
November 14–15, 2023, in the EPA
Nantahala Auditorium, Room C111, 109
T.W. Alexander Drive, Research
Triangle Park, NC 27711. The hearing
and conference will convene each day at
8:30 a.m. EST and will conclude at 5:00
p.m. EST.
The Thirteenth Conference on Air
Quality Modeling will be open to the
public. No registration fee is charged.
The conference will be formally
conducted and chaired by an EPA
official. As required under CAA section
320, a verbatim transcript of the
conference proceedings will be
produced and placed in the docket for
this proposed action. The conference
will begin with introductory remarks by
the presiding EPA official. The EPA staff
and EPA invited speakers will then
provide a structured overview of the
revisions to the Guideline as proposed
in this document and present on the
research that supports those revisions
and supports formulation updates to the
preferred models. The following topics
will be presented:
I. Overview of the Thirteenth Conference
on Air Quality Modeling;
II. Review of the proposed revisions to the
preferred air quality models; and
III. Review of the proposed revisions to the
Guideline.
At the conclusion of these
presentations, the EPA will convene the
public hearing on the proposed
revisions to the Guideline. The public
hearing will span a portion of the
afternoon of the first day and
throughout the second day of the
conference. The EPA will make every
effort to follow the schedule as closely
as possible on the days of the
conference; however, please plan for the
public hearing to run either ahead of
schedule or behind schedule. The EPA
may close the hearing 15 minutes after
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
the last pre-registered speaker has
testified on November 15, if there are no
additional speakers.
Those wishing to reserve time to
speak at the public hearing, whether to
offer specific comments on the proposed
rule, volunteer a presentation on a
special topic, or to offer
recommendations on any regulatory
modeling techniques, should contact us
at the address given in the FOR FURTHER
INFORMATION CONTACT section by no later
than November 10, 2023. Such persons
should identify the organization (if any)
on whose behalf they are speaking and
the length of the presentation. If a
scheduled presentation is projected to
be longer than 10 minutes, the presenter
should also state why a longer period is
needed. Scheduled speakers should
bring extra copies of their presentation
for inclusion in the docket and for the
convenience of the recorder. Scheduled
speakers will also be permitted to enter
additional written comments into the
record.
Any person in attendance wishing to
speak at the public hearing who has not
reserved time in advance may provide
oral comments on the proposed
revisions to the Guideline during time
allotted on the last day. These parties
will need to sign up to speak on the
second day of the hearing, and the EPA
may need to limit the duration of
presentations to allow all participants to
be heard.
The EPA may ask clarifying questions
during the oral presentations but will
not respond to the presentations at that
time. Information submitted to the EPA
during the public hearing will be placed
in the docket for this proposed action.
Written statements and supporting
information submitted during the
comment period will be considered
with the same weight as oral testimony
and supporting information presented at
the public hearing.
Conference background information.
Preregistration details, additional
background information, and a more
detailed agenda for the Thirteenth
Conference on Air Quality Modeling are
electronically available at https://
www.epa.gov/scram/13th-conferenceair-quality-modeling. Preregistration for
the conference, while not required, is
strongly recommended due to
heightened security protocols at the
EPA–RTP facility.
Access to U.S. government facility.
Because this hearing is being held at a
U.S. government facility, individuals
planning to attend the conference and/
or public hearing should be prepared to
show valid picture identification to the
security staff in order to gain access to
the meeting room. Please note that the
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
REAL ID Act, passed by Congress in
2005, established new requirements for
entering Federal facilities. For purposes
of the REAL ID Act, EPA will accept
government-issued IDs, including
drivers’ licenses, from the District of
Columbia and all States and territories
except from American Samoa. If your
identification is issued by American
Samoa, you must present an additional
form of identification to enter the
Federal building where the public
hearing will be held. Acceptable
alternative forms of identification
include Federal employee badges,
passports, enhanced driver’s licenses,
and military identification cards. For
additional information for the status of
your State regarding REAL ID, go to:
https://www.dhs.gov/real-idenforcement-brieffrequently-askedquestions. Any objects brought into the
building need to fit through the security
screening system, such as a purse,
laptop bag, or small backpack.
Demonstrations will not be allowed on
Federal property for security reasons.
Attendees are encouraged to arrive at
least 15 minutes prior to the start of the
meeting to allow enough time for
security screening.
IV. Proposed Revisions to the Guideline
In this action, the EPA is proposing
updates to the Guideline corresponding
to updates to the scientific formulation
of the AERMOD Modeling System and
updates to the recommendations for the
development of appropriate background
concentration for cumulative impact
analyses. When and where appropriate,
the EPA has engaged with our Federal
partners, including the Bureau of Ocean
Energy Management (BOEM) and the
Federal Highway Administration
(FHWA), to collaborate on these
proposed updates to the Guideline.
There are additional editorial changes
proposed to the Guideline to correct
minor typographical errors found in the
2017 Guideline and update website
links.
A. Proposed Revisions
This section provides a detailed
overview of the substantive proposed
changes to the Guideline that are
intended to improve the science of the
models and approaches used in
regulatory assessments.
1. Proposed Updates to EPA’s AERMOD
Modeling System
Based on studies presented and
discussed at the Twelfth Conference on
Air Quality Models held on October 2–
PO 00000
Frm 00005
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72829
3, 2019,1 and additional relevant
research since 2017, the EPA and other
researchers have conducted additional
model evaluations and developed
changes to the model formulation of the
AERMOD Modeling System to improve
model performance in its regulatory
applications. One update is to the
AERMET meteorological preprocessor
for AERMOD. This update provides the
capability to process measured and
prognostic marine-based meteorology
for offshore applications. Separate
updates are related to the AERMOD
dispersion model and include (1) a new
Tier 3 screening method for the
conversion of nitrogen oxides (NOX)
emissions to NO2 and (2) a new source
type for modeling vehicle roadway
emissions.
Each of the proposed formulation
updates to the AERMOD Modeling
System is provided as a non-regulatory
beta option in the release of the relevant
modeling system components that is
occurring concurrent with this proposed
rule. If EPA adopts these formulation
updates in a subsequent final rule, the
beta categorization would be removed
and the respective model option(s)
could be considered regulatory model
options.
The EPA proposes the following
updates to the AERMOD Modeling
System to address several technical
concerns expressed by stakeholders:
a. Incorporation of COARE Algorithms
Into AERMET for Use in Overwater
Marine Boundary Layer Environments
As the number of overwater
applications has increased in recent
years, the EPA is proposing to add the
Coupled Ocean-Atmosphere Response
Experiment (COARE) 2 3 algorithms to
AERMET for meteorological data
processing in applications using either
observed or prognostic meteorological
data in overwater marine boundary
layer environments. One of the first
notable uses of AERMOD for an
overwater application was an alternative
model application—AERMOD–COARE
was used in 2011 in an ice-free arctic
environment of Alaska.4 5 In this
1 https://www.epa.gov/scram/12th-conference-airquality-modeling.
2 Fairall, C.W., E.F. Bradley, J.E. Hare, A.A.
Grachev, and J.B. Edson, 2003: ‘‘Bulk
Parameterization of Air-Sea Fluxes: Updates and
Verification for the COARE Algorithm.’’ Journal of
Climate, 16, 571–591.
3 Evaluation of the Implementation of the
Coupled Ocean-Atmosphere Response Experiment
(COARE) algorithms into AERMET for Boundary
Layer Environments. EPA–2023/R–23–008, Office
of Air Quality Planning and Standards, RTP, NC.
4 U.S. EPA, 2011: COARE Bulk Flux Algorithm to
Generate Hourly Meteorological Data for Use with
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
Continued
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72830
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
elimination is contingent upon
consultation with the EPA Regional
Office and appropriate reviewing
authority. This consultation will ensure
that platform downwash and shoreline
fumigation are adequately considered in
the modeling demonstration.
application, the incorporation of the
COARE bulk flux algorithm was used as
an alternative to the AERMET
meteorological processor to AERMOD.
This led to the development of the
AERCOARE 6 processor that can be used
with either measured or prognostic data
for overwater applications in lieu of
AERMET. AERCOARE has been
approved as an alternative model for
several overwater applications since
2011.7
For overwater applications, the
algorithms in COARE are better suited
for overwater boundary layer
calculations than the existing algorithms
in AERMET that are better suited for
land-based data. These calculations
include calculation of surface
roughness, stability classification,
effects of moisture on Monin-Obukhov
length, and the use of Bowen ratio by
AERMET for heat flux calculations.5
The EPA proposes to add COARE to
AERMET in order to ensure that the
COARE algorithms are updated
regularly as part of routine AERMET
updates, to provide consistent data
handling among land based and
overwater based meteorological data
(e.g., treatment of missing data and
treatment of calms), and to have all
meteorological processing for AERMOD
applications in one program.
The addition of the COARE
algorithms to AERMET would replace
the standalone AERCOARE program and
the AERCOARE output option in MMIF
for prognostic data overwater. This
proposed option is selected by the user
with the METHOD COARE RUN–
COARE record in the AERMET Stage 2
input file. For prognostic applications
processed through the MMIF, the user
can run MMIF for AERMET input for
overwater applications.
The addition of COARE to AERMET
would eliminate the previous
alternative model demonstration
requirements for use of AERMOD in
marine environments, and this
b. Proposed Addition of a New Tier 3
Detailed Screening Technique for NO2
Section 4.2.3.4 of the 2017 Guideline
details a 3-tiered approach for
evaluating the modeled impacts of NOX
sources, which was recommended to
assess hourly and annual average NO2
impacts from point, volume, and area
sources for the purposes of the PSD
program, SIP planning, and
transportation general conformity. This
3-tiered approach addresses the coemissions of NO and NO2 and the
subsequent conversion of NO to NO2 in
the atmosphere. The tiered levels
include:
Tier 1—assuming that all emitted NO
is converted to NO2 (full conversion).
Tier 2—using the Ambient Ratio
Method 2 (ARM2), which applies an
assumed equilibrium ratio of NO2 to
NOX, based on analysis of and
correlation with nationwide hourly
observed ambient conditions.
Tier 3—applying the Ozone Limiting
Method (OLM) and Plume Volume
Molar Ratio (PVMRM) screening options
based on site-specific hourly ozone data
and source-specific NO2 to NOX in-stack
ratios.8 9 10 11
As further discussed in section
4.2.3.4(e) of the Guideline, regulatory
application of Tier 3 screening options
shall occur in consultation with the EPA
Regional Office and appropriate
reviewing authority.
The EPA proposes to include the
Generic Reaction Set Method (GRSM) as
a regulatory non-default Tier 3 NO2
screening option. Following a peerreviewed publication in 2017, GRSM
was added to AERMOD as an alpha
option in version 21112 and updated as
a beta option in version 22112.12 The
the AERMOD dispersion program; Section 3.2.2.e
Alternative Refined Model Demonstration Herman
Wong Memorandum dated April 1, 2011, Office of
Environmental Assessment, Region 10, Seattle,
Washington 98101.
5 U.S. EPA, 2011: Model Clearinghouse Review
AERMOD–COARE as an Alternative Model in an
Arctic Ice Free Environment. George Bridgers
Memorandum dated May 6, 2011, Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle
Park, North Carolina 27711.
6 U.S. EPA, 2012: User’s Manual AERCOARE
Version 1.0. EPA–910–R–12–008. U.S. EPA, Region
10, Seattle, WA.
7 Please reference the EPA Model Clearinghouse
Information Storage and Retrieval System
(MCHISRS) database for more information regarding
AERCOARE alternative model approvals (https://
cfpub.epa.gov/oarweb/MCHISRS, text Search term
‘‘AERCOARE’’).
8 Podrez, M. 2015. An Update to the Ambient
Ratio Method for 1-h NO2 Air Quality Standards
Dispersion Modeling. Atmospheric Environment,
103: 163–170.
9 Cole, H.S. and J.E. Summerhays, 1979. A Review
of Techniques Available for Estimation of ShortTerm NO2 Concentrations. Journal of the Air
Pollution Control Association, 29(8): 812–817.
10 Hanrahan, P.L., 1999. The Polar Volume Polar
Ratio Method for Determining NO2/NOX Ratios in
Modeling—Part I: Methodology. Journal of the Air
& Waste Management Association, 49: 1324–1331.
11 Chu, S.H. and E.L. Meyer, 1991. Use of
Ambient Ratios to Estimate Impact of NOX Sources
on Annual NO2 Concentrations. Proceedings, 84th
Annual Meeting & Exhibition of the Air & Waste
Management Association, Vancouver, B.C.; 16–21
June 1991. (16pp.) (Docket No. A–92–65, II–A–9).
12 David J. Carruthers, Jenny R. Stocker, Andrew
Ellis, Martin D. Seaton & Stephen E. Smith (2017)
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
PO 00000
Frm 00006
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
primary motivation behind the
formulation and development of the
GRSM NO2 screening option was to
address photolytic conversion of NO2 to
NO and to address the time-of-travel
necessary for NOX plumes to convert the
NO portion of the plume to NO2 via
titration and entrainment of ambient
ozone. The existing regulatory nondefault Tier 3 NO2 screening options,
PVMRM and OLM, do not address or
provide for treatment of these
mechanisms, and have been shown to
over-predict for some source
characterizations and model
configurations at project source ambient
air boundaries and within the first 1–3
km.13
The functionality of the GRSM
implementation in AERMOD is similar
to that of the PVMRM and OLM
schemes, with exception to some
additional input requirements necessary
for treatment of the reverse NO2
photolysis reaction during daytime
hours. Modeled source inputs for GRSM
require NO2/NOX in-stack ratios, with
similar assumptions as applied to
PVMRM and OLM according to section
4.2.3.4 of the Guideline. Ambient inputs
for GRSM require hourly ozone
concentrations taken from an
appropriately representative monitoring
station or selection of monitoring
stations for varying upwind sector
concentrations. GRSM also requires
hourly NOX concentration inputs to
resolve the daytime photolysis of NO2
reaction in equilibrium with ozone
titration conversion of the NO portion of
the NOX plume. GRSM hourly NOX
concentration inputs can also vary by
upwind sector concentration, as
appropriate. Background NO2
concentrations are accounted for in the
GRSM daytime equilibrium NO2
concentration estimates based on the
chemical reaction balance between
ozone entrainment and NO titration,
photolysis of NO2 to NO, and ambient
background NO2 participation in
titration and photolysis reactions.
Nighttime GRSM NO2 estimates are
based on ozone entrainment and
titration of available NO in the NOX
plume. Note that all hourly ozone and
NOX ambient inputs to GRSM must
coincide with the hourly meteorological
Evaluation of an explicit NOX chemistry method in
AERMOD, Journal of the Air & Waste Management
Association, 67:6, 702–712, DOI: 10.1080/
10962247.2017.1280096.
13 Jenny Stocker, Martin Seaton, Stephen Smith,
James O’Neill, Kate Johnson, Rose Jackson, David
Carruthers (CERC). Evaluation of the Generic
Reaction Set Method for NO2 conversion in
AERMOD. The modification of AERMOD to include
ADMS chemistry. August 8, 2023. Cambridge
Environmental Research Consultants (CERC)
Technical Report.
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
data records for the period of the
modeling analysis (i.e., minimum of 1
year for on-site data, 3 years of
prognostic data, and 5 years of airport
data).
Updates to the GRSM formulation in
AERMOD version 22112 were
developed in late 2022 to address more
realistic building effects on
instantaneous plume spread, accounting
of multiple plume effects on
entrainment of ozone, and the tendency
of GRSM to over-predict in the far-field
(e.g., beyond approximately 3 km for
typical point source releases).
Sensitivity testing and model
performance evaluations of these
updates to GRSM in AERMOD version
23132 have shown consistent or
improved model behavior and
performance.14
c. Proposed Addition of RLINE as
Mobile Source Type
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
As a culmination of an Interagency
Agreement between EPA and FHWA,
the EPA proposes to add the RLINE
source type as a new source type
applicable for regulatory modeling of
mobile sources. This is in addition to
the AREA, LINE, and VOLUME source
types already available for mobile
source modeling. The proposed addition
of RLINE as a mobile source type is an
extension of the 2017 update to the
Guideline in which AERMOD replaced
CALINE3 as the addendum A 15 model
for mobile source modeling. At that
time, AERMOD’s AREA, LINE, and
VOLUME sources were available for
mobile source modeling. The basis of
the RLINE source type is the EPA’s
Office of Research and Development
(ORD) Research LINE (RLINE) model 16
released in 2013. The RLINE model was
designed for near-surface releases to
simulate mobile source dispersion with
an emphasis on the near-road
environment. The RLINE model was
first incorporated into AERMOD as a
beta source type in AERMOD version
19191 in 2019.
14 Environmental Protection Agency, 2023.
Technical Support Document (TSD) for Adoption of
the Generic Reaction Set Method (GRSM) as a
Regulatory Non-Default Tier-3 NO2 Screening
Option, Publication No. EPA–454/R–23–009. Office
of Air Quality Planning & Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC.
15 Under the codification requirements of the
Administrative Committee of the Federal Register
(ACFR), only subparts, parts, subchapters, and
chapters may have appendices. Therefore, we have
changed the naming convention from ‘‘appendix A’’
to ‘‘addendum A’’.
16 Snyder, M.G., Venkatram, A., Heist, D.K.,
Perry, S.G., Petersen, W.B. and Isakov, V., 2013.
RLINE: A line source dispersion model for nearsurface releases. Atmospheric environment, 77,
pp.748–756.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
The RLINE source type for this
proposed action has undergone
significant evaluation by the EPA and
the FHWA as part of the Interagency
Agreement and has shown improved
performance.17 18 This proposed option
is selected by the model user with the
SOURCE type ‘‘RLINE’’. In addition to
proposing RLINE as a new source type,
the EPA is also proposing the use of the
AERMOD urban option (accounting for
urban heat island effect in stable
conditions) and terrain with the RLINE
source type. However, the inclusion of
terrain with RLINE does not supersede
the EPA’s PM Hot-spot guidance where
FLAT terrain is recommended for
modeling applications.19 The EPA also
emphasizes that the inclusion of RLINE
as a source type for mobile source
modeling does not preclude the use of
the existing AREA, LINE, and VOLUME
source types thereby extending the
flexibility of users in best characterizing
mobile source for regulatory modeling.
d. Support Information, Documentation,
and Model Code
Model performance evaluation and
peer-reviewed scientific references for
each of these three proposed updates to
the AERMOD Modeling System are
cited and placed in the docket, as
appropriate. An updated user’s guide
and model formulation documents for
version 23132 have also been placed in
the docket. We have updated the
summary description of the AERMOD
Modeling System to addendum A of the
Guideline to reflect these proposed
updates. The essential codes,
preprocessors, and test cases have been
updated and posted to the EPA’s
SCRAM website, https://www.epa.gov/
scram.
2. Proposed Updates to
Recommendations on the Development
of Background Concentration
Based on permit modeling
experiences since the 2017 revisions to
the Guideline, the EPA proposes
revisions to section 8 of the Guideline
to refine the recommendations regarding
the determination of appropriate model
input data, specifically background
17 Incorporation and Evaluation of the RLINE
source type in AERMOD for Mobile Source
Applications. EPA–2023/R–23–011, Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, RTP, NC.
18 Heist, D., et al., 2023. Integration of RLINE
dispersion model into EPA’s AERMOD: updated
formulation and evaluations. Journal of the Air &
Waste Management Association, Manuscript
submitted for publication.
19 U.S. EPA, 2021: PM Hot-spot Guidance;
Transportation Conformity Guidance for
Quantitative Hot-spot Analyses in PM2.5 and PM10
Nonattainment and Maintenance Areas. EPA–42–B–
21–037. U.S. EPA, Office of Transportation and Air
Quality, Ann Arbor, MI.
PO 00000
Frm 00007
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72831
concentration, for use in NAAQS
implementation modeling
demonstrations (e.g., PSD compliance
demonstrations, SIP demonstrations for
inert pollutants, and SO2 designations).
The Guideline recommends that a
representative background
concentration should include
contributions from all sources,
including both nearby and other
sources. When identifying nearby
sources that may not be adequately
represented by ambient monitoring data,
the Guideline recommends selecting
sources ‘‘that cause a significant
concentration gradient in the vicinity of
the source(s) under consideration.’’ The
EPA recognizes that the recommended
method for identifying nearby sources
lacks specificity, is used and referenced
inconsistently, and may lead to overly
conservative modeling exercises. The
proposed revisions to section 8 are
intended to provide a more robust
framework for characterizing
background concentrations for
cumulative modeling with particular
attention to identifying and modeling
nearby sources in multi-source areas.
The EPA proposes to revise
recommendations for the determination
of background concentrations in
constructing the design concentration,
or total air quality concentration in
multi-source areas (see section 8.3), as
part of a cumulative impact analysis for
NAAQS implementation modeling
demonstrations. The EPA’s proposed
framework includes a stepwise set of
considerations to replace the narrow
recommendation of modeling nearby
sources that cause a significant
concentration gradient. This framework
focuses the inherent discretion in
defining representative background
concentrations through qualitative and
semi-quantitative considerations within
a transparent process using the variety
of emissions and air quality data
available to the permit applicant. To
construct a background concentration
for model input under the framework,
permit applicants should consider the
representativeness of relevant
emissions, air quality monitoring, and
pre-exiting air quality modeling to
appropriately represent background
concentrations for the cumulative
impact analysis.
In conjunction with the proposed
revisions to section 8 of the Guideline,
the EPA developed the Draft Guidance
on Developing Background
Concentrations for Use in Modeling
Demonstrations.20 This draft guidance
20 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023.
Draft Guidance on Developing Background
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
Continued
23OCP2
72832
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
document details the EPArecommended framework with
illustrative examples to assist permit
applicants in characterizing a credible
and appropriately representative
background concentration for
cumulative impact analyses including
the contributions from nearby sources in
multi-source areas.
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
3. Transition Period for Applicability of
Revisions to the Guideline
In previous rulemakings to revise the
Guideline, we have traditionally
communicated that it would be
appropriate to provide 1-year to
transition to the use of new models,
techniques and procedures in the
context of PSD permit applications and
other regulatory modeling applications.
We invite comments whether it would
be appropriate to apply a 1-year
transition after promulgation of the
revised Guideline (i.e., from its effective
date) such that applications conducted
under the existing Guideline with
approved protocols would be acceptable
during that period, but new
requirements and recommendations
should be used for applications
submitted after that period or protocols
approved after that period.
Such a transition period is consistent
with previous revisions to the Guideline
and appropriate to avoid the time and
expense of revisiting modeling that is
substantially complete, which would
cause undue delays to permit
applications that are pending when the
proposed revisions to the Guideline are
finalized. The proposed revisions to the
Guideline are intended as incremental
improvements to the Guideline, and
such improvements do not necessarily
invalidate past practices under the
previous editions of the Guideline. The
requirements and recommendations in
the existing (2017) version of the
Guideline were previously identified as
acceptable by the EPA, and they will
continue to be acceptable for air quality
assessments during the period of
transition to the revised version of the
Guideline, if finalized.
Where a proposed revision to the
Guideline does raise questions about the
acceptability of a requirement or
recommendation that it replaces, model
users and applicants are encouraged to
consult with the appropriate reviewing
authority as soon as possible to assure
the acceptability of modeling used to
support permit applications during this
period.
Concentrations for Use in Modeling
Demonstrations. Publication No. EPA–454/P–23–
001. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
4. Proposed Revisions by Section
a. Section 1.0—Introduction
The EPA proposes to correct
paragraph (i) by combining the
inadvertently created paragraph (A),
which is actually part of the phrase
‘‘addendum A’’ in the first sentence.
b. Section 3.0—Preferred and
Alternative Air Quality Models
The EPA proposes to revise an
outdated website link in section 3.0(b).
In sections 3.1.1(c) and 3.1.2(a), the
EPA proposes to correct the sections by
combining the inadvertently created
paragraph (A), which is actually part of
the phrase ‘‘addendum A’’ in the first
sentence.
c. Section 4.0—Models for Carbon
Monoxide, Lead, Sulfur Dioxide,
Nitrogen Dioxide and Primary
Particulate Matter
The EPA proposes to update reference
numbers where necessary due to added
references.
In sections 4.1(b) and 4.2.2(a), the
EPA proposes to correct the sections by
combining the inadvertently created
paragraph (A), which is actually part of
the phrase ‘‘addendum A’’ in the first
sentence.
In section 4.2.2.1, the EPA proposes to
add a new paragraph (f) regarding the
use of AERMOD in certain overwater
situations. A typographical correction is
proposed in section 4.2.2.1(b).
The EPA proposes amendments to
section 4.2.2.3 to account for
circumstances where OCD is available
to evaluate situations where shoreline
fumigation and/or platform downwash
are important.
In section 4.2.3.4, the EPA proposes to
revise paragraph (e) to adopt the Generic
Reaction Set Method (GRSM) as a
regulatory Tier 3 detailed screening
technique for NO2 modeling
demonstrations. Sentences in this
section would be updated to incorporate
GRSM with the existing regulatory Tier
3 screening techniques OLM and
PVMRM. An additional statement is
proposed indicating GRSM model
performance may be better than OLM
and PVMRM under certain source
characterization situations. The EPA
also proposes to add two references to
the section including one for the peerreviewed paper on development and
evaluation of GRSM, and a second
reference to the EPA Technical Support
Document (TSD) on GRSM.
The EPA proposes to revise Table 4–
1 in section 4.2.3.4(f) to include GRSM
as a Tier 3 detailed screening option.
PO 00000
Frm 00008
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
d. Section 5.0—Models for Ozone and
Secondarily Formed Particulate Matter
The EPA proposes to update reference
numbers where necessary due to added
references. In section 5.2, the EPA
proposes to revise paragraph (c) to
include a reference for guidance on the
use of models to assess the impacts of
emissions from single sources on
secondarily formed ozone and PM2.5.
e. Section 6.0—Modeling for Air Quality
Related Values and Other Governmental
Programs
The EPA proposes to update reference
numbers where necessary due to added
references and revise an outdated
website link in section 6.3(a).
f. Section 7.0—General Modeling
Considerations
The EPA proposes to update reference
numbers where necessary due to added
references.
In section 7.2.3, the EPA proposes to
revise paragraph (b) to include the
addition of RLINE as a source type for
use in regulatory applications of
AERMOD and remove references to
specific distances that receptors can be
placed from the roadway.
Also in section 7.2.3, the EPA
proposes to revise paragraph (c) to
include RLINE as a source type that can
be used to model mobile sources and
clarify that an area source can be
categorized in AERMOD using the
AREA, LINE, or RLINE source type.
g. Section 8.0—Model Input Data
The EPA proposes to update reference
numbers where necessary due to added
references.
The EPA proposes to revise Table 8–
1 and Table 8–2 to correct typographical
errors and update the footnotes in each
of the tables.
The EPA proposes to revise section
8.3.1 to address current EPA practices
and recommendations for determining
the appropriate background
concentration as model input data for a
new or modifying source(s) or sources
under consideration for a revised permit
limit. This revision would provide a
stepwise framework for modeling
isolated single sources and multi-source
areas as part of a cumulative impact
analysis. The EPA also proposes to
remove the term ‘‘significant
concentration gradient’’ and its related
content in section 8.3.1(a)(i) due to the
ambiguity and lack of definition of this
term in the context of modeling multisource areas.
The EPA proposes to remove
paragraph (d) in section 8.3.2 and
renumber paragraphs (e) and (f) to (d)
and (e), respectively. The content of
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
paragraph (d) is proposed to be included
in the proposed revision of paragraph
(a) in section 8.3.2.
In section 8.3.3, the EPA proposes
revisions to the content in section
8.3.3(b) on the recommendations for
determining nearby sources to explicitly
model as part of a cumulative impact
analysis. The EPA proposes to remove
the content related to the term
‘‘significant concentration gradient’’ in
section 8.3.3(b)(i), section 8.3.3(b)(ii),
and section 8.3.3(b)(iii) due to the lack
of definition of this term in the context
of modeling multi-source areas. The
EPA also proposes to revise the example
given in section 8.3.3(d) to be consistent
with the discussion of other sources in
section 8.3.1(a)(ii) and the proposed
revisions to Tables 8–1 and 8–2.
In section 8.4.1, the EPA proposes to
include buoy data as an example of sitespecific data as a result of the inclusion
of the Coupled-Ocean Atmosphere
Response Experiment (COARE)
algorithms to AERMET for marine
boundary layer processing. The EPA
proposes to revise paragraph (a) of
section 8.4.2 to note that MMIF should
be used to process prognostic
meteorological data for both land-based
and overwater applications, and to
revise paragraph (b) to clarify that
AERSURFACE should be used to
calculate surface characteristics for
land-based data and AERMET calculates
surface characteristics for overwater
applications. Also, the EPA proposes to
revise paragraph (e) of this section to
clarify that at least 1-year of site-specific
data applies to both land-based and
overwater-based data.
The EPA proposes to revise paragraph
(a) of section 8.4.3.2 to remove
references to specific weblinks and to
state that users should refer to the latest
guidance documents for weblinks.
The EPA proposes to add a new
section 8.4.6 to discuss the
implementation of COARE for marine
boundary layer processing and to
renumber the existing section 8.4.6 (in
the 2017 Guideline) to a new section
8.4.7. References to specific wind speed
thresholds are proposed to be replaced
with guidance to consult the
appropriate guidance documents for the
latest thresholds.
h. Section 9.0—Regulatory Application
of Models
The EPA proposes to update reference
numbers where necessary due to added
references.
In section 9.2.3, the EPA proposes to
revise the example given in section
9.2.3(a)(ii) to be consistent with the
discussion of other sources in section
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
72833
8.3.1(a)(ii) and the proposed revisions to
Tables 8–1 and 8–2.
our proposed updates to the AERMOD
Modeling System.
i. Section 10.0—References
The EPA proposes updates to
references in section 10.0 to remove
outdated website links and reflect
current versions of guidance documents,
user’s guides, and other supporting
documentation where applicable. The
EPA also proposes to add references to
support proposed updates to the
AERMOD Modeling System described
in this proposed update to the
Guideline.
c. Section A.3
In section A.3, the EPA proposes to
remove the reference to the Bureau of
Ocean Energy Management’s (BOEM)
outdated guidance.
5. Proposed Revisions to Addendum
A 21 to Appendix W to Part 51
a. Section A.0
The EPA proposes to revise section
A.0 to remove references that indicate
there are ‘‘many’’ preferred models
while the number is currently only
three.
b. Section A.1
The EPA proposes to revise the
References section to include additional
references that support our proposed
updates to the AERMOD Modeling
System.
In the Abstract section, the EPA
proposes to add line type sources as one
of the source types AERMOD can
simulate.
The EPA proposes to revise section
A.1(a) to include overwater applications
for regulatory modeling where shoreline
fumigation and/or platform downwash
are not important to facilitate the use of
AERMOD with COARE processing. This
revision would remove the need to
request an alternative model
demonstration for such applications.
The EPA also proposes to clarify
elevation data that can be used in
AERMOD, specifically the change in the
name of the U.S. Geological Survey
(USGS) National Dataset (NED) to 3D
Elevation Program (3DEP). For
consistency, references to NED would
be updated to 3DEP throughout section
A.1.
The EPA proposes to revise section
A.1(b) to include prognostic data as
meteorological input to the AERMOD
Modeling System, as applicable.
The EPA proposes to revise section
A.1(l) to include the proposed Generic
Reaction Set Method in the discussion
on chemical transformation in
AERMOD. We also propose to clarify
the status of the different deposition
options in A.1(l).
The EPA proposes to revise section
A.1(n) to include references to
additional evaluation studies to support
21 Formerly
PO 00000
designated as appendix A.
Frm 00009
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
V. Ongoing Model Development
In addition to the proposed beta
options above, AERMOD version 23132
also includes alpha options that are
thought to have scientific merit and that
are still being developed or evaluated
and peer reviewed. These alpha options
are not being proposed as updates to the
regulatory formulation of the AERMOD
Modeling System, and the EPA is not
taking comment on the alpha options
during this rulemaking. A list of alpha
options on which the EPA has placed a
high priority for continued research and
development for model improvement is
included below. Refer to the AERMOD
User’s Guide for details and usage of
each option.
The AERMOD Modeling System,
version 23131, includes but is not
limited to the following alpha options:
• Low Wind Default Overrides
(LOW_WIND).
LOW_WIND was first implemented as
a collection of non-regulatory beta test
options in AERMOD version 12345
(LOWWIND1 and LOWWIND2) and
expanded in version
15481(LOWWIND3). Each of these
options altered the default model values
for minimum sigma-v, minimum wind
speed, and the minimum meander factor
with different combinations of
hardcoded values. Though the original
LOW_WIND beta test options are no
longer implemented in AERMOD, the
LOW_WIND option was recategorized as
an alpha option in AERMOD version
18181. The LOW_WIND option in
version 23132 enables the user to
override AERMOD default values with
user-defined values for one or more of
the following parameters:
Æ Minimum standard deviation of the
lateral velocity to the average wind
direction;
Æ Minimum mean wind speed;
Æ Minimum and maximum meander
factor;
Æ Minimum standard deviation of the
vertical wind speed; and
Æ Time scale for random dispersion.
• Modifications to PRIME Building
Downwash (AWMADWNW and ORD_
DWNW).
Beginning with AERMOD version
19191, two distinct sets of alpha options
were added that modify the building
downwash algorithm, PRIME. The two
sets of options were developed
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72834
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
independently by EPA’s ORD (ORD_
DWNW) and the Air & Waste
Management Association (A&WMA)
(AWMADWNW). With a couple of
exceptions, the options within each set
can be employed individually or
combined with other options from each
set.
• Downwash from Offshore Drilling
Platforms (PLATFORM).
To enhance AERMOD’s offshore
modeling capabilities, the platform
downwash algorithm, adapted from the
Offshore Coastal Dispersion (OCD)
dispersion model, was incorporated in
AERMOD version 22112 and requires
further development, testing, and
evaluation. The PLATFORM option
simulates the building downwash effect
from platforms commonly used for
offshore drilling, made up of both
porous and solid structures and which
are elevated with airflow beneath them.
• Extended RLINE Source Type
Including Barriers and Depressed
Roadways (RLINEXT).
The RLINEXT source type was
implemented in AERMOD version
18181 and is an extended version of the
RLINE source type that allows for a
more refined characterization of a road
segment. It accepts separate inputs for
the elevations of each end of the road
segment and extended options for
modeling with roadway barriers
(RBARRIER) and depressed roadways
(RDEPRESS).
• TTRM and TTRM2 for Conversion
of NOX to NO2.
The Travel Time Reaction Method
(TTRM) was implemented in AERMOD
version 21112 as a stand-alone NOX-toNO2 conversion option that accounts for
plume travel time, applicable only in
the near field. TTRM was further
integrated in AERMOD version 22112 as
TTRM2 which can be paired with any
one of the Ambient Ration Method
(ARM2), OLM, or PVMRM. When paired
with one of these, TTRM is applied in
the near field and the other specified
option is applied in the far field where
travel time is not as relevant.
• Highly Buoyant Plume (HBP).
A Highly Buoyant Plume (HBP)
option was implemented as an alpha
option that can be applied to POINT
source types beginning with AERMOD
version 23132 to further explore
AERMOD’s treatment of the penetrated
plume. A penetrated plume occurs
when a plume released into the mixed
layer, and a portion of the plume
eventually penetrates the top of the
mixed layer during convective hours as
it continues to rise due to either
buoyancy or momentum.
• Aircraft Plume Rise (AREA/
VOLUME Source Types).
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
Beginning with AERMOD version
23132, the characterization of AREA
and VOLUME sources was extended to
account for the buoyancy and horizontal
momentum of aircraft emissions. The
aircraft plume rise formulation and code
for AREA and VOLUME sources was
independently developed and provided
by the Federal Aviation Administration
(FAA). EPA continues to collaborate
with FAA on model evaluation and peer
review of the aircraft plume rise
formulations.
VI. Statutory and Executive Order
Reviews
Additional information about these
statutes and Executive Orders can be
found at https://www.epa.gov/lawsregulations/laws-and-executive-orders.
A. Executive Order 12866: Regulatory
Planning and Review and Executive
Order 14094: Modernizing Regulatory
Review
This action is not a significant
regulatory action as defined in
Executive Order 12866, as amended by
Executive Order 14094, and was
therefore not subject to a requirement
for Executive Order 12866 review.
B. Paperwork Reduction Act (PRA)
This action does not impose an
information collection burden under the
PRA. This action does not contain any
information collection activities, nor
does it add any information collection
requirements beyond those imposed by
existing New Source Review
requirements.
C. Regulatory Flexibility Act (RFA)
I certify that this action will not have
a significant economic impact on a
substantial number of small entities
under the RFA. This action will not
impose any requirements on small
entities. This action proposes revisions
to the Guideline, including
enhancements to the formulation and
application of the EPA’s near-field
dispersion modeling system, AERMOD,
and updates to the recommendations for
the development of appropriate
background concentration for
cumulative impact analyses. Use of the
models and/or techniques described in
this action is not expected to pose any
additional burden on small entities.
D. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act
(UMRA)
This action does not contain any
unfunded mandate as described in
UMRA, 2 U.S.C. 1531–1538, and does
not significantly or uniquely affect small
governments. This action imposes no
PO 00000
Frm 00010
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
enforceable duty on any State, local or
Tribal governments or the private sector.
E. Executive Order 13132: Federalism
This action does not have federalism
implications. It will not have substantial
direct effects on the States, on the
relationship between the national
government and the States, or on the
distribution of power and
responsibilities among the various
levels of government.
F. Executive Order 13175: Consultation
and Coordination With Indian Tribal
Governments
This action does not have Tribal
implications, as specified in Executive
Order 13175. This action provides
proposed revisions to the Guideline
which is used by the EPA, other
Federal, State, territorial, local, and
Tribal air quality agencies, and industry
to prepare and review preconstruction
permit applications, SIP submittals and
revisions, determinations of conformity,
and other air quality assessments
required under EPA regulation. Separate
from this action, the Tribal Air Rule
implements the provisions of section
301(d) of the CAA authorizing eligible
Tribes to implement their own Tribal air
program. Thus, Executive Order 13175
does not apply to this action.
The EPA provided information
regarding this action to the Tribes
during a monthly National Tribal Air
Association (NTAA) call and will
continue to provide any new or
subsequent updates to EPA modeling
guidance and other regulatory
compliance demonstration related
topics upon request of the NTAA.
Additionally, the EPA specifically
solicits any comments on this proposed
action from Tribal officials.
G. Executive Order 13045: Protection of
Children From Environmental Health
Risks and Safety Risks
EPA interprets Executive Order 13045
as applying only to those regulatory
actions that concern environmental
health or safety risks that EPA has
reason to believe may
disproportionately affect children, per
the definition of ‘‘covered regulatory
action’’ in section 2–202 of the
Executive Order.
Therefore, this action is not subject to
Executive Order 13045 because it does
not concern an environmental health
risk or safety risk. Since this action does
not concern human health, EPA’s Policy
on Children’s Health also does not
apply.
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
H. Executive Order 13211: Actions
Concerning Regulations That
Significantly Affect Energy Supply,
Distribution, or Use
PART 51—REQUIREMENTS FOR
PREPARATION, ADOPTION, AND
SUBMITTAL OF IMPLEMENTATION
PLANS
This action is not subject to Executive
Order 13211, because it is not a
significant regulatory action under
Executive Order 12866.
■
I. National Technology Transfer and
Advancement Act
■
Appendix W to Part 51—Guideline on
Air Quality Models Preface
J. Executive Order 12898: Federal
Actions To Address Environmental
Justice in Minority Populations and
Low-Income Populations and Executive
Order 14096: Revitalizing Our Nation’s
Commitment to Environmental Justice
for All
The EPA believes that this action does
not have disproportionate and adverse
human health or environmental effects
on communities with environmental
justice concerns because it does not
establish an environmental health or
safety standard. This action proposes
revisions to the Guideline, including
enhancements to the formulations and
application of EPA’s near-field
dispersion modeling system, AERMOD,
that would assist and expand
assessment options in Environmental
Justice determinations. While the EPA
does not expect this action to directly
impact air quality, the proposed
revisions are important because the
Guideline is used by air permitting
authorities and industry to prepare and
review NSR permits and serves as a
benchmark of consistency across the
nation. This consistency has value to all
communities including communities
with environmental justice concerns.
List of Subjects in 40 CFR Part 51
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Environmental protection,
Administrative practice and procedure,
Air pollution control, Carbon monoxide,
Criteria pollutants, Intergovernmental
relations, Lead, Mobile sources,
Nitrogen oxides, Ozone, Particulate
matter, Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements, Stationary sources, Sulfur
oxides.
Michael S. Regan,
Administrator.
For the reasons stated in the
preamble, the Environmental Protection
Agency is amending title 40, chapter I
of the Code of Federal Regulations as
follows:
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
Authority: 23 U.S.C. 101; 42 U.S.C. 7401–
7671q.
2. Appendix W to part 51 is revised
to read as follows:
This rulemaking does not involve
technical standards.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
1. The authority citation for part 51
continues to read as follows:
a. Industry and control agencies have long
expressed a need for consistency in the
application of air quality models for
regulatory purposes. In the 1977 Clean Air
Act (CAA), Congress mandated such
consistency and encouraged the
standardization of model applications. The
Guideline on Air Quality Models (hereafter,
Guideline) was first published in April 1978
to satisfy these requirements by specifying
models and providing guidance for their use.
The Guideline provides a common basis for
estimating the air quality concentrations of
criteria pollutants used in assessing control
strategies and developing emissions limits.
b. The continuing development of new air
quality models in response to regulatory
requirements and the expanded requirements
for models to cover even more complex
problems have emphasized the need for
periodic review and update of guidance on
these techniques. Historically, three primary
activities have provided direct input to
revisions of the Guideline. The first is a series
of periodic EPA workshops and modeling
conferences conducted for the purpose of
ensuring consistency and providing
clarification in the application of models.
The second activity was the solicitation and
review of new models from the technical and
user community. In the March 27, 1980,
Federal Register, a procedure was outlined
for the submittal to the EPA of privately
developed models. After extensive evaluation
and scientific review, these models, as well
as those made available by the EPA, have
been considered for recognition in the
Guideline. The third activity is the extensive
on-going research efforts by the EPA and
others in air quality and meteorological
modeling.
c. Based primarily on these three activities,
new sections and topics have been included
as needed. The EPA does not make changes
to the guidance on a predetermined schedule,
but rather on an as-needed basis. The EPA
believes that revisions of the Guideline
should be timely and responsive to user
needs and should involve public
participation to the greatest possible extent.
All future changes to the guidance will be
proposed and finalized in the Federal
Register. Information on the current status of
modeling guidance can always be obtained
from the EPA’s Regional Offices.
Table of Contents
List of Tables
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Overview of Model Use
PO 00000
Frm 00011
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72835
2.1 Suitability of Models
2.1.1 Model Accuracy and Uncertainty
2.2 Levels of Sophistication of Air Quality
Analyses and Models
2.3 Availability of Models
3.0 Preferred and Alternative Air Quality
Models
3.1 Preferred Models
3.1.1 Discussion
3.1.2 Requirements
3.2 Alternative Models
3.2.1 Discussion
3.2.2 Requirements
3.3 EPA’s Model Clearinghouse
4.0 Models for Carbon Monoxide, Lead,
Sulfur Dioxide, Nitrogen Dioxide and
Primary Particulate Matter
4.1 Discussion
4.2 Requirements
4.2.1 Screening Models and Techniques
4.2.1.1 AERSCREEN
4.2.1.2 CTSCREEN
4.2.1.3 Screening in Complex Terrain
4.2.2 Refined Models
4.2.2.1 AERMOD
4.2.2.2 CTDMPLUS
4.2.2.3 OCD
4.2.3 Pollutant Specific Modeling
Requirements
4.2.3.1 Models for Carbon Monoxide
4.2.3.2 Models for Lead
4.2.3.3 Models for Sulfur Dioxide
4.2.3.4 Models for Nitrogen Dioxide
4.2.3.5 Models for PM2.5
4.2.3.6 Models for PM10
5.0 Models for Ozone and Secondarily
Formed Particulate Matter
5.1 Discussion
5.2 Recommendations
5.3 Recommended Models and Approaches
for Ozone
5.3.1 Models for NAAQS Attainment
Demonstrations and Multi-Source Air
Quality Assessments
5.3.2 Models for Single-Source Air
Quality Assessments
5.4 Recommended Models and Approaches
for Secondarily Formed PM2.5
5.4.1 Models for NAAQS Attainment
Demonstrations and Multi-Source Air
Quality Assessments
5.4.2 Models for Single-Source Air
Quality Assessments
6.0 Modeling for Air Quality Related Values
and Other Governmental Programs
6.1 Discussion
6.2 Air Quality Related Values
6.2.1 Visibility
6.2.1.1 Models for Estimating Near-Field
Visibility Impairment
6.2.1.2 Models for Estimating Visibility
Impairment for Long-Range Transport
6.2.2 Models for Estimating Deposition
Impacts
6.3 Modeling Guidance for Other
Governmental Programs
7.0 General Modeling Considerations
7.1 Discussion
7.2 Recommendations
7.2.1 All sources
7.2.1.1 Dispersion Coefficients
7.2.1.2 Complex Winds
7.2.1.3 Gravitational Settling and
Deposition
7.2.2 Stationary Sources
7.2.2.1 Good Engineering Practice Stack
Height
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
72836
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
7.2.2.2 Plume Rise
7.2.3 Mobile Sources
8.0 Model Input Data
8.1 Modeling Domain
8.1.1 Discussion
8.1.2 Requirements
8.2 Source Data
8.2.1 Discussion
8.2.2 Requirements
8.3 Background Concentrations
8.3.1 Discussion
8.3.2 Recommendations for Isolated
Single Sources
8.3.3 Recommendations for Multi-Source
Areas
8.4 Meteorological Input Data
8.4.1 Discussion
8.4.2 Recommendations and
Requirements
8.4.3 National Weather Service Data
8.4.3.1 Discussion
8.4.3.2 Recommendations
8.4.4 Site-specific data
8.4.4.1 Discussion
8.4.4.2 Recommendations
8.4.5 Prognostic meteorological data
8.4.5.1 Discussion
8.4.5.2 Recommendations
8.4.6 Marine Boundary Layer
Environments
8.4.6.1 Discussion
8.4.6.2 Recommendations
8.4.7 Treatment of Near-Calms and Calms
8.4.7.1 Discussion
8.4.7.2 Recommendations
9.0 Regulatory Application of Models
9.1 Discussion
9.2 Recommendations
9.2.1 Modeling Protocol
9.2.2 Design Concentration and Receptor
Sites
9.2.3 NAAQS and PSD Increments
Compliance Demonstrations for New or
Modified Sources
9.2.3.1 Considerations in Developing
Emissions Limits
9.2.4 Use of Measured Data in Lieu of
Model Estimates
10.0 References
Addendum A to Appendix W of Part
51—Summaries of Preferred Air
Quality Models
List of Tables
Table No.
Title
8–1 .........
Point Source Model Emission Inputs for SIP Revisions of Inert
Pollutants.
Point Source Model Emission Inputs for NAAQS Compliance in
PSD Demonstrations.
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
8–2 .........
1.0 Introduction
a. The Guideline provides air quality
modeling techniques that should be applied
to State Implementation Plan (SIP) submittals
and revisions, to New Source Review (NSR),
including new or modifying sources under
Prevention of Significant Deterioration
(PSD),1 2 3 conformity analyses,4 and other air
quality assessments required under EPA
regulation. Applicable only to criteria air
pollutants, the Guideline is intended for use
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
by the EPA Regional Offices in judging the
adequacy of modeling analyses performed by
the EPA, by State, local, and Tribal
permitting authorities, and by industry. It is
appropriate for use by other Federal
government agencies and by State, local, and
Tribal agencies with air quality and land
management responsibilities. The Guideline
serves to identify, for all interested parties,
those modeling techniques and databases
that the EPA considers acceptable. The
Guideline is not intended to be a
compendium of modeling techniques. Rather,
it should serve as a common measure of
acceptable technical analysis when
supported by sound scientific judgment.
b. Air quality measurements 5 are routinely
used to characterize ambient concentrations
of criteria pollutants throughout the nation
but are rarely sufficient for characterizing the
ambient impacts of individual sources or
demonstrating adequacy of emissions limits
for an existing source due to limitations in
spatial and temporal coverage of ambient
monitoring networks. The impacts of new
sources that do not yet exist, and
modifications to existing sources that have
yet to be implemented, can only be
determined through modeling. Thus, models
have become a primary analytical tool in
most air quality assessments. Air quality
measurements can be used in a
complementary manner to air quality models,
with due regard for the strengths and
weaknesses of both analysis techniques, and
are particularly useful in assessing the
accuracy of model estimates.
c. It would be advantageous to categorize
the various regulatory programs and to apply
a designated model to each proposed source
needing analysis under a given program.
However, the diversity of the nation’s
topography and climate, and variations in
source configurations and operating
characteristics dictate against a strict
modeling ‘‘cookbook.’’ There is no one model
capable of properly addressing all
conceivable situations even within a broad
category such as point sources.
Meteorological phenomena associated with
threats to air quality standards are rarely
amenable to a single mathematical treatment;
thus, case-by-case analysis and judgment are
frequently required. As modeling efforts
become more complex, it is increasingly
important that they be directed by highly
competent individuals with a broad range of
experience and knowledge in air quality
meteorology. Further, they should be
coordinated closely with specialists in
emissions characteristics, air monitoring and
data processing. The judgment of
experienced meteorologists, atmospheric
scientists, and analysts is essential.
d. The model that most accurately
estimates concentrations in the area of
interest is always sought. However, it is clear
from the needs expressed by the EPA
Regional Offices, by State, local, and Tribal
agencies, by many industries and trade
associations, and also by the deliberations of
Congress, that consistency in the selection
and application of models and databases
should also be sought, even in case-by-case
analyses. Consistency ensures that air quality
control agencies and the general public have
PO 00000
Frm 00012
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
a common basis for estimating pollutant
concentrations, assessing control strategies,
and specifying emissions limits. Such
consistency is not, however, promoted at the
expense of model and database accuracy. The
Guideline provides a consistent basis for
selection of the most accurate models and
databases for use in air quality assessments.
e. Recommendations are made in the
Guideline concerning air quality models and
techniques, model evaluation procedures,
and model input databases and related
requirements. The guidance provided here
should be followed in air quality analyses
relative to SIPs, NSR, and in supporting
analyses required by the EPA and by State,
local, and Tribal permitting authorities.
Specific models are identified for particular
applications. The EPA may approve the use
of an alternative model or technique that can
be demonstrated to be more appropriate than
those recommended in the Guideline. In all
cases, the model or technique applied to a
given situation should be the one that
provides the most accurate representation of
atmospheric transport, dispersion, and
chemical transformations in the area of
interest. However, to ensure consistency,
deviations from the Guideline should be
carefully documented as part of the public
record and fully supported by the
appropriate reviewing authority, as discussed
later.
f. From time to time, situations arise
requiring clarification of the intent of the
guidance on a specific topic. Periodic
workshops are held with EPA headquarters,
EPA Regional Offices, and State, local, and
Tribal agency modeling representatives to
ensure consistency in modeling guidance and
to promote the use of more accurate air
quality models, techniques, and databases.
The workshops serve to provide further
explanations of Guideline requirements to
the EPA Regional Offices and workshop
materials are issued with this clarifying
information. In addition, findings from
ongoing research programs, new model
development, or results from model
evaluations and applications are
continuously evaluated. Based on this
information, changes in the applicable
guidance may be indicated and appropriate
revisions to the Guideline may be considered.
g. All changes to the Guideline must follow
rulemaking requirements since the Guideline
is codified in Appendix W to 40 Code of
Federal Regulations (CFR) part 51. The EPA
will promulgate proposed and final rules in
the Federal Register to amend this appendix.
The EPA utilizes the existing procedures
under CAA section 320 that requires the EPA
to conduct a Conference on Air Quality
Modeling at least every 3 years (CAA 320, 42
U.S.C. 7620). These modeling conferences are
intended to develop standardized air quality
modeling procedures and form the basis for
associated revisions to this Guideline in
support of the EPA’s continuing effort to
prescribe with ‘‘reasonable particularity’’ air
quality models and meteorological and
emission databases suitable for modeling
National Ambient Air Quality Standards
(NAAQS) 6 and PSD increments. Ample
opportunity for public comment will be
provided for each proposed change and
public hearings scheduled.
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
h. A wide range of topics on modeling and
databases are discussed in the Guideline.
Section 2 gives an overview of models and
their suitability for use in regulatory
applications. Section 3 provides specific
guidance on the determination of preferred
air quality models and on the selection of
alternative models or techniques. Sections 4
through 6 provide recommendations on
modeling techniques for assessing criteria
pollutant impacts from single and multiple
sources with specific modeling requirements
for selected regulatory applications. Section
7 discusses general considerations common
to many modeling analyses for stationary and
mobile sources. Section 8 makes
recommendations for data inputs to models
including source, background air quality, and
meteorological data. Section 9 summarizes
how estimates and measurements of air
quality are used in assessing source impact
and in evaluating control strategies.
i. Appendix W to 40 CFR part 51 contains
an addendum: addendum A. Thus, when
reference is made to ‘‘addendum A’’ in this
document, it refers to addendum A to
appendix W to 40 CFR part 51. Addendum
A contains summaries of refined air quality
models that are ‘‘preferred’’ for particular
applications; both EPA models and models
developed by others are included.
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
2.0 Overview of Model Use
a. Increasing reliance has been placed on
concentration estimates from air quality
models as the primary basis for regulatory
decisions concerning source permits and
emission control requirements. In many
situations, such as review of a proposed new
source, no practical alternative exists. Before
attempting to implement the guidance
contained in this document, the reader
should be aware of certain general
information concerning air quality models
and their evaluation and use. Such
information is provided in this section.
2.1 Suitability of Models
a. The extent to which a specific air quality
model is suitable for the assessment of source
impacts depends upon several factors. These
include: (1) the topographic and
meteorological complexities of the area; (2)
the detail and accuracy of the input
databases, i.e., emissions inventory,
meteorological data, and air quality data; (3)
the manner in which complexities of
atmospheric processes are handled in the
model; (4) the technical competence of those
undertaking such simulation modeling; and
(5) the resources available to apply the
model. Any of these factors can have a
significant influence on the overall model
performance, which must be thoroughly
evaluated to determine the suitability of an
air quality model to a particular application
or range of applications.
b. Air quality models are most accurate and
reliable in areas that have gradual transitions
of land use and topography. Meteorological
conditions in these areas are spatially
uniform such that observations are broadly
representative and air quality model
projections are not further complicated by a
heterogeneous environment. Areas subject to
major topographic influences experience
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
meteorological complexities that are often
difficult to measure and simulate. Models
with adequate performance are available for
increasingly complex environments.
However, they are resource intensive and
frequently require site-specific observations
and formulations. Such complexities and the
related challenges for the air quality
simulation should be considered when
selecting the most appropriate air quality
model for an application.
c. Appropriate model input data should be
available before an attempt is made to
evaluate or apply an air quality model.
Assuming the data are adequate, the greater
the detail with which a model considers the
spatial and temporal variations in
meteorological conditions and permitenforceable emissions, the greater the ability
to evaluate the source impact and to
distinguish the effects of various control
strategies.
d. There are three types of models that
have historically been used in the regulatory
demonstrations applicable in the Guideline,
each having strengths and weaknesses that
lend themselves to particular regulatory
applications.
i. Gaussian plume models use a ‘‘steadystate’’ approximation, which assumes that
over the model time step, the emissions,
meteorology and other model inputs, are
constant throughout the model domain,
resulting in a resolved plume with the
emissions distributed throughout the plume
according to a Gaussian distribution. This
formulation allows Gaussian models to
estimate near-field impacts of a limited
number of sources at a relatively high
resolution, with temporal scales of an hour
and spatial scales of meters. However, this
formulation allows for only relatively inert
pollutants, with very limited considerations
of transformation and removal (e.g.,
deposition), and further limits the domain for
which the model may be used. Thus,
Gaussian models may not be appropriate if
model inputs are changing sharply over the
model time step or within the desired model
domain, or if more advanced considerations
of chemistry are needed.
ii. Lagrangian puff models, on the other
hand, are non-steady-state, and assume that
model input conditions are changing over the
model domain and model time step.
Lagrangian models can also be used to
determine near- and far-field impacts from a
limited number of sources. Traditionally,
Lagrangian models have been used for
relatively inert pollutants, with slightly more
complex considerations of removal than
Gaussian models. Some Lagrangian models
treat in-plume gas and particulate chemistry.
However, these models require time and
space varying concentration fields of
oxidants and, in the case of fine particulate
matter (PM2.5), neutralizing agents, such as
ammonia. Reliable background fields are
critical for applications involving secondary
pollutant formation because secondary
impacts generally occur when in-plume
precursors mix and react with species in the
background atmosphere.7 8 These oxidant and
neutralizing agents are not routinely
measured, but can be generated with a threedimensional photochemical grid model.
PO 00000
Frm 00013
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72837
iii. Photochemical grid models are threedimensional Eulerian grid-based models that
treat chemical and physical processes in each
grid cell and use diffusion and transport
processes to move chemical species between
grid cells.9 Eulerian models assume that
emissions are spread evenly throughout each
model grid cell. At coarse grid resolutions,
Eulerian models have difficulty with fine
scale resolution of individual plumes.
However, these types of models can be
appropriately applied for assessment of nearfield and regional scale reactive pollutant
impacts from specific sources 7 10 11 12 or all
sources.13 14 15 Photochemical grid models
simulate a more realistic environment for
chemical transformation,7 12 but simulations
can be more resource intensive than
Lagrangian or Gaussian plume models.
e. Competent and experienced
meteorologists, atmospheric scientists, and
analysts are an essential prerequisite to the
successful application of air quality models.
The need for such specialists is critical when
sophisticated models are used or the area has
complicated meteorological or topographic
features. It is important to note that a model
applied improperly or with inappropriate
data can lead to serious misjudgments
regarding the source impact or the
effectiveness of a control strategy.
f. The resource demands generated by use
of air quality models vary widely depending
on the specific application. The resources
required may be important factors in the
selection and use of a model or technique for
a specific analysis. These resources depend
on the nature of the model and its
complexity, the detail of the databases, the
difficulty of the application, the amount and
level of expertise required, and the costs of
manpower and computational facilities.
2.1.1 Model Accuracy and Uncertainty
a. The formulation and application of air
quality models are accompanied by several
sources of uncertainty. ‘‘Irreducible’’
uncertainty stems from the ‘‘unknown’’
conditions, which may not be explicitly
accounted for in the model (e.g., the
turbulent velocity field). Thus, there are
likely to be deviations from the observed
concentrations in individual events due to
variations in the unknown conditions.
‘‘Reducible’’ uncertainties 16 are caused by:
(1) uncertainties in the ‘‘known’’ input
conditions (e.g., emission characteristics and
meteorological data); (2) errors in the
measured concentrations; and (3) inadequate
model physics and formulation.
b. Evaluations of model accuracy should
focus on the reducible uncertainty associated
with physics and the formulation of the
model. The accuracy of the model is
normally determined by an evaluation
procedure which involves the comparison of
model concentration estimates with
measured air quality data.17 The statement of
model accuracy is based on statistical tests or
performance measures such as bias, error,
correlation, etc.18 19
c. Since the 1980’s, the EPA has worked
with the modeling community to encourage
development of standardized model
evaluation methods and the development of
continually improved methods for the
characterization of model
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72838
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
performance.16 18 20 21 22 There is general
consensus on what should be considered in
the evaluation of air quality models; namely,
quality assurance planning, documentation
and scrutiny should be consistent with the
intended use and should include:
• Scientific peer review;
• Supportive analyses (diagnostic
evaluations, code verification, sensitivity
analyses);
• Diagnostic and performance evaluations
with data obtained in trial locations; and
• Statistical performance evaluations in
the circumstances of the intended
applications.
Performance evaluations and diagnostic
evaluations assess different qualities of how
well a model is performing, and both are
needed to establish credibility within the
client and scientific community.
d. Performance evaluations allow the EPA
and model users to determine the relative
performance of a model in comparison with
alternative modeling systems. Diagnostic
evaluations allow determination of a model
capability to simulate individual processes
that affect the results, and usually employ
smaller spatial/temporal scale data sets (e.g.,
field studies). Diagnostic evaluations enable
the EPA and model users to build confidence
that model predictions are accurate for the
right reasons. However, the objective
comparison of modeled concentrations with
observed field data provides only a partial
means for assessing model performance. Due
to the limited supply of evaluation datasets,
there are practical limits in assessing model
performance. For this reason, the conclusions
reached in the science peer reviews and the
supportive analyses have particular relevance
in deciding whether a model will be useful
for its intended purposes.
2.2 Levels of Sophistication of Air Quality
Analyses and Models
a. It is desirable to begin an air quality
analysis by using simplified and conservative
methods followed, as appropriate, by more
complex and refined methods. The purpose
of this approach is to streamline the process
and sufficiently address regulatory
requirements by eliminating the need of more
detailed modeling when it is not necessary in
a specific regulatory application. For
example, in the context of a PSD permit
application, a simplified and conservative
analysis may be sufficient where it shows the
proposed construction clearly will not cause
or contribute to ambient concentrations in
excess of either the NAAQS or the PSD
increments.2 3
b. There are two general levels of
sophistication of air quality models. The first
level consists of screening models that
provide conservative modeled estimates of
the air quality impact of a specific source or
source category based on simplified
assumptions of the model inputs (e.g., preset,
worst-case meteorological conditions). In the
case of a PSD assessment, if a screening
model indicates that the increase in
concentration attributable to the source could
cause or contribute to a violation of any
NAAQS or PSD increment, then the second
level of more sophisticated models should be
applied unless appropriate controls or
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
operational restrictions are implemented
based on the screening modeling.
c. The second level consists of refined
models that provide more detailed treatment
of physical and chemical atmospheric
processes, require more detailed and precise
input data, and provide spatially and
temporally resolved concentration estimates.
As a result, they provide a more
sophisticated and, at least theoretically, a
more accurate estimate of source impact and
the effectiveness of control strategies.
d. There are situations where a screening
model or a refined model is not available
such that screening and refined modeling are
not viable options to determine sourcespecific air quality impacts. In such
situations, a screening technique or reducedform model may be viable options for
estimating source impacts.
i. Screening techniques are differentiated
from a screening model in that screening
techniques are approaches that make
simplified and conservative assumptions
about the physical and chemical atmospheric
processes important to determining source
impacts, while screening models make
assumptions about conservative inputs to a
specific model. The complexity of screening
techniques ranges from simplified
assumptions of chemistry applied to refined
or screening model output to sophisticated
approximations of the chemistry applied
within a refined model.
ii. Reduced-form models are
computationally efficient simulation tools for
characterizing the pollutant response to
specific types of emission reductions for a
particular geographic area or background
environmental conditions that reflect
underlying atmospheric science of a refined
model but reduce the computational
resources of running a complex, numerical
air quality model such as a photochemical
grid model.
In such situations, an attempt should be
made to acquire or improve the necessary
databases and to develop appropriate
analytical techniques, but the screening
technique or reduced-form model may be
sufficient in conducting regulatory modeling
applications when applied in consultation
with the EPA Regional Office.
e. Consistent with the general principle
described in paragraph 2.2(a), the EPA may
establish a demonstration tool or method as
a sufficient means for a user or applicant to
make a demonstration required by regulation,
either by itself or as part of a modeling
demonstration. To be used for such
regulatory purposes, such a tool or method
must be reflected in a codified regulation or
have a well-documented technical basis and
reasoning that is contained or incorporated in
the record of the regulatory decision in
which it is applied.
2.3 Availability of Models
a. For most of the screening and refined
models discussed in the Guideline, codes,
associated documentation and other useful
information are publicly available for
download from the EPA’s Support Center for
Regulatory Atmospheric Modeling (SCRAM)
website at https://www.epa.gov/scram. This
is a website with which air quality modelers
PO 00000
Frm 00014
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
should become familiar and regularly visit
for important model updates and additional
clarifications and revisions to modeling
guidance documents that are applicable to
EPA programs and regulations. Codes and
documentation may also be available from
the National Technical Information Service
(NTIS), https://www.ntis.gov, and, when
available, is referenced with the appropriate
NTIS accession number.
3.0 Preferred and Alternative Air Quality
Models
a. This section specifies the approach to be
taken in determining preferred models for
use in regulatory air quality programs. The
status of models developed by the EPA, as
well as those submitted to the EPA for review
and possible inclusion in this Guideline, is
discussed in this section. The section also
provides the criteria and process for
obtaining EPA approval for use of alternative
models for individual cases in situations
where the preferred models are not
applicable or available. Additional sources of
relevant modeling information are: the EPA’s
Model Clearinghouse 23 (section 3.3); EPA
modeling conferences; periodic Regional,
State, and Local Modelers’ Workshops; and
the EPA’s SCRAM website (section 2.3).
b. When approval is required for a specific
modeling technique or analytical procedure
in this Guideline, we refer to the
‘‘appropriate reviewing authority.’’ Many
States and some local agencies administer
NSR permitting under programs approved
into SIPs. In some EPA regions, Federal
authority to administer NSR permitting and
related activities has been delegated to State
or local agencies. In these cases, such
agencies ‘‘stand in the shoes’’ of the
respective EPA Region. Therefore, depending
on the circumstances, the appropriate
reviewing authority may be an EPA Regional
Office, a State, local, or Tribal agency, or
perhaps the Federal Land Manager (FLM). In
some cases, the Guideline requires review
and approval of the use of an alternative
model by the EPA Regional Office
(sometimes stated as ‘‘Regional
Administrator’’). For all approvals of
alternative models or techniques, the EPA
Regional Office will coordinate and shall
seek concurrence with the EPA’s Model
Clearinghouse. If there is any question as to
the appropriate reviewing authority, you
should contact the EPA Regional Office
modeling contact (https://www.epa.gov/
scram/air-modeling-regional-contacts),
whose jurisdiction generally includes the
physical location of the source in question
and its expected impacts.
c. In all regulatory analyses, early
discussions among the EPA Regional Office
staff, State, local, and Tribal agency staff,
industry representatives, and where
appropriate, the FLM, are invaluable and are
strongly encouraged. Prior to the actual
analyses, agreement on the databases to be
used, modeling techniques to be applied, and
the overall technical approach helps avoid
misunderstandings concerning the final
results and may reduce the later need for
additional analyses. The preparation of a
written modeling protocol that is vetted with
the appropriate reviewing authority helps to
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
keep misunderstandings and resource
expenditures at a minimum.
d. The identification of preferred models in
this Guideline should not be construed as a
determination that the preferred models
identified here are to be permanently used to
the exclusion of all others or that they are the
only models available for relating emissions
to air quality. The model that most accurately
estimates concentrations in the area of
interest is always sought. However,
designation of specific preferred models is
needed to promote consistency in model
selection and application.
3.1 Preferred Models
3.1.1 Discussion
a. The EPA has developed some models
suitable for regulatory application, while
other models have been submitted by private
developers for possible inclusion in the
Guideline. Refined models that are preferred
and required by the EPA for particular
applications have undergone the necessary
peer scientific reviews 24 25 and model
performance evaluation exercises 26 27 that
include statistical measures of model
performance in comparison with measured
air quality data as described in section 2.1.1.
b. An American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) reference 28 provides a
general philosophy for developing and
implementing advanced statistical
evaluations of atmospheric dispersion
models, and provides an example statistical
technique to illustrate the application of this
philosophy. Consistent with this approach,
the EPA has determined and applied a
specific evaluation protocol that provides a
statistical technique for evaluating model
performance for predicting peak
concentration values, as might be observed at
individual monitoring locations.29
c. When a single model is found to perform
better than others, it is recommended for
application as a preferred model and listed
in addendum A. If no one model is found to
clearly perform better through the evaluation
exercise, then the preferred model listed in
addendum A may be selected on the basis of
other factors such as past use, public
familiarity, resource requirements, and
availability. Accordingly, the models listed
in addendum A meet these conditions:
i. The model must be written in a common
programming language, and the executable(s)
must run on a common computer platform.
ii. The model must be documented in a
user’s guide or model formulation report
which identifies the mathematics of the
model, data requirements and program
operating characteristics at a level of detail
comparable to that available for other
recommended models in addendum A.
iii. The model must be accompanied by a
complete test dataset including input
parameters and output results. The test data
must be packaged with the model in
computer-readable form.
iv. The model must be useful to typical
users, e.g., State air agencies, for specific air
quality control problems. Such users should
be able to operate the computer program(s)
from available documentation.
v. The model documentation must include
a robust comparison with air quality data
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
(and/or tracer measurements) or with other
well-established analytical techniques.
vi. The developer must be willing to make
the model and source code available to users
at reasonable cost or make them available for
public access through the internet or
National Technical Information Service. The
model and its code cannot be proprietary.
d. The EPA’s process of establishing a
preferred model includes a determination of
technical merit, in accordance with the above
six items, including the practicality of the
model for use in ongoing regulatory
programs. Each model will also be subjected
to a performance evaluation for an
appropriate database and to a peer scientific
review. Models for wide use (not just an
isolated case) that are found to perform better
will be proposed for inclusion as preferred
models in future Guideline revisions.
e. No further evaluation of a preferred
model is required for a particular application
if the EPA requirements for regulatory use
specified for the model in the Guideline are
followed. Alternative models to those listed
in addendum A should generally be
compared with measured air quality data
when they are used for regulatory
applications consistent with
recommendations in section 3.2.
3.1.2 Requirements
a. Addendum A identifies refined models
that are preferred for use in regulatory
applications. If a model is required for a
particular application, the user must select a
model from addendum A or follow
procedures in section 3.2.2 for use of an
alternative model or technique. Preferred
models may be used without a formal
demonstration of applicability as long as they
are used as indicated in each model summary
in addendum A. Further recommendations
for the application of preferred models to
specific source applications are found in
subsequent sections of the Guideline.
b. If changes are made to a preferred model
without affecting the modeled
concentrations, the preferred status of the
model is unchanged. Examples of
modifications that do not affect
concentrations are those made to enable use
of a different computer platform or those that
only affect the format or averaging time of the
model results. The integration of a graphical
user interface (GUI) to facilitate setting up the
model inputs and/or analyzing the model
results without otherwise altering the
preferred model code is another example of
a modification that does not affect
concentrations. However, when any changes
are made, the Regional Administrator must
require a test case example to demonstrate
that the modeled concentrations are not
affected.
c. A preferred model must be operated
with the options listed in addendum A for its
intended regulatory application. If the
regulatory options are not applied, the model
is no longer ‘‘preferred.’’ Any other
modification to a preferred model that would
result in a change in the concentration
estimates likewise alters its status so that it
is no longer a preferred model. Use of the
modified model must then be justified as an
alternative model on a case-by-case basis to
PO 00000
Frm 00015
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72839
the appropriate reviewing authority and
approved by the Regional Administrator.
d. Where the EPA has not identified a
preferred model for a particular pollutant or
situation, the EPA may establish a multitiered approach for making a demonstration
required under PSD or another CAA program.
The initial tier or tiers may involve use of
demonstration tools, screening models,
screening techniques, or reduced-form
models; while the last tier may involve the
use of demonstration tools, refined models or
techniques, or alternative models approved
under section 3.2.
3.2 Alternative Models
3.2.1 Discussion
a. Selection of the best model or techniques
for each individual air quality analysis is
always encouraged, but the selection should
be done in a consistent manner. A simple
listing of models in this Guideline cannot
alone achieve that consistency nor can it
necessarily provide the best model for all
possible situations. As discussed in section
3.1.1, the EPA has determined and applied a
specific evaluation protocol that provides a
statistical technique for evaluating model
performance for predicting peak
concentration values, as might be observed at
individual monitoring locations.29 This
protocol is available to assist in developing
a consistent approach when justifying the use
of other-than-preferred models recommended
in the Guideline (i.e., alternative models).
The procedures in this protocol provide a
general framework for objective decisionmaking on the acceptability of an alternative
model for a given regulatory application.
These objective procedures may be used for
conducting both the technical evaluation of
the model and the field test or performance
evaluation.
b. This subsection discusses the use of
alternate models and defines three situations
when alternative models may be used. This
subsection also provides a procedure for
implementing 40 CFR 51.166(l)(2) in PSD
permitting. This provision requires written
approval of the Administrator for any
modification or substitution of an applicable
model. An applicable model for purposes of
40 CFR 51.166(l) is a preferred model in
addendum A to the Guideline. Approval to
use an alternative model under section 3.2 of
the Guideline qualifies as approval for the
modification or substitution of a model under
40 CFR 51.166(l)(2). The Regional
Administrators have delegated authority to
issue such approvals under section 3.2 of the
Guideline, provided that such approval is
issued after consultation with the EPA’s
Model Clearinghouse and formally
documented in a concurrence memorandum
from the EPA’s Model Clearinghouse which
demonstrates that the requirements within
section 3.2 for use of an alternative model
have been met.
3.2.2 Requirements
a. Determination of acceptability of an
alternative model is an EPA Regional Office
responsibility in consultation with the EPA’s
Model Clearinghouse as discussed in
paragraphs 3.0(b) and 3.2.1(b). Where the
Regional Administrator finds that an
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72840
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
alternative model is more appropriate than a
preferred model, that model may be used
subject to the approval of the EPA Regional
Office based on the requirements of this
subsection. This finding will normally result
from a determination that: (1) a preferred air
quality model is not appropriate for the
particular application; or (2) a more
appropriate model or technique is available
and applicable.
b. An alternative model shall be evaluated
from both a theoretical and a performance
perspective before it is selected for use. There
are three separate conditions under which
such a model may be approved for use:
1. If a demonstration can be made that the
model produces concentration estimates
equivalent to the estimates obtained using a
preferred model;
2. If a statistical performance evaluation
has been conducted using measured air
quality data and the results of that evaluation
indicate the alternative model performs
better for the given application than a
comparable model in addendum A; or
3. If there is no preferred model.
Any one of these three separate conditions
may justify use of an alternative model. Some
known alternative models that are applicable
for selected situations are listed on the EPA’s
SCRAM website (section 2.3). However,
inclusion there does not confer any unique
status relative to other alternative models
that are being or will be developed in the
future.
c. Equivalency, condition (1) in paragraph
(b) of this subsection, is established by
demonstrating that the appropriate regulatory
metric(s) are within +/¥2 percent of the
estimates obtained from the preferred model.
The option to show equivalency is intended
as a simple demonstration of acceptability for
an alternative model that is nearly identical
(or contains options that can make it
identical) to a preferred model that it can be
treated for practical purposes as the preferred
model. However, notwithstanding this
demonstration, models that are not
equivalent may be used when one of the two
other conditions described in paragraphs (d)
and (e) of this subsection are satisfied.
d. For condition (2) in paragraph (b) of this
subsection, established statistical
performance evaluation procedures and
techniques 28 29 for determining the
acceptability of a model for an individual
case based on superior performance should
be followed, as appropriate. Preparation and
implementation of an evaluation protocol
that is acceptable to both control agencies
and regulated industry is an important
element in such an evaluation.
e. Finally, for condition (3) in paragraph (b)
of this subsection, an alternative model or
technique may be approved for use provided
that:
i. The model or technique has received a
scientific peer review;
ii. The model or technique can be
demonstrated to be applicable to the problem
on a theoretical basis;
iii. The databases which are necessary to
perform the analysis are available and
adequate;
iv. Appropriate performance evaluations of
the model or technique have shown that the
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
model or technique is not inappropriately
biased for regulatory application; a and
v. A protocol on methods and procedures
to be followed has been established.
f. To formally document that the
requirements of section 3.2 for use of an
alternative model are satisfied for a particular
application or range of applications, a
memorandum will be prepared by the EPA’s
Model Clearinghouse through a consultative
process with the EPA Regional Office.
3.3 EPA’s Model Clearinghouse
a. The Regional Administrator has the
authority to select models that are
appropriate for use in a given situation.
However, there is a need for assistance and
guidance in the selection process so that
fairness, consistency, and transparency in
modeling decisions are fostered among the
EPA Regional Offices and the State, local,
and Tribal agencies. To satisfy that need, the
EPA established the Model Clearinghouse 23
to serve a central role of coordination and
collaboration between EPA headquarters and
the EPA Regional Offices. Additionally, the
EPA holds periodic workshops with EPA
Headquarters, EPA Regional Offices, and
State, local, and Tribal agency modeling
representatives.
b. The appropriate EPA Regional Office
should always be consulted for information
and guidance concerning modeling methods
and interpretations of modeling guidance,
and to ensure that the air quality model user
has available the latest most up-to-date
policy and procedures. As appropriate, the
EPA Regional Office may also request
assistance from the EPA’s Model
Clearinghouse on other applications of
models, analytical techniques, or databases
or to clarify interpretation of the Guideline or
related modeling guidance.
c. The EPA Regional Office will coordinate
with the EPA’s Model Clearinghouse after an
initial evaluation and decision has been
developed concerning the application of an
alternative model. The acceptability and
formal approval process for an alternative
model is described in section 3.2.
4.0 Models for Carbon Monoxide, Lead,
Sulfur Dioxide, Nitrogen Dioxide and
Primary Particulate Matter
4.1 Discussion
a. This section identifies modeling
approaches generally used in the air quality
impact analysis of sources that emit the
criteria pollutants carbon monoxide (CO),
lead, sulfur dioxide (SO2), nitrogen dioxide
(NO2), and primary particulates (PM2.5 and
PM10).
b. The guidance in this section is specific
to the application of the Gaussian plume
models identified in addendum A. Gaussian
plume models assume that emissions and
meteorology are in a steady-state, which is
typically based on an hourly time step. This
a For PSD and other applications that use the
model results in an absolute sense, the model
should not be biased toward underestimates.
Alternatively, for ozone and PM2.5 SIP attainment
demonstrations and other applications that use the
model results in a relative sense, the model should
not be biased toward overestimates.
PO 00000
Frm 00016
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
approach results in a plume that has an
hourly-averaged distribution of emission
mass according to a Gaussian curve through
the plume. Though Gaussian steady-state
models conserve the mass of the primary
pollutant throughout the plume, they can
still take into account a limited consideration
of first-order removal processes (e.g., wet and
dry deposition) and limited chemical
conversion (e.g., OH oxidation).
c. Due to the steady-state assumption,
Gaussian plume models are generally
considered applicable to distances less than
50 km, beyond which, modeled predictions
of plume impact are likely conservative. The
locations of these impacts are expected to be
unreliable due to changes in meteorology that
are likely to occur during the travel time.
d. The applicability of Gaussian plume
models may vary depending on the
topography of the modeling domain, i.e.,
simple or complex. Simple terrain is
considered to be an area where terrain
features are all lower in elevation than the
top of the stack(s) of the source(s) in
question. Complex terrain is defined as
terrain exceeding the height of the stack(s)
being modeled.
e. Gaussian models determine source
impacts at discrete locations (receptors) for
each meteorological and emission scenario,
and generally attempt to estimate
concentrations at specific sites that represent
an ensemble average of numerous repetitions
of the same ‘‘event.’’ Uncertainties in model
estimates are driven by this formulation, and
as noted in section 2.1.1, evaluations of
model accuracy should focus on the
reducible uncertainty associated with
physics and the formulation of the model.
The ‘‘irreducible’’ uncertainty associated
with Gaussian plume models may be
responsible for variation in concentrations of
as much as +/¥50 percent.30 ‘‘Reducible’’
uncertainties 16 can be on a similar scale. For
example, Pasquill 31 estimates that, apart
from data input errors, maximum groundlevel concentrations at a given hour for a
point source in flat terrain could be in error
by 50 percent due to these uncertainties.
Errors of 5 to 10 degrees in the measured
wind direction can result in concentration
errors of 20 to 70 percent for a particular time
and location, depending on stability and
station location. Such uncertainties do not
indicate that an estimated concentration does
not occur, only that the precise time and
locations are in doubt. Composite errors in
highest estimated concentrations of 10 to 40
percent are found to be typical.32 33 However,
estimates of concentrations paired in time
and space with observed concentrations are
less certain.
f. Model evaluations and inter-comparisons
should take these aspects of uncertainty into
account. For a regulatory application of a
model, the emphasis of model evaluations is
generally placed on the highest modeled
impacts. Thus, the Cox-Tikvart model
evaluation approach, which compares the
highest modeled impacts on several
timescales, is recommended for comparisons
of models and measurements and model
inter-comparisons. The approach includes
bootstrap techniques to determine the
significance of various modeled predictions
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
and increases the robustness of such
comparisons when the number of available
measurements are limited.34 35 Because of the
uncertainty in paired modeled and observed
concentrations, any attempts at calibration of
models based on these comparisons is of
questionable benefit and shall not be done.
4.2 Requirements
a. For NAAQS compliance demonstrations
under PSD, use of the screening and
preferred models for the pollutants listed in
this subsection shall be limited to the nearfield at a nominal distance of 50 km or less.
Near-field application is consistent with
capabilities of Gaussian plume models and,
based on the EPA’s assessment, is sufficient
to address whether a source will cause or
contribute to ambient concentrations in
excess of a NAAQS. In most cases, maximum
source impacts of inert pollutants will occur
within the first 10 to 20 km from the source.
Therefore, the EPA does not consider a longrange transport assessment beyond 50 km
necessary for these pollutants if a near-field
NAAQS compliance demonstration is
required.36
b. For assessment of PSD increments
within the near-field distance of 50 km or
less, use of the screening and preferred
models for the pollutants listed in this
subsection shall be limited to the same
screening and preferred models approved for
NAAQS compliance demonstrations.
c. To determine if a compliance
demonstration for NAAQS and/or PSD
increments may be necessary beyond 50 km
(i.e., long-range transport assessment), the
following screening approach shall be used
to determine if a significant ambient impact
will occur with particular focus on Class I
areas and/or the applicable receptors that
may be threatened at such distances.
i. Based on application in the near-field of
the appropriate screening and/or preferred
model, determine the significance of the
ambient impacts at or about 50 km from the
new or modifying source. If a near-field
assessment is not available or this initial
analysis indicates there may be significant
ambient impacts at that distance, then further
assessment is necessary.
ii. For assessment of the significance of
ambient impacts for NAAQS and/or PSD
increments, there is not a preferred model or
screening approach for distances beyond 50
km. Thus, the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and the EPA
Regional Office shall be consulted in
determining the appropriate and agreed upon
screening technique to conduct the second
level assessment. Typically, a Lagrangian
model is most appropriate to use for these
second level assessments, but applicants
shall reach agreement on the specific model
and modeling parameters on a case-by-case
basis in consultation with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and
EPA Regional Office. When Lagrangian
models are used in this manner, they shall
not include plume-depleting processes, such
that model estimates are considered
conservative, as is generally appropriate for
screening assessments.
d. In those situations where a cumulative
impact analysis for NAAQS and/or PSD
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
increments analysis beyond 50 km is
necessary, the selection and use of an
alternative model shall occur in agreement
with the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) and approval by the EPA
Regional Office based on the requirements of
paragraph 3.2.2(e).
4.2.1 Screening Models and Techniques
a. Where a preliminary or conservative
estimate is desired, point source screening
techniques are an acceptable approach to air
quality analyses.
b. As discussed in paragraph 2.2(a),
screening models or techniques are designed
to provide a conservative estimate of
concentrations. The screening models used
in most applications are the screening
versions of the preferred models for refined
applications. The two screening models,
AERSCREEN 37 38 and CTSCREEN, are
screening versions of AERMOD (American
Meteorological Society (AMS)/EPA
Regulatory Model) and CTDMPLUS
(Complex Terrain Dispersion Model Plus
Algorithms for Unstable Situations),
respectively. AERSCREEN is the
recommended screening model for most
applications in all types of terrain and for
applications involving building downwash.
For those applications in complex terrain
where the application involves a welldefined hill or ridge, CTSCREEN 39 can be
used.
c. Although AERSCREEN and CTSCREEN
are designed to address a single-source
scenario, there are approaches that can be
used on a case-by-case basis to address multisource situations using screening
meteorology or other conservative model
assumptions. However, the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) shall
be consulted, and concurrence obtained, on
the protocol for modeling multiple sources
with AERSCREEN or CTSCREEN to ensure
that the worst case is identified and assessed.
d. As discussed in section 4.2.3.4, there are
also screening techniques built into
AERMOD that use simplified or limited
chemistry assumptions for determining the
partitioning of NO and NO2 for NO2
modeling. These screening techniques are
part of the EPA’s preferred modeling
approach for NO2 and do not need to be
approved as an alternative model. However,
as with other screening models and
techniques, their usage shall occur in
agreement with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
e. As discussed in section 4.2(c)(ii), there
are screening techniques needed for longrange transport assessments that will
typically involve the use of a Lagrangian
model. Based on the long-standing practice
and documented capabilities of these models
for long-range transport assessments, the use
of a Lagrangian model as a screening
technique for this purpose does not need to
be approved as an alternative model.
However, their usage shall occur in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and EPA
Regional Office.
f. All screening models and techniques
shall be configured to appropriately address
the site and problem at hand. Close attention
must be paid to whether the area should be
PO 00000
Frm 00017
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72841
classified urban or rural in accordance with
section 7.2.1.1. The climatology of the area
must be studied to help define the worst-case
meteorological conditions. Agreement shall
be reached between the model user and the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) on the choice of the screening model
or technique for each analysis, on the input
data and model settings, and the appropriate
metric for satisfying regulatory requirements.
4.2.1.1 AERSCREEN
a. Released in 2011, AERSCREEN is the
EPA’s recommended screening model for
simple and complex terrain for single sources
including point sources, area sources,
horizontal stacks, capped stacks, and flares.
AERSCREEN runs AERMOD in a screening
mode and consists of two main components:
(1) the MAKEMET program which generates
a site-specific matrix of meteorological
conditions for input to the AERMOD model;
and (2) the AERSCREEN command-prompt
interface.
b. The MAKEMET program generates a
matrix of meteorological conditions, in the
form of AERMOD-ready surface and profile
files, based on user-specified surface
characteristics, ambient temperatures,
minimum wind speed, and anemometer
height. The meteorological matrix is
generated based on looping through a range
of wind speeds, cloud covers, ambient
temperatures, solar elevation angles, and
convective velocity scales (w*, for convective
conditions only) based on user-specified
surface characteristics for surface roughness
(Zo), Bowen ratio (Bo), and albedo (r). For
unstable cases, the convective mixing height
(Zic) is calculated based on w*, and the
mechanical mixing height (Zim) is calculated
for unstable and stable conditions based on
the friction velocity, u*.
c. For applications involving simple or
complex terrain, AERSCREEN interfaces with
AERMAP. AERSCREEN also interfaces with
BPIPPRM to provide the necessary building
parameters for applications involving
building downwash using the Plume Rise
Model Enhancements (PRIME) downwash
algorithm. AERSCREEN generates inputs to
AERMOD via MAKEMET, AERMAP, and
BPIPPRM and invokes AERMOD in a
screening mode. The screening mode of
AERMOD forces the AERMOD model
calculations to represent values for the plume
centerline, regardless of the source-receptorwind direction orientation. The maximum
concentration output from AERSCREEN
represents a worst-case 1-hour concentration.
Averaging-time scaling factors of 1.0 for 3hour, 0.9 for 8-hour, 0.60 for 24-hour, and
0.10 for annual concentration averages are
applied internally by AERSCREEN to the
highest 1-hour concentration calculated by
the model for non-area type sources. For area
type source concentrations for averaging
times greater than one hour, the
concentrations are equal to the 1-hour
estimates.37 40
4.2.1.2 CTSCREEN
a. CTSCREEN 39 41 can be used to obtain
conservative, yet realistic, worst-case
estimates for receptors located on terrain
above stack height. CTSCREEN accounts for
the three-dimensional nature of plume and
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
72842
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
terrain interaction and requires detailed
terrain data representative of the modeling
domain. The terrain data must be digitized in
the same manner as for CTDMPLUS and a
terrain processor is available.42 CTSCREEN is
designed to execute a fixed matrix of
meteorological values for wind speed (u),
standard deviation of horizontal and vertical
wind speeds (sv, sw), vertical potential
temperature gradient (dq/dz), friction
velocity (u*), Monin-Obukhov length (L),
mixing height (zi) as a function of terrain
height, and wind directions for both neutral/
stable conditions and unstable convective
conditions. The maximum concentration
output from CTSCREEN represents a worstcase 1-hour concentration. Time-scaling
factors of 0.7 for 3-hour, 0.15 for 24-hour and
0.03 for annual concentration averages are
applied internally by CTSCREEN to the
highest 1-hour concentration calculated by
the model.
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
4.2.1.3
Screening in Complex Terrain
a. For applications utilizing AERSCREEN,
AERSCREEN automatically generates a polargrid receptor network with spacing
determined by the maximum distance to
model. If the application warrants a different
receptor network than that generated by
AERSCREEN, it may be necessary to run
AERMOD in screening mode with a userdefined network. For CTSCREEN
applications or AERMOD in screening mode
outside of AERSCREEN, placement of
receptors requires very careful attention
when modeling in complex terrain. Often the
highest concentrations are predicted to occur
under very stable conditions, when the
plume is near or impinges on the terrain.
Under such conditions, the plume may be
quite narrow in the vertical, so that even
relatively small changes in a receptor’s
location may substantially affect the
predicted concentration. Receptors within
about a kilometer of the source may be even
more sensitive to location. Thus, a dense
array of receptors may be required in some
cases.
b. For applications involving AERSCREEN,
AERSCREEN interfaces with AERMAP to
generate the receptor elevations. For
applications involving CTSCREEN, digitized
contour data must be preprocessed 42 to
provide hill shape parameters in suitable
input format. The user then supplies receptor
locations either through an interactive
program that is part of the model or directly,
by using a text editor; using both methods to
select receptor locations will generally be
necessary to assure that the maximum
concentrations are estimated by either model.
In cases where a terrain feature may ‘‘appear
to the plume’’ as smaller, multiple hills, it
may be necessary to model the terrain both
as a single feature and as multiple hills to
determine design concentrations.
c. Other screening techniques may be
acceptable for complex terrain cases where
established procedures 43 are used. The user
is encouraged to confer with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) if any
unforeseen problems are encountered, e.g.,
applicability, meteorological data, receptor
siting, or terrain contour processing issues.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
4.2.2 Refined Models
a. A brief description of each preferred
model for refined applications is found in
addendum A. Also listed in that addendum
Are availability, the model input
requirements, the standard options that shall
be selected when running the program, and
output options.
4.2.2.1 AERMOD
a. For a wide range of regulatory
applications in all types of terrain, and for
aerodynamic building downwash, the
required model is AERMOD.44 45 The
AERMOD regulatory modeling system
consists of the AERMOD dispersion model,
the AERMET meteorological processor, and
the AERMAP terrain processor. AERMOD is
a steady-state Gaussian plume model
applicable to directly emitted air pollutants
that employs best state-of-practice
parameterizations for characterizing the
meteorological influences and dispersion.
Differentiation of simple versus complex
terrain is unnecessary with AERMOD. In
complex terrain, AERMOD employs the wellknown dividing-streamline concept in a
simplified simulation of the effects of plumeterrain interactions.
b. The AERMOD Modeling System has
been extensively evaluated across a wide
range of scenarios based on numerous field
studies, including tall stacks in flat and
complex terrain settings, sources subject to
building downwash influences, and lowlevel non-buoyant sources.27 These
evaluations included several long-term field
studies associated with operating plants as
well as several intensive tracer studies. Based
on these evaluations, AERMOD has shown
consistently good performance, with ‘‘errors’’
in predicted versus observed peak
concentrations, based on the Robust Highest
Concentration (RHC) metric, consistently
within the range of 10 to 40 percent (cited
in paragraph 4.1(e)).
c. AERMOD incorporates the PRIME
algorithm to account for enhanced plume
growth and restricted plume rise for plumes
affected by building wake effects.46 The
PRIME algorithm accounts for entrainment of
plume mass into the cavity recirculation
region, including re-entrainment of plume
mass into the wake region beyond the cavity.
d. AERMOD incorporates the Buoyant Line
and Point Source (BLP) Dispersion model to
account for buoyant plume rise from line
sources. The BLP option utilizes the standard
meteorological inputs provided by the
AERMET meteorological processor.
e. The state-of-the-science for modeling
atmospheric deposition is evolving, new
modeling techniques are continually being
assessed, and their results are being
compared with observations. Consequently,
while deposition treatment is available in
AERMOD, the approach taken for any
purpose shall be coordinated with the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)).
f. The AERMET meteorological processor
incorporates the COARE algorithms to derive
marine boundary layer parameters for
overwater applications of AERMOD.47 48
AERMOD is applicable for some overwater
applications when platform downwash and
PO 00000
Frm 00018
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
shoreline fumigation are adequately
considered in consultation with the Regional
Office and appropriate reviewing authority.
Where the effects of shoreline fumigation and
platform downwash need to be assessed, the
Offshore and Coastal Dispersion (OCD)
model is the applicable model (paragraph
4.2.2.3).
4.2.2.2 CTDMPLUS
a. If the modeling application involves an
elevated point source with a well-defined hill
or ridge and a detailed dispersion analysis of
the spatial pattern of plume impacts is of
interest, CTDMPLUS is available.
CTDMPLUS provides greater resolution of
concentrations about the contour of the hill
feature than does AERMOD through a
different plume-terrain interaction algorithm.
4.2.2.3 OCD
a. The OCD (Offshore and Coastal
Dispersion) model is a straight-line Gaussian
model that incorporates overwater plume
transport and dispersion as well as changes
that occur as the plume crosses the shoreline.
OCD can determine the impact of offshore
emissions from point, area, or line sources on
the air quality of coastal regions. OCD is also
applicable for situations that involve
platform building downwash.
4.2.3 Pollutant Specific Modeling
Requirements
4.2.3.1 Models for Carbon Monoxide
a. Models for assessing the impact of CO
emissions are needed to meet NSR
requirements to address compliance with the
CO NAAQS and to determine localized
impacts from transportations projects.
Examples include evaluating effects of point
sources, congested roadway intersections and
highways, as well as the cumulative effect of
numerous sources of CO in an urban area.
b. The general modeling recommendations
and requirements for screening models in
section 4.2.1 and refined models in section
4.2.2 shall be applied for CO modeling. Given
the relatively low CO background
concentrations, screening techniques are
likely to be adequate in most cases. In
applying these recommendations and
requirements, the existing 1992 EPA
guidance for screening CO impacts from
highways may be consulted.49
4.2.3.2 Models for Lead
a. In January 1999 (40 CFR part 58,
appendix D), the EPA gave notice that
concern about ambient lead impacts was
being shifted away from roadways and
toward a focus on stationary point sources.
Thus, models for assessing the impact of lead
emissions are needed to meet NSR
requirements to address compliance with the
lead NAAQS and for SIP attainment
demonstrations. The EPA has also issued
guidance on siting ambient monitors in the
vicinity of stationary point sources.50 For
lead, the SIP should contain an air quality
analysis to determine the maximum rolling 3month average lead concentration resulting
from major lead point sources, such as
smelters, gasoline additive plants, etc. The
EPA has developed a post-processor to
calculate rolling 3-month average
concentrations from model output.51 General
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
guidance for lead SIP development is also
available.52
b. For major lead point sources, such as
smelters, which contribute fugitive emissions
and for which deposition is important,
professional judgment should be used, and
there shall be coordination with the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)). For most applications, the general
requirements for screening and refined
models of section 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 are
applicable to lead modeling.
4.2.3.3 Models for Sulfur Dioxide
a. Models for SO2 are needed to meet NSR
requirements to address compliance with the
SO2 NAAQS and PSD increments, for SIP
attainment demonstrations,53 and for
characterizing current air quality via
modeling.54 SO2 is one of a group of highly
reactive gases known as ‘‘oxides of sulfur’’
with largest emissions sources being fossil
fuel combustion at power plants and other
industrial facilities.
b. Given the relatively inert nature of SO2
on the short-term time scales of interest (i.e.,
1-hour) and the sources of SO2 (i.e.,
stationary point sources), the general
modeling requirements for screening models
in section 4.2.1 and refined models in section
4.2.2 are applicable for SO2 modeling
applications. For urban areas, AERMOD
automatically invokes a half-life of 4 hours 55
to SO2. Therefore, care must be taken when
determining whether a source is urban or
rural (see section 7.2.1.1 for urban/rural
determination methodology).
4.2.3.4 Models for Nitrogen Dioxide
a. Models for assessing the impact of
sources on ambient NO2 concentrations are
needed to meet NSR requirements to address
compliance with the NO2 NAAQS and PSD
increments. Impact of an individual source
on ambient NO2 depends, in part, on the
chemical environment into which the
source’s plume is to be emitted. This is due
to the fact that NO2 sources co-emit NO along
with NO2 and any emitted NO may react with
ambient ozone to convert to additional NO2
downwind. Thus, comprehensive modeling
of NO2 would need to consider the ratio of
emitted NO and NO2, the ambient levels of
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
ozone and subsequent reactions between
ozone and NO, and the photolysis of NO2 to
NO.
b. Due to the complexity of NO2 modeling,
a multi-tiered screening approach is required
to obtain hourly and annual average
estimates of NO2.56 Since these methods are
considered screening techniques, their usage
shall occur in agreement with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
Additionally, since screening techniques are
conservative by their nature, there are
limitations to how these options can be used.
Specifically, modeling of negative emissions
rates should only be done after consultation
with the EPA Regional Office to ensure that
decreases in concentrations would not be
overestimated. Each tiered approach (see
Figure 4–1) accounts for increasingly
complex considerations of NO2 chemistry
and is described in paragraphs c through e
of this subsection. The tiers of NO2 modeling
include:
i. A first-tier (most conservative) ‘‘full’’
conversion approach;
ii. A second-tier approach that assumes
ambient equilibrium between NO and NO2;
and
iii. A third-tier consisting of several
detailed screening techniques that account
for ambient ozone and the relative amount of
NO and NO2 emitted from a source.
c. For Tier 1, use an appropriate refined
model (section 4.2.2) to estimate nitrogen
oxides (NOX) concentrations and assume a
total conversion of NO to NO2.
d. For Tier 2, multiply the Tier 1 result(s)
by the Ambient Ratio Method 2 (ARM2),
which provides estimates of representative
equilibrium ratios of NO2/NOX value based
ambient levels of NO2 and NOX derived from
national data from the EPA’s Air Quality
System (AQS).57 The national default for
ARM2 includes a minimum ambient NO2/
NOX ratio of 0.5 and a maximum ambient
ratio of 0.9. The reviewing agency may
establish alternative minimum ambient NO2/
NOX values based on the source’s in-stack
emissions ratios, with alternative minimum
ambient ratios reflecting the source’s in-stack
NO2/NOX ratios. Preferably, alternative
minimum ambient NO2/NOX ratios should be
PO 00000
Frm 00019
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72843
based on source-specific data which satisfies
all quality assurance procedures that ensure
data accuracy for both NO2 and NOX within
the typical range of measured values.
However, alternate information may be used
to justify a source’s anticipated NO2/NOX instack ratios, such as manufacturer test data,
State or local agency guidance, peer-reviewed
literature, and/or the EPA’s NO2/NOX ratio
database.
e. For Tier 3, a detailed screening
technique shall be applied on a case-by-case
basis. Because of the additional input data
requirements and complexities associated
with the Tier 3 options, their usage shall
occur in consultation with the EPA Regional
Office in addition to the appropriate
reviewing authority. The Ozone Limiting
Method (OLM),58 the Plume Volume Molar
Ratio Method (PVMRM),59 and the Generic
Set Reaction Method (GRSM) 60 61 are three
detailed screening techniques that may be
used for most sources. These three
techniques use an appropriate section 4.2.2
model to estimate NOX concentrations and
then estimate the conversion of primary NO
emissions to NO2 based on the ambient levels
of ozone and the plume characteristics. OLM
only accounts for NO2 formation based on the
ambient levels of ozone while PVMRM and
GRSM also accommodate distance-dependent
conversion ratios based on ambient ozone.
GRSM, PVMRM and OLM require explicit
specification of the NO2/NOX in-stack ratios
and that ambient ozone concentrations be
provided on an hourly basis. GRSM requires
hourly ambient NOX concentrations in
addition to hourly ozone.
f. Alternative models or techniques may be
considered on a case-by-case basis and their
usage shall be approved by the EPA Regional
Office (section 3.2). Such models or
techniques should consider individual
quantities of NO and NO2 emissions,
atmospheric transport and dispersion, and
atmospheric transformation of NO to NO2.
Dispersion models that account for more
explicit photochemistry may also be
considered as an alternative model to
estimate ambient impacts of NOX sources.
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
72844
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
Tier 1: Full
Conversion
Assume total conversion of NO to NO2
Tier 2:
Ambient
Ratio
Method
Multiply Tier 1 results by an appropriate ambient ratio
l
Detailed analysis with OLM, PVMRM, GRSM or other
alternative screening model or technique
Figure 4–1: Multi-Tiered Approach for
Estimating NO2 Concentrations
4.2.3.5 Models for PM2.5
a. PM2.5 is a mixture consisting of several
diverse components.62 Ambient PM2.5
generally consists of two components: (1) the
primary component, emitted directly from a
source; and (2) the secondary component,
formed in the atmosphere from other
pollutants emitted from the source. Models
for PM2.5 are needed to meet NSR
requirements to address compliance with the
PM2.5 NAAQS and PSD increments and for
SIP attainment demonstrations.
b. For NSR modeling assessments, the
general modeling requirements for screening
models in section 4.2.1 and refined models
in section 4.2.2 are applicable for the primary
component of PM2.5, while the methods in
section 5.4 are applicable for addressing the
secondary component of PM2.5. Guidance for
PSD assessments is available for determining
the best approach to handling sources of
primary and secondary PM2.5.63
c. For SIP attainment demonstrations and
regional haze reasonable progress goal
analyses, effects of a control strategy on PM2.5
are estimated from the sum of the effects on
the primary and secondary components
composing PM2.5. Model users should refer to
section 5.4.1 and associated SIP modeling
guidance 64 for further details concerning
appropriate modeling approaches.
d. The general modeling requirements for
the refined models discussed in section 4.2.2
shall be applied for PM2.5 hot-spot modeling
for mobile sources. Specific guidance is
available for analyzing direct PM2.5 impacts
from highways, terminals, and other
transportation projects.65
4.2.3.6 Models for PM10
a. Models for PM10 are needed to meet NSR
requirements to address compliance with the
PM10 NAAQS and PSD increments and for
SIP attainment demonstrations.
b. For most sources, the general modeling
requirements for screening models in section
4.2.1 and refined models in section 4.2.2
shall be applied for PM10 modeling. In cases
where the particle size and its effect on
VerDate Sep<11>2014
19:10 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
ambient concentrations need to be
considered, particle deposition may be used
on a case-by-case basis and their usage shall
be coordinated with the appropriate
reviewing authority. A SIP development
guide 66 is also available to assist in PM10
analyses and control strategy development.
c. Fugitive dust usually refers to dust put
into the atmosphere by the wind blowing
over plowed fields, dirt roads, or desert or
sandy areas with little or no vegetation.
Fugitive emissions include the emissions
resulting from the industrial process that are
not captured and vented through a stack, but
may be released from various locations
within the complex. In some unique cases, a
model developed specifically for the
situation may be needed. Due to the difficult
nature of characterizing and modeling
fugitive dust and fugitive emissions, the
proposed procedure shall be determined in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) for each specific
situation before the modeling exercise is
begun. Re-entrained dust is created by
vehicles driving over dirt roads (e.g., haul
roads) and dust-covered roads typically
found in arid areas. Such sources can be
characterized as line, area or volume
sources.65 67 Emission rates may be based on
site-specific data or values from the general
literature.
d. Under certain conditions, recommended
dispersion models may not be suitable to
appropriately address the nature of ambient
PM10. In these circumstances, the alternative
modeling approach shall be approved by the
EPA Regional Office (section 3.2).
e. The general modeling requirements for
the refined models discussed in section 4.2.2
shall be applied for PM10 hot-spot modeling
for mobile sources. Specific guidance is
available for analyzing direct PM10 impacts
from highways, terminals, and other
transportation projects.65
5.0 Models for Ozone and Secondarily
Formed Particulate Matter
5.1 Discussion
a. Air pollutants formed through chemical
reactions in the atmosphere are referred to as
PO 00000
Frm 00020
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
secondary pollutants. For example, groundlevel ozone and a portion of PM2.5 are
secondary pollutants formed through
photochemical reactions. Ozone and
secondarily formed particulate matter are
closely related to each other in that they
share common sources of emissions and are
formed in the atmosphere from chemical
reactions with similar precursors.
b. Ozone formation is driven by emissions
of NOX and volatile organic compounds
(VOCs). Ozone formation is a complicated
nonlinear process that requires favorable
meteorological conditions in addition to VOC
and NOX emissions. Sometimes complex
terrain features also contribute to the buildup of precursors and subsequent ozone
formation or destruction.
c. PM2.5 can be either primary (i.e., emitted
directly from sources) or secondary in nature.
The fraction of PM2.5 which is primary versus
secondary varies by location and season. In
the United States, PM2.5 is dominated by a
variety of chemical species or components of
atmospheric particles, such as ammonium
sulfate, ammonium nitrate, organic carbon
mass, elemental carbon, and other soil
compounds and oxidized metals. PM2.5
sulfate, nitrate, and ammonium ions are
predominantly the result of chemical
reactions of the oxidized products of SO2 and
NOX emissions with direct ammonia
emissions.68
d. Control measures reducing ozone and
PM2.5 precursor emissions may not lead to
proportional reductions in ozone and PM2.5.
Modeled strategies designed to reduce ozone
or PM2.5 levels typically need to consider the
chemical coupling between these pollutants.
This coupling is important in understanding
processes that control the levels of both
pollutants. Thus, when feasible, it is
important to use models that take into
account the chemical coupling between
ozone and PM2.5. In addition, using such a
multi-pollutant modeling system can reduce
the resource burden associated with applying
and evaluating separate models for each
pollutant and promotes consistency among
the strategies themselves.
e. PM2.5 is a mixture consisting of several
diverse chemical species or components of
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
EP23OC23.000
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Tier 3:
Detailed
Screening
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
atmospheric particles. Because chemical and
physical properties and origins of each
component differ, it may be appropriate to
use either a single model capable of
addressing several of the important
components or to model primary and
secondary components using different
models. Effects of a control strategy on PM2.5
is estimated from the sum of the effects on
the specific components comprising PM2.5.
5.2 Recommendations
a. Chemical transformations can play an
important role in defining the concentrations
and properties of certain air pollutants.
Models that take into account chemical
reactions and physical processes of various
pollutants (including precursors) are needed
for determining the current state of air
quality, as well as predicting and projecting
the future evolution of these pollutants. It is
important that a modeling system provide a
realistic representation of chemical and
physical processes leading to secondary
pollutant formation and removal from the
atmosphere.
b. Chemical transport models treat
atmospheric chemical and physical processes
such as deposition and motion. There are two
types of chemical transport models, Eulerian
(grid based) and Lagrangian. These types of
models are differentiated from each other by
their frame of reference. Eulerian models are
based on a fixed frame of reference and
Lagrangian models use a frame of reference
that moves with parcels of air between the
source and receptor point.9 Photochemical
grid models are three-dimensional Eulerian
grid-based models that treat chemical and
physical processes in each grid cell and use
diffusion and transport processes to move
chemical species between grid cells.9 These
types of models are appropriate for
assessment of near-field and regional scale
reactive pollutant impacts from specific
sources 7 10 11 12 or all sources.13 14 15 In some
limited cases, the secondary processes can be
treated with a box model, ideally in
combination with a number of other
modeling techniques and/or analyses to treat
individual source sectors.
c. Regardless of the modeling system used
to estimate secondary impacts of ozone and/
or PM2.5, model results should be compared
to observation data to generate confidence
that the modeling system is representative of
the local and regional air quality. For ozone
related projects, model estimates of ozone
should be compared with observations in
both time and space. For PM2.5, model
estimates of speciated PM2.5 components
(such as sulfate ion, nitrate ion, etc.) should
be compared with observations in both time
and space.69
d. Model performance metrics comparing
observations and predictions are often used
to summarize model performance. These
metrics include mean bias, mean error,
fractional bias, fractional error, and
correlation coefficient.69 There are no
specific levels of any model performance
metric that indicate ‘‘acceptable’’ model
performance. The EPA’s preferred approach
for providing context about model
performance is to compare model
performance metrics with similar
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
contemporary applications.64 69 Because
model application purpose and scope vary,
model users should consult with the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) to determine what model performance
elements should be emphasized and
presented to provide confidence in the
regulatory model application.
e. There is no preferred modeling system
or technique for estimating ozone or
secondary PM2.5 for specific source impacts
or to assess impacts from multiple sources.
For assessing secondary pollutant impacts
from single sources, the degree of complexity
required to assess potential impacts varies
depending on the nature of the source, its
emissions, and the background environment.
The EPA recommends a two-tiered approach
where the first tier consists of using existing
technically credible and appropriate
relationships between emissions and impacts
developed from previous modeling that is
deemed sufficient for evaluating a source’s
impacts. The second tier consists of more
sophisticated case-specific modeling
analyses. The appropriate tier for a given
application should be selected in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and be consistent
with EPA guidance.70
5.3 Recommended Models and Approaches
for Ozone
a. Models that estimate ozone
concentrations are needed to guide the
choice of strategies for the purposes of a
nonattainment area demonstrating future
year attainment of the ozone NAAQS.
Additionally, models that estimate ozone
concentrations are needed to assess impacts
from specific sources or source complexes to
satisfy requirements for NSR and other
regulatory programs. Other purposes for
ozone modeling include estimating the
impacts of specific events on air quality,
ozone deposition impacts, and planning for
areas that may be attaining the ozone
NAAQS.
5.3.1 Models for NAAQS Attainment
Demonstrations and Multi-Source Air
Quality Assessments
a. Simulation of ozone formation and
transport is a complex exercise. Control
agencies with jurisdiction over areas with
ozone problems should use photochemical
grid models to evaluate the relationship
between precursor species and ozone. Use of
photochemical grid models is the
recommended means for identifying control
strategies needed to address high ozone
concentrations in such areas. Judgment on
the suitability of a model for a given
application should consider factors that
include use of the model in an attainment
test, development of emissions and
meteorological inputs to the model, and
choice of episodes to model. Guidance on the
use of models and other analyses for
demonstrating attainment of the air quality
goals for ozone is available.63 64 Users should
consult with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) to ensure the
most current modeling guidance is applied.
PO 00000
Frm 00021
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72845
5.3.2 Models for Single-Source Air Quality
Assessments
a. Depending on the magnitude of
emissions, estimating the impact of an
individual source’s emissions of NOX and
VOC on ambient ozone is necessary for
obtaining a permit. The simulation of ozone
formation and transport requires realistic
treatment of atmospheric chemistry and
deposition. Models (e.g., Lagrangian and
photochemical grid models) that integrate
chemical and physical processes important
in the formation, decay, and transport of
ozone and important precursor species
should be applied. Photochemical grid
models are primarily designed to characterize
precursor emissions and impacts from a wide
variety of sources over a large geographic
area but can also be used to assess the
impacts from specific sources.7 11 12
b. The first tier of assessment for ozone
impacts involves those situations where
existing technical information is available
(e.g., results from existing photochemical
grid modeling, published empirical estimates
of source specific impacts, or reduced-form
models) in combination with other
supportive information and analysis for the
purposes of estimating secondary impacts
from a particular source. The existing
technical information should provide a
credible and representative estimate of the
secondary impacts from the project source.
The appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) and appropriate EPA
guidance 70 71 should be consulted to
determine what types of assessments may be
appropriate on a case-by-case basis.
c. The second tier of assessment for ozone
impacts involves those situations where
existing technical information is not
available or a first tier demonstration
indicates a more refined assessment is
needed. For these situations, chemical
transport models should be used to address
single-source impacts. Special considerations
are needed when using these models to
evaluate the ozone impact from an individual
source. Guidance on the use of models and
other analyses for demonstrating the impacts
of single sources for ozone is available.70
This guidance document provides a more
detailed discussion of the appropriate
approaches to obtaining estimates of ozone
impacts from a single source. Model users
should use the latest version of the guidance
in consultation with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) to
determine the most suitable refined approach
for single-source ozone modeling on a caseby-case basis.
5.4 Recommended Models and Approaches
for Secondarily Formed PM2.5
a. Models that estimate PM2.5
concentrations are needed to guide the
choice of strategies for the purposes of a
nonattainment area demonstrating future
year attainment of the PM2.5 NAAQS.
Additionally, models that estimate PM2.5
concentrations are needed to assess impacts
from specific sources or source complexes to
satisfy requirements for NSR and other
regulatory programs. Other purposes for
PM2.5 modeling include estimating the
impacts of specific events on air quality,
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72846
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
visibility, deposition impacts, and planning
for areas that may be attaining the PM2.5
NAAQS.
5.4.1 Models for NAAQS Attainment
Demonstrations and Multi-Source Air
Quality Assessments
a. Models for PM2.5 are needed to assess the
adequacy of a proposed strategy for meeting
the annual and 24-hour PM2.5 NAAQS.
Modeling primary and secondary PM2.5 can
be a multi-faceted and complex problem,
especially for secondary components of PM2.5
such as sulfates and nitrates. Control
agencies with jurisdiction over areas with
secondary PM2.5 problems should use models
that integrate chemical and physical
processes important in the formation, decay,
and transport of these species (e.g.,
photochemical grid models). Suitability of a
modeling approach or mix of modeling
approaches for a given application requires
technical judgment as well as professional
experience in choice of models, use of the
model(s) in an attainment test, development
of emissions and meteorological inputs to the
model, and selection of days to model.
Guidance on the use of models and other
analyses for demonstrating attainment of the
air quality goals for PM2.5 is available.63 64
Users should consult with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) to
ensure the most current modeling guidance
is applied.
5.4.2 Models for Single-Source Air Quality
Assessments
a. Depending on the magnitude of
emissions, estimating the impact of an
individual source’s emissions on secondary
particulate matter concentrations may be
necessary for obtaining a permit. Primary
PM2.5 components shall be simulated using
the general modeling requirements in section
4.2.3.5. The simulation of secondary
particulate matter formation and transport is
a complex exercise requiring realistic
treatment of atmospheric chemistry and
deposition. Models should be applied that
integrate chemical and physical processes
important in the formation, decay, and
transport of these species (e.g., Lagrangian
and photochemical grid models).
Photochemical grid models are primarily
designed to characterize precursor emissions
and impacts from a wide variety of sources
over a large geographic area and can also be
used to assess the impacts from specific
sources.7 10 For situations where a project
source emits both primary PM2.5 and PM2.5
precursors, the contribution from both
should be combined for use in determining
the source’s ambient impact. Approaches for
combining primary and secondary impacts
are provided in appropriate guidance for
single source permit related
demonstrations.70
b. The first tier of assessment for secondary
PM2.5 impacts involves those situations
where existing technical information is
available (e.g., results from existing
photochemical grid modeling, published
empirical estimates of source specific
impacts, or reduced-form models) in
combination with other supportive
information and analysis for the purposes of
estimating secondary impacts from a
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
particular source. The existing technical
information should provide a credible and
representative estimate of the secondary
impacts from the project source. The
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) and appropriate EPA guidance 70 71
should be consulted to determine what types
of assessments may be appropriate on a caseby-case basis.
c. The second tier of assessment for
secondary PM2.5 impacts involves those
situations where existing technical
information is not available or a first tier
demonstration indicates a more refined
assessment is needed. For these situations,
chemical transport models should be used for
assessments of single-source impacts. Special
considerations are needed when using these
models to evaluate the secondary particulate
matter impact from an individual source.
Guidance on the use of models and other
analyses for demonstrating the impacts of
single sources for secondary PM2.5 is
available.70 This guidance document
provides a more detailed discussion of the
appropriate approaches to obtaining
estimates of secondary particulate matter
concentrations from a single source. Model
users should use the latest version of this
guidance in consultation with the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) to determine the most suitable singlesource modeling approach for secondary
PM2.5 on a case-by-case basis.
6.0 Modeling for Air Quality Related
Values and Other Governmental Programs
6.1 Discussion
a. Other Federal government agencies and
State, local, and Tribal agencies with air
quality and land management responsibilities
have also developed specific modeling
approaches for their own regulatory or other
requirements. Although such regulatory
requirements and guidance have come about
because of EPA rules or standards, the
implementation of such regulations and the
use of the modeling techniques is under the
jurisdiction of the agency issuing the
guidance or directive. This section covers
such situations with reference to those
guidance documents, when they are
available.
b. When using the model recommended or
discussed in the Guideline in support of
programmatic requirements not specifically
covered by EPA regulations, the model user
should consult the appropriate Federal, State,
local, or Tribal agency to ensure the proper
application and use of the models and/or
techniques. These agencies have developed
specific modeling approaches for their own
regulatory or other requirements. Most of the
programs have, or will have when fully
developed, separate guidance documents that
cover the program and a discussion of the
tools that are needed. The following
paragraphs reference those guidance
documents, when they are available.
6.2 Air Quality Related Values
a. The 1990 CAA Amendments give FLMs
an ‘‘affirmative responsibility’’ to protect the
natural and cultural resources of Class I areas
from the adverse impacts of air pollution and
to provide the appropriate procedures and
PO 00000
Frm 00022
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
analysis techniques. The CAA identifies the
FLM as the Secretary of the department, or
their designee, with authority over these
lands. Mandatory Federal Class I areas are
defined in the CAA as international parks,
national parks over 6,000 acres, and
wilderness areas and memorial parks over
5,000 acres, established as of 1977. The FLMs
are also concerned with the protection of
resources in federally managed Class II areas
because of other statutory mandates to
protect these areas. Where State or Tribal
agencies have successfully petitioned the
EPA and lands have been redesignated to
Class I status, these agencies may have
equivalent responsibilities to that of the
FLMs for these non-Federal Class I areas as
described throughout the remainder of
section 6.2.
b. The FLM agency responsibilities include
the review of air quality permit applications
from proposed new or modified major
pollution sources that may affect these Class
I areas to determine if emissions from a
proposed or modified source will cause or
contribute to adverse impacts on air quality
related values (AQRVs) of a Class I area and
making recommendations to the FLM.
AQRVs are resources, identified by the FLM
agencies, that have the potential to be
affected by air pollution. These resources
may include visibility, scenic, cultural,
physical, or ecological resources for a
particular area. The FLM agencies take into
account the particular resources and AQRVs
that would be affected; the frequency and
magnitude of any potential impacts; and the
direct, indirect, and cumulative effects of any
potential impacts in making their
recommendations.
c. While the AQRV notification and impact
analysis requirements are outlined in the
PSD regulations at 40 CFR 51.166(p) and 40
CFR 52.21(p), determination of appropriate
analytical methods and metrics for AQRV’s
are determined by the FLM agencies and are
published in guidance external to the general
recommendations of this paragraph.
d. To develop greater consistency in the
application of air quality models to assess
potential AQRV impacts in both Class I areas
and protected Class II areas, the FLM
agencies have developed the Federal Land
Managers’ Air Quality Related Values Work
Group Phase I Report (FLAG).72 FLAG
focuses upon specific technical and policy
issues associated with visibility impairment,
effects of pollutant deposition on soils and
surface waters, and ozone effects on
vegetation. Model users should consult the
latest version of the FLAG report for current
modeling guidance and with affected FLM
agency representatives for any application
specific guidance which is beyond the scope
of the Guideline.
6.2.1 Visibility
a. Visibility in important natural areas (e.g.,
Federal Class I areas) is protected under a
number of provisions of the CAA, including
sections 169A and 169B (addressing impacts
primarily from existing sources) and section
165 (new source review). Visibility
impairment is caused by light scattering and
light absorption associated with particles and
gases in the atmosphere. In most areas of the
country, light scattering by PM2.5 is the most
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
significant component of visibility
impairment. The key components of PM2.5
contributing to visibility impairment include
sulfates, nitrates, organic carbon, elemental
carbon, and crustal material.72
b. Visibility regulations (40 CFR 51.300
through 51.309) require State, local, and
Tribal agencies to mitigate current and
prevent future visibility impairment in any of
the 156 mandatory Federal Class I areas
where visibility is considered an important
attribute. In 1999, the EPA issued revisions
to the regulations to address visibility
impairment in the form of regional haze,
which is caused by numerous, diverse
sources (e.g., stationary, mobile, and area
sources) located across a broad region (40
CFR 51.308 through 51.309). The state of
relevant scientific knowledge has expanded
significantly since that time. A number of
studies and reports 73 74 have concluded that
long-range transport (e.g., up to hundreds of
kilometers) of fine particulate matter plays a
significant role in visibility impairment
across the country. Section 169A of the CAA
requires States to develop SIPs containing
long-term strategies for remedying existing
and preventing future visibility impairment
in the 156 mandatory Class I Federal areas,
where visibility is considered an important
attribute. In order to develop long-term
strategies to address regional haze, many
State, local, and Tribal agencies will need to
conduct regional-scale modeling of fine
particulate concentrations and associated
visibility impairment.
c. The FLAG visibility modeling
recommendations are divided into two
distinct sections to address different
requirements for: (1) near field modeling
where plumes or layers are compared against
a viewing background, and (2) distant/multisource modeling for plumes and aggregations
of plumes that affect the general appearance
of a scene.72 The recommendations
separately address visibility assessments for
sources proposing to locate relatively near
and at farther distances from these areas.72
6.2.1.1 Models for Estimating Near-Field
Visibility Impairment
a. To calculate the potential impact of a
plume of specified emissions for specific
transport and dispersion conditions (‘‘plume
blight’’) for source-receptor distances less
than 50 km, a screening model and guidance
are available.72 75 If a more comprehensive
analysis is necessary, a refined model should
be selected. The model selection, procedures,
and analyses should be determined in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and the affected
FLM(s).
6.2.1.2 Models for Estimating Visibility
Impairment for Long-Range Transport
a. Chemical transformations can play an
important role in defining the concentrations
and properties of certain air pollutants.
Models that take into account chemical
reactions and physical processes of various
pollutants (including precursors) are needed
for determining the current state of air
quality, as well as predicting and projecting
the future evolution of these pollutants. It is
important that a modeling system provide a
realistic representation of chemical and
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
physical processes leading to secondary
pollutant formation and removal from the
atmosphere.
b. Chemical transport models treat
atmospheric chemical and physical processes
such as deposition and motion. There are two
types of chemical transport models, Eulerian
(grid based) and Lagrangian. These types of
models are differentiated from each other by
their frame of reference. Eulerian models are
based on a fixed frame of reference and
Lagrangian models use a frame of reference
that moves with parcels of air between the
source and receptor point.9 Photochemical
grid models are three-dimensional Eulerian
grid-based models that treat chemical and
physical processes in each grid cell and use
diffusion and transport processes to move
chemical species between grid cells.9 These
types of models are appropriate for
assessment of near-field and regional scale
reactive pollutant impacts from specific
sources 7 10 11 12 or all sources.13 14 15
c. Development of the requisite
meteorological and emissions databases
necessary for use of photochemical grid
models to estimate AQRVs should conform to
recommendations in section 8 and those
outlined in the EPA’s Modeling Guidance for
Demonstrating Attainment of Air Quality
Goals for Ozone, PM2.5, and Regional Haze.64
Demonstration of the adequacy of prognostic
meteorological fields can be established
through appropriate diagnostic and statistical
performance evaluations consistent with
recommendations provided in the
appropriate guidance.64 Model users should
consult the latest version of this guidance
and with the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) for any applicationspecific guidance that is beyond the scope of
this subsection.
6.2.2 Models for Estimating Deposition
Impacts
a. For many Class I areas, AQRVs have
been identified that are sensitive to
atmospheric deposition of air pollutants.
Emissions of NOX, sulfur oxides, NH3,
mercury, and secondary pollutants such as
ozone and particulate matter affect
components of ecosystems. In sensitive
ecosystems, these compounds can acidify
soils and surface waters, add nutrients that
change biodiversity, and affect the ecosystem
services provided by forests and natural
areas.72 To address the relationship between
deposition and ecosystem effects, the FLM
agencies have developed estimates of critical
loads. A critical load is defined as, ‘‘A
quantitative estimate of an exposure to one
or more pollutants below which significant
harmful effects on specified sensitive
elements of the environment do not occur
according to present knowledge.’’ 76
b. The FLM deposition modeling
recommendations are divided into two
distinct sections to address different
requirements for: (1) near field modeling, and
(2) distant/multi-source modeling for
cumulative effects. The recommendations
separately address deposition assessments for
sources proposing to locate relatively near
and at farther distances from these areas.72
Where the source and receptors are not in
close proximity, chemical transport (e.g.,
photochemical grid) models generally should
PO 00000
Frm 00023
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72847
be applied for an assessment of deposition
impacts due to one or a small group of
sources. Over these distances, chemical and
physical transformations can change
atmospheric residence time due to different
propensity for deposition to the surface of
different forms of nitrate and sulfate. Users
should consult the latest version of the FLAG
report 72 and relevant FLM representatives
for guidance on the use of models for
deposition. Where source and receptors are
in close proximity, users should contact the
appropriate FLM for application-specific
guidance.
6.3 Modeling Guidance for Other
Governmental Programs
a. Dispersion and photochemical grid
modeling may need to be conducted to
ensure that individual and cumulative
offshore oil and gas exploration,
development, and production plans and
activities do not significantly affect the air
quality of any State as required under the
Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act (OCSLA).
Air quality modeling requires various input
datasets, including emissions sources,
meteorology, and pre-existing pollutant
concentrations. For sources under the
reviewing authority of the Department of
Interior, Bureau of Ocean Energy
Management (BOEM), guidance for the
development of all necessary Outer
Continental Shelf (OCS) air quality modeling
inputs and appropriate model selection and
application is available from the BOEM’s
website: https://www.boem.gov/about-boem/
regulations-guidance/guidance-portal.
b. The Federal Aviation Administration
(FAA) is the appropriate reviewing authority
for air quality assessments of primary
pollutant impacts at airports and air bases.
The Aviation Environmental Design Tool
(AEDT) is developed and supported by the
FAA, and is appropriate for air quality
assessment of primary pollutant impacts at
airports or air bases. AEDT has adopted
AERMOD for treating dispersion. Application
of AEDT is intended for estimating the
change in emissions for aircraft operations,
point source, and mobile source emissions on
airport property and quantify the associated
pollutant level- concentrations. AEDT is not
intended for PSD, SIP, or other regulatory air
quality analyses of point or mobile sources at
or peripheral to airport property that are
unrelated to airport operations. The latest
version of AEDT may be obtained from the
FAA at: https://aedt.faa.gov.
7.0
General Modeling Considerations
7.1 Discussion
a. This section contains recommendations
concerning a number of different issues not
explicitly covered in other sections of the
Guideline. The topics covered here are not
specific to any one program or modeling area,
but are common to dispersion modeling
analyses for criteria pollutants.
7.2 Recommendations
7.2.1 All sources
7.2.1.1 Dispersion Coefficients
a. For any dispersion modeling exercise,
the urban or rural determination of a source
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72848
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
is critical in determining the boundary layer
characteristics that affect the model’s
prediction of downwind concentrations.
Historically, steady-state Gaussian plume
models used in most applications have
employed dispersion coefficients based on
Pasquill-Gifford 77 in rural areas and
McElroy-Pooler 78 in urban areas. These
coefficients are still incorporated in the BLP
and OCD models. However, the AERMOD
model incorporates a more up-to-date
characterization of the atmospheric boundary
layer using continuous functions of
parameterized horizontal and vertical
turbulence based on Monin-Obukhov
similarity (scaling) relationships.44 Another
key feature of AERMOD’s formulation is the
option to use directly observed variables of
the boundary layer to parameterize
dispersion.44 45
b. The selection of rural or urban
dispersion coefficients in a specific
application should follow one of the
procedures suggested by Irwin 79 to
determine whether the character of an area is
primarily urban or rural (of the two methods,
the land use procedure is considered more
definitive.):
i. Land Use Procedure: (1) Classify the land
use within the total area, Ao, circumscribed
by a 3 km radius circle about the source
using the meteorological land use typing
scheme proposed by Auer; 80 (2) if land use
types I1, I2, C1, R2, and R3 account for 50
percent or more of Ao, use urban dispersion
coefficients; otherwise, use appropriate rural
dispersion coefficients.
ii. Population Density Procedure: (1)
Compute the average population density, p
per square kilometer with Ao as defined
above; (2) If p is greater than 750 people per
square kilometer, use urban dispersion
coefficients; otherwise use appropriate rural
dispersion coefficients.
c. Population density should be used with
caution and generally not be applied to
highly industrialized areas where the
population density may be low and, thus, a
rural classification would be indicated.
However, the area is likely to be sufficiently
built-up so that the urban land use criteria
would be satisfied. Therefore, in this case,
the classification should be ‘‘urban’’ and
urban dispersion parameters should be used.
d. For applications of AERMOD in urban
areas, under either the Land Use Procedure
or the Population Density Procedure, the user
needs to estimate the population of the urban
area affecting the modeling domain because
the urban influence in AERMOD is scaled
based on a user-specified population. For
non-population oriented urban areas, or areas
influenced by both population and industrial
activity, the user will need to estimate an
equivalent population to adequately account
for the combined effects of industrialized
areas and populated areas within the
modeling domain. Selection of the
appropriate population for these applications
should be determined in consultation with
the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) and the latest version of
the AERMOD Implementation Guide.81
e. It should be noted that AERMOD allows
for modeling rural and urban sources in a
single model run. For analyses of whole
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
urban complexes, the entire area should be
modeled as an urban region if most of the
sources are located in areas classified as
urban. For tall stacks located within or
adjacent to small or moderate sized urban
areas, the stack height or effective plume
height may extend above the urban boundary
layer and, therefore, may be more
appropriately modeled using rural
coefficients. Model users should consult with
the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) and the latest version of
the AERMOD Implementation Guide 81 when
evaluating this situation.
f. Buoyancy-induced dispersion (BID), as
identified by Pasquill,82 is included in the
preferred models and should be used where
buoyant sources (e.g., those involving fuel
combustion) are involved.
7.2.1.2 Complex Winds
a. Inhomogeneous local winds. In many
parts of the United States, the ground is
neither flat nor is the ground cover (or land
use) uniform. These geographical variations
can generate local winds and circulations,
and modify the prevailing ambient winds
and circulations. Typically, geographic
effects are more apparent when the ambient
winds are light or calm, as stronger synoptic
or mesoscale winds can modify, or even
eliminate the weak geographic circulations.83
In general, these geographically induced
wind circulation effects are named after the
source location of the winds, e.g., lake and
sea breezes, and mountain and valley winds.
In very rugged hilly or mountainous terrain,
along coastlines, or near large land use
variations, the characteristics of the winds
are a balance of various forces, such that the
assumptions of steady-state straight-line
transport both in time and space are
inappropriate. In such cases, a model should
be chosen to fully treat the time and space
variations of meteorology effects on transport
and dispersion. The setup and application of
such a model should be determined in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) consistent with
limitations of paragraph 3.2.2(e). The
meteorological input data requirements for
developing the time and space varying threedimensional winds and dispersion
meteorology for these situations are
discussed in paragraph 8.4.1.2(c). Examples
of inhomogeneous winds include, but are not
limited to, situations described in the
following paragraphs:
i. Inversion breakup fumigation. Inversion
breakup fumigation occurs when a plume (or
multiple plumes) is emitted into a stable
layer of air and that layer is subsequently
mixed to the ground through convective
transfer of heat from the surface or because
of advection to less stable surroundings.
Fumigation may cause excessively high
concentrations, but is usually rather shortlived at a given receptor. There are no
recommended refined techniques to model
this phenomenon. There are, however,
screening procedures 40 that may be used to
approximate the concentrations.
Considerable care should be exercised in
using the results obtained from the screening
techniques.
ii. Shoreline fumigation. Fumigation can be
an important phenomenon on and near the
PO 00000
Frm 00024
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
shoreline of bodies of water. This can affect
both individual plumes and area-wide
emissions. When fumigation conditions are
expected to occur from a source or sources
with tall stacks located on or just inland of
a shoreline, this should be addressed in the
air quality modeling analysis. The EPA has
evaluated several coastal fumigation models,
and the evaluation results of these models are
available for their possible application on a
case-by-case basis when air quality estimates
under shoreline fumigation conditions are
needed.84 Selection of the appropriate model
for applications where shoreline fumigation
is of concern should be determined in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
iii. Stagnation. Stagnation conditions are
characterized by calm or very low wind
speeds, and variable wind directions. These
stagnant meteorological conditions may
persist for several hours to several days.
During stagnation conditions, the dispersion
of air pollutants, especially those from lowlevel emissions sources, tends to be
minimized, potentially leading to relatively
high ground-level concentrations. If point
sources are of interest, users should note the
guidance provided in paragraph (a) of this
subsection. Selection of the appropriate
model for applications where stagnation is of
concern should be determined in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
7.2.1.3 Gravitational Settling and
Deposition
a. Gravitational settling and deposition
may be directly included in a model if either
is a significant factor. When particulate
matter sources can be quantified and settling
and dry deposition are problems, use
professional judgment along with
coordination with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)). AERMOD
contains algorithms for dry and wet
deposition of gases and particles.85 For other
Gaussian plume models, an ‘‘infinite halflife’’ may be used for estimates of particle
concentrations when only exponential decay
terms are used for treating settling and
deposition. Lagrangian models have varying
degrees of complexity for dealing with
settling and deposition and the selection of
a parameterization for such should be
included in the approval process for selecting
a Lagrangian model. Eulerian grid models
tend to have explicit parameterizations for
gravitational settling and deposition as well
as wet deposition parameters already
included as part of the chemistry scheme.
7.2.2 Stationary Sources
7.2.2.1 Good Engineering Practice Stack
Height
a. The use of stack height credit in excess
of Good Engineering Practice (GEP) stack
height or credit resulting from any other
dispersion technique is prohibited in the
development of emissions limits by 40 CFR
51.118 and 40 CFR 51.164. The definition of
GEP stack height and dispersion technique
are contained in 40 CFR 51.100. Methods and
procedures for making the appropriate stack
height calculations, determining stack height
credits and an example of applying those
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
techniques are found in several
references,86 87 88 89 that provide a great deal
of additional information for evaluating and
describing building cavity and wake effects.
b. If stacks for new or existing major
sources are found to be less than the height
defined by the EPA’s refined formula for
determining GEP height, then air quality
impacts associated with cavity or wake
effects due to the nearby building structures
should be determined. The EPA refined
formula height is defined as H + 1.5L.88 Since
the definition of GEP stack height defines
excessive concentrations as a maximum
ground-level concentration due in whole or
in part to downwash of at least 40 percent
in excess of the maximum concentration
without downwash, the potential air quality
impacts associated with cavity and wake
effects should also be considered for stacks
that equal or exceed the EPA formula height
for GEP. The AERSCREEN model can be used
to obtain screening estimates of potential
downwash influences, based on the PRIME
downwash algorithm incorporated in the
AERMOD model. If more refined
concentration estimates are required,
AERMOD should be used (section 4.2.2).
7.2.2.2 Plume Rise
a. The plume rise methods of Briggs 90 91
are incorporated in many of the preferred
models and are recommended for use in
many modeling applications. In
AERMOD,44 45 for the stable boundary layer,
plume rise is estimated using an iterative
approach, similar to that in the CTDMPLUS
model. In the convective boundary layer,
plume rise is superposed on the
displacements by random convective
velocities.92 In AERMOD, plume rise is
computed using the methods of Briggs,
except in cases involving building
downwash, in which a numerical solution of
the mass, energy, and momentum
conservation laws is performed.93 No explicit
provisions in these models are made for
multistack plume rise enhancement or the
handling of such special plumes as flares.
b. Gradual plume rise is generally
recommended where its use is appropriate:
(1) in AERMOD; (2) in complex terrain
screening procedures to determine close-in
impacts; and (3) when calculating the effects
of building wakes. The building wake
algorithm in AERMOD incorporates and
exercises the thermodynamically based
gradual plume rise calculations as described
in paragraph (a) of this subsection. If the
building wake is calculated to affect the
plume for any hour, gradual plume rise is
also used in downwind dispersion
calculations to the distance of final plume
rise, after which final plume rise is used.
Plumes captured by the near wake are reemitted to the far wake as a ground-level
volume source.
c. Stack tip downwash generally occurs
with poorly constructed stacks and when the
ratio of the stack exit velocity to wind speed
is small. An algorithm developed by Briggs 91
is the recommended technique for this
situation and is used in preferred models for
point sources.
d. On a case-by-case basis, refinements to
the preferred model may be considered for
plume rise and downwash effects and shall
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
occur in agreement with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and
approval by the EPA Regional Office based
on the requirements of section 3.2.2.
7.2.3 Mobile Sources
a. Emissions of primary pollutants from
mobile sources can be modeled with an
appropriate model identified in section 4.2.
Screening of mobile sources can be
accomplished by using screening
meteorology, e.g., worst-case meteorological
conditions. Maximum hourly concentrations
computed from screening modeling can be
converted to longer averaging periods using
the scaling ratios specified in the
AERSCREEN User’s Guide.37
b. Mobile sources can be modeled in
AERMOD as either line (i.e., elongated area)
sources or as a series of volume sources. Line
sources can be represented in AERMOD with
the following source types: LINE, AREA,
VOLUME or RLINE. However, since mobile
source modeling usually includes an analysis
of very near-source impacts, the results can
be highly sensitive to the characterization of
the mobile emissions. Important
characteristics for both line/area and volume
sources include the plume release height,
source width, and initial dispersion
characteristics, and should also take into
account the impact of traffic-induced
turbulence that can cause roadway sources to
have larger initial dimensions than might
normally be used for representing line
sources.
c. The EPA’s quantitative PM hot-spot
guidance 65 and Haul Road Workgroup Final
Report 67 provide guidance on the
appropriate characterization of mobile
sources as a function of the roadway and
vehicle characteristics. The EPA’s
quantitative PM hot-spot guidance includes
important considerations and should be
consulted when modeling roadway links.
Area and line sources, which can be
characterized as AREA, LINE, and RLINE
source types in AERMOD, or volume sources,
may be used for modeling mobile sources.
However, experience in the field has shown
that area sources (characterized as AREA,
LINE, or RLINE source types) may be easier
to characterize correctly compared to volume
sources. If volume sources are used, it is
particularly important to ensure that roadway
emissions are appropriately spaced when
using volume source so that the emissions
field is uniform across the roadway.
Additionally, receptor placement is
particularly important for volume sources
that have ‘‘exclusion zones’’ where
concentrations are not calculated for
receptors located ‘‘within’’ the volume
sources, i.e., less than 2.15 times the initial
lateral dispersion coefficient from the center
of the volume.65 Therefore, placing receptors
in these ‘‘exclusion zones’’ will result in
underestimates of roadway impacts.
8.0 Model Input Data
a. Databases and related procedures for
estimating input parameters are an integral
part of the modeling process. The most
appropriate input data available should
always be selected for use in modeling
analyses. Modeled concentrations can vary
widely depending on the source data or
PO 00000
Frm 00025
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72849
meteorological data used. This section
attempts to minimize the uncertainty
associated with database selection and use by
identifying requirements for input data used
in modeling. More specific data requirements
and the format required for the individual
models are described in detail in the user’s
guide and/or associated documentation for
each model.
8.1 Modeling Domain
8.1.1 Discussion
a. The modeling domain is the geographic
area for which the required air quality
analyses for the NAAQS and PSD increments
are conducted.
8.1.2 Requirements
a. For a NAAQS or PSD increments
assessment, the modeling domain or project’s
impact area shall include all locations where
the emissions of a pollutant from the new or
modifying source(s) may cause a significant
ambient impact. This impact area is defined
as an area with a radius extending from the
new or modifying source to: (1) the most
distant location where air quality modeling
predicts a significant ambient impact will
occur, or (2) the nominal 50 km distance
considered applicable for Gaussian
dispersion models, whichever is less. The
required air quality analysis shall be carried
out within this geographical area with
characterization of source impacts, nearby
source impacts, and background
concentrations, as recommended later in this
section.
b. For SIP attainment demonstrations for
ozone and PM2.5, or regional haze reasonable
progress goal analyses, the modeling domain
is determined by the nature of the problem
being modeled and the spatial scale of the
emissions that impact the nonattainment or
Class I area(s). The modeling domain shall be
designed so that all major upwind source
areas that influence the downwind
nonattainment area are included in addition
to all monitor locations that are currently or
recently violating the NAAQS or close to
violating the NAAQS in the nonattainment
area. Similarly, all Class I areas to be
evaluated in a regional haze modeling
application shall be included and sufficiently
distant from the edge of the modeling
domain. Guidance on the determination of
the appropriate modeling domain for
photochemical grid models in demonstrating
attainment of these air quality goals is
available.64 Users should consult the latest
version of this guidance for the most current
modeling guidance and the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) for any
application specific guidance that is beyond
the scope of this section.
8.2 Source Data
8.2.1 Discussion
a. Sources of pollutants can be classified as
point, line, area, and volume sources. Point
sources are defined in terms of size and may
vary between regulatory programs. The line
sources most frequently considered are
roadways and streets along which there are
well-defined movements of motor vehicles.
They may also be lines of roof vents or
stacks, such as in aluminum refineries. Area
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
72850
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
and volume sources are often collections of
a multitude of minor sources with
individually small emissions that are
impractical to consider as separate point or
line sources. Large area sources are typically
treated as a grid network of square areas,
with pollutant emissions distributed
uniformly within each grid square. Generally,
input data requirements for air quality
models necessitate the use of metric units. As
necessary, any English units common to
engineering applications should be
appropriately converted to metric.
b. For point sources, there are many source
characteristics and operating conditions that
may be needed to appropriately model the
facility. For example, the plant layout (e.g.,
location of stacks and buildings), stack
parameters (e.g., height and diameter), boiler
size and type, potential operating conditions,
and pollution control equipment parameters.
Such details are required inputs to air quality
models and are needed to determine
maximum potential impacts.
c. Modeling mobile emissions from streets
and highways requires data on the road
layout, including the width of each traveled
lane, the number of lanes, and the width of
the median strip. Additionally, traffic
patterns should be taken into account (e.g.,
daily cycles of rush hour, differences in
weekday and weekend traffic volumes, and
changes in the distribution of heavy-duty
trucks and light-duty passenger vehicles), as
these patterns will affect the types and
amounts of pollutant emissions allocated to
each lane and the height of emissions.
d. Emission factors can be determined
through source-specific testing and
measurements (e.g., stack test data) from
existing sources or provided from a
manufacturing association or vendor.
Additionally, emissions factors for a variety
of source types are compiled in an EPA
publication commonly known as AP–42.94
AP–42 also provides an indication of the
quality and amount of data on which many
of the factors are based. Other information
concerning emissions is available in EPA
publications relating to specific source
categories. The appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) should be
consulted to determine appropriate source
definitions and for guidance concerning the
determination of emissions from and
techniques for modeling the various source
types.
8.2.2 Requirements
a. For SIP attainment demonstrations for
the purpose of projecting future year NAAQS
attainment for ozone, PM2.5, and regional
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
haze reasonable progress goal analyses,
emissions which reflect actual emissions
during the base modeling year time period
should be input to models for base year
modeling. Emissions projections to future
years should account for key variables such
as growth due to increased or decreased
activity, expected emissions controls due to
regulations, settlement agreements or consent
decrees, fuel switches, and any other relevant
information. Guidance on emissions
estimation techniques (including future year
projections) for SIP attainment
demonstrations is available.64 95
b. For the purpose of SIP revisions for
stationary point sources, the regulatory
modeling of inert pollutants shall use the
emissions input data shown in Table 8–1 for
short-term and long-term NAAQS. To
demonstrate compliance and/or establish the
appropriate SIP emissions limits, Table 8–1
generally provides for the use of ‘‘allowable’’
emissions in the regulatory dispersion
modeling of the stationary point source(s) of
interest. In such modeling, these source(s)
should be modeled sequentially with these
loads for every hour of the year. As part of
a cumulative impact analysis, Table 8–1
allows for the model user to account for
actual operations in developing the
emissions inputs for dispersion modeling of
nearby sources, while other sources are best
represented by air quality monitoring data.
Consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) is advisable on
the establishment of the appropriate
emissions inputs for regulatory modeling
applications with respect to SIP revisions for
stationary point sources.
c. For the purposes of demonstrating
NAAQS compliance in a PSD assessment, the
regulatory modeling of inert pollutants shall
use the emissions input data shown in Table
8–2 for short and long-term NAAQS. The
new or modifying stationary point source
shall be modeled with ‘‘allowable’’ emissions
in the regulatory dispersion modeling. As
part of a cumulative impact analysis, Table
8–2 allows for the model user to account for
actual operations in developing the
emissions inputs for dispersion modeling of
nearby sources, while other sources are best
represented by air quality monitoring data.
For purposes of situations involving
emissions trading, refer to current EPA policy
and guidance to establish input data.
Consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) is advisable on
the establishment of the appropriate
emissions inputs for regulatory modeling
applications with respect to PSD assessments
for a proposed new or modifying source.
PO 00000
Frm 00026
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
d. For stationary source applications,
changes in operating conditions that affect
the physical emission parameters (e.g.,
release height, initial plume volume, and exit
velocity) shall be considered to ensure that
maximum potential impacts are
appropriately determined in the assessment.
For example, the load or operating condition
for point sources that causes maximum
ground-level concentrations shall be
established. As a minimum, the source
should be modeled using the design capacity
(100 percent load). If a source operates at
greater than design capacity for periods that
could result in violations of the NAAQS or
PSD increments, this load should be
modeled. Where the source operates at
substantially less than design capacity, and
the changes in the stack parameters
associated with the operating conditions
could lead to higher ground level
concentrations, loads such as 50 percent and
75 percent of capacity should also be
modeled. Malfunctions which may result in
excess emissions are not considered to be a
normal operating condition. They generally
should not be considered in determining
allowable emissions. However, if the excess
emissions are the result of poor maintenance,
careless operation, or other preventable
conditions, it may be necessary to consider
them in determining source impact. A range
of operating conditions should be considered
in screening analyses. The load causing the
highest concentration, in addition to the
design load, should be included in refined
modeling.
e. Emissions from mobile sources also have
physical and temporal characteristics that
should be appropriately accounted. For
example, an appropriate emissions model
shall be used to determine emissions profiles.
Such emissions should include speciation
specific for the vehicle types used on the
roadway (e.g., light duty and heavy duty
trucks), and subsequent parameterizations of
the physical emissions characteristics (e.g.,
release height) should reflect those emissions
sources. For long-term standards, annual
average emissions may be appropriate, but
for short-term standards, discrete temporal
representation of emissions should be used
(e.g., variations in weekday and weekend
traffic or the diurnal rush-hour profile typical
of many cities). Detailed information and
data requirements for modeling mobile
sources of pollution are provided in the
user’s manuals for each of the models
applicable to mobile sources.65 67
BILLING CODE 6560–50–P
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
72851
Table 8-1. - Point Source Model Emission Inputs for SIP Revisions of Inert Pollutants 1
Emissions limit
Averaging time
Operating level
X
(lb/MMBtul 2
Operating factor
X
(MMBtu/hrl 2
(e.g., hr/yr, hr/day)
Stationary Point Source(s) Subject to SIP Emissions Limit(s) Evaluation for Compliance with Ambient Standards
(Including Areawide Demonstrations)
Annual & quarterly .................... .
Short term(:,; 24 hours) ............ .
Maximum allowable emission
limit or federally enforceable
Actual or design capacity
(whichever is greater), or federally
permit limit.
enforceable permit condition. 3
Maximum allowable em1ss1on
limit or federally enforceable
Actual or design capacity
(whichever is greater), or federally
permit limit.
enforceable permit condition. 3
Nearby Source(s)
Annual & quarterly .................... .
Short term(:,; 24 hours) ............ .
6
Annual level when actually
limit or federally enforceable
operating, averaged over the most
permit limit. 6
recent 2 years. 4
permit limit. 6
Continuous operation, i.e., all
hours of each time period under
consideration (for all hours of the
meteorological database). 5
Maximum allowable emission
Maximum allowable emission
limit or federally enforceable
Actual operating factor averaged
over the most recent 2 years. 4
Temporally representative level
Actual operating factor averaged
over the most recent 2 years. 4 • 8
reflective of the most recent 2
Continuous operation, i.e., all
hours of each time period under
consideration (for all hours of the
years. 4 ' 7
meteorological database). 5
when actually operating,
Other Source(s)
6' 9
The ambient impacts from Non-nearby or Other Sources (e.g., natural, minor, distant major, and unidentified sources) can be represented by air
quality monitoring data unless adequate data do not exist.
1. For purposes of emissions trading, NSR, or PSD, other model input criteria may apply. See Section 8.2 for more information regarding attainment
demonstrations of primary PM2.5.
2. Terminology applicable to fuel burning sources; analogous terminology (e.g., lb/throughput) may be used for other types of sources.
3. Operating levels such as SO percent and 75 percent of capacity should also be modeled to determine the load causing the highest concentration.
4. Unless it is determined that this period is not representative.
5. If operation does not occur for all hours of the time period of consideration (e.g., 3 or 24-hours) and the source operation is constrained by a
federally enforceable permit condition, an appropriate adjustment to the modeled emission rate may be made (e.g., if operation is only 8 a.m. to 4
p.m. each day, only these hours will be modeled with emissions from the source. Modeled emissions should not be averaged across non-operating
time periods.)
6. See Section 8.3.3.
7. Temporally representative operating level could be based on Continuous Emissions Monitoring (CEM) data or other information and should be
determined through consultation with the appropriate reviewing authority (Paragraph 3.0(b)).
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
PO 00000
Frm 00027
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
EP23OC23.001
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
8. For those permitted sources not in operation or that have not established an appropriate factor, continuous operation (i.e., 8760) should be used.
9. See Section 8.3.2.
72852
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
Table 8-2. - Point Source Model Emission Inputs for NAAQS Compliance in PSD Demonstrations
Emissions limit
Averaging time
Operating level
X
(lb/MMBtul 1
Operating factor
X
(MMBtu/hrl 1
(e.g., hr/yr, hr/day)
Proposed Major New or Modified Source
Annual & quarterly .................... .
Maximum allowable emission
limit or federally enforceable
permit limit.
Short term(::; 24 hours) ............ .
Maximum allowable em1ss1on
limit or federally enforceable
permit limit.
Design capacity or federally
Continuous operation (i.e., 8760
enforceable permit condition. 2
hours). 3
Design capacity or federally
Continuous operation, i.e., all
hours of each time period under
consideration (for all hours of the
enforceable permit condition. 2
meteorological database). 3
Nearby Source(s)
Annual & quarterly .................... .
Short term(::; 24 hours) ............ .
4' 5
Maximum allowable emission
limit or federally enforceable
Annual level when actually
permit limit. 5
recent 2 years. 6
Maximum allowable em1ss1on
limit or federally enforceable
permit limit. 5
operating, averaged over the most
Temporally representative level
when actually operating,
Actual operating factor averaged
over the most recent 2 years. 6 • 8
reflective of the most recent 2
Continuous operation, i.e., all
hours of each time period under
consideration (for all hours of the
years. 6 ' 7
meteorological database). 3
Other Source(s)
5' 9
The ambient impacts from Non-nearby or Other Sources (e.g., natural, minor, distant major, and unidentified sources) can be represented by air
quality monitoring data unless adequate data do not exist.
1. Terminology applicable to fuel burning sources; analogous terminology (e.g., lb/throughput) may be used for other types of sources.
2. Operating levels such as SO percent and 75 percent of capacity should also be modeled to determine the load causing the highest concentration.
3. If operation does not occur for all hours of the time period of consideration (e.g., 3 or 24-hours) and the source operation is constrained by a
federally enforceable permit condition, an appropriate adjustment to the modeled emission rate may be made (e.g., if operation is only 8 a.m. to 4
p.m. each day, only these hours will be modeled with emissions from the source. Modeled emissions should not be averaged across non-operating
time periods.
4. Includes existing facility to which modification is proposed if the emissions from the existing facility will not be affected by the modification.
Otherwise use the same parameters as for major modification.
5. See Section 8.3.3.
6. Unless it is determined that this period is not representative.
7. Temporally representative operating level could be based on Continuous Emissions Monitoring (CEM) data or other information and should be
determined through consultation with the appropriate reviewing authority (Paragraph 3.0(b)).
8. For those permitted sources not in operation or that have not established an appropriate factor, continuous operation (i.e., 8760) should be used.
BILLING CODE 6560–50–C
8.3
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
8.3.1
Background Concentrations
Discussion
a. Background concentrations are essential
in constructing the design concentration, or
total air quality concentration, as part of a
cumulative impact analysis for NAAQS and
PSD increments (section 9.2.3). To assist
applicants and reviewing authorities with
appropriately characterizing background
concentrations, EPA has developed the Draft
Guidance on Developing Background
Concentrations for Use in Modeling
Demonstrations.96 The guidance provides a
recommended framework composed of steps
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
that should be used in parallel with the
recommendations made in this section.
Generally, background air quality should not
include the ambient impacts of the project
source under consideration. Instead, it
should include:
i. Nearby sources: These are individual
sources located in the vicinity of the
source(s) under consideration for emissions
limits that are not adequately represented by
ambient monitoring data. The ambient
contributions from these nearby sources are
thereby accounted for by explicitly modeling
their emissions (section 8.2).
ii. Other sources: That portion of the
background attributable to natural sources,
PO 00000
Frm 00028
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
other unidentified sources in the vicinity of
the project, and regional transport
contributions from more distant sources
(domestic and international). The ambient
contributions from these sources are typically
accounted for through use of ambient
monitoring data or, in some cases, regionalscale photochemical grid modeling results.
b. The monitoring network used for
developing background concentrations is
expected to conform to the same quality
assurance and other requirements as those
networks established for PSD purposes.97
Accordingly, the air quality monitoring data
should be of sufficient completeness and
follow appropriate data validation
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
EP23OC23.002
9. See Section 8.3.2.
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
procedures. These data should be adequately
representative of the area to inform
calculation of the design concentration for
comparison to the applicable NAAQS
(section 9.2.2).
c. For photochemical grid modeling
conducted in SIP attainment demonstrations
for ozone, PM2.5 and regional haze, the
emissions from nearby and other sources are
included as model inputs and fully
accounted for in the modeling application
and predicted concentrations. The concept of
adding individual components to develop a
design concentration, therefore, do not apply
in these SIP applications. However, such
modeling results may then be appropriate for
consideration in characterizing background
concentrations for other regulatory
applications. Also, as noted in section 5, this
modeling approach does provide for an
appropriate atmospheric environment to
assess single-source impacts for ozone and
secondary PM2.5.
d. For NAAQS assessments and SIP
attainment demonstrations for inert
pollutants, the development of the
appropriate background concentration for a
cumulative impact analysis involves proper
accounting of each contribution to the design
concentration and will depend upon whether
the project area’s situation consists of either
an isolated single source(s) or a multitude of
sources. For PSD increment assessments, all
impacts after the appropriate baseline dates
(i.e., trigger date, major source baseline date,
and minor source baseline date) from all
increment-consuming and incrementexpanding sources should be considered in
the design concentration (section 9.2.2).
8.3.2 Recommendations for Isolated Single
Sources
a. In areas with an isolated source(s),
determining the appropriate background
concentration should focus on
characterization of contributions from all
other sources through adequately
representative ambient monitoring data. The
application of EPA’s recommended
framework for determining an appropriate
background concentration should be
consistent with appropriate EPA modeling
guidance 63 96 and justified in the modeling
protocol that is vetted with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
b. The EPA recommends use of the most
recent quality assured air quality monitoring
data collected in the vicinity of the source to
determine the background concentration for
the averaging times of concern. In most cases,
the EPA recommends using data from the
monitor closest to and upwind of the project
area. If several monitors are available,
preference should be given to the monitor
with characteristics that are most similar to
the project area. If there are no monitors
located in the vicinity of the new or
modifying source, a ‘‘regional site’’ may be
used to determine background
concentrations. A regional site is one that is
located away from the area of interest but is
impacted by similar or adequately
representative sources.
c. Many of the challenges related to
cumulative impact analyses arise in the
context of defining the appropriate metric to
characterize background concentrations from
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
ambient monitoring data and determining the
appropriate method for combining this
monitor-based background contribution to
the modeled impact of the project and other
nearby sources. For many cases, the best
starting point would be use of the current
design value for the applicable NAAQS as a
uniform monitored background contribution
across the project area. However, there are
cases in which the current design value may
not be appropriate. Such cases include but
are not limited to:
i. For situations involving a modifying
source where the existing facility is
determined to impact the ambient monitor,
the background concentration at each
monitor can be determined by excluding
values when the source in question is
impacting the monitor. In such cases,
monitoring sites inside a 90° sector
downwind of the source may be used to
determine the area of impact.
ii. There may be other circumstances
which would necessitate modifications to the
ambient data record. Such cases could
include removal of data from specific days or
hours when a monitor is being impacted by
activities that are not typical or not expected
to occur again in the future (e.g.,
construction, roadway repairs, forest fires, or
unusual agricultural activities). There may
also be cases where it may be appropriate to
scale (multiplying the monitored
concentrations with a scaling factor) or adjust
(adding or subtracting a constant value the
monitored concentrations) data from specific
days or hours. Such adjustments would make
the monitored background concentrations
more temporally and/or spatially
representative of the area around the new or
modifying source for the purposes of the
regulatory assessment.
iii. For short-term standards, the diurnal or
seasonal patterns of the air quality
monitoring data may differ significantly from
the patterns associated with the modeled
concentrations. When this occurs, it may be
appropriate to pair the air quality monitoring
data in a temporal manner that reflects these
patterns (e.g., pairing by season and/or hour
of day).98
iv. For situations where monitored air
quality concentrations vary across the
modeling domain, it may be appropriate to
consider air quality monitoring data from
multiple monitors within the project area.
d. Considering the spatial and temporal
variability throughout a typical modeling
domain on an hourly basis and the
complexities and limitations of hourly
observations from the ambient monitoring
network, the EPA does not recommend
hourly or daily pairing of monitored
background and modeled concentrations
except in rare cases of relatively isolated
sources where the available monitor can be
shown to be representative of the ambient
concentration levels in the areas of maximum
impact from the proposed new source. The
implicit assumption underlying hourly
pairing is that the background monitored
levels for each hour are spatially uniform and
that the monitored values are fully
representative of background levels at each
receptor for each hour. Such an assumption
clearly ignores the many factors that
PO 00000
Frm 00029
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72853
contribute to the temporal and spatial
variability of ambient concentrations across a
typical modeling domain on an hourly basis.
In most cases, the seasonal (or quarterly)
pairing of monitored and modeled
concentrations should sufficiently address
situations to which the impacts from
modeled emissions are not temporally
correlated with background monitored levels.
e. In those cases where adequately
representative monitoring data to
characterize background concentrations are
not available, it may be appropriate to use
results from a regional-scale photochemical
grid model, or other representative model
application, as background concentrations
consistent with the considerations discussed
above and in consultation with the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)).
8.3.3 Recommendations for Multi-Source
Areas
a. In multi-source areas, determining the
appropriate background concentration
involves: (1) characterization of contributions
from other sources through adequately
representative ambient monitoring data, and
(2) identification and characterization of
contributions from nearby sources through
explicit modeling. A key point here is the
interconnectedness of each component in
that the question of which nearby sources to
include in the cumulative modeling is
inextricably linked to the question of what
the ambient monitoring data represents
within the project area.
b. Nearby sources: All sources in the
vicinity of the source(s) under consideration
for emissions limits that are not adequately
represented by ambient monitoring data
should be explicitly modeled. EPA’s
recommended framework for determining an
appropriate background concentration 96
should be applied to identify such sources
and accurately account for their ambient
impacts through explicit modeling.
i. The determination of nearby sources
relies on the selection of adequately
representative ambient monitoring data
(section 8.3.2). The EPA recommends
determining the representativeness of the
monitoring data through a visual assessment
of the modeling domain considering any
relevant nearby sources and their respective
air quality data. The visual assessment
should consider any relevant air quality data
such as the proximity of nearby sources to
the project source and the ambient monitor,
the nearby source’s level of emissions with
respect to the ambient data, and the
dispersion environment (i.e., meteorological
patterns, terrain, etc.) of the modeling
domain.
ii. Nearby sources not adequately
represented by the ambient monitor through
visual assessment should undergo further
qualitative and quantitative analysis before
being explicitly modeled. The EPA
recommends evaluating any modeling,
monitoring, or emissions data that may be
available for the identified nearby sources
with respect to possible exceedances of the
appropriate SIL or violations to the NAAQS.
iii. The number of nearby sources to be
explicitly modeled in the air quality analysis
is expected to be few except in unusual
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72854
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
situations. The determination of nearby
sources through the application of EPA’s
recommended framework calls for the
exercise of professional judgment by the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) and should be consistent with
appropriate EPA modeling guidance.63 96 This
guidance is not intended to alter the exercise
of that judgment or to comprehensively
prescribe which sources should be included
as nearby sources.
c. For cumulative impact analyses of shortterm and annual ambient standards, the
nearby sources as well as the project
source(s) must be evaluated using an
appropriate addendum A model or approved
alternative model with the emission input
data shown in Table 8–1 or 8–2.
i. When modeling a nearby source that
does not have a permit and the emissions
limits contained in the SIP for a particular
source category is greater than the emissions
possible given the source’s maximum
physical capacity to emit, the ‘‘maximum
allowable emissions limit’’ for such a nearby
source may be calculated as the emissions
rate representative of the nearby source’s
maximum physical capacity to emit,
considering its design specifications and
allowable fuels and process materials.
However, the burden is on the permit
applicant to sufficiently document what the
maximum physical capacity to emit is for
such a nearby source.
ii. It is appropriate to model nearby sources
only during those times when they, by their
nature, operate at the same time as the
primary source(s) or could have impact on
the averaging period of concern. Accordingly,
it is not necessary to model impacts of a
nearby source that does not, by its nature,
operate at the same time as the primary
source or could have impact on the averaging
period of concern, regardless of an identified
significant concentration gradient from the
nearby source. The burden is on the permit
applicant to adequately justify the exclusion
of nearby sources to the satisfaction of the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)). The following examples illustrate two
cases in which a nearby source may be
shown not to operate at the same time as the
primary source(s) being modeled: (1)
Seasonal sources (only used during certain
seasons of the year). Such sources would not
be modeled as nearby sources during times
in which they do not operate; and (2)
Emergency backup generators, to the extent
that they do not operate simultaneously with
the sources that they back up. Such
emergency equipment would not be modeled
as nearby sources.
d. Other sources. That portion of the
background attributable to all other sources
(e.g., natural, minor, distant major, and
unidentified sources) should be accounted
for through use of ambient monitoring data
and determined by the procedures found in
section 8.3.2 in keeping with eliminating or
reducing the source-oriented impacts from
nearby sources to avoid potential doublecounting of modeled and monitored
contributions.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
8.4 Meteorological Input Data
8.4.1 Discussion
a. This subsection covers meteorological
input data for use in dispersion modeling for
regulatory applications and is separate from
recommendations made for photochemical
grid modeling. Recommendations for
meteorological data for photochemical grid
modeling applications are outlined in the
latest version of EPA’s Modeling Guidance
for Demonstrating Attainment of Air Quality
Goals for Ozone, PM2.5, and Regional Haze.64
In cases where Lagrangian models are
applied for regulatory purposes, appropriate
meteorological inputs should be determined
in consultation with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
b. The meteorological data used as input to
a dispersion model should be selected on the
basis of spatial and climatological (temporal)
representativeness as well as the ability of
the individual parameters selected to
characterize the transport and dispersion
conditions in the area of concern. The
representativeness of the measured data is
dependent on numerous factors including,
but not limited to: (1) the proximity of the
meteorological monitoring site to the area
under consideration; (2) the complexity of
the terrain; (3) the exposure of the
meteorological monitoring site; and (4) the
period of time during which data are
collected. The spatial representativeness of
the data can be adversely affected by large
distances between the source and receptors
of interest and the complex topographic
characteristics of the area. Temporal
representativeness is a function of the yearto-year variations in weather conditions.
Where appropriate, data representativeness
should be viewed in terms of the
appropriateness of the data for constructing
realistic boundary layer profiles and, where
applicable, three-dimensional meteorological
fields, as described in paragraphs (c) and (d)
of this subsection.
c. The meteorological data should be
adequately representative and may be sitespecific data (land-based or buoy data for
overwater applications), data from a nearby
National Weather Service (NWS) or
comparable station, or prognostic
meteorological data. The implementation of
NWS Automated Surface Observing Stations
(ASOS) in the early 1990’s should not
preclude the use of NWS ASOS data if such
a station is determined to be representative
of the modeled area.99
D. Model input data are normally obtained
either from the NWS or as part of a sitespecific measurement program. State
climatology offices, local universities, FAA,
military stations, industry, and pollution
control agencies may also be sources of such
data. In specific cases, prognostic
meteorological data may be appropriate for
use and obtained from similar sources. Some
recommendations and requirements for the
use of each type of data are included in this
subsection.
8.4.2 Recommendations and Requirements
a. AERMET 100 shall be used to preprocess
all meteorological data, be it observed or
prognostic, for use with AERMOD in
regulatory applications. The AERMINUTE 101
PO 00000
Frm 00030
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
processor, in most cases, should be used to
process 1-minute ASOS wind data for input
to AERMET when processing NWS ASOS
sites in AERMET. When processing
prognostic meteorological data for AERMOD,
the Mesoscale Model Interface Program
(MMIF) 109 should be used to process data for
input to AERMET, both for land-based
applications and overwater applications.
Other methods of processing prognostic
meteorological data for input to AERMET
should be approved by the appropriate
reviewing authority. Additionally, the
following meteorological preprocessors are
recommended by the EPA: PCRAMMET,102
MPRM,103 and METPRO.104 PCRAMMET is
the recommended meteorological data
preprocessor for use in applications of OCD
employing hourly NWS data. MPRM is the
recommended meteorological data
preprocessor for applications of OCD
employing site-specific meteorological data.
METPRO is the recommended meteorological
data preprocessor for use with
CTDMPLUS.105
b. Regulatory application of AERMOD
necessitates careful consideration of the
meteorological data for input to AERMET.
Data representativeness, in the case of
AERMOD, means utilizing data of an
appropriate type for constructing realistic
boundary layer profiles. Of particular
importance is the requirement that all
meteorological data used as input to
AERMOD should be adequately
representative of the transport and dispersion
within the analysis domain. Where surface
conditions vary significantly over the
analysis domain, the emphasis in assessing
representativeness should be given to
adequate characterization of transport and
dispersion between the source(s) of concern
and areas where maximum design
concentrations are anticipated to occur. The
EPA recommends that the surface
characteristics input to AERMET should be
representative of the land cover in the
vicinity of the meteorological data, i.e., the
location of the meteorological tower for
measured data or the representative grid cell
for prognostic data. Therefore, the model user
should apply the latest version
AERSURFACE,106 107 where applicable, for
determining surface characteristics when
processing measured land-based
meteorological data through AERMET. In
areas where it is not possible to use
AERSURFACE output, surface characteristics
can be determined using techniques that
apply the same analysis as AERSURFACE. In
the case of measured meteorological data for
overwater applications, AERMET calculates
the surface characteristics and AERSURFACE
outputs are not needed. In the case of
prognostic meteorological data, the surface
characteristics associated with the prognostic
meteorological model output for the
representative grid cell should be used.108 109
Furthermore, since the spatial scope of each
variable could be different,
representativeness should be judged for each
variable separately. For example, for a
variable such as wind direction, the data
should ideally be collected near plume
height to be adequately representative,
especially for sources located in complex
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
terrain. Whereas, for a variable such as
temperature, data from a station several
kilometers away from the source may be
considered to be adequately representative.
More information about meteorological data,
representativeness, and surface
characteristics can be found in the AERMOD
Implementation Guide.81
c. Regulatory application of CTDMPLUS
requires the input of multi-level
measurements of wind speed, direction,
temperature, and turbulence from an
appropriately sited meteorological tower. The
measurements should be obtained up to the
representative plume height(s) of interest.
Plume heights of interest can be determined
by use of screening procedures such as
CTSCREEN.
d. Regulatory application of OCD requires
meteorological data over land and over water.
The over land or surface data, processed
through PCRAMMET 102 or MPRM,103 that
provides hourly stability class, wind
direction and speed, ambient temperature,
and mixing height, are required. Data over
water requires hourly mixing height, relative
humidity, air temperature, and water surface
temperature. Missing winds are substituted
with the surface winds. Vertical wind
direction shear, vertical temperature
gradient, and turbulence intensities are
optional.
e. The model user should acquire enough
meteorological data to ensure that worst-case
meteorological conditions are adequately
represented in the model results. The use of
5 years of adequately representative NWS or
comparable meteorological data, at least 1
year of site-specific (either land-based or
overwater based), or at least 3 years of
prognostic meteorological data, are required.
If 1 year or more, up to 5 years, of sitespecific data are available, these data are
preferred for use in air quality analyses.
Depending on completeness of the data
record, consecutive years of NWS, sitespecific, or prognostic data are preferred.
Such data must be subjected to quality
assurance procedures as described in section
8.4.4.2.
f. Objective analysis in meteorological
modeling is to improve meteorological
analyses (the ‘‘first guess field’’) used as
initial conditions for prognostic
meteorological models by incorporating
information from meteorological
observations. Direct and indirect (using
remote sensing techniques) observations of
temperature, humidity, and wind from
surface and radiosonde reports are commonly
employed to improve these analysis fields.
For long-range transport applications, it is
recommended that objective analysis
procedures, using direct and indirect
meteorological observations, be employed in
preparing input fields to produce prognostic
meteorological datasets. The length of record
of observations should conform to
recommendations outlined in paragraph
8.4.2(e) for prognostic meteorological model
datasets.
8.4.3 National Weather Service Data
8.4.3.1 Discussion
a. The NWS meteorological data are
routinely available and familiar to most
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
model users. Although the NWS does not
provide direct measurements of all the
needed dispersion model input variables,
methods have been developed and
successfully used to translate the basic NWS
data to the needed model input. Site-specific
measurements of model input parameters
have been made for many modeling studies,
and those methods and techniques are
becoming more widely applied, especially in
situations such as complex terrain
applications, where available NWS data are
not adequately representative. However,
there are many modeling applications where
NWS data are adequately representative and
the applications still rely heavily on the NWS
data.
b. Many models use the standard hourly
weather observations available from the
National Centers for Environmental
Information (NCEI).b These observations are
then preprocessed before they can be used in
the models. Prior to the advent of ASOS in
the early 1990’s, the standard ‘‘hourly’’
weather observation was a human-based
observation reflecting a single 2-minute
average generally taken about 10 minutes
before the hour. However, beginning in
January 2000 for first-order stations and in
March 2005 for all stations, the NCEI has
archived the 1-minute ASOS wind data (i.e.,
the rolling 2-minute average winds) for the
NWS ASOS sites. The AERMINUTE
processor 101 was developed to reduce the
number of calm and missing hours in
AERMET processing by substituting standard
hourly observations with full hourly average
winds calculated from 1-minute ASOS wind
data.
8.4.3.2 Recommendations
a. The preferred models listed in
addendum A all accept, as input, the NWS
meteorological data preprocessed into model
compatible form. If NWS data are judged to
be adequately representative for a specific
modeling application, they may be used. The
NCEI makes available surface and upper air
meteorological data online and in CD–ROM
format. Upper air data are also available at
the Earth System Research Laboratory Global
Systems Divisions website and from NCEI.
For the latest websites of available surface
and upper air data see reference 100.
b. Although most NWS wind
measurements are made at a standard height
of 10 m, the actual anemometer height
should be used as input to the preferred
meteorological processor and model.
c. Standard hourly NWS wind directions
are reported to the nearest 10 degrees. Due
to the coarse resolution of these data, a
specific set of randomly generated numbers
has been developed by the EPA and should
be used when processing standard hourly
NWS data for use in the preferred EPA
models to ensure a lack of bias in wind
direction assignments within the models.
d. Beginning with year 2000, NCEI began
archiving 2-minute winds, reported every
minute to the nearest degree for NWS ASOS
sites. The AERMINUTE processor was
developed to read those winds and calculate
hourly average winds for input to AERMET.
b Formerly the National Climatic Data Center
(NCDC).
PO 00000
Frm 00031
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72855
When such data are available for the NWS
ASOS site being processed, the AERMINUTE
processor should be used, in most cases, to
calculate hourly average wind speed and
direction when processing NWS ASOS data
for input to AERMOD.99
e. Data from universities, FAA, military
stations, industry and pollution control
agencies may be used if such data are
equivalent in accuracy and detail (e.g., siting
criteria, frequency of observations, data
completeness, etc.) to the NWS data, they are
judged to be adequately representative for the
particular application, and have undergone
quality assurance checks.
f. After valid data retrieval requirements
have been met,110 large number of hours in
the record having missing data should be
treated according to an established data
substitution protocol provided that
adequately representative alternative data are
available. Data substitution guidance is
provided in section 5.3 of reference 110.110
If no representative alternative data are
available for substitution, the absent data
should be coded as missing using missing
data codes appropriate to the applicable
meteorological pre-processor. Appropriate
model options for treating missing data, if
available in the model, should be employed.
8.4.4 Site-Specific Data
8.4.4.1 Discussion
a. Spatial or geographical
representativeness is best achieved by
collection of all of the needed model input
data in close proximity to the actual site of
the source(s). Site-specific measured data are,
therefore, preferred as model input, provided
that appropriate instrumentation and quality
assurance procedures are followed, and that
the data collected are adequately
representative (free from inappropriate local
or microscale influences) and compatible
with the input requirements of the model to
be used. It should be noted that, while sitespecific measurements are frequently made
‘‘on-property’’ (i.e., on the source’s premises),
acquisition of adequately representative sitespecific data does not preclude collection of
data from a location off property. Conversely,
collection of meteorological data on a
source’s property does not of itself guarantee
adequate representativeness. For help in
determining representativeness of sitespecific measurements, technical
guidance 110 is available. Site-specific data
should always be reviewed for
representativeness and adequacy by an
experienced meteorologist, atmospheric
scientist, or other qualified scientist in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
8.4.4.2 Recommendations
a. The EPA guidance 110 provides
recommendations on the collection and use
of site-specific meteorological data.
Recommendations on characteristics, siting,
and exposure of meteorological instruments
and on data recording, processing,
completeness requirements, reporting, and
archiving are also included. This publication
should be used as a supplement to other
limited guidance on these subjects.5 97 111 112
Detailed information on quality assurance is
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72856
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
also available.113 As a minimum, site-specific
measurements of ambient air temperature,
transport wind speed and direction, and the
variables necessary to estimate atmospheric
dispersion should be available in
meteorological datasets to be used in
modeling. Care should be taken to ensure
that meteorological instruments are located
to provide an adequately representative
characterization of pollutant transport
between sources and receptors of interest.
The appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) is available to help
determine the appropriateness of the
measurement locations.
i. Solar radiation measurements. Total
solar radiation or net radiation should be
measured with a reliable pyranometer or net
radiometer sited and operated in accordance
with established site-specific meteorological
guidance.110 113
ii. Temperature measurements.
Temperature measurements should be made
at standard shelter height (2m) in accordance
with established site-specific meteorological
guidance.110
iii. Temperature difference measurements.
Temperature difference (DT) measurements
should be obtained using matched
thermometers or a reliable thermocouple
system to achieve adequate accuracy. Siting,
probe placement, and operation of DT
systems should be based on guidance found
in Chapter 3 of reference 110 and such
guidance should be followed when obtaining
vertical temperature gradient data. AERMET
may employ the Bulk Richardson scheme,
which requires measurements of temperature
difference, in lieu of cloud cover or
insolation data. To ensure correct application
and acceptance, AERMOD users should
consult with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) before using the
Bulk Richardson scheme for their analysis.
iv. Wind measurements. For simulation of
plume rise and dispersion of a plume emitted
from a stack, characterization of the wind
profile up through the layer in which the
plume disperses is desirable. This is
especially important in complex terrain and/
or complex wind situations where wind
measurements at heights up to hundreds of
meters above stack base may be required in
some circumstances. For tall stacks when
site-specific data are needed, these winds
have been obtained traditionally using
meteorological sensors mounted on tall
towers. A feasible alternative to tall towers is
the use of meteorological remote sensing
instruments (e.g., acoustic sounders or radar
wind profilers) to provide winds aloft,
coupled with 10-meter towers to provide the
near-surface winds. Note that when sitespecific wind measurements are used,
AERMOD, at a minimum, requires wind
observations at a height above ground
between seven times the local surface
roughness height and 100 m. (For additional
requirements for AERMOD and CTDMPLUS,
see addendum A.) Specifications for wind
measuring instruments and systems are
contained in reference 110.
b. All processed site-specific data should
be in the form of hourly averages for input
to the dispersion model.
i. Turbulence data. There are several
dispersion models that are capable of using
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
direct measurements of turbulence (wind
fluctuations) in the characterization of the
vertical and lateral dispersion (e.g.,
CTDMPLUS or AERMOD). When turbulence
data are used to directly characterize the
vertical and lateral dispersion, the averaging
time for the turbulence measurements should
be 1-hour. For technical guidance on
processing of turbulence parameters for use
in dispersion modeling, refer to the user’s
guide to the meteorological processor for
each model (see section 8.4.2(a)).
ii. Stability categories. For dispersion
models that employ P–G stability categories
for the characterization of the vertical and
lateral dispersion, the P–G stability
categories, as originally defined, couple nearsurface measurements of wind speed with
subjectively determined insolation
assessments based on hourly cloud cover and
ceiling height observations. The wind speed
measurements are made at or near 10 m. The
insolation rate is typically assessed using
observations of cloud cover and ceiling
height based on criteria outlined by Turner.77
It is recommended that the P–G stability
category be estimated using the Turner
method with site-specific wind speed
measured at or near 10 m and representative
cloud cover and ceiling height.
Implementation of the Turner method, as
well as considerations in determining
representativeness of cloud cover and ceiling
height in cases for which site-specific cloud
observations are unavailable, may be found
in section 6 of reference 110. In the absence
of requisite data to implement the Turner
method, the solar radiation/delta-T (SRDT)
method or wind fluctuation statistics (i.e., the
sE and sA methods) may be used.
iii. The SRDT method, described in section
6.4.4.2 of reference 110, is modified slightly
from that published from earlier work 114 and
has been evaluated with three site-specific
databases.115 The two methods of stability
classification that use wind fluctuation
statistics, the sE and sA methods, are also
described in detail in section 6.4.4 of
reference 110 (note applicable tables in
section 6). For additional information on the
wind fluctuation methods, several references
are available.116 117 118 119
c. Missing data substitution. After valid
data retrieval requirements have been met,110
hours in the record having missing data
should be treated according to an established
data substitution protocol provided that
adequately representative alternative data are
available. Such protocols are usually part of
the approved monitoring program plan. Data
substitution guidance is provided in section
5.3 of reference 110. If no representative
alternative data are available for substitution,
the absent data should be coded as missing,
using missing data codes appropriate to the
applicable meteorological pre-processor.
Appropriate model options for treating
missing data, if available in the model,
should be employed.
8.4.5 Prognostic Meteorological Data
8.4.5.1 Discussion
a. For some modeling applications, there
may not be a representative NWS or
comparable meteorological station available
(e.g., complex terrain), and it may be cost
PO 00000
Frm 00032
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
prohibitive or infeasible to collect adequately
representative site-specific data. For these
cases, it may be appropriate to use prognostic
meteorological data, if deemed adequately
representative, in a regulatory modeling
application. However, if prognostic
meteorological data are not representative of
transport and dispersion conditions in the
area of concern, the collection of site-specific
data is necessary.
b. The EPA has developed a processor, the
MMIF,108 to process MM5 (Mesoscale Model
5) or WRF (Weather Research and
Forecasting) model data for input to various
models including AERMOD. MMIF can
process data for input to AERMET or
AERMOD for a single grid cell or multiple
grid cells. MMIF output has been found to
compare favorably against observed data
(site-specific or NWS).120 Specific guidance
on processing MMIF for AERMOD can be
found in reference 109109. When using
MMIF to process prognostic data for
regulatory applications, the data should be
processed to generate AERMET inputs and
the data subsequently processed through
AERMET for input to AERMOD. If an
alternative method of processing data for
input to AERMET is used, it must be
approved by the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
8.4.5.2 Recommendations
a. Prognostic model evaluation.
Appropriate effort by the applicant should be
devoted to the process of evaluating the
prognostic meteorological data. The
modeling data should be compared to NWS
observational data or other comparable data
in an effort to show that the data are
adequately replicating the observed
meteorological conditions of the time periods
modeled. An operational evaluation of the
modeling data for all model years (i.e.,
statistical, graphical) should be completed.64
The use of output from prognostic mesoscale
meteorological models is contingent upon the
concurrence with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) that the data are
of acceptable quality, which can be
demonstrated through statistical comparisons
with meteorological observations aloft and at
the surface at several appropriate locations.64
b. Representativeness. When processing
MMIF data for use with AERMOD, the grid
cell used for the dispersion modeling should
be adequately spatially representative of the
analysis domain. In most cases, this may be
the grid cell containing the emission source
of interest. Since the dispersion modeling
may involve multiple sources and the
domain may cover several grid cells,
depending on grid resolution of the
prognostic model, professional judgment may
be needed to select the appropriate grid cell
to use. In such cases, the selected grid cells
should be adequately representative of the
entire domain.
c. Grid resolution. The grid resolution of
the prognostic meteorological data should be
considered and evaluated appropriately,
particularly for projects involving complex
terrain. The operational evaluation of the
modeling data should consider whether a
finer grid resolution is needed to ensure that
the data are representative. The use of output
from prognostic mesoscale meteorological
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
models is contingent upon the concurrence
with the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) that the data are of
acceptable quality.
8.4.6 Marine Boundary Layer Environments
8.4.6.1 Discussion
a. Calculations of boundary layer
parameters for the marine boundary layer
present special challenges as the marine
boundary layer can be very different from the
boundary layer over land. For example,
convective conditions can occur in the
overnight hours in the marine boundary layer
while typically over land, stable conditions
occur at night. Also, surface roughness in the
marine environment is a function of wave
height and wind speed and less static with
time than surface roughness over land.
b. While the Offshore and Coastal
Dispersion Model (OCD) is the preferred
model for overwater applications, there are
applications where the use of AERMOD is
applicable. These include applications that
utilize features of AERMOD not included in
OCD (e.g., NO2 chemistry). Such use of
AERMOD would require consultation with
the Regional Office and appropriate
reviewing authority to ensure that platform
downwash and shoreline fumigation are
adequately considered in the modeling
demonstration.
c. For the reasons stated above, a
standalone pre-processor to AERMOD, called
AERCOARE 47 was developed to use the
Coupled Ocean Atmosphere Response
Experiment (COARE) bulk-flux algorithms 48
to bypass AERMET and calculate the
boundary layer parameters for input to
AERMOD for the marine boundary layer.
AERCOARE can process either measurements
from water-based sites such as buoys or
prognostic data. To better facilitate the use of
the COARE algorithms for AERMOD, EPA
has included the COARE algorithms into
AERMET thus eliminating the need for a
standalone pre-processor and ensuring the
algorithms are updated as part of routine
AERMET updates.
8.4.6.2 Recommendations
a. Measured data. For applications in the
marine environment that require the use of
AERMOD, measured surface data, such as
from a buoy or other offshore platform,
should be processed in AERMET with the
COARE processing option following
recommendations in the AERMET User’s
Guide 100 and AERMOD Implementation
Guide.81 For applications in the marine
environment that require the use of OCD,
users should use the recommended
meteorological pre-processor MPRM.
b. Prognostic data. For applications in the
marine environment that require the use of
AERMOD and prognostic data, the prognostic
data should be processed via MMIF for input
to AERMET following recommendations in
paragraph 8.4.5.1(b) and the guidance found
in reference 109.
8.4.7 Treatment of Near-Calms and Calms
8.4.7.1 Discussion
a. Treatment of calm or light and variable
wind poses a special problem in modeling
applications since steady-state Gaussian
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
plume models assume that concentration is
inversely proportional to wind speed,
depending on model formulations.
Procedures have been developed to prevent
the occurrence of overly conservative
concentration estimates during periods of
calms. These procedures acknowledge that a
steady-state Gaussian plume model does not
apply during calm conditions, and that our
knowledge of wind patterns and plume
behavior during these conditions does not, at
present, permit the development of a better
technique. Therefore, the procedures
disregard hours that are identified as calm.
The hour is treated as missing and a
convention for handling missing hours is
recommended. With the advent of the
AERMINUTE processor, when processing
NWS ASOS data, the inclusion of hourly
averaged winds from AERMINUTE will, in
some instances, dramatically reduce the
number of calm and missing hours,
especially when the ASOS wind are derived
from a sonic anemometer. To alleviate
concerns about these issues, especially those
introduced with AERMINUTE, the EPA
implemented a wind speed threshold in
AERMET for use with ASOS derived
winds.99 100 Winds below the threshold will
be treated as calms.
b. AERMOD, while fundamentally a
steady-state Gaussian plume model, contains
algorithms for dealing with low wind speed
(near calm) conditions. As a result, AERMOD
can produce model estimates for conditions
when the wind speed may be less than 1 m/
s, but still greater than the instrument
threshold. Required input to AERMET for
site-specific data, the meteorological
processor for AERMOD, includes a threshold
wind speed and a reference wind speed. The
threshold wind speed is the greater of the
threshold of the instrument used to collect
the wind speed data or wind direction
sensor.110 The reference wind speed is
selected by the model as the lowest level of
non-missing wind speed and direction data
where the speed is greater than the wind
speed threshold, and the height of the
measurement is between seven times the
local surface roughness length and 100 m. If
the only valid observation of the reference
wind speed between these heights is less
than the threshold, the hour is considered
calm, and no concentration is calculated.
None of the observed wind speeds in a
measured wind profile that are less than the
threshold speed are used in construction of
the modeled wind speed profile in AERMOD.
8.4.7.2 Recommendations
a. Hourly concentrations calculated with
steady-state Gaussian plume models using
calms should not be considered valid; the
wind and concentration estimates for these
hours should be disregarded and considered
to be missing. Model predicted
concentrations for 3-, 8-, and 24-hour
averages should be calculated by dividing the
sum of the hourly concentrations for the
period by the number of valid or non-missing
hours. If the total number of valid hours is
less than 18 for 24-hour averages, less than
6 for 8-hour averages, or less than 3 for 3hour averages, the total concentration should
be divided by 18 for the 24-hour average, 6
for the 8-hour average, and 3 for the 3-hour
PO 00000
Frm 00033
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72857
average. For annual averages, the sum of all
valid hourly concentrations is divided by the
number of non-calm hours during the year.
AERMOD has been coded to implement these
instructions. For hours that are calm or
missing, the AERMOD hourly concentrations
will be zero. For other models listed in
addendum A, a post-processor computer
program, CALMPRO 121 has been prepared, is
available on the EPA’s SCRAM website
(section 2.3), and should be used.
b. Stagnant conditions that include
extended periods of calms often produce
high concentrations over wide areas for
relatively long averaging periods. The
standard steady-state Gaussian plume models
are often not applicable to such situations.
When stagnation conditions are of concern,
other modeling techniques should be
considered on a case-by-case basis (see also
section 7.2.1.2).
c. When used in steady-state Gaussian
plume models other than AERMOD,
measured site-specific wind speeds of less
than 1 m/s but higher than the response
threshold of the instrument should be input
as 1 m/s; the corresponding wind direction
should also be input. Wind observations
below the response threshold of the
instrument should be set to zero, with the
input file in ASCII format. For input to
AERMOD, no such adjustment should be
made to the site-specific wind data, as
AERMOD has algorithms to account for light
or variable winds as discussed in section
8.4.6.1(a). For NWS ASOS data, see the
AERMET User’s Guide 100 for guidance on
wind speed thresholds. For prognostic data,
see the latest guidance 109 for thresholds.
Observations with wind speeds less than the
threshold are considered calm, and no
concentration is calculated. In all cases
involving steady-state Gaussian plume
models, calm hours should be treated as
missing, and concentrations should be
calculated as in paragraph (a) of this
subsection.
9.0
Regulatory Application of Models
9.1 Discussion
a. Standardized procedures are valuable in
the review of air quality modeling and data
analyses conducted to support SIP submittals
and revisions, NSR, or other EPA
requirements to ensure consistency in their
regulatory application. This section
recommends procedures specific to NSR that
facilitate some degree of standardization
while at the same time allowing the
flexibility needed to assure the technically
best analysis for each regulatory application.
For SIP attainment demonstrations, refer to
the appropriate EPA guidance 53 64 for the
recommended procedures.
b. Air quality model estimates, especially
with the support of measured air quality
data, are the preferred basis for air quality
demonstrations. A number of actions have
been taken to ensure that the best air quality
model is used correctly for each regulatory
application and that it is not arbitrarily
imposed.
• First, the Guideline clearly recommends
that the most appropriate model be used in
each case. Preferred models are identified,
based on a number of factors, for many uses.
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72858
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
• Second, the preferred models have been
subjected to a systematic performance
evaluation and a scientific peer review.
Statistical performance measures, including
measures of difference (or residuals) such as
bias, variance of difference and gross
variability of the difference, and measures of
correlation such as time, space, and time and
space combined, as described in section
2.1.1, were generally followed.
• Third, more specific information has
been provided for considering the
incorporation of new models into the
Guideline (section 3.1), and the Guideline
contains procedures for justifying the caseby-case use of alternative models and
obtaining EPA approval (section 3.2).
c. Air quality modeling is the preferred
basis for air quality demonstrations.
Nevertheless, there are rare circumstances
where the performance of the preferred air
quality model may be shown to be less than
reasonably acceptable or where no preferred
air quality model, screening model or
technique, or alternative model are suitable
for the situation. In these unique instances,
there is the possibility of assuring
compliance and establishing emissions limits
for an existing source solely on the basis of
observed air quality data in lieu of an air
quality modeling analysis. Comprehensive
air quality monitoring in the vicinity of the
existing source with proposed modifications
will be necessary in these cases. The same
attention should be given to the detailed
analyses of the air quality data as would be
applied to a model performance evaluation.
d. The current levels and forms of the
NAAQS for the six criteria pollutants can be
found on the EPA’s NAAQS website at
https://www.epa.gov/criteria-air-pollutants.
As required by the CAA, the NAAQS are
subjected to extensive review every 5 years
and the standards, including the level and
the form, may be revised as part of that
review. The criteria pollutants have either
long-term (annual or quarterly) and/or shortterm (24-hour or less) forms that are not to
be exceeded more than a certain frequency
over a period of time (e.g., no exceedance on
a rolling 3-month average, no more than once
per year, or no more than once per year
averaged over 3 years), are averaged over a
period of time (e.g., an annual mean or an
annual mean averaged over 3 years), or are
some percentile that is averaged over a
period of time (e.g., annual 99th or 98th
percentile averaged over 3 years). The 3-year
period for ambient monitoring design values
does not dictate the length of the data periods
recommended for modeling (i.e., 5 years of
NWS meteorological data, at least 1 year of
site-specific, or at least 3 years of prognostic
meteorological data).
e. This section discusses general
recommendations on the regulatory
application of models for the purposes of
NSR, including PSD permitting, and
particularly for estimating design
concentration(s), appropriately comparing
these estimates to NAAQS and PSD
increments, and developing emissions limits.
This section also provides the criteria
necessary for considering use of an analysis
based on measured ambient data in lieu of
modeling as the sole basis for demonstrating
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
compliance with NAAQS and PSD
increments.
9.2 Recommendations
9.2.1 Modeling Protocol
a. Every effort should be made by the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) to meet with all parties involved in
either a SIP submission or revision or a PSD
permit application prior to the start of any
work on such a project. During this meeting,
a protocol should be established between the
preparing and reviewing parties to define the
procedures to be followed, the data to be
collected, the model to be used, and the
analysis of the source and concentration data
to be performed. An example of the content
for such an effort is contained in the Air
Quality Analysis Checklist posted on the
EPA’s SCRAM website (section 2.3). This
checklist suggests the appropriate level of
detail to assess the air quality resulting from
the proposed action. Special cases may
require additional data collection or analysis
and this should be determined and agreed
upon at the pre-application meeting. The
protocol should be written and agreed upon
by the parties concerned, although it is not
intended that this protocol be a binding,
formal legal document. Changes in such a
protocol or deviations from the protocol are
often necessary as the data collection and
analysis progresses. However, the protocol
establishes a common understanding of how
the demonstration required to meet
regulatory requirements will be made.
9.2.2 Design Concentration and Receptor
Sites
a. Under the PSD permitting program, an
air quality analysis for criteria pollutants is
required to demonstrate that emissions from
the construction or operation of a proposed
new source or modification will not cause or
contribute to a violation of the NAAQS or
PSD increments.
i. For a NAAQS assessment, the design
concentration is the combination of the
appropriate background concentration
(section 8.3) with the estimated modeled
impact of the proposed source. The NAAQS
design concentration is then compared to the
applicable NAAQS.
ii. For a PSD increment assessment, the
design concentration includes impacts
occurring after the appropriate baseline date
from all increment-consuming and
increment-expanding sources. The PSD
increment design concentration is then
compared to the applicable PSD increment.
b. The specific form of the NAAQS for the
pollutant(s) of concern will also influence
how the background and modeled data
should be combined for appropriate
comparison with the respective NAAQS in
such a modeling demonstration. Given the
potential for revision of the form of the
NAAQS and the complexities of combining
background and modeled data, specific
details on this process can be found in the
applicable modeling guidance available on
the EPA’s SCRAM website (section 2.3).
Modeled concentrations should not be
rounded before comparing the resulting
design concentration to the NAAQS or PSD
increments. Ambient monitoring and
PO 00000
Frm 00034
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
dispersion modeling address different issues
and needs relative to each aspect of the
overall air quality assessment.
c. The PSD increments for criteria
pollutants are listed in 40 CFR 52.21(c) and
40 CFR 51.166(c). For short-term increments,
these maximum allowable increases in
pollutant concentrations may be exceeded
once per year at each site, while the annual
increment may not be exceeded. The highest,
second-highest increase in estimated
concentrations for the short-term averages, as
determined by a model, must be less than or
equal to the permitted increment. The
modeled annual averages must not exceed
the increment.
d. Receptor sites for refined dispersion
modeling should be located within the
modeling domain (section 8.1). In designing
a receptor network, the emphasis should be
placed on receptor density and location, not
total number of receptors. Typically, the
density of receptor sites should be
progressively more resolved near the new or
modifying source, areas of interest, and areas
with the highest concentrations with
sufficient detail to determine where possible
violations of a NAAQS or PSD increments are
most likely to occur. The placement of
receptor sites should be determined on a
case-by-case basis, taking into consideration
the source characteristics, topography,
climatology, and monitor sites. Locations of
particular importance include: (1) the area of
maximum impact of the point source; (2) the
area of maximum impact of nearby sources;
and (3) the area where all sources combine
to cause maximum impact. Depending on the
complexities of the source and the
environment to which the source is located,
a dense array of receptors may be required in
some cases. In order to avoid unreasonably
large computer runs due to an excessively
large array of receptors, it is often desirable
to model the area twice. The first model run
would use a moderate number of receptors
more resolved near the new or modifying
source and over areas of interest. The second
model run would modify the receptor
network from the first model run with a
denser array of receptors in areas showing
potential for high concentrations and
possible violations, as indicated by the
results of the first model run. Accordingly,
the EPA neither anticipates nor encourages
that numerous iterations of modeling runs be
made to continually refine the receptor
network.
9.2.3 NAAQS and PSD Increments
Compliance Demonstrations for New or
Modifying Sources
a. As described in this subsection, the
recommended procedure for conducting
either a NAAQS or PSD increments
assessment under PSD permitting is a multistage approach that includes the following
two stages:
i. The EPA describes the first stage as a
single-source impact analysis, since this stage
involves considering only the impact of the
new or modifying source. There are two
possible levels of detail in conducting a
single-source impact analysis with the model
user beginning with use of a screening model
and proceeding to use of a refined model as
necessary.
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
ii. The EPA describes the second stage as
a cumulative impact analysis, since it takes
into account all sources affecting the air
quality in an area. In addition to the project
source impact, this stage includes
consideration of background, which includes
contributions from nearby sources and other
sources (e.g., natural, minor, distant major,
and unidentified sources).
b. Each stage should involve increasing
complexity and details, as required, to fully
demonstrate that a new or modifying source
will not cause or contribute to a violation of
any NAAQS or PSD increment. As such,
starting with a single-source impact analysis
is recommended because, where the analysis
at this stage is sufficient to demonstrate that
a source will not cause or contribute to any
potential violation, this may alleviate the
need for a more time-consuming and
comprehensive cumulative modeling
analysis.
c. The single-source impact analysis, or
first stage of an air quality analysis, should
begin by determining the potential of a
proposed new or modifying source to cause
or contribute to a NAAQS or PSD increment
violation. In certain circumstances, a
screening model or technique may be used
instead of the preferred model because it will
provide estimated worst-case ambient
impacts from the proposed new or modifying
source. If these worst case ambient
concentration estimates indicate that the
source will not cause or contribute to any
potential violation of a NAAQS or PSD
increment, then the screening analysis
should generally be sufficient for the
required demonstration under PSD. If the
ambient concentration estimates indicate that
the source’s emissions have the potential to
cause or contribute to a violation, then the
use of a refined model to estimate the
source’s impact should be pursued. The
refined modeling analysis should use a
model or technique consistent with the
Guideline (either a preferred model or
technique or an alternative model or
technique) and follow the requirements and
recommendations for model inputs outlined
in section 8. If the ambient concentration
increase predicted with refined modeling
indicates that the source will not cause or
contribute to any potential violation of a
NAAQS or PSD increment, then the refined
analysis should generally be sufficient for the
required demonstration under PSD. However,
if the ambient concentration estimates from
the refined modeling analysis indicate that
the source’s emissions have the potential to
cause or contribute to a violation, then a
cumulative impact analysis should be
undertaken. The receptors that indicate the
location of significant ambient impacts
should be used to define the modeling
domain for use in the cumulative impact
analysis (section 8.2.2).
d. The cumulative impact analysis, or the
second stage of an air quality analysis,
should be conducted with the same refined
model or technique to characterize the
project source and then include the
appropriate background concentrations
(section 8.3). The resulting design
concentrations should be used to determine
whether the source will cause or contribute
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
to a NAAQS or PSD increment violation.
This determination should be based on: (1)
The appropriate design concentration for
each applicable NAAQS (and averaging
period); and (2) whether the source’s
emissions cause or contribute to a violation
at the time and location of any modeled
violation (i.e., when and where the predicted
design concentration is greater than the
NAAQS). For PSD increments, the
cumulative impact analysis should also
consider the amount of the air quality
increment that has already been consumed
by other sources, or, conversely, whether
increment has expanded relative to the
baseline concentration. Therefore, the
applicant should model the existing or
permitted nearby increment-consuming and
increment-expanding sources, rather than
using past modeling analyses of those
sources as part of background concentration.
This would permit the use of newly acquired
data or improved modeling techniques if
such data and/or techniques have become
available since the last source was permitted.
9.2.3.1 Considerations in Developing
Emissions Limits
a. Emissions limits and resulting control
requirements should be established to
provide for compliance with each applicable
NAAQS (and averaging period) and PSD
increment. It is possible that multiple
emissions limits will be required for a source
to demonstrate compliance with several
criteria pollutants (and averaging periods)
and PSD increments. Case-by-case
determinations must be made as to the
appropriate form of the limits, i.e., whether
the emissions limits restrict the emission
factor (e.g., limiting lb/MMBTU), the
emission rate (e.g., lb/hr), or both. The
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) and appropriate EPA guidance should
be consulted to determine the appropriate
emissions limits on a case-by-case basis.
9.2.4 Use of Measured Data in Lieu of
Model Estimates
a. As described throughout the Guideline,
modeling is the preferred method for
demonstrating compliance with the NAAQS
and PSD increments and for determining the
most appropriate emissions limits for new
and existing sources. When a preferred
model or adequately justified and approved
alternative model is available, model results,
including the appropriate background, are
sufficient for air quality demonstrations and
establishing emissions limits, if necessary. In
instances when the modeling technique
available is only a screening technique, the
addition of air quality monitoring data to the
analysis may lend credence to the model
results. However, air quality monitoring data
alone will normally not be acceptable as the
sole basis for demonstrating compliance with
the NAAQS and PSD increments or for
determining emissions limits.
b. There may be rare circumstances where
the performance of the preferred air quality
model will be shown to be less than
reasonably acceptable when compared with
air quality monitoring data measured in the
vicinity of an existing source. Additionally,
there may not be an applicable preferred air
quality model, screening technique, or
PO 00000
Frm 00035
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72859
justifiable alternative model suitable for the
situation. In these unique instances, there
may be the possibility of establishing
emissions limits and demonstrating
compliance with the NAAQS and PSD
increments solely on the basis of analysis of
observed air quality data in lieu of an air
quality modeling analysis. However, only in
the case of a modification to an existing
source should air quality monitoring data
alone be a basis for determining adequate
emissions limits or for demonstration that the
modification will not cause or contribute to
a violation of any NAAQS or PSD increment.
c. The following items should be
considered prior to the acceptance of an
analysis of measured air quality data as the
sole basis for an air quality demonstration or
determining an emissions limit:
i. Does a monitoring network exist for the
pollutants and averaging times of concern in
the vicinity of the existing source?
ii. Has the monitoring network been
designed to locate points of maximum
concentration?
iii. Do the monitoring network and the data
reduction and storage procedures meet EPA
monitoring and quality assurance
requirements?
iv. Do the dataset and the analysis allow
impact of the most important individual
sources to be identified if more than one
source or emission point is involved?
v. Is at least one full year of valid ambient
data available?
vi. Can it be demonstrated through the
comparison of monitored data with model
results that available air quality models and
techniques are not applicable?
d. Comprehensive air quality monitoring in
the area affected by the existing source with
proposed modifications will be necessary in
these cases. Additional meteorological
monitoring may also be necessary. The
appropriate number of air quality and
meteorological monitors from a scientific and
technical standpoint is a function of the
situation being considered. The source
configuration, terrain configuration, and
meteorological variations all have an impact
on number and optimal placement of
monitors. Decisions on the monitoring
network appropriate for this type of analysis
can only be made on a case-by-case basis.
e. Sources should obtain approval from the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) and the EPA Regional Office for the
monitoring network prior to the start of
monitoring. A monitoring protocol agreed to
by all parties involved is necessary to assure
that ambient data are collected in a
consistent and appropriate manner. The
design of the network, the number, type, and
location of the monitors, the sampling
period, averaging time, as well as the need
for meteorological monitoring or the use of
mobile sampling or plume tracking
techniques, should all be specified in the
protocol and agreed upon prior to start-up of
the network.
f. Given the uniqueness and complexities
of these rare circumstances, the procedures
can only be established on a case-by-case
basis for analyzing the source’s emissions
data and the measured air quality monitoring
data, and for projecting with a reasoned basis
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
72860
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
the air quality impact of a proposed
modification to an existing source in order to
demonstrate that emissions from the
construction or operation of the modification
will not cause or contribute to a violation of
the applicable NAAQS and PSD increment,
and to determine adequate emissions limits.
The same attention should be given to the
detailed analyses of the air quality data as
would be applied to a comprehensive model
performance evaluation. In some cases, the
monitoring data collected for use in the
performance evaluation of preferred air
quality models, screening technique, or
existing alternative models may help inform
the development of a suitable new alternative
model. Early coordination with the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) and the EPA Regional Office is
fundamental with respect to any potential
use of measured data in lieu of model
estimates.
10.0 References
1. Code of Federal Regulations; Title 40
(Protection of Environment); part 51;
§§ 51.112, 51.117, 51.150, 51.160.
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1990. New Source Review Workshop
Manual: Prevention of Significant
Deterioration and Nonattainment Area
Permitting (Draft). Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC.
3. Code of Federal Regulations; Title 40
(Protection of Environment); part 51;
§§ 51.166 and 52.21.
4. Code of Federal Regulations; Title 40
(Protection of Environment); part 93;
§§ 93.116, 93.123, and 93.150.
5. Code of Federal Regulations; Title 40
(Protection of Environment); part 58
(Ambient Air Quality Surveillance).
6. Code of Federal Regulations; Title 40
(Protection of Environment); part 50
(National Primary and Secondary
Ambient Air Quality Standards).
7. Baker, K.R., Kelly, J.T., 2014. Single source
impacts estimated with photochemical
model source sensitivity and
apportionment approaches. Atmospheric
Environment, 96: 266–274.
8. ENVIRON, 2012. Evaluation of Chemical
Dispersion Models using Atmospheric
Plume Measurements from Field
Experiments. ENVIRON International,
Corp., Novato, CA. Prepared under
contract No. EP–D–07–102 for the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
9. McMurry, P.H., Shepherd, M.F., Vickery,
J.S., 2004. Particulate matter science for
policy makers: A NARSTO assessment.
Cambridge University Press.
10. Baker, K.R., Foley, K.M., 2011. A
nonlinear regression model estimating
single source concentrations of primary
and secondarily formed PM2.5.
Atmospheric Environment, 45: 3758–
3767.
11. Bergin, M.S., Russell, A.G., Odman, M.T.,
Cohan, D.S., Chameldes, W.L., 2008.
Single-Source Impact Analysis Using
Three-Dimensional Air Quality Models.
Journal of the Air & Waste Management
Association, 58: 1351–1359.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
12. Zhou, W., Cohan, D.S., Pinder, R.W.,
Neuman, J.A., Holloway, J.S., Peischl, J.,
Ryerson, T.B., Nowak, J.B., Flocke, F.,
Zheng, W.G., 2012. Observation and
modeling of the evolution of Texas
power plant plumes. Atmospheric
Chemistry and Physics, 12: 455–468.
13. Chen, J., Lu, J., Avise, J.C., DaMassa, J.A.,
Kleeman, M.J., Kaduwela, A.P., 2014.
Seasonal modeling of PM 2.5 in
California’s San Joaquin Valley.
Atmospheric Environment, 92: 182–190.
14. Russell, A.G., 2008. EPA Supersites
program-related emissions-based
particulate matter modeling: initial
applications and advances. Journal of the
Air & Waste Management Association,
58: 289–302.
15. Tesche, T., Morris, R., Tonnesen, G.,
McNally, D., Boylan, J., Brewer, P., 2006.
CMAQ/CAMx annual 2002 performance
evaluation over the eastern US.
Atmospheric Environment, 40: 4906–
4919.
16. Fox, D.G., 1984. Uncertainty in air quality
modeling. Bulletin of the American
Meteorological Society, 65(1): 27–36.
17. Bowne, NE, 1981. Validation and
Performance Criteria for Air Quality
Models. Appendix F in Air Quality
Modeling and the Clean Air Act:
Recommendations to EPA on Dispersion
Modeling for Regulatory Applications.
American Meteorological Society,
Boston, MA; pp. 159–171. (Docket No.
A–80–46, II–A–106).
18. Fox, D.G., 1981. Judging Air Quality
Model Performance. Bulletin of the
American Meteorological Society, 62(5):
599–609.
19. Simon, H., Baker, K.R., Phillips, S., 2012.
Compilation and interpretation of
photochemical model performance
statistics published between 2006 and
2012. Atmospheric Environment, 61:
124–139.
20. Burton, C.S., 1981. The Role of
Atmospheric Models in Regulatory
Decision-Making: Summary Report.
Systems Applications, Inc., San Rafael,
CA. Prepared under contract No. 68–01–
5845 for the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Research Triangle
Park, NC. (Docket No. A–80–46, II–M–6).
21. Olesen, H.R., 2001. Ten years of
Harmonisation activities: Past, present
and future. Introductory address and
paper presented at the 7th International
Conference on Harmonisation within
Atmospheric Dispersion Modelling for
Regulatory Purposes, May 28–31, 2001,
Belgirate, Italy.
22. Weil, Sykes, and Venkatram, 1992.
Evaluating Air-Quality Models: Review
and Outlook. Journal of Applied
Meteorology, 31: 1121–1145.
23. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2016. Model Clearinghouse: Operational
Plan. Publication No. EPA–454/B–16–
008. Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
24. American Meteorological Society, 1983.
Synthesis of the Rural Model Reviews.
Publication No. EPA–600/3–83–108.
Office of Research and Development,
Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No.
PB 84–121037).
PO 00000
Frm 00036
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
25. Hanna, S., M. Garrison and B. Turner,
1998. AERMOD Peer Review report.
Prepared by SAI, Inc. under EPA
Contract No. 68–D6–0064/1–14 for the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Research Triangle Park, NC. 12pp. &
appendices. (Docket No. A–99–05, II–A–
6).
26. Scire, J.S. and L.L. Schulman, 1981.
Evaluation of the BLP and ISC Models
with SF6 Tracer Data and SO2
Measurements at Aluminum Reduction
Plants. APCA Specialty Conference on
Dispersion Modeling for Complex
Sources, St. Louis, MO.
27. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2003. AERMOD: Latest Features and
Evaluation Results. Publication No.
EPA–454/R–03–003. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
28. ASTM D6589: Standard Guide for
Statistical Evaluation of Atmospheric
Dispersion Model Performance. (2010).
29. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1992. Protocol for Determining the Best
Performing Model. Publication No. EPA–
454/R–92–025. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 93–
226082).
30. Hanna, S.R., 1982. Natural Variability of
Observed Hourly SO2 and CO
Concentrations in St. Louis. Atmospheric
Environment, 16(6): 1435–1440.
31. Pasquill, F., 1974. Atmospheric Diffusion,
2nd Edition. John Wiley and Sons, New
York, NY; 479pp.
32. Rhoads, R.G., 1981. Accuracy of Air
Quality Models. Staff Report. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency,
Research Triangle Park, NC. (Docket No.
A–80–46, II–G–6).
33. Hanna, S.R., 1993. Uncertainties in air
quality model predictions. BoundaryLayer Meteorology, 62: 3–20.
34. Hanna, S.R., 1989. Confidence limits for
air quality model evaluations, as
estimated by bootstrap and jackknife
resampling methods. Atmospheric
Environment, 23(6): 1385–1398.
35. Cox, W.M. and J.A. Tikvart, 1990. A
statistical procedure for determining the
best performing air quality simulation
model. Atmospheric Environment,
24A(9): 2387–2395.
36. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2016. Technical Support Document
(TSD) for AERMOD-Based Assessments
of Long-Range Transport Impacts for
Primary Pollutants. Publication No.
EPA–454/B–16–007. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
37. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2021. AERSCREEN User’s Guide.
Publication No. EPA–454/B–21–005.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
38. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2011. AERSCREEN Released as the EPA
Recommended Screening Model.
Memorandum dated April 11, 2011,
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
39. Perry, S.G., D.J. Burns and A.J. Cimorelli,
1990. User’s Guide to CTDMPLUS:
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
Volume 2. The Screening Mode
(CTSCREEN). Publication No. EPA–600/
8–90–087. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Research Triangle
Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 91–136564).
40. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1992. Screening Procedures for
Estimating the Air Quality Impact of
Stationary Sources, Revised. Publication
No. EPA–454/R–92–019. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No.
PB 93–219095).
41. Burns, D.J., S.G. Perry and A.J. Cimorelli,
1991. An Advanced Screening Model for
Complex Terrain Applications. Paper
presented at the 7th Joint Conference on
Applications of Air Pollution
Meteorology (cosponsored by the
American Meteorological Society and the
Air & Waste Management Association),
January 13–18, 1991, New Orleans, LA.
42. Mills, M.T., R.J. Paine, E.A. Insley and
B.A. Egan, 1987. The Complex Terrain
Dispersion Model Terrain Preprocessor
System—User’s Guide and Program
Description. Publication No. EPA–600/
8–88–003. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Research Triangle
Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 88–162094).
43. Environmental Research and Technology,
1987. User’s Guide to the Rough Terrain
Diffusion Model (RTDM), Rev. 3.20. ERT
Document No. P–D535–585.
Environmental Research and
Technology, Inc., Concord, MA. (NTIS
No. PB 88–171467).
44. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2023. AERMOD Model Formulation.
Publication No. EPA–454/B–23–008.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
45. Cimorelli, A., et al., 2005. AERMOD: A
Dispersion Model for Industrial Source
Applications. Part I: General Model
Formulation and Boundary Layer
Characterization. Journal of Applied
Meteorology, 44(5): 682–693.
46. L.L. Schulman, D.G. Strimaitis and J.S.
Scire, 2002. Development and evaluation
of the PRIME plume rise and building
downwash model. Journal of the Air &
Waste Management Association, 50:
378–390.
47. U.S. EPA, 2012: User’s Manual
AERCOARE Version 1.0. EPA–910–R–
12–008. U.S. EPA, Region 10, Seattle,
WA.
48. Fairall, C.W., E.F. Bradley, J.E. Hare, A.A.
Grachev, and J.B. Edson, 2003: ‘‘Bulk
Parameterization of Air-Sea Fluxes:
Updates and Verification for the COARE
Algorithm.’’ Journal. Of Climate, 16,
571–591.
49. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1992. Guideline for modeling carbon
monoxide from roadway intersections.
Publication number EPA–454/R–92–005.
Office of Air Quality Planning &
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
50. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1997. Guidance for Siting Ambient Air
Monitors around Stationary Lead
Sources. Publication No. EPA–454/R–
92–009R. Office of Air Quality Planning
and Standards, Research Triangle Park,
NC. (NTIS No. PB 97–208094).
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
51. LEADPOST processor: https://
gaftp.epa.gov/Air/aqmg/SCRAM/models/
preferred/aermod/leadpost.zip.
52. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1993. Lead Guideline Document.
Publication No. EPA–452/R–93–009.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
(NTIS No. PB 94–111846).
53. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2014. Guidance for 1-Hour SO2
Nonattainment Area SIP Submissions.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
54. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2016. SO2 NAAQS Designations
Modeling Technical Assistance
Document. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC.
55. Turner, D.B., 1964. A Diffusion Model for
an Urban Area. Journal of Applied
Meteorology, 3(1):83–91.
56. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2015. Technical Support Document
(TSD) for NO2-Related AERMOD Options
and Modifications. Publication No. EPA–
454/B–15–004. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC.
57. Podrez, M., 2015. An Update to the
Ambient Ratio Method for 1-h NO2 Air
Quality Standards Dispersion Modeling.
Atmospheric Environment, 103: 163–
170.
58. Cole, H.S. and J.E. Summerhays, 1979. A
Review of Techniques Available for
Estimation of Short-Term NO2
Concentrations. Journal of the Air
Pollution Control Association, 29(8):
812–817.
59. Hanrahan, P.L., 1999. The Polar Volume
Polar Ratio Method for Determining
NO2/NOX Ratios in Modeling—Part I:
Methodology. Journal of the Air & Waste
Management Association, 49: 1324–
1331.
60. Carruthers, D.J.; Stocker, J.R.; Ellis, A.;
Seaton, M.D.; Smith, SE, 2017.
Evaluation of an explicit NOX chemistry
method in AERMOD; Journal of the Air
& Waste Management Association. 2017,
67 (6), 702–712; DOI:10.1080/
10962247.2017.1280096.
61. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023.
Technical Support Document (TSD) for
Adoption of the Generic Reaction Set
Method (GRSM) as a Regulatory NonDefault Tier-3 NO2 Screening Option,
Publication No. EPA–454/R–23–009.
Office of Air Quality Planning &
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
62. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2004. The Particle Pollution Report.
Publication No. EPA–454/R–04–002.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
63. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2022. Guidance for Ozone and PM2.5
Permit Modeling. Publication No. EPA–
454/R–22–005. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC.
64. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2018. Modeling Guidance for
Demonstrating Attainment of Air Quality
PO 00000
Frm 00037
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72861
Goals for Ozone, PM2.5, and Regional
Haze. Publication No. EPA 454/R–18–
009. Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
65. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2015. Transportation Conformity
Guidance for Quantitative Hot-Spot
Analyses in PM2.5 and PM10
Nonattainment and Maintenance Areas.
Publication No. EPA–420–B–15–084.
Office of Transportation and Air Quality,
Ann Arbor, MI.
66. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1987. PM10 SIP Development Guideline.
Publication No. EPA–450/2–86–001.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
(NTIS No. PB 87–206488).
67. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2012. Haul Road Workgroup Final
Report Submission to EPA–OAQPS.
Memorandum dated March 2, 2012,
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
68. Seinfeld, J.H., Pandis, S.N., 2012.
Atmospheric chemistry and physics:
from air pollution to climate change.
John Wiley & Sons.
69. Simon, H., Baker, K.R., Phillips, S., 2012.
Compilation and interpretation of
photochemical model performance
statistics published between 2006 and
2012. Atmospheric Environment, 61,
124–139.
70. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2016. Guidance on the use of models for
assessing the impacts of emissions from
single sources on the secondarily formed
pollutants ozone and PM2.5. Publication
No. EPA 454/R–16–005. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
71. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2019. Guidance on the Development of
Modeled Emission Rates for Precursors
(MERPs) as a Tier 1 Demonstration Tool
for Ozone and PM2.5 under the PSD
Permitting Program. Publication No.
EPA–454/R–19–003. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
72. U.S. Department of the Interior, 2010.
Federal Land Managers’ Air Quality
Related Values Work Group (FLAG)
Phase I Report—Revised 2010. Natural
Resource Report NPS/NPRC/NRR–2010/
232.
73. National Acid Precipitation Assessment
Program (NAPAP), 1991. Acid
Deposition: State of Science and
Technology. Volume III Terrestrial,
Materials, Health and Visibility Effects.
Report 24, Visibility: Existing and
Historical Conditions—Causes and
Effects. Edited by Patricia M. Irving.
Washington, DC, 129pp.
74. National Research Council, 1993.
Protecting Visibility in National Parks
and Wilderness Areas. National
Academy Press, Washington, DC, 446pp.
75. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1992. Workbook for plume visual impact
screening and analysis (revised).
Publication No. EPA–454/R–92–023.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
(NTIS No. PB 93–223592).
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72862
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
76. Nilsson, J., Grennfelt, P., Ministerra˚d, N.,
1988. Critical Loads for Sulphur and
Nitrogen: Report from a Workshop Held
at Skokloster, Sweden, 19–24 March,
1988. Nordic Council of Ministers.
77. Turner, D.B., 1969. Workbook of
Atmospheric Dispersion Estimates. PHS
Publication No. 999–AP–26. U.S.
Department of Health, Education and
Welfare, Public Health Service,
Cincinnati, OH. (NTIS No. PB–191482).
78. McElroy, J.L. and F. Pooler, Jr., 1968. St.
Louis Dispersion Study, Volume II—
Analysis. National Air Pollution Control
Administration Publication No. AP–53,
U.S. Department of Health, Education
and Welfare, Public Health Service,
Arlington, VA. (NTIS No. PB–190255).
79. Irwin, J.S., 1978. Proposed Criteria for
Selection of Urban Versus Rural
Dispersion Coefficients. (Draft Staff
Report). Meteorology and Assessment
Division, U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC.
(Docket No. A–80–46, II–B–8).
80. Auer, Jr., A.H., 1978. Correlation of Land
Use and Cover with Meteorological
Anomalies. Journal of Applied
Meteorology, 17(5): 636–643.
81. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2023. AERMOD Implementation Guide.
Publication No. EPA–454/B–23–009.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
82. Pasquill, F., 1976. Atmospheric
Dispersion Parameters in Gaussian
Plume Modeling, Part II. Possible
Requirements for Change in the Turner
Workbook Values. Publication No. EPA–
600/4–76–030b. Office of Research and
Development, Research Triangle Park,
NC. (NTIS No. PB–258036/3BA).
83. Stull, R.B., 1988. An Introduction to
Boundary Layer Meteorology. Kluwer
Academic Publishers, Boston, MA.
666pp.
84. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1987. Analysis and Evaluation of
Statistical Coastal Fumigation Models.
Publication No. EPA–450/4–87–002.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
(NTIS No. PB 87–175519).
85. Wesely, M.L, P.V. Doskey, and J.D.
Shannon, 2002: Deposition
Parameterizations for the Industrial
Source Complex (ISC3) Model. ANL
Report ANL/ER/TRB01/003, DOE/W–31–
109–Eng–38, Argonne National
Laboratory, Argonne, Illinois 60439.
86. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1981. Guideline for Use of Fluid
Modeling to Determine Good
Engineering Practice (GEP) Stack Height.
Publication No. EPA–450/4–81–003.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
(NTIS No. PB 82–145327).
87. Lawson, Jr., R.E. and W.H. Snyder, 1983.
Determination of Good Engineering
Practice Stack Height: A Demonstration
Study for a Power Plant. Publication No.
EPA–600/3–83–024. Office of Research
and Development, Research Triangle
Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 83–207407).
88. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1985. Guideline for Determination of
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
Good Engineering Practice Stack Height
(Technical Support Document for the
Stack Height Regulations), Revised.
Publication No. EPA–450/4–80–023R.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
(NTIS No. PB 85–225241).
89. Snyder, W.H. and R.E. Lawson, Jr., 1985.
Fluid Modeling Demonstration of Good
Engineering-Practice Stack Height in
Complex Terrain. Publication No. EPA–
600/3–85–022. Office of Research and
Development, Research Triangle Park,
NC. (NTIS No. PB 85–203107).
90. Briggs, G.A., 1975. Plume Rise
Predictions. Chapter 3 in Lectures on Air
Pollution and Environmental Impact
Analyses. American Meteorological
Society, Boston, MA; pp. 59–111.
91. Hanna, S.R., G.A. Briggs and R.P. Hosker,
Jr., 1982. Plume Rise. Chapter 2 in
Handbook on Atmospheric Diffusion.
Technical Information Center, U.S.
Department of Energy, Washington, DC;
pp. 11–24. DOE/TIC–11223 (DE
82002045).
92. Weil, J.C., L.A. Corio and R.P. Brower,
1997. A PDF dispersion model for
buoyant plumes in the convective
boundary layer. Journal of Applied
Meteorology, 36: 982–1003.
93. L.L. Schulman, D.G. Strimaitis and J.S.
Scire, 2002. Development and evaluation
of the PRIME plume rise and building
downwash model. Journal of the Air &
Waste Management Association, 50:
378–390.
94. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1995. Compilation of Air Pollutant
Emission Factors, Volume I: Stationary
Point and Area Sources (Fifth Edition,
AP–42: GPO Stock No. 055–000–00500–
1), and Supplements A–D. Volume I can
be downloaded from EPA’s website at
https://www.epa.gov/air-emissionsfactors-and-quantification/ap-42compilation-air-emission-factors.
95. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2017. Emissions Inventory Guidance for
Implementation of Ozone and Particulate
Matter National Ambient Air Quality
Standards (NAAQS) and Regional Haze
Regulations. Publication No. EPA–454/
B–17–002. Office of Air Quality Planning
and Standards, Research Triangle Park,
NC.
96. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2023. Draft Guidance on Developing
Background Concentrations for Use in
Modeling Demonstrations. Publication
No. EPA–454/P–23–001. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
97. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1987. Ambient Air Monitoring
Guidelines for Prevention of Significant
Deterioration (PSD). Publication No.
EPA–450/4–87–007. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No.
PB 90–168030).
98. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2011. Additional Clarification Regarding
Application of Appendix W Modeling
Guidance for the 1-hour NO2 National
Ambient Air Quality Standard. Office of
PO 00000
Frm 00038
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
Air Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
99. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2013. Use of ASOS meteorological data
in AERMOD dispersion modeling.
Memorandum dated March 8, 2013,
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
100. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2023. User’s Guide for the AERMOD
Meteorological Preprocessor (AERMET).
Publication No. EPA–454/B–23–005.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
101. U.S Environmental Protection Agency.
2023. AERMINUTE User’s Guide.
Publication No. EPA–454/B–23–007.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
102. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1993. PCRAMMET User’s Guide.
Publication No. EPA–454/R–96–001.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
(NTIS No. PB 97–147912).
103. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1996. Meteorological Processor for
Regulatory Models (MPRM). Publication
No. EPA–454/R–96–002. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No.
PB 96–180518).
104. Paine, R.J., 1987. User’s Guide to the
CTDM Meteorological Preprocessor
Program. Publication No. EPA–600/8–
88–004. Office of Research and
Development, Research Triangle Park,
NC. (NTIS No. PB–88–162102).
105. Perry, S.G., D.J. Burns, L.H. Adams, R.J.
Paine, M.G. Dennis, M.T. Mills, D.G.
Strimaitis, R.J. Yamartino and E.M.
Insley, 1989. User’s Guide to the
Complex Terrain Dispersion Model Plus
Algorithms for Unstable Situations
(CTDMPLUS). Volume 1: Model
Descriptions and User Instructions.
Publication No. EPA–600/8–89–041. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency,
Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No.
PB 89–181424).
106. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2020. User’s Guide for AERSURFACE
Tool. Publication No. EPA–454/B–20–
008. Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
107. Brode, R., K. Wesson, J. Thurman, and
C. Tillerson, 2008. AERMOD Sensitivity
to the Choice of Surface Characteristics.
Paper #811 presented at the 101st Air &
Waste Management Association Annual
Conference and Exhibition, June 24–27,
2008, Portland, OR.
108. Ramboll, 2023. The Mesoscale Model
Interface Program (MMIF) Version 4.1
User’s Manual.
109. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2023. Guidance on the Use of the
Mesoscale Model Interface Program
(MMIF) for AERMOD Applications.
Publication No. EPA–454/B–23–006.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
110. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2000. Meteorological Monitoring
Guidance for Regulatory Modeling
Applications. Publication No. EPA–454/
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
R–99–005. Office of Air Quality Planning
and Standards, Research Triangle Park,
NC. (NTIS No. PB 2001–103606).
111. ASTM D5527: Standard Practice for
Measuring Surface Winds and
Temperature by Acoustic Means. (2011).
112. ASTM D5741: Standard Practice for
Characterizing Surface Wind Using Wind
Vane and Rotating Anemometer. (2011).
113. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1995. Quality Assurance for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume
IV—Meteorological Measurements.
Publication No. EPA600/R–94/038d.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
Note: for copies of this handbook, you
may make inquiry to ORD Publications,
26 West Martin Luther King Dr.,
Cincinnati, OH 45268.
114. Bowen, B.M., J.M. Dewart and A.I. Chen,
1983. Stability Class Determination: A
Comparison for One Site. Proceedings,
Sixth Symposium on Turbulence and
Diffusion. American Meteorological
Society, Boston, MA; pp. 211–214.
(Docket No. A–92–65, II–A–7).
115. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1993. An Evaluation of a Solar
Radiation/Delta-T (SRDT) Method for
Estimating Pasquill-Gifford (P–G)
Stability Categories. Publication No.
EPA–454/R–93–055. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No.
PB 94–113958).
116. Irwin, J.S., 1980. Dispersion Estimate
Suggestion #8: Estimation of Pasquill
Stability Categories. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC. (Docket No. A–80–46,
II–B–10).
117. Mitchell, Jr., A.E. and K.O. Timbre,
1979. Atmospheric Stability Class from
Horizontal Wind Fluctuation. Presented
at 72nd Annual Meeting of Air Pollution
Control Association, Cincinnati, OH;
June 24–29, 1979. (Docket No. A–80–46,
II–P–9).
118. Smedman-Hogstrom, A. and V.
Hogstrom, 1978. A Practical Method for
Determining Wind Frequency
Distributions for the Lowest 200 m from
Routine Meteorological Data. Journal of
Applied Meteorology, 17(7): 942–954.
119. Smith, T.B. and S.M. Howard, 1972.
Methodology for Treating Diffusivity.
MRI 72 FR–1030. Meteorology Research,
Inc., Altadena, CA. (Docket No. A–80–
46, II–P–8).
120. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
2018. Evaluation of Prognostic
Meteorological Data in AERMOD
Applications. Publication No. EPA–454/
R–18–002. Office of Air Quality Planning
and Standards, Research Triangle Park,
NC.
121. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1984. Calms Processor (CALMPRO)
User’s Guide. Publication No. EPA–901/
9–84–001. Office of Air Quality Planning
and Standards, Region I, Boston, MA.
(NTIS No. PB 84–229467).
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
Addendum A to Appendix W of Part
51—Summaries of Preferred Air
Quality Models
Table of Contents
A.0 Introduction and Availability
A.1 AERMOD (AMS/EPA Regulatory
Model)
A.2 CTDMPLUS (Complex Terrain
Dispersion Model Plus Algorithms for
Unstable Situations)
A.3 OCD (Offshore and Coastal Dispersion
Model)
A.0 Introduction and Availability
(1) This appendix summarizes key features
of refined air quality models preferred for
specific regulatory applications. For each
model, information is provided on
availability, approximate cost (where
applicable), regulatory use, data input,
output format and options, simulation of
atmospheric physics, and accuracy. These
models may be used without a formal
demonstration of applicability provided they
satisfy the recommendations for regulatory
use; not all options in the models are
necessarily recommended for regulatory use.
(2) These models have been subjected to a
performance evaluation using comparisons
with observed air quality data. Where
possible, the models contained herein have
been subjected to evaluation exercises,
including: (1) statistical performance tests
recommended by the American
Meteorological Society, and (2) peer
scientific reviews. The models in this
appendix have been selected on the basis of
the results of the model evaluations,
experience with previous use, familiarity of
the model to various air quality programs,
and the costs and resource requirements for
use.
(3) Codes and documentation for all
models listed in this addendum are available
from the EPA’s Support Center for Regulatory
Air Models (SCRAM) website at https://
www.epa.gov/scram. Codes and
documentation may also be available from
the National Technical Information Service
(NTIS), https://www.ntis.gov, and, when
available, are referenced with the appropriate
NTIS accession number.
A.1 AERMOD (AMS/EPA Regulatory
Model)
References
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023.
AERMOD Model Formulation.
Publication No. EPA–454/B–23–010.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
Cimorelli, A., et al., 2005. AERMOD: A
Dispersion Model for Industrial Source
Applications. Part I: General Model
Formulation and Boundary Layer
Characterization. Journal of Applied
Meteorology, 44(5): 682–693.
Perry, S., et al., 2005. AERMOD: A
Dispersion Model for Industrial Source
Applications. Part II: Model Performance
against 17 Field Study Databases. Journal
of Applied Meteorology, 44(5): 694–708.
Heist, D., et al., 2013. Estimating near-road
pollutant dispersion: A model intercomparison. Transportation Research
PO 00000
Frm 00039
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72863
Part D: Transport and Environment, 25:
pp 93–105.
Heist, D., et al., 2023. Integration of RLINE
dispersion model into EPA’s AERMOD:
updated formulation and evaluations.
Journal of the Air & Waste Management
Association, Manuscript submitted for
publication.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023.
User’s Guide for the AMS/EPA
Regulatory Model (AERMOD).
Publication No. EPA–454/B–23–008.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023.
User’s Guide for the AERMOD
Meteorological Preprocessor (AERMET).
Publication No. EPA–454/B–23–005.
Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2018.
User’s Guide for the AERMOD Terrain
Preprocessor (AERMAP). Publication No.
EPA–454/B–18–004. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC.
Schulman, L.L., D.G. Strimaitis and J.S. Scire,
2000. Development and evaluation of the
PRIME plume rise and building
downwash model. Journal of the Air &
Waste Management Association, 50:
378–390.
Schulman, L.L., and Joseph S. Scire, 1980.
Buoyant Line and Point Source (BLP)
Dispersion Model User’s Guide.
Document P–7304B. Environmental
Research and Technology, Inc., Concord,
MA. (NTIS No. PB 81–164642).
Availability
The model codes and associated
documentation are available on EPA’s
SCRAM website (paragraph A.0(3)).
Abstract
AERMOD is a steady-state plume
dispersion model for assessment of pollutant
concentrations from a variety of sources.
AERMOD simulates transport and dispersion
from multiple point, area, volume, and line
sources based on an up-to-date
characterization of the atmospheric boundary
layer. Sources may be located in rural or
urban areas, and receptors may be located in
simple or complex terrain. AERMOD
accounts for building wake effects (i.e.,
plume downwash) based on the PRIME
building downwash algorithms. The model
employs hourly sequential preprocessed
meteorological data to estimate
concentrations for averaging times from 1hour to 1-year (also multiple years).
AERMOD can be used to estimate the
concentrations of nonreactive pollutants from
highway traffic. AERMOD also handles
unique modeling problems associated with
aluminum reduction plants, and other
industrial sources where plume rise and
downwash effects from stationary buoyant
line sources are important. AERMOD is
designed to operate in concert with two preprocessor codes: AERMET processes
meteorological data for input to AERMOD,
and AERMAP processes terrain elevation
data and generates receptor and hill height
information for input to AERMOD.
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72864
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
a. Regulatory Use
(1) AERMOD is appropriate for the
following applications:
• Point, volume, and area sources;
• Buoyant, elevated line sources (e.g.,
aluminum reduction plants);
• Mobile sources;
• Surface, near-surface, and elevated
releases;
• Rural or urban areas;
• Simple and complex terrain;
• Transport distances over which steadystate assumptions are appropriate, up to 50
km;
• 1-hour to annual averaging times,
• Continuous toxic air emissions; and,
• Applications in the marine boundary
layer environment where the effects of
shoreline fumigation and/or platform
downwash are adequately assessed or are not
applicable.
(2) For regulatory applications of
AERMOD, the regulatory default option
should be set, i.e., the parameter DFAULT
should be employed in the MODELOPT
record in the COntrol Pathway. The DFAULT
option requires the use of meteorological data
processed with the regulatory options in
AERMET, the use of terrain elevation data
processed through the AERMAP terrain
processor, stack-tip downwash, sequential
date checking, and does not permit the use
of the model in the SCREEN mode. In the
regulatory default mode, pollutant half-life or
decay options are not employed, except in
the case of an urban source of sulfur dioxide
where a 4-hour half-life is applied. Terrain
elevation data from the U.S. Geological
Survey (USGS) 7.5-Minute Digital Elevation
Model (DEM), or equivalent (approx. 30meter resolution and finer), (processed
through AERMAP) should be used in all
applications. Starting in 2011, data from the
3D Elevation Program (3DEP, https://
apps.nationalmap.gov/downloader), formerly
the National Elevation Dataset (NED), can
also be used in AERMOD, which includes a
range of resolutions, from 1-m to 2 arc
seconds and such high resolution would
always be preferred. In some cases,
exceptions from the terrain data requirement
may be made in consultation with the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)).
b. Input Requirements
(1) Source data: Required inputs include
source type, location, emission rate, stack
height, stack inside diameter, stack gas exit
velocity, stack gas exit temperature, area and
volume source dimensions, and source base
elevation. For point sources subject to the
influence of building downwash, directionspecific building dimensions (processed
through the BPIPPRM building processor)
should be input. Variable emission rates are
optional. Buoyant line sources require
coordinates of the end points of the line,
release height, emission rate, average line
source width, average building width,
average spacing between buildings, and
average line source buoyancy parameter. For
mobile sources, traffic volume; emission
factor, source height, and mixing zone width
are needed to determine appropriate model
inputs.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
(2) Meteorological data: The AERMET
meteorological preprocessor requires input of
surface characteristics, including surface
roughness (zo), Bowen ratio, and albedo, as
well as, hourly observations of wind speed
between 7zo and 100 m (reference wind
speed measurement from which a vertical
profile can be developed), wind direction,
cloud cover, and temperature between zo and
100 m (reference temperature measurement
from which a vertical profile can be
developed). Meteorological data can be in the
form of observed data or prognostic modeled
data as discussed in paragraph 8.4.1(d).
Surface characteristics may be varied by
wind sector and by season or month. When
using observed meteorological data, a
morning sounding (in National Weather
Service format) from a representative upper
air station is required. Latitude, longitude,
and time zone of the surface, site-specific or
prognostic data (if applicable) and upper air
meteorological stations are required. The
wind speed starting threshold is also
required in AERMET for applications
involving site-specific data. When using
prognostic data, modeled profiles of
temperature and winds are input to
AERMET. These can be hourly or a time that
represents a morning sounding. Additionally,
measured profiles of wind, temperature,
vertical and lateral turbulence may be
required in certain applications (e.g., in
complex terrain) to adequately represent the
meteorology affecting plume transport and
dispersion. Optionally, measurements of
solar and/or net radiation may be input to
AERMET. Two files are produced by the
AERMET meteorological preprocessor for
input to the AERMOD dispersion model.
When using observed data, the surface file
contains observed and calculated surface
variables, one record per hour. For
applications with multi-level site-specific
meteorological data, the profile contains the
observations made at each level of the
meteorological tower (or remote sensor).
When using prognostic data, the surface file
contains surface variables calculated by the
prognostic model and AERMET. The profile
file contains the observations made at each
level of a meteorological tower (or remote
sensor), the one-level observations taken
from other representative data (e.g., National
Weather Service surface observations), one
record per level per hour, or in the case of
prognostic data, the prognostic modeled
values of temperature and winds at userspecified levels.
(i) Data used as input to AERMET should
possess an adequate degree of
representativeness to ensure that the wind,
temperature and turbulence profiles derived
by AERMOD are both laterally and vertically
representative of the source impact area. The
adequacy of input data should be judged
independently for each variable. The values
for surface roughness, Bowen ratio, and
albedo should reflect the surface
characteristics in the vicinity of the
meteorological tower or representative grid
cell when using prognostic data, and should
be adequately representative of the modeling
domain. Finally, the primary atmospheric
input variables, including wind speed and
direction, ambient temperature, cloud cover,
PO 00000
Frm 00040
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
and a morning upper air sounding, should
also be adequately representative of the
source area when using observed data.
(ii) For applications involving the use of
site-specific meteorological data that
includes turbulences parameters (i.e., sigmatheta and/or sigma-w), the application of the
ADJ_U* option in AERMET would require
approval as an alternative model application
under section 3.2.
(iii) For recommendations regarding the
length of meteorological record needed to
perform a regulatory analysis with AERMOD,
see section 8.4.2.
(3) Receptor data: Receptor coordinates,
elevations, height above ground, and hill
height scales are produced by the AERMAP
terrain preprocessor for input to AERMOD.
Discrete receptors and/or multiple receptor
grids, Cartesian and/or polar, may be
employed in AERMOD. AERMAP requires
input of DEM or 3DEP terrain data produced
by the USGS, or other equivalent data.
AERMAP can be used optionally to estimate
source elevations.
c. Output
Printed output options include input
information, high concentration summary
tables by receptor for user-specified
averaging periods, maximum concentration
summary tables, and concurrent values
summarized by receptor for each day
processed. Optional output files can be
generated for: a listing of occurrences of
exceedances of user-specified threshold
value; a listing of concurrent (raw) results at
each receptor for each hour modeled, suitable
for post-processing; a listing of design values
that can be imported into graphics software
for plotting contours; a listing of results
suitable for NAAQS analyses including
NAAQS exceedances and culpability
analyses; an unformatted listing of raw
results above a threshold value with a special
structure for use with the TOXX model
component of TOXST; a listing of
concentrations by rank (e.g., for use in
quantile-quantile plots); and a listing of
concentrations, including arc-maximum
normalized concentrations, suitable for
model evaluation studies.
d. Type of Model
AERMOD is a steady-state plume model,
using Gaussian distributions in the vertical
and horizontal for stable conditions, and in
the horizontal for convective conditions. The
vertical concentration distribution for
convective conditions results from an
assumed bi-Gaussian probability density
function of the vertical velocity.
e. Pollutant Types
AERMOD is applicable to primary
pollutants and continuous releases of toxic
and hazardous waste pollutants. Chemical
transformation is treated by simple
exponential decay.
f. Source-Receptor Relationships
AERMOD applies user-specified locations
for sources and receptors. Actual separation
between each source-receptor pair is used.
Source and receptor elevations are user input
or are determined by AERMAP using USGS
DEM or 3DEP terrain data. Receptors may be
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
located at user-specified heights above
ground level.
g. Plume Behavior
(1) In the convective boundary layer (CBL),
the transport and dispersion of a plume is
characterized as the superposition of three
modeled plumes: (1) the direct plume (from
the stack); (2) the indirect plume; and (3) the
penetrated plume, where the indirect plume
accounts for the lofting of a buoyant plume
near the top of the boundary layer, and the
penetrated plume accounts for the portion of
a plume that, due to its buoyancy, penetrates
above the mixed layer, but can disperse
downward and re-enter the mixed layer. In
the CBL, plume rise is superposed on the
displacements by random convective
velocities (Weil, et al., 1997).
(2) In the stable boundary layer, plume rise
is estimated using an iterative approach to
account for height-dependent lapse rates,
similar to that in the CTDMPLUS model (see
A.2 in this appendix).
(3) Stack-tip downwash and buoyancy
induced dispersion effects are modeled.
Building wake effects are simulated for stacks
subject to building downwash using the
methods contained in the PRIME downwash
algorithms (Schulman, et al., 2000). For
plume rise affected by the presence of a
building, the PRIME downwash algorithm
uses a numerical solution of the mass, energy
and momentum conservation laws (Zhang
and Ghoniem, 1993). Streamline deflection
and the position of the stack relative to the
building affect plume trajectory and
dispersion. Enhanced dispersion is based on
the approach of Weil (1996). Plume mass
captured by the cavity is well-mixed within
the cavity. The captured plume mass is reemitted to the far wake as a volume source.
(4) For elevated terrain, AERMOD
incorporates the concept of the critical
dividing streamline height, in which flow
below this height remains horizontal, and
flow above this height tends to rise up and
over terrain (Snyder, et al., 1985). Plume
concentration estimates are the weighted sum
of these two limiting plume states. However,
consistent with the steady-state assumption
of uniform horizontal wind direction over the
modeling domain, straight-line plume
trajectories are assumed, with adjustment in
the plume/receptor geometry used to account
for the terrain effects.
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
h. Horizontal Winds
Vertical profiles of wind are calculated for
each hour based on measurements and
surface-layer similarity (scaling)
relationships. At a given height above
ground, for a given hour, winds are assumed
constant over the modeling domain. The
effect of the vertical variation in horizontal
wind speed on dispersion is accounted for
through simple averaging over the plume
depth.
i. Vertical Wind Speed
In convective conditions, the effects of
random vertical updraft and downdraft
velocities are simulated with a bi-Gaussian
probability density function. In both
convective and stable conditions, the mean
vertical wind speed is assumed equal to zero.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
j. Horizontal Dispersion
Gaussian horizontal dispersion coefficients
are estimated as continuous functions of the
parameterized (or measured) ambient lateral
turbulence and also account for buoyancyinduced and building wake-induced
turbulence. Vertical profiles of lateral
turbulence are developed from measurements
and similarity (scaling) relationships.
Effective turbulence values are determined
from the portion of the vertical profile of
lateral turbulence between the plume height
and the receptor height. The effective lateral
turbulence is then used to estimate
horizontal dispersion.
k. Vertical Dispersion
In the stable boundary layer, Gaussian
vertical dispersion coefficients are estimated
as continuous functions of parameterized
vertical turbulence. In the convective
boundary layer, vertical dispersion is
characterized by a bi-Gaussian probability
density function and is also estimated as a
continuous function of parameterized
vertical turbulence. Vertical turbulence
profiles are developed from measurements
and similarity (scaling) relationships. These
turbulence profiles account for both
convective and mechanical turbulence.
Effective turbulence values are determined
from the portion of the vertical profile of
vertical turbulence between the plume height
and the receptor height. The effective vertical
turbulence is then used to estimate vertical
dispersion.
l. Chemical Transformation
Chemical transformations are generally not
treated by AERMOD. However, AERMOD
does contain an option to treat chemical
transformation using simple exponential
decay, although this option is typically not
used in regulatory applications except for
sources of sulfur dioxide in urban areas.
Either a decay coefficient or a half-life is
input by the user. Note also that the Generic
Reaction Set Method, Plume Volume Molar
Ratio Method and the Ozone Limiting
Method (section 4.2.3.4) for NO2 analyses are
available.
m. Physical Removal
AERMOD can be used to treat dry and wet
deposition for both gases and particles.
Currently, Method 1 particle deposition is
available for regulatory applications. Method
2 particle deposition and gas deposition are
currently alpha options and not available for
regulatory applications
n. Evaluation Studies
American Petroleum Institute, 1998.
Evaluation of State of the Science of Air
Quality Dispersion Model, Scientific
Evaluation, prepared by WoodwardClyde Consultants, Lexington,
Massachusetts, for American Petroleum
Institute, Washington, DC 20005–4070.
Brode, R.W., 2002. Implementation and
Evaluation of PRIME in AERMOD.
Preprints of the 12th Joint Conference on
Applications of Air Pollution
Meteorology, May 20–24, 2002;
American Meteorological Society,
Boston, MA.
Brode, R.W., 2004. Implementation and
Evaluation of Bulk Richardson Number
PO 00000
Frm 00041
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72865
Scheme in AERMOD. 13th Joint
Conference on Applications of Air
Pollution Meteorology, August 23–26,
2004; American Meteorological Society,
Boston, MA.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2003.
AERMOD: Latest Features and
Evaluation Results. Publication No.
EPA–454/R–03–003. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
Heist, D., et al., 2013. Estimating near-road
pollutant dispersion: A model intercomparison. Transportation Research
Part D: Transport and Environment, 25:
pp 93–105.
Heist, D., et al., 2023. Integration of RLINE
dispersion model into EPA’s AERMOD:
updated formulation and evaluations.
Journal of the Air & Waste Management
Association, Manuscript submitted for
publication.
Carruthers, D.J.; Stocker, J.R.; Ellis, A.;
Seaton, M.D.; Smith, SE Evaluation of an
explicit NOx chemistry method in
AERMOD; Journal of the Air & Waste
Management Association. 2017, 67 (6),
702–712; DOI:10.1080/
10962247.2017.1280096.
Environmental Protection Agency, 2023.
Technical Support Document (TSD) for
Adoption of the Generic Reaction Set
Method (GRSM) as a Regulatory NonDefault Tier-3 NO2 Screening Option.
Publication No. EPA–454/R–23–009.
Office of Air Quality Planning &
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
A.2 CTDMPLUS (Complex Terrain
Dispersion Model Plus Algorithms for
Unstable Situations)
References
Perry, S.G., D.J. Burns, L.H. Adams, R.J.
Paine, M.G. Dennis, M.T. Mills, D.G.
Strimaitis, R.J. Yamartino and E.M.
Insley, 1989. User’s Guide to the
Complex Terrain Dispersion Model Plus
Algorithms for Unstable Situations
(CTDMPLUS). Volume 1: Model
Descriptions and User Instructions. EPA
Publication No. EPA–600/8–89–041. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency,
Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No.
PB 89–181424).
Perry, S.G., 1992. CTDMPLUS: A Dispersion
Model for Sources near Complex
Topography. Part I: Technical
Formulations. Journal of Applied
Meteorology, 31(7): 633–645.
Availability
The model codes and associated
documentation are available on the EPA’s
SCRAM website (paragraph A.0(3)).
Abstract
CTDMPLUS is a refined point source
Gaussian air quality model for use in all
stability conditions for complex terrain
applications. The model contains, in its
entirety, the technology of CTDM for stable
and neutral conditions. However,
CTDMPLUS can also simulate daytime,
unstable conditions, and has a number of
additional capabilities for improved user
friendliness. Its use of meteorological data
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
72866
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
and terrain information is different from
other EPA models; considerable detail for
both types of input data is required and is
supplied by preprocessors specifically
designed for CTDMPLUS. CTDMPLUS
requires the parameterization of individual
hill shapes using the terrain preprocessor and
the association of each model receptor with
a particular hill.
a. Regulatory Use
CTDMPLUS is appropriate for the
following applications:
• Elevated point sources;
• Terrain elevations above stack top;
• Rural or urban areas;
• Transport distances less than 50
kilometers; and
• 1-hour to annual averaging times when
used with a post-processor program such as
CHAVG.
b. Input Requirements
(1) Source data: For each source, user
supplies source location, height, stack
diameter, stack exit velocity, stack exit
temperature, and emission rate; if variable
emissions are appropriate, the user supplies
hourly values for emission rate, stack exit
velocity, and stack exit temperature.
(2) Meteorological data: For applications of
CTDMPLUS, multiple level (typically three
or more) measurements of wind speed and
direction, temperature and turbulence (wind
fluctuation statistics) are required to create
the basic meteorological data file
(‘‘PROFILE’’). Such measurements should be
obtained up to the representative plume
height(s) of interest (i.e., the plume height(s)
under those conditions important to the
determination of the design concentration).
The representative plume height(s) of interest
should be determined using an appropriate
complex terrain screening procedure (e.g.,
CTSCREEN) and should be documented in
the monitoring/modeling protocol. The
necessary meteorological measurements
should be obtained from an appropriately
sited meteorological tower augmented by
SODAR and/or RASS if the representative
plume height(s) of interest is above the levels
represented by the tower measurements.
Meteorological preprocessors then create a
SURFACE data file (hourly values of mixed
layer heights, surface friction velocity,
Monin-Obukhov length and surface
roughness length) and a RAWINsonde data
file (upper air measurements of pressure,
temperature, wind direction, and wind
speed).
(3) Receptor data: receptor names (up to
400) and coordinates, and hill number (each
receptor must have a hill number assigned).
(4) Terrain data: user inputs digitized
contour information to the terrain
preprocessor which creates the TERRAIN
data file (for up to 25 hills).
c. Output
(1) When CTDMPLUS is run, it produces
a concentration file, in either binary or text
format (user’s choice), and a list file
containing a verification of model inputs, i.e.,
• Input meteorological data from
‘‘SURFACE’’ and ‘‘PROFILE,’’
• Stack data for each source,
• Terrain information,
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
• Receptor information, and
• Source-receptor location (line printer
map).
(2) In addition, if the case-study option is
selected, the listing includes:
• Meteorological variables at plume height,
• Geometrical relationships between the
source and the hill, and
• Plume characteristics at each receptor,
i.e.,
—Distance in along-flow and cross flow
direction
—Effective plume-receptor height difference
—Effective sy & sz values, both flat terrain
and hill induced (the difference shows the
effect of the hill)
—Concentration components due to WRAP,
LIFT and FLAT.
(3) If the user selects the TOPN option, a
summary table of the top four concentrations
at each receptor is given. If the ISOR option
is selected, a source contribution table for
every hour will be printed.
(4) A separate output file of predicted (1hour only) concentrations (‘‘CONC’’) is
written if the user chooses this option. Three
forms of output are possible:
(i) A binary file of concentrations, one
value for each receptor in the hourly
sequence as run;
(ii) A text file of concentrations, one value
for each receptor in the hourly sequence as
run; or
(iii) A text file as described above, but with
a listing of receptor information (names,
positions, hill number) at the beginning of
the file.
(5) Hourly information provided to these
files besides the concentrations themselves
includes the year, month, day, and hour
information as well as the receptor number
with the highest concentration.
d. Type of Model
CTDMPLUS is a refined steady-state, point
source plume model for use in all stability
conditions for complex terrain applications.
e. Pollutant Types
CTDMPLUS may be used to model nonreactive, primary pollutants.
f. Source-Receptor Relationship
Up to 40 point sources, 400 receptors and
25 hills may be used. Receptors and sources
are allowed at any location. Hill slopes are
assumed not to exceed 15°, so that the
linearized equation of motion for Boussinesq
flow are applicable. Receptors upwind of the
impingement point, or those associated with
any of the hills in the modeling domain,
require separate treatment.
g. Plume Behavior
(1) As in CTDM, the basic plume rise
algorithms are based on Briggs’ (1975)
recommendations.
(2) A central feature of CTDMPLUS for
neutral/stable conditions is its use of a
critical dividing-streamline height (Hc) to
separate the flow in the vicinity of a hill into
two separate layers. The plume component in
the upper layer has sufficient kinetic energy
to pass over the top of the hill while
streamlines in the lower portion are
constrained to flow in a horizontal plane
around the hill. Two separate components of
CTDMPLUS compute ground-level
PO 00000
Frm 00042
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
concentrations resulting from plume material
in each of these flows.
(3) The model calculates on an hourly (or
appropriate steady averaging period) basis
how the plume trajectory (and, in stable/
neutral conditions, the shape) is deformed by
each hill. Hourly profiles of wind and
temperature measurements are used by
CTDMPLUS to compute plume rise, plume
penetration (a formulation is included to
handle penetration into elevated stable
layers, based on Briggs (1984)), convective
scaling parameters, the value of Hc, and the
Froude number above Hc.
h. Horizontal Winds
CTDMPLUS does not simulate calm
meteorological conditions. Both scalar and
vector wind speed observations can be read
by the model. If vector wind speed is
unavailable, it is calculated from the scalar
wind speed. The assignment of wind speed
(either vector or scalar) at plume height is
done by either:
• Interpolating between observations
above and below the plume height, or
• Extrapolating (within the surface layer)
from the nearest measurement height to the
plume height.
i. Vertical Wind Speed
Vertical flow is treated for the plume
component above the critical dividing
streamline height (Hc); see ‘‘Plume
Behavior.’’
j. Horizontal Dispersion
Horizontal dispersion for stable/neutral
conditions is related to the turbulence
velocity scale for lateral fluctuations, sv, for
which a minimum value of 0.2 m/s is used.
Convective scaling formulations are used to
estimate horizontal dispersion for unstable
conditions.
k. Vertical Dispersion
Direct estimates of vertical dispersion for
stable/neutral conditions are based on
observed vertical turbulence intensity, e.g.,
sw (standard deviation of the vertical
velocity fluctuation). In simulating unstable
(convective) conditions, CTDMPLUS relies
on a skewed, bi-Gaussian probability density
function (pdf) description of the vertical
velocities to estimate the vertical distribution
of pollutant concentration.
l. Chemical Transformation
Chemical transformation is not treated by
CTDMPLUS.
m. Physical Removal
Physical removal is not treated by
CTDMPLUS (complete reflection at the
ground/hill surface is assumed).
n. Evaluation Studies
Burns, D.J., L.H. Adams and S.G. Perry, 1990.
Testing and Evaluation of the
CTDMPLUS Dispersion Model: Daytime
Convective Conditions. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
Paumier, J.O., S.G. Perry and D.J. Burns,
1990. An Analysis of CTDMPLUS Model
Predictions with the Lovett Power Plant
Data Base. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Research Triangle
Park, NC.
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
Paumier, J.O., S.G. Perry and D.J. Burns,
1992. CTDMPLUS: A Dispersion Model
for Sources near Complex Topography.
Part II: Performance Characteristics.
Journal of Applied Meteorology, 31(7):
646–660.
A.3 OCD (Offshore and Coastal Dispersion)
Model
Reference
DiCristofaro, DC and S.R. Hanna, 1989. OCD:
The Offshore and Coastal Dispersion
Model, Version 4. Volume I: User’s
Guide, and Volume II: Appendices.
Sigma Research Corporation, Westford,
MA. (NTIS Nos. PB 93–144384 and PB
93–144392).
Availability
The model codes and associated
documentation are available on EPA’s
SCRAM website (paragraph A.0(3)).
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
Abstract
(1) OCD is a straight-line Gaussian model
developed to determine the impact of
offshore emissions from point, area or line
sources on the air quality of coastal regions.
OCD incorporates overwater plume transport
and dispersion as well as changes that occur
as the plume crosses the shoreline. Hourly
meteorological data are needed from both
offshore and onshore locations. These
include water surface temperature, overwater
air temperature, mixing height, and relative
humidity.
(2) Some of the key features include
platform building downwash, partial plume
penetration into elevated inversions, direct
use of turbulence intensities for plume
dispersion, interaction with the overland
internal boundary layer, and continuous
shoreline fumigation.
a. Regulatory Use
OCD is applicable for overwater sources
where onshore receptors are below the lowest
source height. Where onshore receptors are
above the lowest source height, offshore
plume transport and dispersion may be
modeled on a case-by-case basis in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
b. Input Requirements
(1) Source data: Point, area or line source
location, pollutant emission rate, building
height, stack height, stack gas temperature,
stack inside diameter, stack gas exit velocity,
stack angle from vertical, elevation of stack
base above water surface and gridded
specification of the land/water surfaces. As
an option, emission rate, stack gas exit
velocity and temperature can be varied
hourly.
(2) Meteorological data: PCRAMMET is the
recommended meteorological data
preprocessor for use in applications of OCD
employing hourly NWS data. MPRM is the
recommended meteorological data
preprocessor for applications of OCD
employing site-specific meteorological data
(i) Over land: Surface weather data
including hourly stability class, wind
direction, wind speed, ambient temperature,
and mixing height are required.
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
(ii) Over water: Hourly values for mixing
height, relative humidity, air temperature,
and water surface temperature are required;
if wind speed/direction are missing, values
over land will be used (if available); vertical
wind direction shear, vertical temperature
gradient, and turbulence intensities are
optional.
(3) Receptor data: Location, height above
local ground-level, ground-level elevation
above the water surface.
c. Output
(1) All input options, specification of
sources, receptors and land/water map
including locations of sources and receptors.
(2) Summary tables of five highest
concentrations at each receptor for each
averaging period, and average concentration
for entire run period at each receptor.
(3) Optional case study printout with
hourly plume and receptor characteristics.
Optional table of annual impact assessment
from non-permanent activities.
(4) Concentration output files can be used
by ANALYSIS postprocessor to produce the
highest concentrations for each receptor, the
cumulative frequency distributions for each
receptor, the tabulation of all concentrations
exceeding a given threshold, and the
manipulation of hourly concentration files.
d. Type of Model
OCD is a Gaussian plume model
constructed on the framework of the MPTER
model.
e. Pollutant Types
OCD may be used to model primary
pollutants. Settling and deposition are not
treated.
f. Source-Receptor Relationship
(1) Up to 250 point sources, 5 area sources,
or 1 line source and 180 receptors may be
used.
(2) Receptors and sources are allowed at
any location.
(3) The coastal configuration is determined
by a grid of up to 3600 rectangles. Each
element of the grid is designated as either
land or water to identify the coastline.
g. Plume Behavior
(1) The basic plume rise algorithms are
based on Briggs’ recommendations.
(2) Momentum rise includes consideration
of the stack angle from the vertical.
(3) The effect of drilling platforms, ships,
or any overwater obstructions near the source
are used to decrease plume rise using a
revised platform downwash algorithm based
on laboratory experiments.
(4) Partial plume penetration of elevated
inversions is included using the suggestions
of Briggs (1975) and Weil and Brower (1984).
(5) Continuous shoreline fumigation is
parameterized using the Turner method
where complete vertical mixing through the
thermal internal boundary layer (TIBL)
occurs as soon as the plume intercepts the
TIBL.
h. Horizontal Winds
(1) Constant, uniform wind is assumed for
each hour.
(2) Overwater wind speed can be estimated
from overland wind speed using relationship
of Hsu (1981).
PO 00000
Frm 00043
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4702
72867
(3) Wind speed profiles are estimated using
similarity theory (Businger, 1973). Surface
layer fluxes for these formulas are calculated
from bulk aerodynamic methods.
i. Vertical Wind Speed
Vertical wind speed is assumed equal to
zero.
j. Horizontal Dispersion
(1) Lateral turbulence intensity is
recommended as a direct estimate of
horizontal dispersion. If lateral turbulence
intensity is not available, it is estimated from
boundary layer theory. For wind speeds less
than 8 m/s, lateral turbulence intensity is
assumed inversely proportional to wind
speed.
(2) Horizontal dispersion may be enhanced
because of obstructions near the source. A
virtual source technique is used to simulate
the initial plume dilution due to downwash.
(3) Formulas recommended by Pasquill
(1976) are used to calculate buoyant plume
enhancement and wind direction shear
enhancement.
(4) At the water/land interface, the change
to overland dispersion rates is modeled using
a virtual source. The overland dispersion
rates can be calculated from either lateral
turbulence intensity or Pasquill-Gifford
curves. The change is implemented where
the plume intercepts the rising internal
boundary layer.
k. Vertical Dispersion
(1) Observed vertical turbulence intensity
is not recommended as a direct estimate of
vertical dispersion. Turbulence intensity
should be estimated from boundary layer
theory as default in the model. For very
stable conditions, vertical dispersion is also
a function of lapse rate.
(2) Vertical dispersion may be enhanced
because of obstructions near the source. A
virtual source technique is used to simulate
the initial plume dilution due to downwash.
(3) Formulas recommended by Pasquill
(1976) are used to calculate buoyant plume
enhancement.
(4) At the water/land interface, the change
to overland dispersion rates is modeled using
a virtual source. The overland dispersion
rates can be calculated from either vertical
turbulence intensity or the Pasquill-Gifford
coefficients. The change is implemented
where the plume intercepts the rising
internal boundary layer.
l. Chemical Transformation
Chemical transformations are treated using
exponential decay. Different rates can be
specified by month and by day or night.
m. Physical Removal
Physical removal is also treated using
exponential decay.
n. Evaluation Studies
DiCristofaro, D.C. and S.R. Hanna, 1989.
OCD: The Offshore and Coastal
Dispersion Model. Volume I: User’s
Guide. Sigma Research Corporation,
Westford, MA.
Hanna, S.R., L.L. Schulman, R.J. Paine and
J.E. Pleim, 1984. The Offshore and
Coastal Dispersion (OCD) Model User’s
Guide, Revised. OCS Study, MMS 84–
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
72868
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 / Proposed Rules
lotter on DSK11XQN23PROD with PROPOSALS2
0069. Environmental Research &
Technology, Inc., Concord, MA. (NTIS
No. PB 86–159803).
Hanna, S.R., L.L. Schulman, R.J. Paine, J.E.
Pleim and M. Baer, 1985. Development
and Evaluation of the Offshore and
VerDate Sep<11>2014
18:34 Oct 20, 2023
Jkt 262001
Coastal Dispersion (OCD) Model. Journal
of the Air Pollution Control Association,
35: 1039–1047.
Hanna, S.R. and D.C. DiCristofaro, 1988.
Development and Evaluation of the
OCD/API Model. Final Report, API Pub.
PO 00000
Frm 00044
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 9990
4461, American Petroleum Institute,
Washington, DC.
[FR Doc. 2023–22876 Filed 10–20–23; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 6560–50–P
E:\FR\FM\23OCP2.SGM
23OCP2
Agencies
[Federal Register Volume 88, Number 203 (Monday, October 23, 2023)]
[Proposed Rules]
[Pages 72826-72868]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 2023-22876]
[[Page 72825]]
Vol. 88
Monday,
No. 203
October 23, 2023
Part II
Environmental Protection Agency
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
40 CFR Part 51
Guideline on Air Quality Models; Enhancements to the AERMOD Dispersion
Modeling System; Proposed Rule
Federal Register / Vol. 88, No. 203 / Monday, October 23, 2023 /
Proposed Rules
[[Page 72826]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
40 CFR Part 51
[EPA-HQ-OAR-2022-0872; FRL-10391-01-OAR]
RIN 2060-AV92
Guideline on Air Quality Models; Enhancements to the AERMOD
Dispersion Modeling System
AGENCY: Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
ACTION: Proposed rule; notification of public hearing and conference.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: In this action, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
proposes to revise the Guideline on Air Quality Models (``Guideline'').
The Guideline has been incorporated into EPA's regulations, satisfying
a requirement under the Clean Air Act (CAA) section 165(e)(3)(D) for
the EPA to specify, with reasonable particularity, models to be used in
the Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) program. It provides
EPA-preferred models and other recommended techniques, as well as
guidance for their use in predicting ambient concentrations of air
pollutants. In this action, the EPA is proposing revisions to the
Guideline, including enhancements to the formulation and application of
the EPA's near-field dispersion modeling system, AERMOD, and updates to
the recommendations for the development of appropriate background
concentration for cumulative impact analyses. Within this action, the
EPA is also announcing the Thirteenth Conference on Air Quality
Modeling and invites the public to participate in the conference. The
conference will focus on the proposed revisions to the Guideline, and
part of the conference will also serve as the public hearing for these
revisions.
DATES: Comments must be received on or before December 22, 2023.
Public hearing and conference: The public hearing for this action
and the Thirteenth Conference on Air Quality Modeling will be held
November 14-15, 2023, from 8:30 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time
(EST).
ADDRESSES: Submit your comments, identified by Docket ID No. EPA-HQ-
OAR-2022-0872, by one of the following methods:
Federal eRulemaking Portal: https://www.regulations.gov.
Follow the online instructions for submitting comments.
Email: [email protected]. Include Docket ID No. EPA-
HQ-OAR-2022-0872 in the subject line of the message.
Fax: (202) 566-9744.
Mail: Environmental Protection Agency, EPA Docket Center,
Office of Air and Radiation Docket, Mail code 28221T, Attention Docket
No. EPA-HQ-OAR-2022-0872, 1200 Pennsylvania Ave. NW, Washington, DC
20460.
Hand/Courier Delivery: EPA Docket Center, Room 3334, EPA
WJC West Building, 1301 Constitution Ave. NW, Washington, DC. The
Docket Center's hours of operations are 8:30 a.m.-4:30 p.m., Monday-
Friday (except Federal Holidays).
Instructions: All submissions received must include the Docket ID
No. for this rulemaking. Comments received may be posted without change
to https://www.regulations.gov, including any personal information
provided. For detailed instructions on sending comments and additional
information on the rulemaking process, see the ``Public Participation''
heading of the SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION section of this document.
The public hearing will be held at 109 T.W. Alexander Drive,
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711. The hearing will convene
at 8:30 a.m. (local time) and will conclude at 5:00 p.m. (local time).
Refer to the SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION section below for additional
information.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Mr. George M. Bridgers, Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Air Quality Assessment Division, Air
Quality Modeling Group, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Mail code
C439-01, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711; telephone: (919) 541-5563;
email: [email protected]. (and include ``2023 Revisions to the
Guideline on Air Quality Models'' in the subject line of the message).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
The information in this preamble is organized as follows:
Table of Contents
I. General Information
A. Does this action apply to me?
B. Where can I get a copy of this document?
II. Background
A. The Guideline on Air Quality Models and EPA Modeling
Conferences
B. The Twelfth Conference on Air Quality Modeling
C. Alpha and Beta Categorization of Non-Regulatory Options
III. Public Participation
A. Written Comments
B. Notice of Public Hearing and the Thirteenth Conference on Air
Quality Models
IV. Proposed Revisions to the Guideline
A. Proposed Revisions
V. Ongoing Model Development
VI. Statutory and Executive Order Reviews
A. Executive Order 12866: Regulatory Planning and Review and
Executive Order 14094: Modernizing Regulatory Review
B. Paperwork Reduction Act (PRA)
C. Regulatory Flexibility Act (RFA)
D. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act (UMRA)
E. Executive Order 13132: Federalism
F. Executive Order 13175: Consultation and Coordination With
Indian Tribal Governments
G. Executive Order 13045: Protection of Children From
Environmental Health Risks and Safety Risks
H. Executive Order 13211: Actions Concerning Regulations That
Significantly Affect Energy Supply, Distribution, or Use
I. National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act
J. Executive Order 12898: Federal Actions To Address
Environmental Justice in Minority Populations and Low-Income
Populations
I. General Information
A. Does this action apply to me?
This action applies to Federal, State, territorial, and local air
quality management programs that conduct air quality modeling as part
of State Implementation Plan (SIP) submittals and revisions, New Source
Review (NSR), including new or modifying industrial sources under
Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD), Conformity, and other
air quality assessments required under EPA regulation. Categories and
entities potentially regulated by this action include:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NAICS \a\
Category code
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Federal/State/territorial/local/Tribal government........... 924110
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\a\ North American Industry Classification System.
B. Where can I get a copy of this document?
In addition to being available in the docket, an electronic copy of
this proposed rule and relative supporting documentation will also be
available on EPA's Support Center for Regulatory Atmospheric Modeling
(SCRAM) website. Following signature, these materials will be posted on
SCRAM at the following address: https://www.epa.gov/scram/13th-conference-air-quality-modeling.
II. Background
A. The Guideline on Air Quality Models and EPA Modeling Conferences
The Guideline is used by the EPA, other Federal, State,
territorial, and local
[[Page 72827]]
air quality agencies, and industry to prepare and review
preconstruction permit applications for new sources and modifications,
SIP submittals and revisions, determinations that actions by Federal
agencies are in conformity with SIPs, and other air quality assessments
required under EPA regulation. The Guideline serves as a means by which
national consistency is maintained in air quality analyses for
regulatory activities under CAA regulations, including 40 CFR 51.112,
51.117, 51.150, 51.160, 51.165, 51.166, 52.21, 93.116, 93.123, and
93.150.
The EPA originally published the Guideline in April 1978 (EPA-450/
2-78-027), and it was incorporated by reference in the regulations for
the PSD program in June 1978. The EPA revised the Guideline in 1986 (51
FR 32176) and updated it with supplement A in 1987 (53 FR 32081),
supplement B in July 1993 (58 FR 38816), and supplement C in August
1995 (60 FR 40465). The EPA published the Guideline as Appendix W to 40
CFR part 51 when the EPA issued supplement B. The EPA republished the
Guideline in August 1996 (61 FR 41838) to adopt the CFR system for
labeling paragraphs. The publication and incorporation of the Guideline
by reference into the EPA's PSD regulations satisfies the requirement
under the CAA section 165(e)(3)(D) for the EPA to promulgate
regulations that specify with reasonable particularity models to be
used under specified sets of conditions for purposes of the PSD
program.
To support the process of developing and revising the Guideline
during the period of 1977 to 1988, we held the First, Second, and Third
Conferences on Air Quality Modeling as required by CAA section 320 to
help standardize modeling procedures. These modeling conferences
provided a forum for comments on the Guideline and associated
revisions, thereby helping us introduce improved modeling techniques
into the regulatory process. Between 1988 and 1995, we conducted the
Fourth, Fifth, and Sixth Conferences on Air Quality Modeling to solicit
comments from the stakeholder community to guide our consideration of
further revisions to the Guideline, update the available modeling tools
based on the current state-of-the-science, and advise the public on new
modeling techniques.
The Seventh Conference was held in June 2000 and also served as a
public hearing for the proposed revisions to the recommended air
quality models in the Guideline (65 FR 21506). These changes included
the CALPUFF modeling system, AERMOD Modeling System, and ISC-PRIME
model. Subsequently, the EPA revised the Guideline on April 15, 2003
(68 FR 18440), to adopt CALPUFF as the preferred model for long-range
transport of emissions from 50 to several hundred kilometers and to
make various editorial changes to update and reorganize information and
remove obsolete models.
We held the Eighth Conference on Air Quality Modeling in September
2005. This conference provided details on changes to the preferred air
quality models, including available methods for model performance
evaluation and the notice of data availability that the EPA published
in September 2003, related to the incorporation of the PRIME downwash
algorithm in the AERMOD dispersion model (in response to comments
received from the Seventh Conference). Additionally, at the Eighth
Conference, a panel of experts discussed the use of state-of-the-
science prognostic meteorological data for informing the dispersion
models. The EPA further revised the Guideline on November 9, 2005 (70
FR 68218), to adopt AERMOD as the preferred model for near-field
dispersion of emissions for distances up to 50 kilometers.
The Ninth Conference on Air Quality Modeling was held in October
2008 and emphasized the following topics: reinstituting the Model
Clearinghouse, review of non-guideline applications of dispersion
models, regulatory status updates of AERMOD and CALPUFF, continued
discussions on the use of prognostic meteorological data for informing
dispersion models, and presentations reviewing the available model
evaluation methods. To further inform the development of additional
revisions to the Guideline, we held the Tenth Conference on Air Quality
Modeling in March 2012. The conference addressed updates on: the
regulatory status and future development of AERMOD and CALPUFF, review
of the Mesoscale Model Interface (MMIF) prognostic meteorological data
processing tool for dispersion models, draft modeling guidance for
compliance demonstrations of the fine particulate matter
(PM2.5) National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS),
modeling for compliance demonstration of the 1-hour nitrogen dioxide
(NO2) and sulfur dioxide (SO2) NAAQS, and new and
emerging models/techniques for future consideration under the Guideline
to address single-source modeling for ozone and secondary
PM2.5, as well as long-range transport and chemistry.
The Eleventh Conference on Air Quality Modeling was held August 12-
13, 2015, and included the public hearing for the most recently
proposed version of the Guideline. The conference included
presentations summarizing the proposed updates to the AERMOD Modeling
System, replacement of CALINE3 with AERMOD for modeling of mobile
sources, incorporation of prognostic meteorological data for use in
dispersion modeling, the proposed screening approach for long-range
transport for NAAQS and PSD increments assessments with use of CALPUFF
as a screening technique rather than an EPA-preferred model, the
proposed 2-tiered screening approach to address ozone and
PM2.5 in PSD compliance demonstrations, the status and role
of the Model Clearinghouse, and updates to procedures for single-source
and cumulative modeling analyses (e.g., modeling domain, source input
data, background data, and compliance demonstration procedures).
Additionally, the 2015 proposed action included a reorganization of
the Guideline to make it easier to use and to streamline the compliance
assessment process (80 FR 45340), and also included additional clarity
in distinguishing requirements from recommendations while noting the
continued flexibilities provided within the Guideline, including but
not limited to use and approval of alternative models (82 FR at 45344).
These proposed revisions were adopted and reflected in the latest
version of the Guideline, promulgated on January 17, 2017 (82 FR 5182).
B. The Twelfth Conference on Air Quality Modeling
The most recent EPA modeling conference was the Twelfth Conference
on Air Quality Modeling, which was held in August 2019 in continuing
compliance with CAA section 320. While not associated with a regulatory
action, the Twelfth Conference was held with the intent to inform the
ongoing development of EPA's preferred air quality models and potential
revisions to the Guideline. The conference included expert panel
discussions and invited presentations covering the following model/
technique enhancements: treatment of low wind conditions, overwater
modeling, mobile source modeling, building downwash, prognostic
meteorological data, near-field and long-range model evaluation
criteria, NO2 modeling techniques, plume rise, deposition,
and single source ozone and PM2.5 modeling techniques. At
the conclusion of the expert panels and invited presentations, there
were several presentations given by the public, including industrial
trade groups, on recommended areas for additional model development and
[[Page 72828]]
future revision in the Guideline. The proposed regulatory updates to
the AERMOD Modeling System in this action address topics on which there
was focused discussion and engagement with the stakeholder community
through these expert panels and invited and public presentations during
the Twelfth Conference.
All the presentations, along with the transcript of the conference
proceedings, are available in the docket for the Twelfth Conference on
Air Quality Models (Docket ID No. EPA-HQ-OAR-2019-0454). Additionally,
all the materials associated with the Twelfth Conference and the public
hearing are available on the EPA's SCRAM website at https://www.epa.gov/scram/12th-conference-air-quality-modeling.
C. Alpha and Beta Categorization of Non-Regulatory Options
With the release of AERMOD version 18181 in 2018, the EPA adopted a
new paradigm for engagement with the scientific community to facilitate
the continued development of the AERMOD Modeling System. Previously,
updates to the scientific formulation of the model were not made
available to the public for review, testing, evaluation, and comment
prior to the proposal stage of the formal rulemaking process when an
update was made to the Guideline. This limited the public's engagement
and feedback to a short, predefined comment period, typically only one
to two months. The new approach enables the EPA to release potential
formulation updates as non-regulatory ``alpha'' and ``beta'' options as
they are being developed. As non-regulatory options, they can be made
available during any release cycle, thereby enabling feedback as they
are being developed. This approach allows for more robust testing and
evaluation during development, benefitting from the experience of a
broad expert community. In addition, the EPA developed a protocol to
enable the external community to submit model updates to the EPA for
review and consideration for inclusion as new alpha or beta options. A
pathway such as this that facilitates more frequent and active
engagement with the external community allows for a more informed and
timely regulatory update process when the EPA has determined an update
has met the criteria required for consideration as a science
formulation update to the regulatory version of the model.
In this alpha/beta construct, alpha options are updates to the
scientific formulation that are thought to have merit but are
considered experimental, still in the research and development stage.
Alpha options have not yet been fully tested, evaluated, or vetted
through peer review and should not be considered for use as an
alternative model for regulatory applications of the model.
Beta options, on the other hand, have been demonstrated to be
applicable on a theoretical basis, have undergone scientific peer
review, and are supported with performance evaluations using available
and adequate databases that demonstrate unbiased, improved model
performance. In general, beta options have met the necessary criteria
to be formally proposed and adopted as updates to the regulatory
version of the model but have not yet been proposed through the
required rulemaking process, which includes a public hearing and formal
comment period. Beta options are mature enough in the development
process to be considered for use as an alternative model, provided an
appropriate site-specific modeling demonstration is completed to show
the alternative model is appropriate for the site and conditions where
it will be applied and the requirements of the Guideline, section 3.2,
are fully satisfied, including formal concurrence by the EPA's Model
Clearinghouse.
III. Public Participation
Interested persons may provide the EPA with their views on the
proposed revisions to the Guideline in several ways. This includes
submitting written comments to the EPA, participating in the Thirteenth
Conference on Air Quality Modeling, and speaking at the public hearing
that will be conducted as part of the conference. Additional
information on where to submit written comments on the proposed
revisions to the Guideline is provided in the ADDRESSES section above.
A. Written Comments
Submit your comments, identified by Docket ID No. EPA-HQ-OAR-2022-
0872, at https://www.regulations.gov (our preferred method), or the
other methods identified in the ADDRESSES section. Once submitted,
comments cannot be edited or removed from the docket. The EPA may
publish any comment received to its public docket. Do not submit to
EPA's docket at https://www.regulations.gov any information you
consider to be Confidential Business Information (CBI), Proprietary
Business Information (PBI), or other information whose disclosure is
restricted by statute. Multimedia submissions (audio, video, etc.) must
be accompanied by a written comment. The written comment is considered
the official comment and should include discussion of all points you
wish to make. The EPA will generally not consider comments or comment
contents located outside of the primary submission (i.e., on the web,
cloud, or other file sharing system). Please visit https://www.epa.gov/dockets/commenting-epa-dockets for additional submission methods; the
full EPA public comment policy; information about CBI, PBI, or
multimedia submissions; and general guidance on making effective
comments.
B. Notice of Public Hearing and the Thirteenth Conference on Air
Quality Models
The public hearing for this action and the Thirteenth Conference on
Air Quality Modeling will be held on November 14-15, 2023, in the EPA
Nantahala Auditorium, Room C111, 109 T.W. Alexander Drive, Research
Triangle Park, NC 27711. The hearing and conference will convene each
day at 8:30 a.m. EST and will conclude at 5:00 p.m. EST.
The Thirteenth Conference on Air Quality Modeling will be open to
the public. No registration fee is charged. The conference will be
formally conducted and chaired by an EPA official. As required under
CAA section 320, a verbatim transcript of the conference proceedings
will be produced and placed in the docket for this proposed action. The
conference will begin with introductory remarks by the presiding EPA
official. The EPA staff and EPA invited speakers will then provide a
structured overview of the revisions to the Guideline as proposed in
this document and present on the research that supports those revisions
and supports formulation updates to the preferred models. The following
topics will be presented:
I. Overview of the Thirteenth Conference on Air Quality
Modeling;
II. Review of the proposed revisions to the preferred air
quality models; and
III. Review of the proposed revisions to the Guideline.
At the conclusion of these presentations, the EPA will convene the
public hearing on the proposed revisions to the Guideline. The public
hearing will span a portion of the afternoon of the first day and
throughout the second day of the conference. The EPA will make every
effort to follow the schedule as closely as possible on the days of the
conference; however, please plan for the public hearing to run either
ahead of schedule or behind schedule. The EPA may close the hearing 15
minutes after
[[Page 72829]]
the last pre-registered speaker has testified on November 15, if there
are no additional speakers.
Those wishing to reserve time to speak at the public hearing,
whether to offer specific comments on the proposed rule, volunteer a
presentation on a special topic, or to offer recommendations on any
regulatory modeling techniques, should contact us at the address given
in the FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT section by no later than
November 10, 2023. Such persons should identify the organization (if
any) on whose behalf they are speaking and the length of the
presentation. If a scheduled presentation is projected to be longer
than 10 minutes, the presenter should also state why a longer period is
needed. Scheduled speakers should bring extra copies of their
presentation for inclusion in the docket and for the convenience of the
recorder. Scheduled speakers will also be permitted to enter additional
written comments into the record.
Any person in attendance wishing to speak at the public hearing who
has not reserved time in advance may provide oral comments on the
proposed revisions to the Guideline during time allotted on the last
day. These parties will need to sign up to speak on the second day of
the hearing, and the EPA may need to limit the duration of
presentations to allow all participants to be heard.
The EPA may ask clarifying questions during the oral presentations
but will not respond to the presentations at that time. Information
submitted to the EPA during the public hearing will be placed in the
docket for this proposed action. Written statements and supporting
information submitted during the comment period will be considered with
the same weight as oral testimony and supporting information presented
at the public hearing.
Conference background information. Preregistration details,
additional background information, and a more detailed agenda for the
Thirteenth Conference on Air Quality Modeling are electronically
available at https://www.epa.gov/scram/13th-conference-air-quality-modeling. Preregistration for the conference, while not required, is
strongly recommended due to heightened security protocols at the EPA-
RTP facility.
Access to U.S. government facility. Because this hearing is being
held at a U.S. government facility, individuals planning to attend the
conference and/or public hearing should be prepared to show valid
picture identification to the security staff in order to gain access to
the meeting room. Please note that the REAL ID Act, passed by Congress
in 2005, established new requirements for entering Federal facilities.
For purposes of the REAL ID Act, EPA will accept government-issued IDs,
including drivers' licenses, from the District of Columbia and all
States and territories except from American Samoa. If your
identification is issued by American Samoa, you must present an
additional form of identification to enter the Federal building where
the public hearing will be held. Acceptable alternative forms of
identification include Federal employee badges, passports, enhanced
driver's licenses, and military identification cards. For additional
information for the status of your State regarding REAL ID, go to:
https://www.dhs.gov/real-id-enforcement-brieffrequently-asked-questions. Any objects brought into the building need to fit through
the security screening system, such as a purse, laptop bag, or small
backpack. Demonstrations will not be allowed on Federal property for
security reasons. Attendees are encouraged to arrive at least 15
minutes prior to the start of the meeting to allow enough time for
security screening.
IV. Proposed Revisions to the Guideline
In this action, the EPA is proposing updates to the Guideline
corresponding to updates to the scientific formulation of the AERMOD
Modeling System and updates to the recommendations for the development
of appropriate background concentration for cumulative impact analyses.
When and where appropriate, the EPA has engaged with our Federal
partners, including the Bureau of Ocean Energy Management (BOEM) and
the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), to collaborate on these
proposed updates to the Guideline. There are additional editorial
changes proposed to the Guideline to correct minor typographical errors
found in the 2017 Guideline and update website links.
A. Proposed Revisions
This section provides a detailed overview of the substantive
proposed changes to the Guideline that are intended to improve the
science of the models and approaches used in regulatory assessments.
1. Proposed Updates to EPA's AERMOD Modeling System
Based on studies presented and discussed at the Twelfth Conference
on Air Quality Models held on October 2-3, 2019,\1\ and additional
relevant research since 2017, the EPA and other researchers have
conducted additional model evaluations and developed changes to the
model formulation of the AERMOD Modeling System to improve model
performance in its regulatory applications. One update is to the AERMET
meteorological preprocessor for AERMOD. This update provides the
capability to process measured and prognostic marine-based meteorology
for offshore applications. Separate updates are related to the AERMOD
dispersion model and include (1) a new Tier 3 screening method for the
conversion of nitrogen oxides (NOX) emissions to
NO2 and (2) a new source type for modeling vehicle roadway
emissions.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ https://www.epa.gov/scram/12th-conference-air-quality-modeling.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Each of the proposed formulation updates to the AERMOD Modeling
System is provided as a non-regulatory beta option in the release of
the relevant modeling system components that is occurring concurrent
with this proposed rule. If EPA adopts these formulation updates in a
subsequent final rule, the beta categorization would be removed and the
respective model option(s) could be considered regulatory model
options.
The EPA proposes the following updates to the AERMOD Modeling
System to address several technical concerns expressed by stakeholders:
a. Incorporation of COARE Algorithms Into AERMET for Use in Overwater
Marine Boundary Layer Environments
As the number of overwater applications has increased in recent
years, the EPA is proposing to add the Coupled Ocean-Atmosphere
Response Experiment (COARE) 2 3 algorithms to AERMET for
meteorological data processing in applications using either observed or
prognostic meteorological data in overwater marine boundary layer
environments. One of the first notable uses of AERMOD for an overwater
application was an alternative model application--AERMOD-COARE was used
in 2011 in an ice-free arctic environment of Alaska.4 5 In
this
[[Page 72830]]
application, the incorporation of the COARE bulk flux algorithm was
used as an alternative to the AERMET meteorological processor to
AERMOD. This led to the development of the AERCOARE \6\ processor that
can be used with either measured or prognostic data for overwater
applications in lieu of AERMET. AERCOARE has been approved as an
alternative model for several overwater applications since 2011.\7\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\2\ Fairall, C.W., E.F. Bradley, J.E. Hare, A.A. Grachev, and
J.B. Edson, 2003: ``Bulk Parameterization of Air-Sea Fluxes: Updates
and Verification for the COARE Algorithm.'' Journal of Climate, 16,
571-591.
\3\ Evaluation of the Implementation of the Coupled Ocean-
Atmosphere Response Experiment (COARE) algorithms into AERMET for
Boundary Layer Environments. EPA-2023/R-23-008, Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, RTP, NC.
\4\ U.S. EPA, 2011: COARE Bulk Flux Algorithm to Generate Hourly
Meteorological Data for Use with the AERMOD dispersion program;
Section 3.2.2.e Alternative Refined Model Demonstration Herman Wong
Memorandum dated April 1, 2011, Office of Environmental Assessment,
Region 10, Seattle, Washington 98101.
\5\ U.S. EPA, 2011: Model Clearinghouse Review AERMOD-COARE as
an Alternative Model in an Arctic Ice Free Environment. George
Bridgers Memorandum dated May 6, 2011, Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
27711.
\6\ U.S. EPA, 2012: User's Manual AERCOARE Version 1.0. EPA-910-
R-12-008. U.S. EPA, Region 10, Seattle, WA.
\7\ Please reference the EPA Model Clearinghouse Information
Storage and Retrieval System (MCHISRS) database for more information
regarding AERCOARE alternative model approvals (https://cfpub.epa.gov/oarweb/MCHISRS, text Search term ``AERCOARE'').
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
For overwater applications, the algorithms in COARE are better
suited for overwater boundary layer calculations than the existing
algorithms in AERMET that are better suited for land-based data. These
calculations include calculation of surface roughness, stability
classification, effects of moisture on Monin-Obukhov length, and the
use of Bowen ratio by AERMET for heat flux calculations.\5\ The EPA
proposes to add COARE to AERMET in order to ensure that the COARE
algorithms are updated regularly as part of routine AERMET updates, to
provide consistent data handling among land based and overwater based
meteorological data (e.g., treatment of missing data and treatment of
calms), and to have all meteorological processing for AERMOD
applications in one program.
The addition of the COARE algorithms to AERMET would replace the
standalone AERCOARE program and the AERCOARE output option in MMIF for
prognostic data overwater. This proposed option is selected by the user
with the METHOD COARE RUN-COARE record in the AERMET Stage 2 input
file. For prognostic applications processed through the MMIF, the user
can run MMIF for AERMET input for overwater applications.
The addition of COARE to AERMET would eliminate the previous
alternative model demonstration requirements for use of AERMOD in
marine environments, and this elimination is contingent upon
consultation with the EPA Regional Office and appropriate reviewing
authority. This consultation will ensure that platform downwash and
shoreline fumigation are adequately considered in the modeling
demonstration.
b. Proposed Addition of a New Tier 3 Detailed Screening Technique for
NO2
Section 4.2.3.4 of the 2017 Guideline details a 3-tiered approach
for evaluating the modeled impacts of NOX sources, which was
recommended to assess hourly and annual average NO2 impacts
from point, volume, and area sources for the purposes of the PSD
program, SIP planning, and transportation general conformity. This 3-
tiered approach addresses the co-emissions of NO and NO2 and
the subsequent conversion of NO to NO2 in the atmosphere.
The tiered levels include:
Tier 1--assuming that all emitted NO is converted to NO2
(full conversion).
Tier 2--using the Ambient Ratio Method 2 (ARM2), which applies an
assumed equilibrium ratio of NO2 to NOX, based on
analysis of and correlation with nationwide hourly observed ambient
conditions.
Tier 3--applying the Ozone Limiting Method (OLM) and Plume Volume
Molar Ratio (PVMRM) screening options based on site-specific hourly
ozone data and source-specific NO2 to NOX in-
stack ratios.8 9 10 11
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\8\ Podrez, M. 2015. An Update to the Ambient Ratio Method for
1-h NO2 Air Quality Standards Dispersion Modeling.
Atmospheric Environment, 103: 163-170.
\9\ Cole, H.S. and J.E. Summerhays, 1979. A Review of Techniques
Available for Estimation of Short-Term NO2
Concentrations. Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association,
29(8): 812-817.
\10\ Hanrahan, P.L., 1999. The Polar Volume Polar Ratio Method
for Determining NO2/NOX Ratios in Modeling--
Part I: Methodology. Journal of the Air & Waste Management
Association, 49: 1324-1331.
\11\ Chu, S.H. and E.L. Meyer, 1991. Use of Ambient Ratios to
Estimate Impact of NOX Sources on Annual NO2
Concentrations. Proceedings, 84th Annual Meeting & Exhibition of the
Air & Waste Management Association, Vancouver, B.C.; 16-21 June
1991. (16pp.) (Docket No. A-92-65, II-A-9).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
As further discussed in section 4.2.3.4(e) of the Guideline,
regulatory application of Tier 3 screening options shall occur in
consultation with the EPA Regional Office and appropriate reviewing
authority.
The EPA proposes to include the Generic Reaction Set Method (GRSM)
as a regulatory non-default Tier 3 NO2 screening option.
Following a peer-reviewed publication in 2017, GRSM was added to AERMOD
as an alpha option in version 21112 and updated as a beta option in
version 22112.\12\ The primary motivation behind the formulation and
development of the GRSM NO2 screening option was to address
photolytic conversion of NO2 to NO and to address the time-
of-travel necessary for NOX plumes to convert the NO portion
of the plume to NO2 via titration and entrainment of ambient
ozone. The existing regulatory non-default Tier 3 NO2
screening options, PVMRM and OLM, do not address or provide for
treatment of these mechanisms, and have been shown to over-predict for
some source characterizations and model configurations at project
source ambient air boundaries and within the first 1-3 km.\13\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\12\ David J. Carruthers, Jenny R. Stocker, Andrew Ellis, Martin
D. Seaton & Stephen E. Smith (2017) Evaluation of an explicit
NOX chemistry method in AERMOD, Journal of the Air &
Waste Management Association, 67:6, 702-712, DOI: 10.1080/
10962247.2017.1280096.
\13\ Jenny Stocker, Martin Seaton, Stephen Smith, James O'Neill,
Kate Johnson, Rose Jackson, David Carruthers (CERC). Evaluation of
the Generic Reaction Set Method for NO2 conversion in
AERMOD. The modification of AERMOD to include ADMS chemistry. August
8, 2023. Cambridge Environmental Research Consultants (CERC)
Technical Report.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The functionality of the GRSM implementation in AERMOD is similar
to that of the PVMRM and OLM schemes, with exception to some additional
input requirements necessary for treatment of the reverse
NO2 photolysis reaction during daytime hours. Modeled source
inputs for GRSM require NO2/NOX in-stack ratios,
with similar assumptions as applied to PVMRM and OLM according to
section 4.2.3.4 of the Guideline. Ambient inputs for GRSM require
hourly ozone concentrations taken from an appropriately representative
monitoring station or selection of monitoring stations for varying
upwind sector concentrations. GRSM also requires hourly NOX
concentration inputs to resolve the daytime photolysis of
NO2 reaction in equilibrium with ozone titration conversion
of the NO portion of the NOX plume. GRSM hourly
NOX concentration inputs can also vary by upwind sector
concentration, as appropriate. Background NO2 concentrations
are accounted for in the GRSM daytime equilibrium NO2
concentration estimates based on the chemical reaction balance between
ozone entrainment and NO titration, photolysis of NO2 to NO,
and ambient background NO2 participation in titration and
photolysis reactions. Nighttime GRSM NO2 estimates are based
on ozone entrainment and titration of available NO in the
NOX plume. Note that all hourly ozone and NOX
ambient inputs to GRSM must coincide with the hourly meteorological
[[Page 72831]]
data records for the period of the modeling analysis (i.e., minimum of
1 year for on-site data, 3 years of prognostic data, and 5 years of
airport data).
Updates to the GRSM formulation in AERMOD version 22112 were
developed in late 2022 to address more realistic building effects on
instantaneous plume spread, accounting of multiple plume effects on
entrainment of ozone, and the tendency of GRSM to over-predict in the
far-field (e.g., beyond approximately 3 km for typical point source
releases). Sensitivity testing and model performance evaluations of
these updates to GRSM in AERMOD version 23132 have shown consistent or
improved model behavior and performance.\14\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\14\ Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. Technical Support
Document (TSD) for Adoption of the Generic Reaction Set Method
(GRSM) as a Regulatory Non-Default Tier-3 NO2 Screening Option,
Publication No. EPA-454/R-23-009. Office of Air Quality Planning &
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
c. Proposed Addition of RLINE as Mobile Source Type
As a culmination of an Interagency Agreement between EPA and FHWA,
the EPA proposes to add the RLINE source type as a new source type
applicable for regulatory modeling of mobile sources. This is in
addition to the AREA, LINE, and VOLUME source types already available
for mobile source modeling. The proposed addition of RLINE as a mobile
source type is an extension of the 2017 update to the Guideline in
which AERMOD replaced CALINE3 as the addendum A \15\ model for mobile
source modeling. At that time, AERMOD's AREA, LINE, and VOLUME sources
were available for mobile source modeling. The basis of the RLINE
source type is the EPA's Office of Research and Development (ORD)
Research LINE (RLINE) model \16\ released in 2013. The RLINE model was
designed for near-surface releases to simulate mobile source dispersion
with an emphasis on the near-road environment. The RLINE model was
first incorporated into AERMOD as a beta source type in AERMOD version
19191 in 2019.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\15\ Under the codification requirements of the Administrative
Committee of the Federal Register (ACFR), only subparts, parts,
subchapters, and chapters may have appendices. Therefore, we have
changed the naming convention from ``appendix A'' to ``addendum A''.
\16\ Snyder, M.G., Venkatram, A., Heist, D.K., Perry, S.G.,
Petersen, W.B. and Isakov, V., 2013. RLINE: A line source dispersion
model for near-surface releases. Atmospheric environment, 77,
pp.748-756.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The RLINE source type for this proposed action has undergone
significant evaluation by the EPA and the FHWA as part of the
Interagency Agreement and has shown improved
performance.17 18 This proposed option is selected by the
model user with the SOURCE type ``RLINE''. In addition to proposing
RLINE as a new source type, the EPA is also proposing the use of the
AERMOD urban option (accounting for urban heat island effect in stable
conditions) and terrain with the RLINE source type. However, the
inclusion of terrain with RLINE does not supersede the EPA's PM Hot-
spot guidance where FLAT terrain is recommended for modeling
applications.\19\ The EPA also emphasizes that the inclusion of RLINE
as a source type for mobile source modeling does not preclude the use
of the existing AREA, LINE, and VOLUME source types thereby extending
the flexibility of users in best characterizing mobile source for
regulatory modeling.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\17\ Incorporation and Evaluation of the RLINE source type in
AERMOD for Mobile Source Applications. EPA-2023/R-23-011, Office of
Air Quality Planning and Standards, RTP, NC.
\18\ Heist, D., et al., 2023. Integration of RLINE dispersion
model into EPA's AERMOD: updated formulation and evaluations.
Journal of the Air & Waste Management Association, Manuscript
submitted for publication.
\19\ U.S. EPA, 2021: PM Hot-spot Guidance; Transportation
Conformity Guidance for Quantitative Hot-spot Analyses in
PM2.5 and PM10 Nonattainment and Maintenance
Areas. EPA-42-B-21-037. U.S. EPA, Office of Transportation and Air
Quality, Ann Arbor, MI.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
d. Support Information, Documentation, and Model Code
Model performance evaluation and peer-reviewed scientific
references for each of these three proposed updates to the AERMOD
Modeling System are cited and placed in the docket, as appropriate. An
updated user's guide and model formulation documents for version 23132
have also been placed in the docket. We have updated the summary
description of the AERMOD Modeling System to addendum A of the
Guideline to reflect these proposed updates. The essential codes,
preprocessors, and test cases have been updated and posted to the EPA's
SCRAM website, https://www.epa.gov/scram.
2. Proposed Updates to Recommendations on the Development of Background
Concentration
Based on permit modeling experiences since the 2017 revisions to
the Guideline, the EPA proposes revisions to section 8 of the Guideline
to refine the recommendations regarding the determination of
appropriate model input data, specifically background concentration,
for use in NAAQS implementation modeling demonstrations (e.g., PSD
compliance demonstrations, SIP demonstrations for inert pollutants, and
SO2 designations). The Guideline recommends that a
representative background concentration should include contributions
from all sources, including both nearby and other sources. When
identifying nearby sources that may not be adequately represented by
ambient monitoring data, the Guideline recommends selecting sources
``that cause a significant concentration gradient in the vicinity of
the source(s) under consideration.'' The EPA recognizes that the
recommended method for identifying nearby sources lacks specificity, is
used and referenced inconsistently, and may lead to overly conservative
modeling exercises. The proposed revisions to section 8 are intended to
provide a more robust framework for characterizing background
concentrations for cumulative modeling with particular attention to
identifying and modeling nearby sources in multi-source areas.
The EPA proposes to revise recommendations for the determination of
background concentrations in constructing the design concentration, or
total air quality concentration in multi-source areas (see section
8.3), as part of a cumulative impact analysis for NAAQS implementation
modeling demonstrations. The EPA's proposed framework includes a
stepwise set of considerations to replace the narrow recommendation of
modeling nearby sources that cause a significant concentration
gradient. This framework focuses the inherent discretion in defining
representative background concentrations through qualitative and semi-
quantitative considerations within a transparent process using the
variety of emissions and air quality data available to the permit
applicant. To construct a background concentration for model input
under the framework, permit applicants should consider the
representativeness of relevant emissions, air quality monitoring, and
pre-exiting air quality modeling to appropriately represent background
concentrations for the cumulative impact analysis.
In conjunction with the proposed revisions to section 8 of the
Guideline, the EPA developed the Draft Guidance on Developing
Background Concentrations for Use in Modeling Demonstrations.\20\ This
draft guidance
[[Page 72832]]
document details the EPA-recommended framework with illustrative
examples to assist permit applicants in characterizing a credible and
appropriately representative background concentration for cumulative
impact analyses including the contributions from nearby sources in
multi-source areas.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\20\ U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. Draft Guidance
on Developing Background Concentrations for Use in Modeling
Demonstrations. Publication No. EPA-454/P-23-001. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Transition Period for Applicability of Revisions to the Guideline
In previous rulemakings to revise the Guideline, we have
traditionally communicated that it would be appropriate to provide 1-
year to transition to the use of new models, techniques and procedures
in the context of PSD permit applications and other regulatory modeling
applications. We invite comments whether it would be appropriate to
apply a 1-year transition after promulgation of the revised Guideline
(i.e., from its effective date) such that applications conducted under
the existing Guideline with approved protocols would be acceptable
during that period, but new requirements and recommendations should be
used for applications submitted after that period or protocols approved
after that period.
Such a transition period is consistent with previous revisions to
the Guideline and appropriate to avoid the time and expense of
revisiting modeling that is substantially complete, which would cause
undue delays to permit applications that are pending when the proposed
revisions to the Guideline are finalized. The proposed revisions to the
Guideline are intended as incremental improvements to the Guideline,
and such improvements do not necessarily invalidate past practices
under the previous editions of the Guideline. The requirements and
recommendations in the existing (2017) version of the Guideline were
previously identified as acceptable by the EPA, and they will continue
to be acceptable for air quality assessments during the period of
transition to the revised version of the Guideline, if finalized.
Where a proposed revision to the Guideline does raise questions
about the acceptability of a requirement or recommendation that it
replaces, model users and applicants are encouraged to consult with the
appropriate reviewing authority as soon as possible to assure the
acceptability of modeling used to support permit applications during
this period.
4. Proposed Revisions by Section
a. Section 1.0--Introduction
The EPA proposes to correct paragraph (i) by combining the
inadvertently created paragraph (A), which is actually part of the
phrase ``addendum A'' in the first sentence.
b. Section 3.0--Preferred and Alternative Air Quality Models
The EPA proposes to revise an outdated website link in section
3.0(b).
In sections 3.1.1(c) and 3.1.2(a), the EPA proposes to correct the
sections by combining the inadvertently created paragraph (A), which is
actually part of the phrase ``addendum A'' in the first sentence.
c. Section 4.0--Models for Carbon Monoxide, Lead, Sulfur Dioxide,
Nitrogen Dioxide and Primary Particulate Matter
The EPA proposes to update reference numbers where necessary due to
added references.
In sections 4.1(b) and 4.2.2(a), the EPA proposes to correct the
sections by combining the inadvertently created paragraph (A), which is
actually part of the phrase ``addendum A'' in the first sentence.
In section 4.2.2.1, the EPA proposes to add a new paragraph (f)
regarding the use of AERMOD in certain overwater situations. A
typographical correction is proposed in section 4.2.2.1(b).
The EPA proposes amendments to section 4.2.2.3 to account for
circumstances where OCD is available to evaluate situations where
shoreline fumigation and/or platform downwash are important.
In section 4.2.3.4, the EPA proposes to revise paragraph (e) to
adopt the Generic Reaction Set Method (GRSM) as a regulatory Tier 3
detailed screening technique for NO2 modeling
demonstrations. Sentences in this section would be updated to
incorporate GRSM with the existing regulatory Tier 3 screening
techniques OLM and PVMRM. An additional statement is proposed
indicating GRSM model performance may be better than OLM and PVMRM
under certain source characterization situations. The EPA also proposes
to add two references to the section including one for the peer-
reviewed paper on development and evaluation of GRSM, and a second
reference to the EPA Technical Support Document (TSD) on GRSM.
The EPA proposes to revise Table 4-1 in section 4.2.3.4(f) to
include GRSM as a Tier 3 detailed screening option.
d. Section 5.0--Models for Ozone and Secondarily Formed Particulate
Matter
The EPA proposes to update reference numbers where necessary due to
added references. In section 5.2, the EPA proposes to revise paragraph
(c) to include a reference for guidance on the use of models to assess
the impacts of emissions from single sources on secondarily formed
ozone and PM2.5.
e. Section 6.0--Modeling for Air Quality Related Values and Other
Governmental Programs
The EPA proposes to update reference numbers where necessary due to
added references and revise an outdated website link in section 6.3(a).
f. Section 7.0--General Modeling Considerations
The EPA proposes to update reference numbers where necessary due to
added references.
In section 7.2.3, the EPA proposes to revise paragraph (b) to
include the addition of RLINE as a source type for use in regulatory
applications of AERMOD and remove references to specific distances that
receptors can be placed from the roadway.
Also in section 7.2.3, the EPA proposes to revise paragraph (c) to
include RLINE as a source type that can be used to model mobile sources
and clarify that an area source can be categorized in AERMOD using the
AREA, LINE, or RLINE source type.
g. Section 8.0--Model Input Data
The EPA proposes to update reference numbers where necessary due to
added references.
The EPA proposes to revise Table 8-1 and Table 8-2 to correct
typographical errors and update the footnotes in each of the tables.
The EPA proposes to revise section 8.3.1 to address current EPA
practices and recommendations for determining the appropriate
background concentration as model input data for a new or modifying
source(s) or sources under consideration for a revised permit limit.
This revision would provide a stepwise framework for modeling isolated
single sources and multi-source areas as part of a cumulative impact
analysis. The EPA also proposes to remove the term ``significant
concentration gradient'' and its related content in section 8.3.1(a)(i)
due to the ambiguity and lack of definition of this term in the context
of modeling multi-source areas.
The EPA proposes to remove paragraph (d) in section 8.3.2 and
renumber paragraphs (e) and (f) to (d) and (e), respectively. The
content of
[[Page 72833]]
paragraph (d) is proposed to be included in the proposed revision of
paragraph (a) in section 8.3.2.
In section 8.3.3, the EPA proposes revisions to the content in
section 8.3.3(b) on the recommendations for determining nearby sources
to explicitly model as part of a cumulative impact analysis. The EPA
proposes to remove the content related to the term ``significant
concentration gradient'' in section 8.3.3(b)(i), section 8.3.3(b)(ii),
and section 8.3.3(b)(iii) due to the lack of definition of this term in
the context of modeling multi-source areas. The EPA also proposes to
revise the example given in section 8.3.3(d) to be consistent with the
discussion of other sources in section 8.3.1(a)(ii) and the proposed
revisions to Tables 8-1 and 8-2.
In section 8.4.1, the EPA proposes to include buoy data as an
example of site-specific data as a result of the inclusion of the
Coupled-Ocean Atmosphere Response Experiment (COARE) algorithms to
AERMET for marine boundary layer processing. The EPA proposes to revise
paragraph (a) of section 8.4.2 to note that MMIF should be used to
process prognostic meteorological data for both land-based and
overwater applications, and to revise paragraph (b) to clarify that
AERSURFACE should be used to calculate surface characteristics for
land-based data and AERMET calculates surface characteristics for
overwater applications. Also, the EPA proposes to revise paragraph (e)
of this section to clarify that at least 1-year of site-specific data
applies to both land-based and overwater-based data.
The EPA proposes to revise paragraph (a) of section 8.4.3.2 to
remove references to specific weblinks and to state that users should
refer to the latest guidance documents for weblinks.
The EPA proposes to add a new section 8.4.6 to discuss the
implementation of COARE for marine boundary layer processing and to
renumber the existing section 8.4.6 (in the 2017 Guideline) to a new
section 8.4.7. References to specific wind speed thresholds are
proposed to be replaced with guidance to consult the appropriate
guidance documents for the latest thresholds.
h. Section 9.0--Regulatory Application of Models
The EPA proposes to update reference numbers where necessary due to
added references.
In section 9.2.3, the EPA proposes to revise the example given in
section 9.2.3(a)(ii) to be consistent with the discussion of other
sources in section 8.3.1(a)(ii) and the proposed revisions to Tables 8-
1 and 8-2.
i. Section 10.0--References
The EPA proposes updates to references in section 10.0 to remove
outdated website links and reflect current versions of guidance
documents, user's guides, and other supporting documentation where
applicable. The EPA also proposes to add references to support proposed
updates to the AERMOD Modeling System described in this proposed update
to the Guideline.
5. Proposed Revisions to Addendum A \21\ to Appendix W to Part 51
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\21\ Formerly designated as appendix A.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
a. Section A.0
The EPA proposes to revise section A.0 to remove references that
indicate there are ``many'' preferred models while the number is
currently only three.
b. Section A.1
The EPA proposes to revise the References section to include
additional references that support our proposed updates to the AERMOD
Modeling System.
In the Abstract section, the EPA proposes to add line type sources
as one of the source types AERMOD can simulate.
The EPA proposes to revise section A.1(a) to include overwater
applications for regulatory modeling where shoreline fumigation and/or
platform downwash are not important to facilitate the use of AERMOD
with COARE processing. This revision would remove the need to request
an alternative model demonstration for such applications. The EPA also
proposes to clarify elevation data that can be used in AERMOD,
specifically the change in the name of the U.S. Geological Survey
(USGS) National Dataset (NED) to 3D Elevation Program (3DEP). For
consistency, references to NED would be updated to 3DEP throughout
section A.1.
The EPA proposes to revise section A.1(b) to include prognostic
data as meteorological input to the AERMOD Modeling System, as
applicable.
The EPA proposes to revise section A.1(l) to include the proposed
Generic Reaction Set Method in the discussion on chemical
transformation in AERMOD. We also propose to clarify the status of the
different deposition options in A.1(l).
The EPA proposes to revise section A.1(n) to include references to
additional evaluation studies to support our proposed updates to the
AERMOD Modeling System.
c. Section A.3
In section A.3, the EPA proposes to remove the reference to the
Bureau of Ocean Energy Management's (BOEM) outdated guidance.
V. Ongoing Model Development
In addition to the proposed beta options above, AERMOD version
23132 also includes alpha options that are thought to have scientific
merit and that are still being developed or evaluated and peer
reviewed. These alpha options are not being proposed as updates to the
regulatory formulation of the AERMOD Modeling System, and the EPA is
not taking comment on the alpha options during this rulemaking. A list
of alpha options on which the EPA has placed a high priority for
continued research and development for model improvement is included
below. Refer to the AERMOD User's Guide for details and usage of each
option.
The AERMOD Modeling System, version 23131, includes but is not
limited to the following alpha options:
Low Wind Default Overrides (LOW_WIND).
LOW_WIND was first implemented as a collection of non-regulatory
beta test options in AERMOD version 12345 (LOWWIND1 and LOWWIND2) and
expanded in version 15481(LOWWIND3). Each of these options altered the
default model values for minimum sigma-v, minimum wind speed, and the
minimum meander factor with different combinations of hardcoded values.
Though the original LOW_WIND beta test options are no longer
implemented in AERMOD, the LOW_WIND option was recategorized as an
alpha option in AERMOD version 18181. The LOW_WIND option in version
23132 enables the user to override AERMOD default values with user-
defined values for one or more of the following parameters:
[cir] Minimum standard deviation of the lateral velocity to the
average wind direction;
[cir] Minimum mean wind speed;
[cir] Minimum and maximum meander factor;
[cir] Minimum standard deviation of the vertical wind speed; and
[cir] Time scale for random dispersion.
Modifications to PRIME Building Downwash (AWMADWNW and
ORD_DWNW).
Beginning with AERMOD version 19191, two distinct sets of alpha
options were added that modify the building downwash algorithm, PRIME.
The two sets of options were developed
[[Page 72834]]
independently by EPA's ORD (ORD_DWNW) and the Air & Waste Management
Association (A&WMA) (AWMADWNW). With a couple of exceptions, the
options within each set can be employed individually or combined with
other options from each set.
Downwash from Offshore Drilling Platforms (PLATFORM).
To enhance AERMOD's offshore modeling capabilities, the platform
downwash algorithm, adapted from the Offshore Coastal Dispersion (OCD)
dispersion model, was incorporated in AERMOD version 22112 and requires
further development, testing, and evaluation. The PLATFORM option
simulates the building downwash effect from platforms commonly used for
offshore drilling, made up of both porous and solid structures and
which are elevated with airflow beneath them.
Extended RLINE Source Type Including Barriers and
Depressed Roadways (RLINEXT).
The RLINEXT source type was implemented in AERMOD version 18181 and
is an extended version of the RLINE source type that allows for a more
refined characterization of a road segment. It accepts separate inputs
for the elevations of each end of the road segment and extended options
for modeling with roadway barriers (RBARRIER) and depressed roadways
(RDEPRESS).
TTRM and TTRM2 for Conversion of NOX to
NO2.
The Travel Time Reaction Method (TTRM) was implemented in AERMOD
version 21112 as a stand-alone NOX-to-NO2
conversion option that accounts for plume travel time, applicable only
in the near field. TTRM was further integrated in AERMOD version 22112
as TTRM2 which can be paired with any one of the Ambient Ration Method
(ARM2), OLM, or PVMRM. When paired with one of these, TTRM is applied
in the near field and the other specified option is applied in the far
field where travel time is not as relevant.
Highly Buoyant Plume (HBP).
A Highly Buoyant Plume (HBP) option was implemented as an alpha
option that can be applied to POINT source types beginning with AERMOD
version 23132 to further explore AERMOD's treatment of the penetrated
plume. A penetrated plume occurs when a plume released into the mixed
layer, and a portion of the plume eventually penetrates the top of the
mixed layer during convective hours as it continues to rise due to
either buoyancy or momentum.
Aircraft Plume Rise (AREA/VOLUME Source Types).
Beginning with AERMOD version 23132, the characterization of AREA
and VOLUME sources was extended to account for the buoyancy and
horizontal momentum of aircraft emissions. The aircraft plume rise
formulation and code for AREA and VOLUME sources was independently
developed and provided by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA).
EPA continues to collaborate with FAA on model evaluation and peer
review of the aircraft plume rise formulations.
VI. Statutory and Executive Order Reviews
Additional information about these statutes and Executive Orders
can be found at https://www.epa.gov/laws-regulations/laws-and-executive-orders.
A. Executive Order 12866: Regulatory Planning and Review and Executive
Order 14094: Modernizing Regulatory Review
This action is not a significant regulatory action as defined in
Executive Order 12866, as amended by Executive Order 14094, and was
therefore not subject to a requirement for Executive Order 12866
review.
B. Paperwork Reduction Act (PRA)
This action does not impose an information collection burden under
the PRA. This action does not contain any information collection
activities, nor does it add any information collection requirements
beyond those imposed by existing New Source Review requirements.
C. Regulatory Flexibility Act (RFA)
I certify that this action will not have a significant economic
impact on a substantial number of small entities under the RFA. This
action will not impose any requirements on small entities. This action
proposes revisions to the Guideline, including enhancements to the
formulation and application of the EPA's near-field dispersion modeling
system, AERMOD, and updates to the recommendations for the development
of appropriate background concentration for cumulative impact analyses.
Use of the models and/or techniques described in this action is not
expected to pose any additional burden on small entities.
D. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act (UMRA)
This action does not contain any unfunded mandate as described in
UMRA, 2 U.S.C. 1531-1538, and does not significantly or uniquely affect
small governments. This action imposes no enforceable duty on any
State, local or Tribal governments or the private sector.
E. Executive Order 13132: Federalism
This action does not have federalism implications. It will not have
substantial direct effects on the States, on the relationship between
the national government and the States, or on the distribution of power
and responsibilities among the various levels of government.
F. Executive Order 13175: Consultation and Coordination With Indian
Tribal Governments
This action does not have Tribal implications, as specified in
Executive Order 13175. This action provides proposed revisions to the
Guideline which is used by the EPA, other Federal, State, territorial,
local, and Tribal air quality agencies, and industry to prepare and
review preconstruction permit applications, SIP submittals and
revisions, determinations of conformity, and other air quality
assessments required under EPA regulation. Separate from this action,
the Tribal Air Rule implements the provisions of section 301(d) of the
CAA authorizing eligible Tribes to implement their own Tribal air
program. Thus, Executive Order 13175 does not apply to this action.
The EPA provided information regarding this action to the Tribes
during a monthly National Tribal Air Association (NTAA) call and will
continue to provide any new or subsequent updates to EPA modeling
guidance and other regulatory compliance demonstration related topics
upon request of the NTAA. Additionally, the EPA specifically solicits
any comments on this proposed action from Tribal officials.
G. Executive Order 13045: Protection of Children From Environmental
Health Risks and Safety Risks
EPA interprets Executive Order 13045 as applying only to those
regulatory actions that concern environmental health or safety risks
that EPA has reason to believe may disproportionately affect children,
per the definition of ``covered regulatory action'' in section 2-202 of
the Executive Order.
Therefore, this action is not subject to Executive Order 13045
because it does not concern an environmental health risk or safety
risk. Since this action does not concern human health, EPA's Policy on
Children's Health also does not apply.
[[Page 72835]]
H. Executive Order 13211: Actions Concerning Regulations That
Significantly Affect Energy Supply, Distribution, or Use
This action is not subject to Executive Order 13211, because it is
not a significant regulatory action under Executive Order 12866.
I. National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act
This rulemaking does not involve technical standards.
J. Executive Order 12898: Federal Actions To Address Environmental
Justice in Minority Populations and Low-Income Populations and
Executive Order 14096: Revitalizing Our Nation's Commitment to
Environmental Justice for All
The EPA believes that this action does not have disproportionate
and adverse human health or environmental effects on communities with
environmental justice concerns because it does not establish an
environmental health or safety standard. This action proposes revisions
to the Guideline, including enhancements to the formulations and
application of EPA's near-field dispersion modeling system, AERMOD,
that would assist and expand assessment options in Environmental
Justice determinations. While the EPA does not expect this action to
directly impact air quality, the proposed revisions are important
because the Guideline is used by air permitting authorities and
industry to prepare and review NSR permits and serves as a benchmark of
consistency across the nation. This consistency has value to all
communities including communities with environmental justice concerns.
List of Subjects in 40 CFR Part 51
Environmental protection, Administrative practice and procedure,
Air pollution control, Carbon monoxide, Criteria pollutants,
Intergovernmental relations, Lead, Mobile sources, Nitrogen oxides,
Ozone, Particulate matter, Reporting and recordkeeping requirements,
Stationary sources, Sulfur oxides.
Michael S. Regan,
Administrator.
For the reasons stated in the preamble, the Environmental
Protection Agency is amending title 40, chapter I of the Code of
Federal Regulations as follows:
PART 51--REQUIREMENTS FOR PREPARATION, ADOPTION, AND SUBMITTAL OF
IMPLEMENTATION PLANS
0
1. The authority citation for part 51 continues to read as follows:
Authority: 23 U.S.C. 101; 42 U.S.C. 7401-7671q.
0
2. Appendix W to part 51 is revised to read as follows:
Appendix W to Part 51--Guideline on Air Quality Models Preface
a. Industry and control agencies have long expressed a need for
consistency in the application of air quality models for regulatory
purposes. In the 1977 Clean Air Act (CAA), Congress mandated such
consistency and encouraged the standardization of model
applications. The Guideline on Air Quality Models (hereafter,
Guideline) was first published in April 1978 to satisfy these
requirements by specifying models and providing guidance for their
use. The Guideline provides a common basis for estimating the air
quality concentrations of criteria pollutants used in assessing
control strategies and developing emissions limits.
b. The continuing development of new air quality models in
response to regulatory requirements and the expanded requirements
for models to cover even more complex problems have emphasized the
need for periodic review and update of guidance on these techniques.
Historically, three primary activities have provided direct input to
revisions of the Guideline. The first is a series of periodic EPA
workshops and modeling conferences conducted for the purpose of
ensuring consistency and providing clarification in the application
of models. The second activity was the solicitation and review of
new models from the technical and user community. In the March 27,
1980, Federal Register, a procedure was outlined for the submittal
to the EPA of privately developed models. After extensive evaluation
and scientific review, these models, as well as those made available
by the EPA, have been considered for recognition in the Guideline.
The third activity is the extensive on-going research efforts by the
EPA and others in air quality and meteorological modeling.
c. Based primarily on these three activities, new sections and
topics have been included as needed. The EPA does not make changes
to the guidance on a predetermined schedule, but rather on an as-
needed basis. The EPA believes that revisions of the Guideline
should be timely and responsive to user needs and should involve
public participation to the greatest possible extent. All future
changes to the guidance will be proposed and finalized in the
Federal Register. Information on the current status of modeling
guidance can always be obtained from the EPA's Regional Offices.
Table of Contents
List of Tables
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Overview of Model Use
2.1 Suitability of Models
2.1.1 Model Accuracy and Uncertainty
2.2 Levels of Sophistication of Air Quality Analyses and Models
2.3 Availability of Models
3.0 Preferred and Alternative Air Quality Models
3.1 Preferred Models
3.1.1 Discussion
3.1.2 Requirements
3.2 Alternative Models
3.2.1 Discussion
3.2.2 Requirements
3.3 EPA's Model Clearinghouse
4.0 Models for Carbon Monoxide, Lead, Sulfur Dioxide, Nitrogen
Dioxide and Primary Particulate Matter
4.1 Discussion
4.2 Requirements
4.2.1 Screening Models and Techniques
4.2.1.1 AERSCREEN
4.2.1.2 CTSCREEN
4.2.1.3 Screening in Complex Terrain
4.2.2 Refined Models
4.2.2.1 AERMOD
4.2.2.2 CTDMPLUS
4.2.2.3 OCD
4.2.3 Pollutant Specific Modeling Requirements
4.2.3.1 Models for Carbon Monoxide
4.2.3.2 Models for Lead
4.2.3.3 Models for Sulfur Dioxide
4.2.3.4 Models for Nitrogen Dioxide
4.2.3.5 Models for PM2.5
4.2.3.6 Models for PM10
5.0 Models for Ozone and Secondarily Formed Particulate Matter
5.1 Discussion
5.2 Recommendations
5.3 Recommended Models and Approaches for Ozone
5.3.1 Models for NAAQS Attainment Demonstrations and Multi-
Source Air Quality Assessments
5.3.2 Models for Single-Source Air Quality Assessments
5.4 Recommended Models and Approaches for Secondarily Formed
PM2.5
5.4.1 Models for NAAQS Attainment Demonstrations and Multi-
Source Air Quality Assessments
5.4.2 Models for Single-Source Air Quality Assessments
6.0 Modeling for Air Quality Related Values and Other Governmental
Programs
6.1 Discussion
6.2 Air Quality Related Values
6.2.1 Visibility
6.2.1.1 Models for Estimating Near-Field Visibility Impairment
6.2.1.2 Models for Estimating Visibility Impairment for Long-
Range Transport
6.2.2 Models for Estimating Deposition Impacts
6.3 Modeling Guidance for Other Governmental Programs
7.0 General Modeling Considerations
7.1 Discussion
7.2 Recommendations
7.2.1 All sources
7.2.1.1 Dispersion Coefficients
7.2.1.2 Complex Winds
7.2.1.3 Gravitational Settling and Deposition
7.2.2 Stationary Sources
7.2.2.1 Good Engineering Practice Stack Height
[[Page 72836]]
7.2.2.2 Plume Rise
7.2.3 Mobile Sources
8.0 Model Input Data
8.1 Modeling Domain
8.1.1 Discussion
8.1.2 Requirements
8.2 Source Data
8.2.1 Discussion
8.2.2 Requirements
8.3 Background Concentrations
8.3.1 Discussion
8.3.2 Recommendations for Isolated Single Sources
8.3.3 Recommendations for Multi-Source Areas
8.4 Meteorological Input Data
8.4.1 Discussion
8.4.2 Recommendations and Requirements
8.4.3 National Weather Service Data
8.4.3.1 Discussion
8.4.3.2 Recommendations
8.4.4 Site-specific data
8.4.4.1 Discussion
8.4.4.2 Recommendations
8.4.5 Prognostic meteorological data
8.4.5.1 Discussion
8.4.5.2 Recommendations
8.4.6 Marine Boundary Layer Environments
8.4.6.1 Discussion
8.4.6.2 Recommendations
8.4.7 Treatment of Near-Calms and Calms
8.4.7.1 Discussion
8.4.7.2 Recommendations
9.0 Regulatory Application of Models
9.1 Discussion
9.2 Recommendations
9.2.1 Modeling Protocol
9.2.2 Design Concentration and Receptor Sites
9.2.3 NAAQS and PSD Increments Compliance Demonstrations for New
or Modified Sources
9.2.3.1 Considerations in Developing Emissions Limits
9.2.4 Use of Measured Data in Lieu of Model Estimates
10.0 References
Addendum A to Appendix W of Part 51--Summaries of Preferred Air Quality
Models
List of Tables
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table No. Title
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8-1............................... Point Source Model Emission Inputs
for SIP Revisions of Inert
Pollutants.
8-2............................... Point Source Model Emission Inputs
for NAAQS Compliance in PSD
Demonstrations.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0 Introduction
a. The Guideline provides air quality modeling techniques that
should be applied to State Implementation Plan (SIP) submittals and
revisions, to New Source Review (NSR), including new or modifying
sources under Prevention of Significant Deterioration
(PSD),1 2 3 conformity analyses,\4\ and other air quality
assessments required under EPA regulation. Applicable only to
criteria air pollutants, the Guideline is intended for use by the
EPA Regional Offices in judging the adequacy of modeling analyses
performed by the EPA, by State, local, and Tribal permitting
authorities, and by industry. It is appropriate for use by other
Federal government agencies and by State, local, and Tribal agencies
with air quality and land management responsibilities. The Guideline
serves to identify, for all interested parties, those modeling
techniques and databases that the EPA considers acceptable. The
Guideline is not intended to be a compendium of modeling techniques.
Rather, it should serve as a common measure of acceptable technical
analysis when supported by sound scientific judgment.
b. Air quality measurements \5\ are routinely used to
characterize ambient concentrations of criteria pollutants
throughout the nation but are rarely sufficient for characterizing
the ambient impacts of individual sources or demonstrating adequacy
of emissions limits for an existing source due to limitations in
spatial and temporal coverage of ambient monitoring networks. The
impacts of new sources that do not yet exist, and modifications to
existing sources that have yet to be implemented, can only be
determined through modeling. Thus, models have become a primary
analytical tool in most air quality assessments. Air quality
measurements can be used in a complementary manner to air quality
models, with due regard for the strengths and weaknesses of both
analysis techniques, and are particularly useful in assessing the
accuracy of model estimates.
c. It would be advantageous to categorize the various regulatory
programs and to apply a designated model to each proposed source
needing analysis under a given program. However, the diversity of
the nation's topography and climate, and variations in source
configurations and operating characteristics dictate against a
strict modeling ``cookbook.'' There is no one model capable of
properly addressing all conceivable situations even within a broad
category such as point sources. Meteorological phenomena associated
with threats to air quality standards are rarely amenable to a
single mathematical treatment; thus, case-by-case analysis and
judgment are frequently required. As modeling efforts become more
complex, it is increasingly important that they be directed by
highly competent individuals with a broad range of experience and
knowledge in air quality meteorology. Further, they should be
coordinated closely with specialists in emissions characteristics,
air monitoring and data processing. The judgment of experienced
meteorologists, atmospheric scientists, and analysts is essential.
d. The model that most accurately estimates concentrations in
the area of interest is always sought. However, it is clear from the
needs expressed by the EPA Regional Offices, by State, local, and
Tribal agencies, by many industries and trade associations, and also
by the deliberations of Congress, that consistency in the selection
and application of models and databases should also be sought, even
in case-by-case analyses. Consistency ensures that air quality
control agencies and the general public have a common basis for
estimating pollutant concentrations, assessing control strategies,
and specifying emissions limits. Such consistency is not, however,
promoted at the expense of model and database accuracy. The
Guideline provides a consistent basis for selection of the most
accurate models and databases for use in air quality assessments.
e. Recommendations are made in the Guideline concerning air
quality models and techniques, model evaluation procedures, and
model input databases and related requirements. The guidance
provided here should be followed in air quality analyses relative to
SIPs, NSR, and in supporting analyses required by the EPA and by
State, local, and Tribal permitting authorities. Specific models are
identified for particular applications. The EPA may approve the use
of an alternative model or technique that can be demonstrated to be
more appropriate than those recommended in the Guideline. In all
cases, the model or technique applied to a given situation should be
the one that provides the most accurate representation of
atmospheric transport, dispersion, and chemical transformations in
the area of interest. However, to ensure consistency, deviations
from the Guideline should be carefully documented as part of the
public record and fully supported by the appropriate reviewing
authority, as discussed later.
f. From time to time, situations arise requiring clarification
of the intent of the guidance on a specific topic. Periodic
workshops are held with EPA headquarters, EPA Regional Offices, and
State, local, and Tribal agency modeling representatives to ensure
consistency in modeling guidance and to promote the use of more
accurate air quality models, techniques, and databases. The
workshops serve to provide further explanations of Guideline
requirements to the EPA Regional Offices and workshop materials are
issued with this clarifying information. In addition, findings from
ongoing research programs, new model development, or results from
model evaluations and applications are continuously evaluated. Based
on this information, changes in the applicable guidance may be
indicated and appropriate revisions to the Guideline may be
considered.
g. All changes to the Guideline must follow rulemaking
requirements since the Guideline is codified in Appendix W to 40
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) part 51. The EPA will promulgate
proposed and final rules in the Federal Register to amend this
appendix. The EPA utilizes the existing procedures under CAA section
320 that requires the EPA to conduct a Conference on Air Quality
Modeling at least every 3 years (CAA 320, 42 U.S.C. 7620). These
modeling conferences are intended to develop standardized air
quality modeling procedures and form the basis for associated
revisions to this Guideline in support of the EPA's continuing
effort to prescribe with ``reasonable particularity'' air quality
models and meteorological and emission databases suitable for
modeling National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) \6\ and PSD
increments. Ample opportunity for public comment will be provided
for each proposed change and public hearings scheduled.
[[Page 72837]]
h. A wide range of topics on modeling and databases are
discussed in the Guideline. Section 2 gives an overview of models
and their suitability for use in regulatory applications. Section 3
provides specific guidance on the determination of preferred air
quality models and on the selection of alternative models or
techniques. Sections 4 through 6 provide recommendations on modeling
techniques for assessing criteria pollutant impacts from single and
multiple sources with specific modeling requirements for selected
regulatory applications. Section 7 discusses general considerations
common to many modeling analyses for stationary and mobile sources.
Section 8 makes recommendations for data inputs to models including
source, background air quality, and meteorological data. Section 9
summarizes how estimates and measurements of air quality are used in
assessing source impact and in evaluating control strategies.
i. Appendix W to 40 CFR part 51 contains an addendum: addendum
A. Thus, when reference is made to ``addendum A'' in this document,
it refers to addendum A to appendix W to 40 CFR part 51. Addendum A
contains summaries of refined air quality models that are
``preferred'' for particular applications; both EPA models and
models developed by others are included.
2.0 Overview of Model Use
a. Increasing reliance has been placed on concentration
estimates from air quality models as the primary basis for
regulatory decisions concerning source permits and emission control
requirements. In many situations, such as review of a proposed new
source, no practical alternative exists. Before attempting to
implement the guidance contained in this document, the reader should
be aware of certain general information concerning air quality
models and their evaluation and use. Such information is provided in
this section.
2.1 Suitability of Models
a. The extent to which a specific air quality model is suitable
for the assessment of source impacts depends upon several factors.
These include: (1) the topographic and meteorological complexities
of the area; (2) the detail and accuracy of the input databases,
i.e., emissions inventory, meteorological data, and air quality
data; (3) the manner in which complexities of atmospheric processes
are handled in the model; (4) the technical competence of those
undertaking such simulation modeling; and (5) the resources
available to apply the model. Any of these factors can have a
significant influence on the overall model performance, which must
be thoroughly evaluated to determine the suitability of an air
quality model to a particular application or range of applications.
b. Air quality models are most accurate and reliable in areas
that have gradual transitions of land use and topography.
Meteorological conditions in these areas are spatially uniform such
that observations are broadly representative and air quality model
projections are not further complicated by a heterogeneous
environment. Areas subject to major topographic influences
experience meteorological complexities that are often difficult to
measure and simulate. Models with adequate performance are available
for increasingly complex environments. However, they are resource
intensive and frequently require site-specific observations and
formulations. Such complexities and the related challenges for the
air quality simulation should be considered when selecting the most
appropriate air quality model for an application.
c. Appropriate model input data should be available before an
attempt is made to evaluate or apply an air quality model. Assuming
the data are adequate, the greater the detail with which a model
considers the spatial and temporal variations in meteorological
conditions and permit-enforceable emissions, the greater the ability
to evaluate the source impact and to distinguish the effects of
various control strategies.
d. There are three types of models that have historically been
used in the regulatory demonstrations applicable in the Guideline,
each having strengths and weaknesses that lend themselves to
particular regulatory applications.
i. Gaussian plume models use a ``steady-state'' approximation,
which assumes that over the model time step, the emissions,
meteorology and other model inputs, are constant throughout the
model domain, resulting in a resolved plume with the emissions
distributed throughout the plume according to a Gaussian
distribution. This formulation allows Gaussian models to estimate
near-field impacts of a limited number of sources at a relatively
high resolution, with temporal scales of an hour and spatial scales
of meters. However, this formulation allows for only relatively
inert pollutants, with very limited considerations of transformation
and removal (e.g., deposition), and further limits the domain for
which the model may be used. Thus, Gaussian models may not be
appropriate if model inputs are changing sharply over the model time
step or within the desired model domain, or if more advanced
considerations of chemistry are needed.
ii. Lagrangian puff models, on the other hand, are non-steady-
state, and assume that model input conditions are changing over the
model domain and model time step. Lagrangian models can also be used
to determine near- and far-field impacts from a limited number of
sources. Traditionally, Lagrangian models have been used for
relatively inert pollutants, with slightly more complex
considerations of removal than Gaussian models. Some Lagrangian
models treat in-plume gas and particulate chemistry. However, these
models require time and space varying concentration fields of
oxidants and, in the case of fine particulate matter
(PM2.5), neutralizing agents, such as ammonia. Reliable
background fields are critical for applications involving secondary
pollutant formation because secondary impacts generally occur when
in-plume precursors mix and react with species in the background
atmosphere.7 8 These oxidant and neutralizing agents are
not routinely measured, but can be generated with a three-
dimensional photochemical grid model.
iii. Photochemical grid models are three-dimensional Eulerian
grid-based models that treat chemical and physical processes in each
grid cell and use diffusion and transport processes to move chemical
species between grid cells.\9\ Eulerian models assume that emissions
are spread evenly throughout each model grid cell. At coarse grid
resolutions, Eulerian models have difficulty with fine scale
resolution of individual plumes. However, these types of models can
be appropriately applied for assessment of near-field and regional
scale reactive pollutant impacts from specific sources
7 10 11 12 or all sources.13 14 15
Photochemical grid models simulate a more realistic environment for
chemical transformation,7 12 but simulations can be more
resource intensive than Lagrangian or Gaussian plume models.
e. Competent and experienced meteorologists, atmospheric
scientists, and analysts are an essential prerequisite to the
successful application of air quality models. The need for such
specialists is critical when sophisticated models are used or the
area has complicated meteorological or topographic features. It is
important to note that a model applied improperly or with
inappropriate data can lead to serious misjudgments regarding the
source impact or the effectiveness of a control strategy.
f. The resource demands generated by use of air quality models
vary widely depending on the specific application. The resources
required may be important factors in the selection and use of a
model or technique for a specific analysis. These resources depend
on the nature of the model and its complexity, the detail of the
databases, the difficulty of the application, the amount and level
of expertise required, and the costs of manpower and computational
facilities.
2.1.1 Model Accuracy and Uncertainty
a. The formulation and application of air quality models are
accompanied by several sources of uncertainty. ``Irreducible''
uncertainty stems from the ``unknown'' conditions, which may not be
explicitly accounted for in the model (e.g., the turbulent velocity
field). Thus, there are likely to be deviations from the observed
concentrations in individual events due to variations in the unknown
conditions. ``Reducible'' uncertainties \16\ are caused by: (1)
uncertainties in the ``known'' input conditions (e.g., emission
characteristics and meteorological data); (2) errors in the measured
concentrations; and (3) inadequate model physics and formulation.
b. Evaluations of model accuracy should focus on the reducible
uncertainty associated with physics and the formulation of the
model. The accuracy of the model is normally determined by an
evaluation procedure which involves the comparison of model
concentration estimates with measured air quality data.\17\ The
statement of model accuracy is based on statistical tests or
performance measures such as bias, error, correlation,
etc.18 19
c. Since the 1980's, the EPA has worked with the modeling
community to encourage development of standardized model evaluation
methods and the development of continually improved methods for the
characterization of model
[[Page 72838]]
performance.16 18 20 21 22 There is general consensus on
what should be considered in the evaluation of air quality models;
namely, quality assurance planning, documentation and scrutiny
should be consistent with the intended use and should include:
Scientific peer review;
Supportive analyses (diagnostic evaluations, code
verification, sensitivity analyses);
Diagnostic and performance evaluations with data
obtained in trial locations; and
Statistical performance evaluations in the
circumstances of the intended applications.
Performance evaluations and diagnostic evaluations assess
different qualities of how well a model is performing, and both are
needed to establish credibility within the client and scientific
community.
d. Performance evaluations allow the EPA and model users to
determine the relative performance of a model in comparison with
alternative modeling systems. Diagnostic evaluations allow
determination of a model capability to simulate individual processes
that affect the results, and usually employ smaller spatial/temporal
scale data sets (e.g., field studies). Diagnostic evaluations enable
the EPA and model users to build confidence that model predictions
are accurate for the right reasons. However, the objective
comparison of modeled concentrations with observed field data
provides only a partial means for assessing model performance. Due
to the limited supply of evaluation datasets, there are practical
limits in assessing model performance. For this reason, the
conclusions reached in the science peer reviews and the supportive
analyses have particular relevance in deciding whether a model will
be useful for its intended purposes.
2.2 Levels of Sophistication of Air Quality Analyses and Models
a. It is desirable to begin an air quality analysis by using
simplified and conservative methods followed, as appropriate, by
more complex and refined methods. The purpose of this approach is to
streamline the process and sufficiently address regulatory
requirements by eliminating the need of more detailed modeling when
it is not necessary in a specific regulatory application. For
example, in the context of a PSD permit application, a simplified
and conservative analysis may be sufficient where it shows the
proposed construction clearly will not cause or contribute to
ambient concentrations in excess of either the NAAQS or the PSD
increments.2 3
b. There are two general levels of sophistication of air quality
models. The first level consists of screening models that provide
conservative modeled estimates of the air quality impact of a
specific source or source category based on simplified assumptions
of the model inputs (e.g., preset, worst-case meteorological
conditions). In the case of a PSD assessment, if a screening model
indicates that the increase in concentration attributable to the
source could cause or contribute to a violation of any NAAQS or PSD
increment, then the second level of more sophisticated models should
be applied unless appropriate controls or operational restrictions
are implemented based on the screening modeling.
c. The second level consists of refined models that provide more
detailed treatment of physical and chemical atmospheric processes,
require more detailed and precise input data, and provide spatially
and temporally resolved concentration estimates. As a result, they
provide a more sophisticated and, at least theoretically, a more
accurate estimate of source impact and the effectiveness of control
strategies.
d. There are situations where a screening model or a refined
model is not available such that screening and refined modeling are
not viable options to determine source-specific air quality impacts.
In such situations, a screening technique or reduced-form model may
be viable options for estimating source impacts.
i. Screening techniques are differentiated from a screening
model in that screening techniques are approaches that make
simplified and conservative assumptions about the physical and
chemical atmospheric processes important to determining source
impacts, while screening models make assumptions about conservative
inputs to a specific model. The complexity of screening techniques
ranges from simplified assumptions of chemistry applied to refined
or screening model output to sophisticated approximations of the
chemistry applied within a refined model.
ii. Reduced-form models are computationally efficient simulation
tools for characterizing the pollutant response to specific types of
emission reductions for a particular geographic area or background
environmental conditions that reflect underlying atmospheric science
of a refined model but reduce the computational resources of running
a complex, numerical air quality model such as a photochemical grid
model.
In such situations, an attempt should be made to acquire or
improve the necessary databases and to develop appropriate
analytical techniques, but the screening technique or reduced-form
model may be sufficient in conducting regulatory modeling
applications when applied in consultation with the EPA Regional
Office.
e. Consistent with the general principle described in paragraph
2.2(a), the EPA may establish a demonstration tool or method as a
sufficient means for a user or applicant to make a demonstration
required by regulation, either by itself or as part of a modeling
demonstration. To be used for such regulatory purposes, such a tool
or method must be reflected in a codified regulation or have a well-
documented technical basis and reasoning that is contained or
incorporated in the record of the regulatory decision in which it is
applied.
2.3 Availability of Models
a. For most of the screening and refined models discussed in the
Guideline, codes, associated documentation and other useful
information are publicly available for download from the EPA's
Support Center for Regulatory Atmospheric Modeling (SCRAM) website
at https://www.epa.gov/scram. This is a website with which air
quality modelers should become familiar and regularly visit for
important model updates and additional clarifications and revisions
to modeling guidance documents that are applicable to EPA programs
and regulations. Codes and documentation may also be available from
the National Technical Information Service (NTIS), https://www.ntis.gov, and, when available, is referenced with the
appropriate NTIS accession number.
3.0 Preferred and Alternative Air Quality Models
a. This section specifies the approach to be taken in
determining preferred models for use in regulatory air quality
programs. The status of models developed by the EPA, as well as
those submitted to the EPA for review and possible inclusion in this
Guideline, is discussed in this section. The section also provides
the criteria and process for obtaining EPA approval for use of
alternative models for individual cases in situations where the
preferred models are not applicable or available. Additional sources
of relevant modeling information are: the EPA's Model Clearinghouse
\23\ (section 3.3); EPA modeling conferences; periodic Regional,
State, and Local Modelers' Workshops; and the EPA's SCRAM website
(section 2.3).
b. When approval is required for a specific modeling technique
or analytical procedure in this Guideline, we refer to the
``appropriate reviewing authority.'' Many States and some local
agencies administer NSR permitting under programs approved into
SIPs. In some EPA regions, Federal authority to administer NSR
permitting and related activities has been delegated to State or
local agencies. In these cases, such agencies ``stand in the shoes''
of the respective EPA Region. Therefore, depending on the
circumstances, the appropriate reviewing authority may be an EPA
Regional Office, a State, local, or Tribal agency, or perhaps the
Federal Land Manager (FLM). In some cases, the Guideline requires
review and approval of the use of an alternative model by the EPA
Regional Office (sometimes stated as ``Regional Administrator'').
For all approvals of alternative models or techniques, the EPA
Regional Office will coordinate and shall seek concurrence with the
EPA's Model Clearinghouse. If there is any question as to the
appropriate reviewing authority, you should contact the EPA Regional
Office modeling contact (https://www.epa.gov/scram/air-modeling-regional-contacts), whose jurisdiction generally includes the
physical location of the source in question and its expected
impacts.
c. In all regulatory analyses, early discussions among the EPA
Regional Office staff, State, local, and Tribal agency staff,
industry representatives, and where appropriate, the FLM, are
invaluable and are strongly encouraged. Prior to the actual
analyses, agreement on the databases to be used, modeling techniques
to be applied, and the overall technical approach helps avoid
misunderstandings concerning the final results and may reduce the
later need for additional analyses. The preparation of a written
modeling protocol that is vetted with the appropriate reviewing
authority helps to
[[Page 72839]]
keep misunderstandings and resource expenditures at a minimum.
d. The identification of preferred models in this Guideline
should not be construed as a determination that the preferred models
identified here are to be permanently used to the exclusion of all
others or that they are the only models available for relating
emissions to air quality. The model that most accurately estimates
concentrations in the area of interest is always sought. However,
designation of specific preferred models is needed to promote
consistency in model selection and application.
3.1 Preferred Models
3.1.1 Discussion
a. The EPA has developed some models suitable for regulatory
application, while other models have been submitted by private
developers for possible inclusion in the Guideline. Refined models
that are preferred and required by the EPA for particular
applications have undergone the necessary peer scientific reviews
24 25 and model performance evaluation exercises
26 27 that include statistical measures of model
performance in comparison with measured air quality data as
described in section 2.1.1.
b. An American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
reference \28\ provides a general philosophy for developing and
implementing advanced statistical evaluations of atmospheric
dispersion models, and provides an example statistical technique to
illustrate the application of this philosophy. Consistent with this
approach, the EPA has determined and applied a specific evaluation
protocol that provides a statistical technique for evaluating model
performance for predicting peak concentration values, as might be
observed at individual monitoring locations.\29\
c. When a single model is found to perform better than others,
it is recommended for application as a preferred model and listed in
addendum A. If no one model is found to clearly perform better
through the evaluation exercise, then the preferred model listed in
addendum A may be selected on the basis of other factors such as
past use, public familiarity, resource requirements, and
availability. Accordingly, the models listed in addendum A meet
these conditions:
i. The model must be written in a common programming language,
and the executable(s) must run on a common computer platform.
ii. The model must be documented in a user's guide or model
formulation report which identifies the mathematics of the model,
data requirements and program operating characteristics at a level
of detail comparable to that available for other recommended models
in addendum A.
iii. The model must be accompanied by a complete test dataset
including input parameters and output results. The test data must be
packaged with the model in computer-readable form.
iv. The model must be useful to typical users, e.g., State air
agencies, for specific air quality control problems. Such users
should be able to operate the computer program(s) from available
documentation.
v. The model documentation must include a robust comparison with
air quality data (and/or tracer measurements) or with other well-
established analytical techniques.
vi. The developer must be willing to make the model and source
code available to users at reasonable cost or make them available
for public access through the internet or National Technical
Information Service. The model and its code cannot be proprietary.
d. The EPA's process of establishing a preferred model includes
a determination of technical merit, in accordance with the above six
items, including the practicality of the model for use in ongoing
regulatory programs. Each model will also be subjected to a
performance evaluation for an appropriate database and to a peer
scientific review. Models for wide use (not just an isolated case)
that are found to perform better will be proposed for inclusion as
preferred models in future Guideline revisions.
e. No further evaluation of a preferred model is required for a
particular application if the EPA requirements for regulatory use
specified for the model in the Guideline are followed. Alternative
models to those listed in addendum A should generally be compared
with measured air quality data when they are used for regulatory
applications consistent with recommendations in section 3.2.
3.1.2 Requirements
a. Addendum A identifies refined models that are preferred for
use in regulatory applications. If a model is required for a
particular application, the user must select a model from addendum A
or follow procedures in section 3.2.2 for use of an alternative
model or technique. Preferred models may be used without a formal
demonstration of applicability as long as they are used as indicated
in each model summary in addendum A. Further recommendations for the
application of preferred models to specific source applications are
found in subsequent sections of the Guideline.
b. If changes are made to a preferred model without affecting
the modeled concentrations, the preferred status of the model is
unchanged. Examples of modifications that do not affect
concentrations are those made to enable use of a different computer
platform or those that only affect the format or averaging time of
the model results. The integration of a graphical user interface
(GUI) to facilitate setting up the model inputs and/or analyzing the
model results without otherwise altering the preferred model code is
another example of a modification that does not affect
concentrations. However, when any changes are made, the Regional
Administrator must require a test case example to demonstrate that
the modeled concentrations are not affected.
c. A preferred model must be operated with the options listed in
addendum A for its intended regulatory application. If the
regulatory options are not applied, the model is no longer
``preferred.'' Any other modification to a preferred model that
would result in a change in the concentration estimates likewise
alters its status so that it is no longer a preferred model. Use of
the modified model must then be justified as an alternative model on
a case-by-case basis to the appropriate reviewing authority and
approved by the Regional Administrator.
d. Where the EPA has not identified a preferred model for a
particular pollutant or situation, the EPA may establish a multi-
tiered approach for making a demonstration required under PSD or
another CAA program. The initial tier or tiers may involve use of
demonstration tools, screening models, screening techniques, or
reduced-form models; while the last tier may involve the use of
demonstration tools, refined models or techniques, or alternative
models approved under section 3.2.
3.2 Alternative Models
3.2.1 Discussion
a. Selection of the best model or techniques for each individual
air quality analysis is always encouraged, but the selection should
be done in a consistent manner. A simple listing of models in this
Guideline cannot alone achieve that consistency nor can it
necessarily provide the best model for all possible situations. As
discussed in section 3.1.1, the EPA has determined and applied a
specific evaluation protocol that provides a statistical technique
for evaluating model performance for predicting peak concentration
values, as might be observed at individual monitoring locations.\29\
This protocol is available to assist in developing a consistent
approach when justifying the use of other-than-preferred models
recommended in the Guideline (i.e., alternative models). The
procedures in this protocol provide a general framework for
objective decision-making on the acceptability of an alternative
model for a given regulatory application. These objective procedures
may be used for conducting both the technical evaluation of the
model and the field test or performance evaluation.
b. This subsection discusses the use of alternate models and
defines three situations when alternative models may be used. This
subsection also provides a procedure for implementing 40 CFR
51.166(l)(2) in PSD permitting. This provision requires written
approval of the Administrator for any modification or substitution
of an applicable model. An applicable model for purposes of 40 CFR
51.166(l) is a preferred model in addendum A to the Guideline.
Approval to use an alternative model under section 3.2 of the
Guideline qualifies as approval for the modification or substitution
of a model under 40 CFR 51.166(l)(2). The Regional Administrators
have delegated authority to issue such approvals under section 3.2
of the Guideline, provided that such approval is issued after
consultation with the EPA's Model Clearinghouse and formally
documented in a concurrence memorandum from the EPA's Model
Clearinghouse which demonstrates that the requirements within
section 3.2 for use of an alternative model have been met.
3.2.2 Requirements
a. Determination of acceptability of an alternative model is an
EPA Regional Office responsibility in consultation with the EPA's
Model Clearinghouse as discussed in paragraphs 3.0(b) and 3.2.1(b).
Where the Regional Administrator finds that an
[[Page 72840]]
alternative model is more appropriate than a preferred model, that
model may be used subject to the approval of the EPA Regional Office
based on the requirements of this subsection. This finding will
normally result from a determination that: (1) a preferred air
quality model is not appropriate for the particular application; or
(2) a more appropriate model or technique is available and
applicable.
b. An alternative model shall be evaluated from both a
theoretical and a performance perspective before it is selected for
use. There are three separate conditions under which such a model
may be approved for use:
1. If a demonstration can be made that the model produces
concentration estimates equivalent to the estimates obtained using a
preferred model;
2. If a statistical performance evaluation has been conducted
using measured air quality data and the results of that evaluation
indicate the alternative model performs better for the given
application than a comparable model in addendum A; or
3. If there is no preferred model.
Any one of these three separate conditions may justify use of an
alternative model. Some known alternative models that are applicable
for selected situations are listed on the EPA's SCRAM website
(section 2.3). However, inclusion there does not confer any unique
status relative to other alternative models that are being or will
be developed in the future.
c. Equivalency, condition (1) in paragraph (b) of this
subsection, is established by demonstrating that the appropriate
regulatory metric(s) are within +/-2 percent of the estimates
obtained from the preferred model. The option to show equivalency is
intended as a simple demonstration of acceptability for an
alternative model that is nearly identical (or contains options that
can make it identical) to a preferred model that it can be treated
for practical purposes as the preferred model. However,
notwithstanding this demonstration, models that are not equivalent
may be used when one of the two other conditions described in
paragraphs (d) and (e) of this subsection are satisfied.
d. For condition (2) in paragraph (b) of this subsection,
established statistical performance evaluation procedures and
techniques 28 29 for determining the acceptability of a
model for an individual case based on superior performance should be
followed, as appropriate. Preparation and implementation of an
evaluation protocol that is acceptable to both control agencies and
regulated industry is an important element in such an evaluation.
e. Finally, for condition (3) in paragraph (b) of this
subsection, an alternative model or technique may be approved for
use provided that:
i. The model or technique has received a scientific peer review;
ii. The model or technique can be demonstrated to be applicable
to the problem on a theoretical basis;
iii. The databases which are necessary to perform the analysis
are available and adequate;
iv. Appropriate performance evaluations of the model or
technique have shown that the model or technique is not
inappropriately biased for regulatory application; \a\ and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\a\ For PSD and other applications that use the model results in
an absolute sense, the model should not be biased toward
underestimates. Alternatively, for ozone and PM2.5 SIP
attainment demonstrations and other applications that use the model
results in a relative sense, the model should not be biased toward
overestimates.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
v. A protocol on methods and procedures to be followed has been
established.
f. To formally document that the requirements of section 3.2 for
use of an alternative model are satisfied for a particular
application or range of applications, a memorandum will be prepared
by the EPA's Model Clearinghouse through a consultative process with
the EPA Regional Office.
3.3 EPA's Model Clearinghouse
a. The Regional Administrator has the authority to select models
that are appropriate for use in a given situation. However, there is
a need for assistance and guidance in the selection process so that
fairness, consistency, and transparency in modeling decisions are
fostered among the EPA Regional Offices and the State, local, and
Tribal agencies. To satisfy that need, the EPA established the Model
Clearinghouse \23\ to serve a central role of coordination and
collaboration between EPA headquarters and the EPA Regional Offices.
Additionally, the EPA holds periodic workshops with EPA
Headquarters, EPA Regional Offices, and State, local, and Tribal
agency modeling representatives.
b. The appropriate EPA Regional Office should always be
consulted for information and guidance concerning modeling methods
and interpretations of modeling guidance, and to ensure that the air
quality model user has available the latest most up-to-date policy
and procedures. As appropriate, the EPA Regional Office may also
request assistance from the EPA's Model Clearinghouse on other
applications of models, analytical techniques, or databases or to
clarify interpretation of the Guideline or related modeling
guidance.
c. The EPA Regional Office will coordinate with the EPA's Model
Clearinghouse after an initial evaluation and decision has been
developed concerning the application of an alternative model. The
acceptability and formal approval process for an alternative model
is described in section 3.2.
4.0 Models for Carbon Monoxide, Lead, Sulfur Dioxide, Nitrogen Dioxide
and Primary Particulate Matter
4.1 Discussion
a. This section identifies modeling approaches generally used in
the air quality impact analysis of sources that emit the criteria
pollutants carbon monoxide (CO), lead, sulfur dioxide
(SO2), nitrogen dioxide (NO2), and primary
particulates (PM2.5 and PM10).
b. The guidance in this section is specific to the application
of the Gaussian plume models identified in addendum A. Gaussian
plume models assume that emissions and meteorology are in a steady-
state, which is typically based on an hourly time step. This
approach results in a plume that has an hourly-averaged distribution
of emission mass according to a Gaussian curve through the plume.
Though Gaussian steady-state models conserve the mass of the primary
pollutant throughout the plume, they can still take into account a
limited consideration of first-order removal processes (e.g., wet
and dry deposition) and limited chemical conversion (e.g., OH
oxidation).
c. Due to the steady-state assumption, Gaussian plume models are
generally considered applicable to distances less than 50 km, beyond
which, modeled predictions of plume impact are likely conservative.
The locations of these impacts are expected to be unreliable due to
changes in meteorology that are likely to occur during the travel
time.
d. The applicability of Gaussian plume models may vary depending
on the topography of the modeling domain, i.e., simple or complex.
Simple terrain is considered to be an area where terrain features
are all lower in elevation than the top of the stack(s) of the
source(s) in question. Complex terrain is defined as terrain
exceeding the height of the stack(s) being modeled.
e. Gaussian models determine source impacts at discrete
locations (receptors) for each meteorological and emission scenario,
and generally attempt to estimate concentrations at specific sites
that represent an ensemble average of numerous repetitions of the
same ``event.'' Uncertainties in model estimates are driven by this
formulation, and as noted in section 2.1.1, evaluations of model
accuracy should focus on the reducible uncertainty associated with
physics and the formulation of the model. The ``irreducible''
uncertainty associated with Gaussian plume models may be responsible
for variation in concentrations of as much as +/-50 percent.\30\
``Reducible'' uncertainties \16\ can be on a similar scale. For
example, Pasquill \31\ estimates that, apart from data input errors,
maximum ground-level concentrations at a given hour for a point
source in flat terrain could be in error by 50 percent due to these
uncertainties. Errors of 5 to 10 degrees in the measured wind
direction can result in concentration errors of 20 to 70 percent for
a particular time and location, depending on stability and station
location. Such uncertainties do not indicate that an estimated
concentration does not occur, only that the precise time and
locations are in doubt. Composite errors in highest estimated
concentrations of 10 to 40 percent are found to be
typical.32 33 However, estimates of concentrations paired
in time and space with observed concentrations are less certain.
f. Model evaluations and inter-comparisons should take these
aspects of uncertainty into account. For a regulatory application of
a model, the emphasis of model evaluations is generally placed on
the highest modeled impacts. Thus, the Cox-Tikvart model evaluation
approach, which compares the highest modeled impacts on several
timescales, is recommended for comparisons of models and
measurements and model inter-comparisons. The approach includes
bootstrap techniques to determine the significance of various
modeled predictions
[[Page 72841]]
and increases the robustness of such comparisons when the number of
available measurements are limited.34 35 Because of the
uncertainty in paired modeled and observed concentrations, any
attempts at calibration of models based on these comparisons is of
questionable benefit and shall not be done.
4.2 Requirements
a. For NAAQS compliance demonstrations under PSD, use of the
screening and preferred models for the pollutants listed in this
subsection shall be limited to the near-field at a nominal distance
of 50 km or less. Near-field application is consistent with
capabilities of Gaussian plume models and, based on the EPA's
assessment, is sufficient to address whether a source will cause or
contribute to ambient concentrations in excess of a NAAQS. In most
cases, maximum source impacts of inert pollutants will occur within
the first 10 to 20 km from the source. Therefore, the EPA does not
consider a long-range transport assessment beyond 50 km necessary
for these pollutants if a near-field NAAQS compliance demonstration
is required.\36\
b. For assessment of PSD increments within the near-field
distance of 50 km or less, use of the screening and preferred models
for the pollutants listed in this subsection shall be limited to the
same screening and preferred models approved for NAAQS compliance
demonstrations.
c. To determine if a compliance demonstration for NAAQS and/or
PSD increments may be necessary beyond 50 km (i.e., long-range
transport assessment), the following screening approach shall be
used to determine if a significant ambient impact will occur with
particular focus on Class I areas and/or the applicable receptors
that may be threatened at such distances.
i. Based on application in the near-field of the appropriate
screening and/or preferred model, determine the significance of the
ambient impacts at or about 50 km from the new or modifying source.
If a near-field assessment is not available or this initial analysis
indicates there may be significant ambient impacts at that distance,
then further assessment is necessary.
ii. For assessment of the significance of ambient impacts for
NAAQS and/or PSD increments, there is not a preferred model or
screening approach for distances beyond 50 km. Thus, the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and the EPA Regional Office
shall be consulted in determining the appropriate and agreed upon
screening technique to conduct the second level assessment.
Typically, a Lagrangian model is most appropriate to use for these
second level assessments, but applicants shall reach agreement on
the specific model and modeling parameters on a case-by-case basis
in consultation with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) and EPA Regional Office. When Lagrangian models are used in
this manner, they shall not include plume-depleting processes, such
that model estimates are considered conservative, as is generally
appropriate for screening assessments.
d. In those situations where a cumulative impact analysis for
NAAQS and/or PSD increments analysis beyond 50 km is necessary, the
selection and use of an alternative model shall occur in agreement
with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and
approval by the EPA Regional Office based on the requirements of
paragraph 3.2.2(e).
4.2.1 Screening Models and Techniques
a. Where a preliminary or conservative estimate is desired,
point source screening techniques are an acceptable approach to air
quality analyses.
b. As discussed in paragraph 2.2(a), screening models or
techniques are designed to provide a conservative estimate of
concentrations. The screening models used in most applications are
the screening versions of the preferred models for refined
applications. The two screening models, AERSCREEN 37 38
and CTSCREEN, are screening versions of AERMOD (American
Meteorological Society (AMS)/EPA Regulatory Model) and CTDMPLUS
(Complex Terrain Dispersion Model Plus Algorithms for Unstable
Situations), respectively. AERSCREEN is the recommended screening
model for most applications in all types of terrain and for
applications involving building downwash. For those applications in
complex terrain where the application involves a well-defined hill
or ridge, CTSCREEN \39\ can be used.
c. Although AERSCREEN and CTSCREEN are designed to address a
single-source scenario, there are approaches that can be used on a
case-by-case basis to address multi-source situations using
screening meteorology or other conservative model assumptions.
However, the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b))
shall be consulted, and concurrence obtained, on the protocol for
modeling multiple sources with AERSCREEN or CTSCREEN to ensure that
the worst case is identified and assessed.
d. As discussed in section 4.2.3.4, there are also screening
techniques built into AERMOD that use simplified or limited
chemistry assumptions for determining the partitioning of NO and
NO2 for NO2 modeling. These screening
techniques are part of the EPA's preferred modeling approach for
NO2 and do not need to be approved as an alternative
model. However, as with other screening models and techniques, their
usage shall occur in agreement with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
e. As discussed in section 4.2(c)(ii), there are screening
techniques needed for long-range transport assessments that will
typically involve the use of a Lagrangian model. Based on the long-
standing practice and documented capabilities of these models for
long-range transport assessments, the use of a Lagrangian model as a
screening technique for this purpose does not need to be approved as
an alternative model. However, their usage shall occur in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) and EPA Regional Office.
f. All screening models and techniques shall be configured to
appropriately address the site and problem at hand. Close attention
must be paid to whether the area should be classified urban or rural
in accordance with section 7.2.1.1. The climatology of the area must
be studied to help define the worst-case meteorological conditions.
Agreement shall be reached between the model user and the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) on the choice of
the screening model or technique for each analysis, on the input
data and model settings, and the appropriate metric for satisfying
regulatory requirements.
4.2.1.1 AERSCREEN
a. Released in 2011, AERSCREEN is the EPA's recommended
screening model for simple and complex terrain for single sources
including point sources, area sources, horizontal stacks, capped
stacks, and flares. AERSCREEN runs AERMOD in a screening mode and
consists of two main components: (1) the MAKEMET program which
generates a site-specific matrix of meteorological conditions for
input to the AERMOD model; and (2) the AERSCREEN command-prompt
interface.
b. The MAKEMET program generates a matrix of meteorological
conditions, in the form of AERMOD-ready surface and profile files,
based on user-specified surface characteristics, ambient
temperatures, minimum wind speed, and anemometer height. The
meteorological matrix is generated based on looping through a range
of wind speeds, cloud covers, ambient temperatures, solar elevation
angles, and convective velocity scales (w*, for convective
conditions only) based on user-specified surface characteristics for
surface roughness (Zo), Bowen ratio (Bo), and
albedo (r). For unstable cases, the convective mixing height
(Zic) is calculated based on w*, and the mechanical
mixing height (Zim) is calculated for unstable and stable
conditions based on the friction velocity, u*.
c. For applications involving simple or complex terrain,
AERSCREEN interfaces with AERMAP. AERSCREEN also interfaces with
BPIPPRM to provide the necessary building parameters for
applications involving building downwash using the Plume Rise Model
Enhancements (PRIME) downwash algorithm. AERSCREEN generates inputs
to AERMOD via MAKEMET, AERMAP, and BPIPPRM and invokes AERMOD in a
screening mode. The screening mode of AERMOD forces the AERMOD model
calculations to represent values for the plume centerline,
regardless of the source-receptor-wind direction orientation. The
maximum concentration output from AERSCREEN represents a worst-case
1-hour concentration. Averaging-time scaling factors of 1.0 for 3-
hour, 0.9 for 8-hour, 0.60 for 24-hour, and 0.10 for annual
concentration averages are applied internally by AERSCREEN to the
highest 1-hour concentration calculated by the model for non-area
type sources. For area type source concentrations for averaging
times greater than one hour, the concentrations are equal to the 1-
hour estimates.37 40
4.2.1.2 CTSCREEN
a. CTSCREEN 39 41 can be used to obtain conservative,
yet realistic, worst-case estimates for receptors located on terrain
above stack height. CTSCREEN accounts for the three-dimensional
nature of plume and
[[Page 72842]]
terrain interaction and requires detailed terrain data
representative of the modeling domain. The terrain data must be
digitized in the same manner as for CTDMPLUS and a terrain processor
is available.\42\ CTSCREEN is designed to execute a fixed matrix of
meteorological values for wind speed (u), standard deviation of
horizontal and vertical wind speeds ([sigma]v, [sigma]w), vertical
potential temperature gradient (d[theta]/dz), friction velocity
(u*), Monin-Obukhov length (L), mixing height (zi) as a
function of terrain height, and wind directions for both neutral/
stable conditions and unstable convective conditions. The maximum
concentration output from CTSCREEN represents a worst-case 1-hour
concentration. Time-scaling factors of 0.7 for 3-hour, 0.15 for 24-
hour and 0.03 for annual concentration averages are applied
internally by CTSCREEN to the highest 1-hour concentration
calculated by the model.
4.2.1.3 Screening in Complex Terrain
a. For applications utilizing AERSCREEN, AERSCREEN automatically
generates a polar-grid receptor network with spacing determined by
the maximum distance to model. If the application warrants a
different receptor network than that generated by AERSCREEN, it may
be necessary to run AERMOD in screening mode with a user-defined
network. For CTSCREEN applications or AERMOD in screening mode
outside of AERSCREEN, placement of receptors requires very careful
attention when modeling in complex terrain. Often the highest
concentrations are predicted to occur under very stable conditions,
when the plume is near or impinges on the terrain. Under such
conditions, the plume may be quite narrow in the vertical, so that
even relatively small changes in a receptor's location may
substantially affect the predicted concentration. Receptors within
about a kilometer of the source may be even more sensitive to
location. Thus, a dense array of receptors may be required in some
cases.
b. For applications involving AERSCREEN, AERSCREEN interfaces
with AERMAP to generate the receptor elevations. For applications
involving CTSCREEN, digitized contour data must be preprocessed \42\
to provide hill shape parameters in suitable input format. The user
then supplies receptor locations either through an interactive
program that is part of the model or directly, by using a text
editor; using both methods to select receptor locations will
generally be necessary to assure that the maximum concentrations are
estimated by either model. In cases where a terrain feature may
``appear to the plume'' as smaller, multiple hills, it may be
necessary to model the terrain both as a single feature and as
multiple hills to determine design concentrations.
c. Other screening techniques may be acceptable for complex
terrain cases where established procedures \43\ are used. The user
is encouraged to confer with the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) if any unforeseen problems are encountered, e.g.,
applicability, meteorological data, receptor siting, or terrain
contour processing issues.
4.2.2 Refined Models
a. A brief description of each preferred model for refined
applications is found in addendum A. Also listed in that addendum
Are availability, the model input requirements, the standard options
that shall be selected when running the program, and output options.
4.2.2.1 AERMOD
a. For a wide range of regulatory applications in all types of
terrain, and for aerodynamic building downwash, the required model
is AERMOD.44 45 The AERMOD regulatory modeling system
consists of the AERMOD dispersion model, the AERMET meteorological
processor, and the AERMAP terrain processor. AERMOD is a steady-
state Gaussian plume model applicable to directly emitted air
pollutants that employs best state-of-practice parameterizations for
characterizing the meteorological influences and dispersion.
Differentiation of simple versus complex terrain is unnecessary with
AERMOD. In complex terrain, AERMOD employs the well-known dividing-
streamline concept in a simplified simulation of the effects of
plume-terrain interactions.
b. The AERMOD Modeling System has been extensively evaluated
across a wide range of scenarios based on numerous field studies,
including tall stacks in flat and complex terrain settings, sources
subject to building downwash influences, and low-level non-buoyant
sources.\27\ These evaluations included several long-term field
studies associated with operating plants as well as several
intensive tracer studies. Based on these evaluations, AERMOD has
shown consistently good performance, with ``errors'' in predicted
versus observed peak concentrations, based on the Robust Highest
Concentration (RHC) metric, consistently within the range of 10 to
40 percent (cited in paragraph 4.1(e)).
c. AERMOD incorporates the PRIME algorithm to account for
enhanced plume growth and restricted plume rise for plumes affected
by building wake effects.\46\ The PRIME algorithm accounts for
entrainment of plume mass into the cavity recirculation region,
including re-entrainment of plume mass into the wake region beyond
the cavity.
d. AERMOD incorporates the Buoyant Line and Point Source (BLP)
Dispersion model to account for buoyant plume rise from line
sources. The BLP option utilizes the standard meteorological inputs
provided by the AERMET meteorological processor.
e. The state-of-the-science for modeling atmospheric deposition
is evolving, new modeling techniques are continually being assessed,
and their results are being compared with observations.
Consequently, while deposition treatment is available in AERMOD, the
approach taken for any purpose shall be coordinated with the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
f. The AERMET meteorological processor incorporates the COARE
algorithms to derive marine boundary layer parameters for overwater
applications of AERMOD.47 48 AERMOD is applicable for
some overwater applications when platform downwash and shoreline
fumigation are adequately considered in consultation with the
Regional Office and appropriate reviewing authority. Where the
effects of shoreline fumigation and platform downwash need to be
assessed, the Offshore and Coastal Dispersion (OCD) model is the
applicable model (paragraph 4.2.2.3).
4.2.2.2 CTDMPLUS
a. If the modeling application involves an elevated point source
with a well-defined hill or ridge and a detailed dispersion analysis
of the spatial pattern of plume impacts is of interest, CTDMPLUS is
available. CTDMPLUS provides greater resolution of concentrations
about the contour of the hill feature than does AERMOD through a
different plume-terrain interaction algorithm.
4.2.2.3 OCD
a. The OCD (Offshore and Coastal Dispersion) model is a
straight-line Gaussian model that incorporates overwater plume
transport and dispersion as well as changes that occur as the plume
crosses the shoreline. OCD can determine the impact of offshore
emissions from point, area, or line sources on the air quality of
coastal regions. OCD is also applicable for situations that involve
platform building downwash.
4.2.3 Pollutant Specific Modeling Requirements
4.2.3.1 Models for Carbon Monoxide
a. Models for assessing the impact of CO emissions are needed to
meet NSR requirements to address compliance with the CO NAAQS and to
determine localized impacts from transportations projects. Examples
include evaluating effects of point sources, congested roadway
intersections and highways, as well as the cumulative effect of
numerous sources of CO in an urban area.
b. The general modeling recommendations and requirements for
screening models in section 4.2.1 and refined models in section
4.2.2 shall be applied for CO modeling. Given the relatively low CO
background concentrations, screening techniques are likely to be
adequate in most cases. In applying these recommendations and
requirements, the existing 1992 EPA guidance for screening CO
impacts from highways may be consulted.\49\
4.2.3.2 Models for Lead
a. In January 1999 (40 CFR part 58, appendix D), the EPA gave
notice that concern about ambient lead impacts was being shifted
away from roadways and toward a focus on stationary point sources.
Thus, models for assessing the impact of lead emissions are needed
to meet NSR requirements to address compliance with the lead NAAQS
and for SIP attainment demonstrations. The EPA has also issued
guidance on siting ambient monitors in the vicinity of stationary
point sources.\50\ For lead, the SIP should contain an air quality
analysis to determine the maximum rolling 3-month average lead
concentration resulting from major lead point sources, such as
smelters, gasoline additive plants, etc. The EPA has developed a
post-processor to calculate rolling 3-month average concentrations
from model output.\51\ General
[[Page 72843]]
guidance for lead SIP development is also available.\52\
b. For major lead point sources, such as smelters, which
contribute fugitive emissions and for which deposition is important,
professional judgment should be used, and there shall be
coordination with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)). For most applications, the general requirements for
screening and refined models of section 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 are
applicable to lead modeling.
4.2.3.3 Models for Sulfur Dioxide
a. Models for SO2 are needed to meet NSR requirements
to address compliance with the SO2 NAAQS and PSD
increments, for SIP attainment demonstrations,\53\ and for
characterizing current air quality via modeling.\54\ SO2
is one of a group of highly reactive gases known as ``oxides of
sulfur'' with largest emissions sources being fossil fuel combustion
at power plants and other industrial facilities.
b. Given the relatively inert nature of SO2 on the
short-term time scales of interest (i.e., 1-hour) and the sources of
SO2 (i.e., stationary point sources), the general
modeling requirements for screening models in section 4.2.1 and
refined models in section 4.2.2 are applicable for SO2
modeling applications. For urban areas, AERMOD automatically invokes
a half-life of 4 hours \55\ to SO2. Therefore, care must
be taken when determining whether a source is urban or rural (see
section 7.2.1.1 for urban/rural determination methodology).
4.2.3.4 Models for Nitrogen Dioxide
a. Models for assessing the impact of sources on ambient
NO2 concentrations are needed to meet NSR requirements to
address compliance with the NO2 NAAQS and PSD increments.
Impact of an individual source on ambient NO2 depends, in
part, on the chemical environment into which the source's plume is
to be emitted. This is due to the fact that NO2 sources
co-emit NO along with NO2 and any emitted NO may react
with ambient ozone to convert to additional NO2 downwind.
Thus, comprehensive modeling of NO2 would need to
consider the ratio of emitted NO and NO2, the ambient
levels of ozone and subsequent reactions between ozone and NO, and
the photolysis of NO2 to NO.
b. Due to the complexity of NO2 modeling, a multi-
tiered screening approach is required to obtain hourly and annual
average estimates of NO2.\56\ Since these methods are
considered screening techniques, their usage shall occur in
agreement with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)). Additionally, since screening techniques are conservative
by their nature, there are limitations to how these options can be
used. Specifically, modeling of negative emissions rates should only
be done after consultation with the EPA Regional Office to ensure
that decreases in concentrations would not be overestimated. Each
tiered approach (see Figure 4-1) accounts for increasingly complex
considerations of NO2 chemistry and is described in
paragraphs c through e of this subsection. The tiers of
NO2 modeling include:
i. A first-tier (most conservative) ``full'' conversion
approach;
ii. A second-tier approach that assumes ambient equilibrium
between NO and NO2; and
iii. A third-tier consisting of several detailed screening
techniques that account for ambient ozone and the relative amount of
NO and NO2 emitted from a source.
c. For Tier 1, use an appropriate refined model (section 4.2.2)
to estimate nitrogen oxides (NOX) concentrations and
assume a total conversion of NO to NO2.
d. For Tier 2, multiply the Tier 1 result(s) by the Ambient
Ratio Method 2 (ARM2), which provides estimates of representative
equilibrium ratios of NO2/NOX value based
ambient levels of NO2 and NOX derived from
national data from the EPA's Air Quality System (AQS).\57\ The
national default for ARM2 includes a minimum ambient NO2/
NOX ratio of 0.5 and a maximum ambient ratio of 0.9. The
reviewing agency may establish alternative minimum ambient
NO2/NOX values based on the source's in-stack
emissions ratios, with alternative minimum ambient ratios reflecting
the source's in-stack NO2/NOX ratios.
Preferably, alternative minimum ambient NO2/
NOX ratios should be based on source-specific data which
satisfies all quality assurance procedures that ensure data accuracy
for both NO2 and NOX within the typical range
of measured values. However, alternate information may be used to
justify a source's anticipated NO2/NOX in-
stack ratios, such as manufacturer test data, State or local agency
guidance, peer-reviewed literature, and/or the EPA's NO2/
NOX ratio database.
e. For Tier 3, a detailed screening technique shall be applied
on a case-by-case basis. Because of the additional input data
requirements and complexities associated with the Tier 3 options,
their usage shall occur in consultation with the EPA Regional Office
in addition to the appropriate reviewing authority. The Ozone
Limiting Method (OLM),\58\ the Plume Volume Molar Ratio Method
(PVMRM),\59\ and the Generic Set Reaction Method (GRSM)
60 61 are three detailed screening techniques that may be
used for most sources. These three techniques use an appropriate
section 4.2.2 model to estimate NOX concentrations and
then estimate the conversion of primary NO emissions to
NO2 based on the ambient levels of ozone and the plume
characteristics. OLM only accounts for NO2 formation
based on the ambient levels of ozone while PVMRM and GRSM also
accommodate distance-dependent conversion ratios based on ambient
ozone. GRSM, PVMRM and OLM require explicit specification of the
NO2/NOX in-stack ratios and that ambient ozone
concentrations be provided on an hourly basis. GRSM requires hourly
ambient NOX concentrations in addition to hourly ozone.
f. Alternative models or techniques may be considered on a case-
by-case basis and their usage shall be approved by the EPA Regional
Office (section 3.2). Such models or techniques should consider
individual quantities of NO and NO2 emissions,
atmospheric transport and dispersion, and atmospheric transformation
of NO to NO2. Dispersion models that account for more
explicit photochemistry may also be considered as an alternative
model to estimate ambient impacts of NOX sources.
[[Page 72844]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TP23OC23.000
Figure 4-1: Multi-Tiered Approach for Estimating NO2 Concentrations
4.2.3.5 Models for PM2.5
a. PM2.5 is a mixture consisting of several diverse
components.\62\ Ambient PM2.5 generally consists of two
components: (1) the primary component, emitted directly from a
source; and (2) the secondary component, formed in the atmosphere
from other pollutants emitted from the source. Models for
PM2.5 are needed to meet NSR requirements to address
compliance with the PM2.5 NAAQS and PSD increments and
for SIP attainment demonstrations.
b. For NSR modeling assessments, the general modeling
requirements for screening models in section 4.2.1 and refined
models in section 4.2.2 are applicable for the primary component of
PM2.5, while the methods in section 5.4 are applicable
for addressing the secondary component of PM2.5. Guidance
for PSD assessments is available for determining the best approach
to handling sources of primary and secondary PM2.5.\63\
c. For SIP attainment demonstrations and regional haze
reasonable progress goal analyses, effects of a control strategy on
PM2.5 are estimated from the sum of the effects on the
primary and secondary components composing PM2.5. Model
users should refer to section 5.4.1 and associated SIP modeling
guidance \64\ for further details concerning appropriate modeling
approaches.
d. The general modeling requirements for the refined models
discussed in section 4.2.2 shall be applied for PM2.5
hot-spot modeling for mobile sources. Specific guidance is available
for analyzing direct PM2.5 impacts from highways,
terminals, and other transportation projects.\65\
4.2.3.6 Models for PM10
a. Models for PM10 are needed to meet NSR
requirements to address compliance with the PM10 NAAQS
and PSD increments and for SIP attainment demonstrations.
b. For most sources, the general modeling requirements for
screening models in section 4.2.1 and refined models in section
4.2.2 shall be applied for PM10 modeling. In cases where
the particle size and its effect on ambient concentrations need to
be considered, particle deposition may be used on a case-by-case
basis and their usage shall be coordinated with the appropriate
reviewing authority. A SIP development guide \66\ is also available
to assist in PM10 analyses and control strategy
development.
c. Fugitive dust usually refers to dust put into the atmosphere
by the wind blowing over plowed fields, dirt roads, or desert or
sandy areas with little or no vegetation. Fugitive emissions include
the emissions resulting from the industrial process that are not
captured and vented through a stack, but may be released from
various locations within the complex. In some unique cases, a model
developed specifically for the situation may be needed. Due to the
difficult nature of characterizing and modeling fugitive dust and
fugitive emissions, the proposed procedure shall be determined in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) for each specific situation before the modeling exercise is
begun. Re-entrained dust is created by vehicles driving over dirt
roads (e.g., haul roads) and dust-covered roads typically found in
arid areas. Such sources can be characterized as line, area or
volume sources.65 67 Emission rates may be based on site-
specific data or values from the general literature.
d. Under certain conditions, recommended dispersion models may
not be suitable to appropriately address the nature of ambient
PM10. In these circumstances, the alternative modeling
approach shall be approved by the EPA Regional Office (section 3.2).
e. The general modeling requirements for the refined models
discussed in section 4.2.2 shall be applied for PM10 hot-
spot modeling for mobile sources. Specific guidance is available for
analyzing direct PM10 impacts from highways, terminals,
and other transportation projects.\65\
5.0 Models for Ozone and Secondarily Formed Particulate Matter
5.1 Discussion
a. Air pollutants formed through chemical reactions in the
atmosphere are referred to as secondary pollutants. For example,
ground-level ozone and a portion of PM2.5 are secondary
pollutants formed through photochemical reactions. Ozone and
secondarily formed particulate matter are closely related to each
other in that they share common sources of emissions and are formed
in the atmosphere from chemical reactions with similar precursors.
b. Ozone formation is driven by emissions of NOX and
volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Ozone formation is a complicated
nonlinear process that requires favorable meteorological conditions
in addition to VOC and NOX emissions. Sometimes complex
terrain features also contribute to the build-up of precursors and
subsequent ozone formation or destruction.
c. PM2.5 can be either primary (i.e., emitted
directly from sources) or secondary in nature. The fraction of
PM2.5 which is primary versus secondary varies by
location and season. In the United States, PM2.5 is
dominated by a variety of chemical species or components of
atmospheric particles, such as ammonium sulfate, ammonium nitrate,
organic carbon mass, elemental carbon, and other soil compounds and
oxidized metals. PM2.5 sulfate, nitrate, and ammonium
ions are predominantly the result of chemical reactions of the
oxidized products of SO2 and NOX emissions
with direct ammonia emissions.\68\
d. Control measures reducing ozone and PM2.5
precursor emissions may not lead to proportional reductions in ozone
and PM2.5. Modeled strategies designed to reduce ozone or
PM2.5 levels typically need to consider the chemical
coupling between these pollutants. This coupling is important in
understanding processes that control the levels of both pollutants.
Thus, when feasible, it is important to use models that take into
account the chemical coupling between ozone and PM2.5. In
addition, using such a multi-pollutant modeling system can reduce
the resource burden associated with applying and evaluating separate
models for each pollutant and promotes consistency among the
strategies themselves.
e. PM2.5 is a mixture consisting of several diverse
chemical species or components of
[[Page 72845]]
atmospheric particles. Because chemical and physical properties and
origins of each component differ, it may be appropriate to use
either a single model capable of addressing several of the important
components or to model primary and secondary components using
different models. Effects of a control strategy on PM2.5
is estimated from the sum of the effects on the specific components
comprising PM2.5.
5.2 Recommendations
a. Chemical transformations can play an important role in
defining the concentrations and properties of certain air
pollutants. Models that take into account chemical reactions and
physical processes of various pollutants (including precursors) are
needed for determining the current state of air quality, as well as
predicting and projecting the future evolution of these pollutants.
It is important that a modeling system provide a realistic
representation of chemical and physical processes leading to
secondary pollutant formation and removal from the atmosphere.
b. Chemical transport models treat atmospheric chemical and
physical processes such as deposition and motion. There are two
types of chemical transport models, Eulerian (grid based) and
Lagrangian. These types of models are differentiated from each other
by their frame of reference. Eulerian models are based on a fixed
frame of reference and Lagrangian models use a frame of reference
that moves with parcels of air between the source and receptor
point.\9\ Photochemical grid models are three-dimensional Eulerian
grid-based models that treat chemical and physical processes in each
grid cell and use diffusion and transport processes to move chemical
species between grid cells.\9\ These types of models are appropriate
for assessment of near-field and regional scale reactive pollutant
impacts from specific sources 7 10 11 12 or all
sources.13 14 15 In some limited cases, the secondary
processes can be treated with a box model, ideally in combination
with a number of other modeling techniques and/or analyses to treat
individual source sectors.
c. Regardless of the modeling system used to estimate secondary
impacts of ozone and/or PM2.5, model results should be
compared to observation data to generate confidence that the
modeling system is representative of the local and regional air
quality. For ozone related projects, model estimates of ozone should
be compared with observations in both time and space. For
PM2.5, model estimates of speciated PM2.5
components (such as sulfate ion, nitrate ion, etc.) should be
compared with observations in both time and space.\69\
d. Model performance metrics comparing observations and
predictions are often used to summarize model performance. These
metrics include mean bias, mean error, fractional bias, fractional
error, and correlation coefficient.\69\ There are no specific levels
of any model performance metric that indicate ``acceptable'' model
performance. The EPA's preferred approach for providing context
about model performance is to compare model performance metrics with
similar contemporary applications.64 69 Because model
application purpose and scope vary, model users should consult with
the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) to determine
what model performance elements should be emphasized and presented
to provide confidence in the regulatory model application.
e. There is no preferred modeling system or technique for
estimating ozone or secondary PM2.5 for specific source
impacts or to assess impacts from multiple sources. For assessing
secondary pollutant impacts from single sources, the degree of
complexity required to assess potential impacts varies depending on
the nature of the source, its emissions, and the background
environment. The EPA recommends a two-tiered approach where the
first tier consists of using existing technically credible and
appropriate relationships between emissions and impacts developed
from previous modeling that is deemed sufficient for evaluating a
source's impacts. The second tier consists of more sophisticated
case-specific modeling analyses. The appropriate tier for a given
application should be selected in consultation with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and be consistent with EPA
guidance.\70\
5.3 Recommended Models and Approaches for Ozone
a. Models that estimate ozone concentrations are needed to guide
the choice of strategies for the purposes of a nonattainment area
demonstrating future year attainment of the ozone NAAQS.
Additionally, models that estimate ozone concentrations are needed
to assess impacts from specific sources or source complexes to
satisfy requirements for NSR and other regulatory programs. Other
purposes for ozone modeling include estimating the impacts of
specific events on air quality, ozone deposition impacts, and
planning for areas that may be attaining the ozone NAAQS.
5.3.1 Models for NAAQS Attainment Demonstrations and Multi-Source Air
Quality Assessments
a. Simulation of ozone formation and transport is a complex
exercise. Control agencies with jurisdiction over areas with ozone
problems should use photochemical grid models to evaluate the
relationship between precursor species and ozone. Use of
photochemical grid models is the recommended means for identifying
control strategies needed to address high ozone concentrations in
such areas. Judgment on the suitability of a model for a given
application should consider factors that include use of the model in
an attainment test, development of emissions and meteorological
inputs to the model, and choice of episodes to model. Guidance on
the use of models and other analyses for demonstrating attainment of
the air quality goals for ozone is available.63 64 Users
should consult with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) to ensure the most current modeling guidance is applied.
5.3.2 Models for Single-Source Air Quality Assessments
a. Depending on the magnitude of emissions, estimating the
impact of an individual source's emissions of NOX and VOC
on ambient ozone is necessary for obtaining a permit. The simulation
of ozone formation and transport requires realistic treatment of
atmospheric chemistry and deposition. Models (e.g., Lagrangian and
photochemical grid models) that integrate chemical and physical
processes important in the formation, decay, and transport of ozone
and important precursor species should be applied. Photochemical
grid models are primarily designed to characterize precursor
emissions and impacts from a wide variety of sources over a large
geographic area but can also be used to assess the impacts from
specific sources.7 11 12
b. The first tier of assessment for ozone impacts involves those
situations where existing technical information is available (e.g.,
results from existing photochemical grid modeling, published
empirical estimates of source specific impacts, or reduced-form
models) in combination with other supportive information and
analysis for the purposes of estimating secondary impacts from a
particular source. The existing technical information should provide
a credible and representative estimate of the secondary impacts from
the project source. The appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) and appropriate EPA guidance 70 71 should be
consulted to determine what types of assessments may be appropriate
on a case-by-case basis.
c. The second tier of assessment for ozone impacts involves
those situations where existing technical information is not
available or a first tier demonstration indicates a more refined
assessment is needed. For these situations, chemical transport
models should be used to address single-source impacts. Special
considerations are needed when using these models to evaluate the
ozone impact from an individual source. Guidance on the use of
models and other analyses for demonstrating the impacts of single
sources for ozone is available.\70\ This guidance document provides
a more detailed discussion of the appropriate approaches to
obtaining estimates of ozone impacts from a single source. Model
users should use the latest version of the guidance in consultation
with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) to
determine the most suitable refined approach for single-source ozone
modeling on a case-by-case basis.
5.4 Recommended Models and Approaches for Secondarily Formed PM2.5
a. Models that estimate PM2.5 concentrations are
needed to guide the choice of strategies for the purposes of a
nonattainment area demonstrating future year attainment of the
PM2.5 NAAQS. Additionally, models that estimate
PM2.5 concentrations are needed to assess impacts from
specific sources or source complexes to satisfy requirements for NSR
and other regulatory programs. Other purposes for PM2.5
modeling include estimating the impacts of specific events on air
quality,
[[Page 72846]]
visibility, deposition impacts, and planning for areas that may be
attaining the PM2.5 NAAQS.
5.4.1 Models for NAAQS Attainment Demonstrations and Multi-Source Air
Quality Assessments
a. Models for PM2.5 are needed to assess the adequacy
of a proposed strategy for meeting the annual and 24-hour
PM2.5 NAAQS. Modeling primary and secondary
PM2.5 can be a multi-faceted and complex problem,
especially for secondary components of PM2.5 such as
sulfates and nitrates. Control agencies with jurisdiction over areas
with secondary PM2.5 problems should use models that
integrate chemical and physical processes important in the
formation, decay, and transport of these species (e.g.,
photochemical grid models). Suitability of a modeling approach or
mix of modeling approaches for a given application requires
technical judgment as well as professional experience in choice of
models, use of the model(s) in an attainment test, development of
emissions and meteorological inputs to the model, and selection of
days to model. Guidance on the use of models and other analyses for
demonstrating attainment of the air quality goals for
PM2.5 is available.63 64 Users should consult
with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) to
ensure the most current modeling guidance is applied.
5.4.2 Models for Single-Source Air Quality Assessments
a. Depending on the magnitude of emissions, estimating the
impact of an individual source's emissions on secondary particulate
matter concentrations may be necessary for obtaining a permit.
Primary PM2.5 components shall be simulated using the
general modeling requirements in section 4.2.3.5. The simulation of
secondary particulate matter formation and transport is a complex
exercise requiring realistic treatment of atmospheric chemistry and
deposition. Models should be applied that integrate chemical and
physical processes important in the formation, decay, and transport
of these species (e.g., Lagrangian and photochemical grid models).
Photochemical grid models are primarily designed to characterize
precursor emissions and impacts from a wide variety of sources over
a large geographic area and can also be used to assess the impacts
from specific sources.7 10 For situations where a project
source emits both primary PM2.5 and PM2.5
precursors, the contribution from both should be combined for use in
determining the source's ambient impact. Approaches for combining
primary and secondary impacts are provided in appropriate guidance
for single source permit related demonstrations.\70\
b. The first tier of assessment for secondary PM2.5
impacts involves those situations where existing technical
information is available (e.g., results from existing photochemical
grid modeling, published empirical estimates of source specific
impacts, or reduced-form models) in combination with other
supportive information and analysis for the purposes of estimating
secondary impacts from a particular source. The existing technical
information should provide a credible and representative estimate of
the secondary impacts from the project source. The appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and appropriate EPA guidance
70 71 should be consulted to determine what types of
assessments may be appropriate on a case-by-case basis.
c. The second tier of assessment for secondary PM2.5
impacts involves those situations where existing technical
information is not available or a first tier demonstration indicates
a more refined assessment is needed. For these situations, chemical
transport models should be used for assessments of single-source
impacts. Special considerations are needed when using these models
to evaluate the secondary particulate matter impact from an
individual source. Guidance on the use of models and other analyses
for demonstrating the impacts of single sources for secondary
PM2.5 is available.\70\ This guidance document provides a
more detailed discussion of the appropriate approaches to obtaining
estimates of secondary particulate matter concentrations from a
single source. Model users should use the latest version of this
guidance in consultation with the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) to determine the most suitable single-source
modeling approach for secondary PM2.5 on a case-by-case
basis.
6.0 Modeling for Air Quality Related Values and Other Governmental
Programs
6.1 Discussion
a. Other Federal government agencies and State, local, and
Tribal agencies with air quality and land management
responsibilities have also developed specific modeling approaches
for their own regulatory or other requirements. Although such
regulatory requirements and guidance have come about because of EPA
rules or standards, the implementation of such regulations and the
use of the modeling techniques is under the jurisdiction of the
agency issuing the guidance or directive. This section covers such
situations with reference to those guidance documents, when they are
available.
b. When using the model recommended or discussed in the
Guideline in support of programmatic requirements not specifically
covered by EPA regulations, the model user should consult the
appropriate Federal, State, local, or Tribal agency to ensure the
proper application and use of the models and/or techniques. These
agencies have developed specific modeling approaches for their own
regulatory or other requirements. Most of the programs have, or will
have when fully developed, separate guidance documents that cover
the program and a discussion of the tools that are needed. The
following paragraphs reference those guidance documents, when they
are available.
6.2 Air Quality Related Values
a. The 1990 CAA Amendments give FLMs an ``affirmative
responsibility'' to protect the natural and cultural resources of
Class I areas from the adverse impacts of air pollution and to
provide the appropriate procedures and analysis techniques. The CAA
identifies the FLM as the Secretary of the department, or their
designee, with authority over these lands. Mandatory Federal Class I
areas are defined in the CAA as international parks, national parks
over 6,000 acres, and wilderness areas and memorial parks over 5,000
acres, established as of 1977. The FLMs are also concerned with the
protection of resources in federally managed Class II areas because
of other statutory mandates to protect these areas. Where State or
Tribal agencies have successfully petitioned the EPA and lands have
been redesignated to Class I status, these agencies may have
equivalent responsibilities to that of the FLMs for these non-
Federal Class I areas as described throughout the remainder of
section 6.2.
b. The FLM agency responsibilities include the review of air
quality permit applications from proposed new or modified major
pollution sources that may affect these Class I areas to determine
if emissions from a proposed or modified source will cause or
contribute to adverse impacts on air quality related values (AQRVs)
of a Class I area and making recommendations to the FLM. AQRVs are
resources, identified by the FLM agencies, that have the potential
to be affected by air pollution. These resources may include
visibility, scenic, cultural, physical, or ecological resources for
a particular area. The FLM agencies take into account the particular
resources and AQRVs that would be affected; the frequency and
magnitude of any potential impacts; and the direct, indirect, and
cumulative effects of any potential impacts in making their
recommendations.
c. While the AQRV notification and impact analysis requirements
are outlined in the PSD regulations at 40 CFR 51.166(p) and 40 CFR
52.21(p), determination of appropriate analytical methods and
metrics for AQRV's are determined by the FLM agencies and are
published in guidance external to the general recommendations of
this paragraph.
d. To develop greater consistency in the application of air
quality models to assess potential AQRV impacts in both Class I
areas and protected Class II areas, the FLM agencies have developed
the Federal Land Managers' Air Quality Related Values Work Group
Phase I Report (FLAG).\72\ FLAG focuses upon specific technical and
policy issues associated with visibility impairment, effects of
pollutant deposition on soils and surface waters, and ozone effects
on vegetation. Model users should consult the latest version of the
FLAG report for current modeling guidance and with affected FLM
agency representatives for any application specific guidance which
is beyond the scope of the Guideline.
6.2.1 Visibility
a. Visibility in important natural areas (e.g., Federal Class I
areas) is protected under a number of provisions of the CAA,
including sections 169A and 169B (addressing impacts primarily from
existing sources) and section 165 (new source review). Visibility
impairment is caused by light scattering and light absorption
associated with particles and gases in the atmosphere. In most areas
of the country, light scattering by PM2.5 is the most
[[Page 72847]]
significant component of visibility impairment. The key components
of PM2.5 contributing to visibility impairment include
sulfates, nitrates, organic carbon, elemental carbon, and crustal
material.\72\
b. Visibility regulations (40 CFR 51.300 through 51.309) require
State, local, and Tribal agencies to mitigate current and prevent
future visibility impairment in any of the 156 mandatory Federal
Class I areas where visibility is considered an important attribute.
In 1999, the EPA issued revisions to the regulations to address
visibility impairment in the form of regional haze, which is caused
by numerous, diverse sources (e.g., stationary, mobile, and area
sources) located across a broad region (40 CFR 51.308 through
51.309). The state of relevant scientific knowledge has expanded
significantly since that time. A number of studies and reports
73 74 have concluded that long-range transport (e.g., up
to hundreds of kilometers) of fine particulate matter plays a
significant role in visibility impairment across the country.
Section 169A of the CAA requires States to develop SIPs containing
long-term strategies for remedying existing and preventing future
visibility impairment in the 156 mandatory Class I Federal areas,
where visibility is considered an important attribute. In order to
develop long-term strategies to address regional haze, many State,
local, and Tribal agencies will need to conduct regional-scale
modeling of fine particulate concentrations and associated
visibility impairment.
c. The FLAG visibility modeling recommendations are divided into
two distinct sections to address different requirements for: (1)
near field modeling where plumes or layers are compared against a
viewing background, and (2) distant/multi-source modeling for plumes
and aggregations of plumes that affect the general appearance of a
scene.\72\ The recommendations separately address visibility
assessments for sources proposing to locate relatively near and at
farther distances from these areas.\72\
6.2.1.1 Models for Estimating Near-Field Visibility Impairment
a. To calculate the potential impact of a plume of specified
emissions for specific transport and dispersion conditions (``plume
blight'') for source-receptor distances less than 50 km, a screening
model and guidance are available.72 75 If a more
comprehensive analysis is necessary, a refined model should be
selected. The model selection, procedures, and analyses should be
determined in consultation with the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) and the affected FLM(s).
6.2.1.2 Models for Estimating Visibility Impairment for Long-Range
Transport
a. Chemical transformations can play an important role in
defining the concentrations and properties of certain air
pollutants. Models that take into account chemical reactions and
physical processes of various pollutants (including precursors) are
needed for determining the current state of air quality, as well as
predicting and projecting the future evolution of these pollutants.
It is important that a modeling system provide a realistic
representation of chemical and physical processes leading to
secondary pollutant formation and removal from the atmosphere.
b. Chemical transport models treat atmospheric chemical and
physical processes such as deposition and motion. There are two
types of chemical transport models, Eulerian (grid based) and
Lagrangian. These types of models are differentiated from each other
by their frame of reference. Eulerian models are based on a fixed
frame of reference and Lagrangian models use a frame of reference
that moves with parcels of air between the source and receptor
point.\9\ Photochemical grid models are three-dimensional Eulerian
grid-based models that treat chemical and physical processes in each
grid cell and use diffusion and transport processes to move chemical
species between grid cells.\9\ These types of models are appropriate
for assessment of near-field and regional scale reactive pollutant
impacts from specific sources 7 10 11 12 or all
sources.13 14 15
c. Development of the requisite meteorological and emissions
databases necessary for use of photochemical grid models to estimate
AQRVs should conform to recommendations in section 8 and those
outlined in the EPA's Modeling Guidance for Demonstrating Attainment
of Air Quality Goals for Ozone, PM2.5, and Regional
Haze.64 Demonstration of the adequacy of prognostic
meteorological fields can be established through appropriate
diagnostic and statistical performance evaluations consistent with
recommendations provided in the appropriate guidance.\64\ Model
users should consult the latest version of this guidance and with
the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) for any
application-specific guidance that is beyond the scope of this
subsection.
6.2.2 Models for Estimating Deposition Impacts
a. For many Class I areas, AQRVs have been identified that are
sensitive to atmospheric deposition of air pollutants. Emissions of
NOX, sulfur oxides, NH3, mercury, and
secondary pollutants such as ozone and particulate matter affect
components of ecosystems. In sensitive ecosystems, these compounds
can acidify soils and surface waters, add nutrients that change
biodiversity, and affect the ecosystem services provided by forests
and natural areas.\72\ To address the relationship between
deposition and ecosystem effects, the FLM agencies have developed
estimates of critical loads. A critical load is defined as, ``A
quantitative estimate of an exposure to one or more pollutants below
which significant harmful effects on specified sensitive elements of
the environment do not occur according to present knowledge.'' \76\
b. The FLM deposition modeling recommendations are divided into
two distinct sections to address different requirements for: (1)
near field modeling, and (2) distant/multi-source modeling for
cumulative effects. The recommendations separately address
deposition assessments for sources proposing to locate relatively
near and at farther distances from these areas.\72\ Where the source
and receptors are not in close proximity, chemical transport (e.g.,
photochemical grid) models generally should be applied for an
assessment of deposition impacts due to one or a small group of
sources. Over these distances, chemical and physical transformations
can change atmospheric residence time due to different propensity
for deposition to the surface of different forms of nitrate and
sulfate. Users should consult the latest version of the FLAG report
\72\ and relevant FLM representatives for guidance on the use of
models for deposition. Where source and receptors are in close
proximity, users should contact the appropriate FLM for application-
specific guidance.
6.3 Modeling Guidance for Other Governmental Programs
a. Dispersion and photochemical grid modeling may need to be
conducted to ensure that individual and cumulative offshore oil and
gas exploration, development, and production plans and activities do
not significantly affect the air quality of any State as required
under the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act (OCSLA). Air quality
modeling requires various input datasets, including emissions
sources, meteorology, and pre-existing pollutant concentrations. For
sources under the reviewing authority of the Department of Interior,
Bureau of Ocean Energy Management (BOEM), guidance for the
development of all necessary Outer Continental Shelf (OCS) air
quality modeling inputs and appropriate model selection and
application is available from the BOEM's website: https://www.boem.gov/about-boem/regulations-guidance/guidance-portal.
b. The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) is the appropriate
reviewing authority for air quality assessments of primary pollutant
impacts at airports and air bases. The Aviation Environmental Design
Tool (AEDT) is developed and supported by the FAA, and is
appropriate for air quality assessment of primary pollutant impacts
at airports or air bases. AEDT has adopted AERMOD for treating
dispersion. Application of AEDT is intended for estimating the
change in emissions for aircraft operations, point source, and
mobile source emissions on airport property and quantify the
associated pollutant level- concentrations. AEDT is not intended for
PSD, SIP, or other regulatory air quality analyses of point or
mobile sources at or peripheral to airport property that are
unrelated to airport operations. The latest version of AEDT may be
obtained from the FAA at: https://aedt.faa.gov.
7.0 General Modeling Considerations
7.1 Discussion
a. This section contains recommendations concerning a number of
different issues not explicitly covered in other sections of the
Guideline. The topics covered here are not specific to any one
program or modeling area, but are common to dispersion modeling
analyses for criteria pollutants.
7.2 Recommendations
7.2.1 All sources
7.2.1.1 Dispersion Coefficients
a. For any dispersion modeling exercise, the urban or rural
determination of a source
[[Page 72848]]
is critical in determining the boundary layer characteristics that
affect the model's prediction of downwind concentrations.
Historically, steady-state Gaussian plume models used in most
applications have employed dispersion coefficients based on
Pasquill-Gifford \77\ in rural areas and McElroy-Pooler \78\ in
urban areas. These coefficients are still incorporated in the BLP
and OCD models. However, the AERMOD model incorporates a more up-to-
date characterization of the atmospheric boundary layer using
continuous functions of parameterized horizontal and vertical
turbulence based on Monin-Obukhov similarity (scaling)
relationships.\44\ Another key feature of AERMOD's formulation is
the option to use directly observed variables of the boundary layer
to parameterize dispersion.44 45
b. The selection of rural or urban dispersion coefficients in a
specific application should follow one of the procedures suggested
by Irwin \79\ to determine whether the character of an area is
primarily urban or rural (of the two methods, the land use procedure
is considered more definitive.):
i. Land Use Procedure: (1) Classify the land use within the
total area, Ao, circumscribed by a 3 km radius circle
about the source using the meteorological land use typing scheme
proposed by Auer; \80\ (2) if land use types I1, I2, C1, R2, and R3
account for 50 percent or more of Ao, use urban
dispersion coefficients; otherwise, use appropriate rural dispersion
coefficients.
ii. Population Density Procedure: (1) Compute the average
population density, p per square kilometer with Ao as
defined above; (2) If p is greater than 750 people per square
kilometer, use urban dispersion coefficients; otherwise use
appropriate rural dispersion coefficients.
c. Population density should be used with caution and generally
not be applied to highly industrialized areas where the population
density may be low and, thus, a rural classification would be
indicated. However, the area is likely to be sufficiently built-up
so that the urban land use criteria would be satisfied. Therefore,
in this case, the classification should be ``urban'' and urban
dispersion parameters should be used.
d. For applications of AERMOD in urban areas, under either the
Land Use Procedure or the Population Density Procedure, the user
needs to estimate the population of the urban area affecting the
modeling domain because the urban influence in AERMOD is scaled
based on a user-specified population. For non-population oriented
urban areas, or areas influenced by both population and industrial
activity, the user will need to estimate an equivalent population to
adequately account for the combined effects of industrialized areas
and populated areas within the modeling domain. Selection of the
appropriate population for these applications should be determined
in consultation with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) and the latest version of the AERMOD Implementation
Guide.\81\
e. It should be noted that AERMOD allows for modeling rural and
urban sources in a single model run. For analyses of whole urban
complexes, the entire area should be modeled as an urban region if
most of the sources are located in areas classified as urban. For
tall stacks located within or adjacent to small or moderate sized
urban areas, the stack height or effective plume height may extend
above the urban boundary layer and, therefore, may be more
appropriately modeled using rural coefficients. Model users should
consult with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b))
and the latest version of the AERMOD Implementation Guide \81\ when
evaluating this situation.
f. Buoyancy-induced dispersion (BID), as identified by
Pasquill,\82\ is included in the preferred models and should be used
where buoyant sources (e.g., those involving fuel combustion) are
involved.
7.2.1.2 Complex Winds
a. Inhomogeneous local winds. In many parts of the United
States, the ground is neither flat nor is the ground cover (or land
use) uniform. These geographical variations can generate local winds
and circulations, and modify the prevailing ambient winds and
circulations. Typically, geographic effects are more apparent when
the ambient winds are light or calm, as stronger synoptic or
mesoscale winds can modify, or even eliminate the weak geographic
circulations.\83\ In general, these geographically induced wind
circulation effects are named after the source location of the
winds, e.g., lake and sea breezes, and mountain and valley winds. In
very rugged hilly or mountainous terrain, along coastlines, or near
large land use variations, the characteristics of the winds are a
balance of various forces, such that the assumptions of steady-state
straight-line transport both in time and space are inappropriate. In
such cases, a model should be chosen to fully treat the time and
space variations of meteorology effects on transport and dispersion.
The setup and application of such a model should be determined in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) consistent with limitations of paragraph 3.2.2(e). The
meteorological input data requirements for developing the time and
space varying three-dimensional winds and dispersion meteorology for
these situations are discussed in paragraph 8.4.1.2(c). Examples of
inhomogeneous winds include, but are not limited to, situations
described in the following paragraphs:
i. Inversion breakup fumigation. Inversion breakup fumigation
occurs when a plume (or multiple plumes) is emitted into a stable
layer of air and that layer is subsequently mixed to the ground
through convective transfer of heat from the surface or because of
advection to less stable surroundings. Fumigation may cause
excessively high concentrations, but is usually rather short-lived
at a given receptor. There are no recommended refined techniques to
model this phenomenon. There are, however, screening procedures \40\
that may be used to approximate the concentrations. Considerable
care should be exercised in using the results obtained from the
screening techniques.
ii. Shoreline fumigation. Fumigation can be an important
phenomenon on and near the shoreline of bodies of water. This can
affect both individual plumes and area-wide emissions. When
fumigation conditions are expected to occur from a source or sources
with tall stacks located on or just inland of a shoreline, this
should be addressed in the air quality modeling analysis. The EPA
has evaluated several coastal fumigation models, and the evaluation
results of these models are available for their possible application
on a case-by-case basis when air quality estimates under shoreline
fumigation conditions are needed.\84\ Selection of the appropriate
model for applications where shoreline fumigation is of concern
should be determined in consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
iii. Stagnation. Stagnation conditions are characterized by calm
or very low wind speeds, and variable wind directions. These
stagnant meteorological conditions may persist for several hours to
several days. During stagnation conditions, the dispersion of air
pollutants, especially those from low-level emissions sources, tends
to be minimized, potentially leading to relatively high ground-level
concentrations. If point sources are of interest, users should note
the guidance provided in paragraph (a) of this subsection. Selection
of the appropriate model for applications where stagnation is of
concern should be determined in consultation with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
7.2.1.3 Gravitational Settling and Deposition
a. Gravitational settling and deposition may be directly
included in a model if either is a significant factor. When
particulate matter sources can be quantified and settling and dry
deposition are problems, use professional judgment along with
coordination with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)). AERMOD contains algorithms for dry and wet deposition of
gases and particles.\85\ For other Gaussian plume models, an
``infinite half-life'' may be used for estimates of particle
concentrations when only exponential decay terms are used for
treating settling and deposition. Lagrangian models have varying
degrees of complexity for dealing with settling and deposition and
the selection of a parameterization for such should be included in
the approval process for selecting a Lagrangian model. Eulerian grid
models tend to have explicit parameterizations for gravitational
settling and deposition as well as wet deposition parameters already
included as part of the chemistry scheme.
7.2.2 Stationary Sources
7.2.2.1 Good Engineering Practice Stack Height
a. The use of stack height credit in excess of Good Engineering
Practice (GEP) stack height or credit resulting from any other
dispersion technique is prohibited in the development of emissions
limits by 40 CFR 51.118 and 40 CFR 51.164. The definition of GEP
stack height and dispersion technique are contained in 40 CFR
51.100. Methods and procedures for making the appropriate stack
height calculations, determining stack height credits and an example
of applying those
[[Page 72849]]
techniques are found in several references,86 87 88 89
that provide a great deal of additional information for evaluating
and describing building cavity and wake effects.
b. If stacks for new or existing major sources are found to be
less than the height defined by the EPA's refined formula for
determining GEP height, then air quality impacts associated with
cavity or wake effects due to the nearby building structures should
be determined. The EPA refined formula height is defined as H +
1.5L.\88\ Since the definition of GEP stack height defines excessive
concentrations as a maximum ground-level concentration due in whole
or in part to downwash of at least 40 percent in excess of the
maximum concentration without downwash, the potential air quality
impacts associated with cavity and wake effects should also be
considered for stacks that equal or exceed the EPA formula height
for GEP. The AERSCREEN model can be used to obtain screening
estimates of potential downwash influences, based on the PRIME
downwash algorithm incorporated in the AERMOD model. If more refined
concentration estimates are required, AERMOD should be used (section
4.2.2).
7.2.2.2 Plume Rise
a. The plume rise methods of Briggs 90 91 are
incorporated in many of the preferred models and are recommended for
use in many modeling applications. In AERMOD,44 45 for
the stable boundary layer, plume rise is estimated using an
iterative approach, similar to that in the CTDMPLUS model. In the
convective boundary layer, plume rise is superposed on the
displacements by random convective velocities.\92\ In AERMOD, plume
rise is computed using the methods of Briggs, except in cases
involving building downwash, in which a numerical solution of the
mass, energy, and momentum conservation laws is performed.\93\ No
explicit provisions in these models are made for multistack plume
rise enhancement or the handling of such special plumes as flares.
b. Gradual plume rise is generally recommended where its use is
appropriate: (1) in AERMOD; (2) in complex terrain screening
procedures to determine close-in impacts; and (3) when calculating
the effects of building wakes. The building wake algorithm in AERMOD
incorporates and exercises the thermodynamically based gradual plume
rise calculations as described in paragraph (a) of this subsection.
If the building wake is calculated to affect the plume for any hour,
gradual plume rise is also used in downwind dispersion calculations
to the distance of final plume rise, after which final plume rise is
used. Plumes captured by the near wake are re-emitted to the far
wake as a ground-level volume source.
c. Stack tip downwash generally occurs with poorly constructed
stacks and when the ratio of the stack exit velocity to wind speed
is small. An algorithm developed by Briggs \91\ is the recommended
technique for this situation and is used in preferred models for
point sources.
d. On a case-by-case basis, refinements to the preferred model
may be considered for plume rise and downwash effects and shall
occur in agreement with the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) and approval by the EPA Regional Office based on
the requirements of section 3.2.2.
7.2.3 Mobile Sources
a. Emissions of primary pollutants from mobile sources can be
modeled with an appropriate model identified in section 4.2.
Screening of mobile sources can be accomplished by using screening
meteorology, e.g., worst-case meteorological conditions. Maximum
hourly concentrations computed from screening modeling can be
converted to longer averaging periods using the scaling ratios
specified in the AERSCREEN User's Guide.\37\
b. Mobile sources can be modeled in AERMOD as either line (i.e.,
elongated area) sources or as a series of volume sources. Line
sources can be represented in AERMOD with the following source
types: LINE, AREA, VOLUME or RLINE. However, since mobile source
modeling usually includes an analysis of very near-source impacts,
the results can be highly sensitive to the characterization of the
mobile emissions. Important characteristics for both line/area and
volume sources include the plume release height, source width, and
initial dispersion characteristics, and should also take into
account the impact of traffic-induced turbulence that can cause
roadway sources to have larger initial dimensions than might
normally be used for representing line sources.
c. The EPA's quantitative PM hot-spot guidance \65\ and Haul
Road Workgroup Final Report \67\ provide guidance on the appropriate
characterization of mobile sources as a function of the roadway and
vehicle characteristics. The EPA's quantitative PM hot-spot guidance
includes important considerations and should be consulted when
modeling roadway links. Area and line sources, which can be
characterized as AREA, LINE, and RLINE source types in AERMOD, or
volume sources, may be used for modeling mobile sources. However,
experience in the field has shown that area sources (characterized
as AREA, LINE, or RLINE source types) may be easier to characterize
correctly compared to volume sources. If volume sources are used, it
is particularly important to ensure that roadway emissions are
appropriately spaced when using volume source so that the emissions
field is uniform across the roadway. Additionally, receptor
placement is particularly important for volume sources that have
``exclusion zones'' where concentrations are not calculated for
receptors located ``within'' the volume sources, i.e., less than
2.15 times the initial lateral dispersion coefficient from the
center of the volume.\65\ Therefore, placing receptors in these
``exclusion zones'' will result in underestimates of roadway
impacts.
8.0 Model Input Data
a. Databases and related procedures for estimating input
parameters are an integral part of the modeling process. The most
appropriate input data available should always be selected for use
in modeling analyses. Modeled concentrations can vary widely
depending on the source data or meteorological data used. This
section attempts to minimize the uncertainty associated with
database selection and use by identifying requirements for input
data used in modeling. More specific data requirements and the
format required for the individual models are described in detail in
the user's guide and/or associated documentation for each model.
8.1 Modeling Domain
8.1.1 Discussion
a. The modeling domain is the geographic area for which the
required air quality analyses for the NAAQS and PSD increments are
conducted.
8.1.2 Requirements
a. For a NAAQS or PSD increments assessment, the modeling domain
or project's impact area shall include all locations where the
emissions of a pollutant from the new or modifying source(s) may
cause a significant ambient impact. This impact area is defined as
an area with a radius extending from the new or modifying source to:
(1) the most distant location where air quality modeling predicts a
significant ambient impact will occur, or (2) the nominal 50 km
distance considered applicable for Gaussian dispersion models,
whichever is less. The required air quality analysis shall be
carried out within this geographical area with characterization of
source impacts, nearby source impacts, and background
concentrations, as recommended later in this section.
b. For SIP attainment demonstrations for ozone and
PM2.5, or regional haze reasonable progress goal
analyses, the modeling domain is determined by the nature of the
problem being modeled and the spatial scale of the emissions that
impact the nonattainment or Class I area(s). The modeling domain
shall be designed so that all major upwind source areas that
influence the downwind nonattainment area are included in addition
to all monitor locations that are currently or recently violating
the NAAQS or close to violating the NAAQS in the nonattainment area.
Similarly, all Class I areas to be evaluated in a regional haze
modeling application shall be included and sufficiently distant from
the edge of the modeling domain. Guidance on the determination of
the appropriate modeling domain for photochemical grid models in
demonstrating attainment of these air quality goals is
available.\64\ Users should consult the latest version of this
guidance for the most current modeling guidance and the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) for any application specific
guidance that is beyond the scope of this section.
8.2 Source Data
8.2.1 Discussion
a. Sources of pollutants can be classified as point, line, area,
and volume sources. Point sources are defined in terms of size and
may vary between regulatory programs. The line sources most
frequently considered are roadways and streets along which there are
well-defined movements of motor vehicles. They may also be lines of
roof vents or stacks, such as in aluminum refineries. Area
[[Page 72850]]
and volume sources are often collections of a multitude of minor
sources with individually small emissions that are impractical to
consider as separate point or line sources. Large area sources are
typically treated as a grid network of square areas, with pollutant
emissions distributed uniformly within each grid square. Generally,
input data requirements for air quality models necessitate the use
of metric units. As necessary, any English units common to
engineering applications should be appropriately converted to
metric.
b. For point sources, there are many source characteristics and
operating conditions that may be needed to appropriately model the
facility. For example, the plant layout (e.g., location of stacks
and buildings), stack parameters (e.g., height and diameter), boiler
size and type, potential operating conditions, and pollution control
equipment parameters. Such details are required inputs to air
quality models and are needed to determine maximum potential
impacts.
c. Modeling mobile emissions from streets and highways requires
data on the road layout, including the width of each traveled lane,
the number of lanes, and the width of the median strip.
Additionally, traffic patterns should be taken into account (e.g.,
daily cycles of rush hour, differences in weekday and weekend
traffic volumes, and changes in the distribution of heavy-duty
trucks and light-duty passenger vehicles), as these patterns will
affect the types and amounts of pollutant emissions allocated to
each lane and the height of emissions.
d. Emission factors can be determined through source-specific
testing and measurements (e.g., stack test data) from existing
sources or provided from a manufacturing association or vendor.
Additionally, emissions factors for a variety of source types are
compiled in an EPA publication commonly known as AP-42.\94\ AP-42
also provides an indication of the quality and amount of data on
which many of the factors are based. Other information concerning
emissions is available in EPA publications relating to specific
source categories. The appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) should be consulted to determine appropriate source
definitions and for guidance concerning the determination of
emissions from and techniques for modeling the various source types.
8.2.2 Requirements
a. For SIP attainment demonstrations for the purpose of
projecting future year NAAQS attainment for ozone, PM2.5,
and regional haze reasonable progress goal analyses, emissions which
reflect actual emissions during the base modeling year time period
should be input to models for base year modeling. Emissions
projections to future years should account for key variables such as
growth due to increased or decreased activity, expected emissions
controls due to regulations, settlement agreements or consent
decrees, fuel switches, and any other relevant information. Guidance
on emissions estimation techniques (including future year
projections) for SIP attainment demonstrations is
available.64 95
b. For the purpose of SIP revisions for stationary point
sources, the regulatory modeling of inert pollutants shall use the
emissions input data shown in Table 8-1 for short-term and long-term
NAAQS. To demonstrate compliance and/or establish the appropriate
SIP emissions limits, Table 8-1 generally provides for the use of
``allowable'' emissions in the regulatory dispersion modeling of the
stationary point source(s) of interest. In such modeling, these
source(s) should be modeled sequentially with these loads for every
hour of the year. As part of a cumulative impact analysis, Table 8-1
allows for the model user to account for actual operations in
developing the emissions inputs for dispersion modeling of nearby
sources, while other sources are best represented by air quality
monitoring data. Consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) is advisable on the establishment of
the appropriate emissions inputs for regulatory modeling
applications with respect to SIP revisions for stationary point
sources.
c. For the purposes of demonstrating NAAQS compliance in a PSD
assessment, the regulatory modeling of inert pollutants shall use
the emissions input data shown in Table 8-2 for short and long-term
NAAQS. The new or modifying stationary point source shall be modeled
with ``allowable'' emissions in the regulatory dispersion modeling.
As part of a cumulative impact analysis, Table 8-2 allows for the
model user to account for actual operations in developing the
emissions inputs for dispersion modeling of nearby sources, while
other sources are best represented by air quality monitoring data.
For purposes of situations involving emissions trading, refer to
current EPA policy and guidance to establish input data.
Consultation with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)) is advisable on the establishment of the appropriate
emissions inputs for regulatory modeling applications with respect
to PSD assessments for a proposed new or modifying source.
d. For stationary source applications, changes in operating
conditions that affect the physical emission parameters (e.g.,
release height, initial plume volume, and exit velocity) shall be
considered to ensure that maximum potential impacts are
appropriately determined in the assessment. For example, the load or
operating condition for point sources that causes maximum ground-
level concentrations shall be established. As a minimum, the source
should be modeled using the design capacity (100 percent load). If a
source operates at greater than design capacity for periods that
could result in violations of the NAAQS or PSD increments, this load
should be modeled. Where the source operates at substantially less
than design capacity, and the changes in the stack parameters
associated with the operating conditions could lead to higher ground
level concentrations, loads such as 50 percent and 75 percent of
capacity should also be modeled. Malfunctions which may result in
excess emissions are not considered to be a normal operating
condition. They generally should not be considered in determining
allowable emissions. However, if the excess emissions are the result
of poor maintenance, careless operation, or other preventable
conditions, it may be necessary to consider them in determining
source impact. A range of operating conditions should be considered
in screening analyses. The load causing the highest concentration,
in addition to the design load, should be included in refined
modeling.
e. Emissions from mobile sources also have physical and temporal
characteristics that should be appropriately accounted. For example,
an appropriate emissions model shall be used to determine emissions
profiles. Such emissions should include speciation specific for the
vehicle types used on the roadway (e.g., light duty and heavy duty
trucks), and subsequent parameterizations of the physical emissions
characteristics (e.g., release height) should reflect those
emissions sources. For long-term standards, annual average emissions
may be appropriate, but for short-term standards, discrete temporal
representation of emissions should be used (e.g., variations in
weekday and weekend traffic or the diurnal rush-hour profile typical
of many cities). Detailed information and data requirements for
modeling mobile sources of pollution are provided in the user's
manuals for each of the models applicable to mobile
sources.65 67
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P
[[Page 72851]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TP23OC23.001
[[Page 72852]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TP23OC23.002
BILLING CODE 6560-50-C
8.3 Background Concentrations
8.3.1 Discussion
a. Background concentrations are essential in constructing the
design concentration, or total air quality concentration, as part of
a cumulative impact analysis for NAAQS and PSD increments (section
9.2.3). To assist applicants and reviewing authorities with
appropriately characterizing background concentrations, EPA has
developed the Draft Guidance on Developing Background Concentrations
for Use in Modeling Demonstrations.\96\ The guidance provides a
recommended framework composed of steps that should be used in
parallel with the recommendations made in this section. Generally,
background air quality should not include the ambient impacts of the
project source under consideration. Instead, it should include:
i. Nearby sources: These are individual sources located in the
vicinity of the source(s) under consideration for emissions limits
that are not adequately represented by ambient monitoring data. The
ambient contributions from these nearby sources are thereby
accounted for by explicitly modeling their emissions (section 8.2).
ii. Other sources: That portion of the background attributable
to natural sources, other unidentified sources in the vicinity of
the project, and regional transport contributions from more distant
sources (domestic and international). The ambient contributions from
these sources are typically accounted for through use of ambient
monitoring data or, in some cases, regional-scale photochemical grid
modeling results.
b. The monitoring network used for developing background
concentrations is expected to conform to the same quality assurance
and other requirements as those networks established for PSD
purposes.\97\ Accordingly, the air quality monitoring data should be
of sufficient completeness and follow appropriate data validation
[[Page 72853]]
procedures. These data should be adequately representative of the
area to inform calculation of the design concentration for
comparison to the applicable NAAQS (section 9.2.2).
c. For photochemical grid modeling conducted in SIP attainment
demonstrations for ozone, PM2.5 and regional haze, the
emissions from nearby and other sources are included as model inputs
and fully accounted for in the modeling application and predicted
concentrations. The concept of adding individual components to
develop a design concentration, therefore, do not apply in these SIP
applications. However, such modeling results may then be appropriate
for consideration in characterizing background concentrations for
other regulatory applications. Also, as noted in section 5, this
modeling approach does provide for an appropriate atmospheric
environment to assess single-source impacts for ozone and secondary
PM2.5.
d. For NAAQS assessments and SIP attainment demonstrations for
inert pollutants, the development of the appropriate background
concentration for a cumulative impact analysis involves proper
accounting of each contribution to the design concentration and will
depend upon whether the project area's situation consists of either
an isolated single source(s) or a multitude of sources. For PSD
increment assessments, all impacts after the appropriate baseline
dates (i.e., trigger date, major source baseline date, and minor
source baseline date) from all increment-consuming and increment-
expanding sources should be considered in the design concentration
(section 9.2.2).
8.3.2 Recommendations for Isolated Single Sources
a. In areas with an isolated source(s), determining the
appropriate background concentration should focus on
characterization of contributions from all other sources through
adequately representative ambient monitoring data. The application
of EPA's recommended framework for determining an appropriate
background concentration should be consistent with appropriate EPA
modeling guidance 63 96 and justified in the modeling
protocol that is vetted with the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)).
b. The EPA recommends use of the most recent quality assured air
quality monitoring data collected in the vicinity of the source to
determine the background concentration for the averaging times of
concern. In most cases, the EPA recommends using data from the
monitor closest to and upwind of the project area. If several
monitors are available, preference should be given to the monitor
with characteristics that are most similar to the project area. If
there are no monitors located in the vicinity of the new or
modifying source, a ``regional site'' may be used to determine
background concentrations. A regional site is one that is located
away from the area of interest but is impacted by similar or
adequately representative sources.
c. Many of the challenges related to cumulative impact analyses
arise in the context of defining the appropriate metric to
characterize background concentrations from ambient monitoring data
and determining the appropriate method for combining this monitor-
based background contribution to the modeled impact of the project
and other nearby sources. For many cases, the best starting point
would be use of the current design value for the applicable NAAQS as
a uniform monitored background contribution across the project area.
However, there are cases in which the current design value may not
be appropriate. Such cases include but are not limited to:
i. For situations involving a modifying source where the
existing facility is determined to impact the ambient monitor, the
background concentration at each monitor can be determined by
excluding values when the source in question is impacting the
monitor. In such cases, monitoring sites inside a 90[deg] sector
downwind of the source may be used to determine the area of impact.
ii. There may be other circumstances which would necessitate
modifications to the ambient data record. Such cases could include
removal of data from specific days or hours when a monitor is being
impacted by activities that are not typical or not expected to occur
again in the future (e.g., construction, roadway repairs, forest
fires, or unusual agricultural activities). There may also be cases
where it may be appropriate to scale (multiplying the monitored
concentrations with a scaling factor) or adjust (adding or
subtracting a constant value the monitored concentrations) data from
specific days or hours. Such adjustments would make the monitored
background concentrations more temporally and/or spatially
representative of the area around the new or modifying source for
the purposes of the regulatory assessment.
iii. For short-term standards, the diurnal or seasonal patterns
of the air quality monitoring data may differ significantly from the
patterns associated with the modeled concentrations. When this
occurs, it may be appropriate to pair the air quality monitoring
data in a temporal manner that reflects these patterns (e.g.,
pairing by season and/or hour of day).\98\
iv. For situations where monitored air quality concentrations
vary across the modeling domain, it may be appropriate to consider
air quality monitoring data from multiple monitors within the
project area.
d. Considering the spatial and temporal variability throughout a
typical modeling domain on an hourly basis and the complexities and
limitations of hourly observations from the ambient monitoring
network, the EPA does not recommend hourly or daily pairing of
monitored background and modeled concentrations except in rare cases
of relatively isolated sources where the available monitor can be
shown to be representative of the ambient concentration levels in
the areas of maximum impact from the proposed new source. The
implicit assumption underlying hourly pairing is that the background
monitored levels for each hour are spatially uniform and that the
monitored values are fully representative of background levels at
each receptor for each hour. Such an assumption clearly ignores the
many factors that contribute to the temporal and spatial variability
of ambient concentrations across a typical modeling domain on an
hourly basis. In most cases, the seasonal (or quarterly) pairing of
monitored and modeled concentrations should sufficiently address
situations to which the impacts from modeled emissions are not
temporally correlated with background monitored levels.
e. In those cases where adequately representative monitoring
data to characterize background concentrations are not available, it
may be appropriate to use results from a regional-scale
photochemical grid model, or other representative model application,
as background concentrations consistent with the considerations
discussed above and in consultation with the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
8.3.3 Recommendations for Multi-Source Areas
a. In multi-source areas, determining the appropriate background
concentration involves: (1) characterization of contributions from
other sources through adequately representative ambient monitoring
data, and (2) identification and characterization of contributions
from nearby sources through explicit modeling. A key point here is
the interconnectedness of each component in that the question of
which nearby sources to include in the cumulative modeling is
inextricably linked to the question of what the ambient monitoring
data represents within the project area.
b. Nearby sources: All sources in the vicinity of the source(s)
under consideration for emissions limits that are not adequately
represented by ambient monitoring data should be explicitly modeled.
EPA's recommended framework for determining an appropriate
background concentration \96\ should be applied to identify such
sources and accurately account for their ambient impacts through
explicit modeling.
i. The determination of nearby sources relies on the selection
of adequately representative ambient monitoring data (section
8.3.2). The EPA recommends determining the representativeness of the
monitoring data through a visual assessment of the modeling domain
considering any relevant nearby sources and their respective air
quality data. The visual assessment should consider any relevant air
quality data such as the proximity of nearby sources to the project
source and the ambient monitor, the nearby source's level of
emissions with respect to the ambient data, and the dispersion
environment (i.e., meteorological patterns, terrain, etc.) of the
modeling domain.
ii. Nearby sources not adequately represented by the ambient
monitor through visual assessment should undergo further qualitative
and quantitative analysis before being explicitly modeled. The EPA
recommends evaluating any modeling, monitoring, or emissions data
that may be available for the identified nearby sources with respect
to possible exceedances of the appropriate SIL or violations to the
NAAQS.
iii. The number of nearby sources to be explicitly modeled in
the air quality analysis is expected to be few except in unusual
[[Page 72854]]
situations. The determination of nearby sources through the
application of EPA's recommended framework calls for the exercise of
professional judgment by the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) and should be consistent with appropriate EPA
modeling guidance.63 96 This guidance is not intended to
alter the exercise of that judgment or to comprehensively prescribe
which sources should be included as nearby sources.
c. For cumulative impact analyses of short-term and annual
ambient standards, the nearby sources as well as the project
source(s) must be evaluated using an appropriate addendum A model or
approved alternative model with the emission input data shown in
Table 8-1 or 8-2.
i. When modeling a nearby source that does not have a permit and
the emissions limits contained in the SIP for a particular source
category is greater than the emissions possible given the source's
maximum physical capacity to emit, the ``maximum allowable emissions
limit'' for such a nearby source may be calculated as the emissions
rate representative of the nearby source's maximum physical capacity
to emit, considering its design specifications and allowable fuels
and process materials. However, the burden is on the permit
applicant to sufficiently document what the maximum physical
capacity to emit is for such a nearby source.
ii. It is appropriate to model nearby sources only during those
times when they, by their nature, operate at the same time as the
primary source(s) or could have impact on the averaging period of
concern. Accordingly, it is not necessary to model impacts of a
nearby source that does not, by its nature, operate at the same time
as the primary source or could have impact on the averaging period
of concern, regardless of an identified significant concentration
gradient from the nearby source. The burden is on the permit
applicant to adequately justify the exclusion of nearby sources to
the satisfaction of the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)). The following examples illustrate two cases in which a
nearby source may be shown not to operate at the same time as the
primary source(s) being modeled: (1) Seasonal sources (only used
during certain seasons of the year). Such sources would not be
modeled as nearby sources during times in which they do not operate;
and (2) Emergency backup generators, to the extent that they do not
operate simultaneously with the sources that they back up. Such
emergency equipment would not be modeled as nearby sources.
d. Other sources. That portion of the background attributable to
all other sources (e.g., natural, minor, distant major, and
unidentified sources) should be accounted for through use of ambient
monitoring data and determined by the procedures found in section
8.3.2 in keeping with eliminating or reducing the source-oriented
impacts from nearby sources to avoid potential double-counting of
modeled and monitored contributions.
8.4 Meteorological Input Data
8.4.1 Discussion
a. This subsection covers meteorological input data for use in
dispersion modeling for regulatory applications and is separate from
recommendations made for photochemical grid modeling.
Recommendations for meteorological data for photochemical grid
modeling applications are outlined in the latest version of EPA's
Modeling Guidance for Demonstrating Attainment of Air Quality Goals
for Ozone, PM2.5, and Regional Haze.\64\ In cases where Lagrangian
models are applied for regulatory purposes, appropriate
meteorological inputs should be determined in consultation with the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
b. The meteorological data used as input to a dispersion model
should be selected on the basis of spatial and climatological
(temporal) representativeness as well as the ability of the
individual parameters selected to characterize the transport and
dispersion conditions in the area of concern. The representativeness
of the measured data is dependent on numerous factors including, but
not limited to: (1) the proximity of the meteorological monitoring
site to the area under consideration; (2) the complexity of the
terrain; (3) the exposure of the meteorological monitoring site; and
(4) the period of time during which data are collected. The spatial
representativeness of the data can be adversely affected by large
distances between the source and receptors of interest and the
complex topographic characteristics of the area. Temporal
representativeness is a function of the year-to-year variations in
weather conditions. Where appropriate, data representativeness
should be viewed in terms of the appropriateness of the data for
constructing realistic boundary layer profiles and, where
applicable, three-dimensional meteorological fields, as described in
paragraphs (c) and (d) of this subsection.
c. The meteorological data should be adequately representative
and may be site-specific data (land-based or buoy data for overwater
applications), data from a nearby National Weather Service (NWS) or
comparable station, or prognostic meteorological data. The
implementation of NWS Automated Surface Observing Stations (ASOS) in
the early 1990's should not preclude the use of NWS ASOS data if
such a station is determined to be representative of the modeled
area.\99\
D. Model input data are normally obtained either from the NWS or
as part of a site-specific measurement program. State climatology
offices, local universities, FAA, military stations, industry, and
pollution control agencies may also be sources of such data. In
specific cases, prognostic meteorological data may be appropriate
for use and obtained from similar sources. Some recommendations and
requirements for the use of each type of data are included in this
subsection.
8.4.2 Recommendations and Requirements
a. AERMET \100\ shall be used to preprocess all meteorological
data, be it observed or prognostic, for use with AERMOD in
regulatory applications. The AERMINUTE \101\ processor, in most
cases, should be used to process 1-minute ASOS wind data for input
to AERMET when processing NWS ASOS sites in AERMET. When processing
prognostic meteorological data for AERMOD, the Mesoscale Model
Interface Program (MMIF) \109\ should be used to process data for
input to AERMET, both for land-based applications and overwater
applications. Other methods of processing prognostic meteorological
data for input to AERMET should be approved by the appropriate
reviewing authority. Additionally, the following meteorological
preprocessors are recommended by the EPA: PCRAMMET,\102\ MPRM,\103\
and METPRO.\104\ PCRAMMET is the recommended meteorological data
preprocessor for use in applications of OCD employing hourly NWS
data. MPRM is the recommended meteorological data preprocessor for
applications of OCD employing site-specific meteorological data.
METPRO is the recommended meteorological data preprocessor for use
with CTDMPLUS.\105\
b. Regulatory application of AERMOD necessitates careful
consideration of the meteorological data for input to AERMET. Data
representativeness, in the case of AERMOD, means utilizing data of
an appropriate type for constructing realistic boundary layer
profiles. Of particular importance is the requirement that all
meteorological data used as input to AERMOD should be adequately
representative of the transport and dispersion within the analysis
domain. Where surface conditions vary significantly over the
analysis domain, the emphasis in assessing representativeness should
be given to adequate characterization of transport and dispersion
between the source(s) of concern and areas where maximum design
concentrations are anticipated to occur. The EPA recommends that the
surface characteristics input to AERMET should be representative of
the land cover in the vicinity of the meteorological data, i.e., the
location of the meteorological tower for measured data or the
representative grid cell for prognostic data. Therefore, the model
user should apply the latest version AERSURFACE,106 107
where applicable, for determining surface characteristics when
processing measured land-based meteorological data through AERMET.
In areas where it is not possible to use AERSURFACE output, surface
characteristics can be determined using techniques that apply the
same analysis as AERSURFACE. In the case of measured meteorological
data for overwater applications, AERMET calculates the surface
characteristics and AERSURFACE outputs are not needed. In the case
of prognostic meteorological data, the surface characteristics
associated with the prognostic meteorological model output for the
representative grid cell should be used.108 109
Furthermore, since the spatial scope of each variable could be
different, representativeness should be judged for each variable
separately. For example, for a variable such as wind direction, the
data should ideally be collected near plume height to be adequately
representative, especially for sources located in complex
[[Page 72855]]
terrain. Whereas, for a variable such as temperature, data from a
station several kilometers away from the source may be considered to
be adequately representative. More information about meteorological
data, representativeness, and surface characteristics can be found
in the AERMOD Implementation Guide.\81\
c. Regulatory application of CTDMPLUS requires the input of
multi-level measurements of wind speed, direction, temperature, and
turbulence from an appropriately sited meteorological tower. The
measurements should be obtained up to the representative plume
height(s) of interest. Plume heights of interest can be determined
by use of screening procedures such as CTSCREEN.
d. Regulatory application of OCD requires meteorological data
over land and over water. The over land or surface data, processed
through PCRAMMET \102\ or MPRM,\103\ that provides hourly stability
class, wind direction and speed, ambient temperature, and mixing
height, are required. Data over water requires hourly mixing height,
relative humidity, air temperature, and water surface temperature.
Missing winds are substituted with the surface winds. Vertical wind
direction shear, vertical temperature gradient, and turbulence
intensities are optional.
e. The model user should acquire enough meteorological data to
ensure that worst-case meteorological conditions are adequately
represented in the model results. The use of 5 years of adequately
representative NWS or comparable meteorological data, at least 1
year of site-specific (either land-based or overwater based), or at
least 3 years of prognostic meteorological data, are required. If 1
year or more, up to 5 years, of site-specific data are available,
these data are preferred for use in air quality analyses. Depending
on completeness of the data record, consecutive years of NWS, site-
specific, or prognostic data are preferred. Such data must be
subjected to quality assurance procedures as described in section
8.4.4.2.
f. Objective analysis in meteorological modeling is to improve
meteorological analyses (the ``first guess field'') used as initial
conditions for prognostic meteorological models by incorporating
information from meteorological observations. Direct and indirect
(using remote sensing techniques) observations of temperature,
humidity, and wind from surface and radiosonde reports are commonly
employed to improve these analysis fields. For long-range transport
applications, it is recommended that objective analysis procedures,
using direct and indirect meteorological observations, be employed
in preparing input fields to produce prognostic meteorological
datasets. The length of record of observations should conform to
recommendations outlined in paragraph 8.4.2(e) for prognostic
meteorological model datasets.
8.4.3 National Weather Service Data
8.4.3.1 Discussion
a. The NWS meteorological data are routinely available and
familiar to most model users. Although the NWS does not provide
direct measurements of all the needed dispersion model input
variables, methods have been developed and successfully used to
translate the basic NWS data to the needed model input. Site-
specific measurements of model input parameters have been made for
many modeling studies, and those methods and techniques are becoming
more widely applied, especially in situations such as complex
terrain applications, where available NWS data are not adequately
representative. However, there are many modeling applications where
NWS data are adequately representative and the applications still
rely heavily on the NWS data.
b. Many models use the standard hourly weather observations
available from the National Centers for Environmental Information
(NCEI).\b\ These observations are then preprocessed before they can
be used in the models. Prior to the advent of ASOS in the early
1990's, the standard ``hourly'' weather observation was a human-
based observation reflecting a single 2-minute average generally
taken about 10 minutes before the hour. However, beginning in
January 2000 for first-order stations and in March 2005 for all
stations, the NCEI has archived the 1-minute ASOS wind data (i.e.,
the rolling 2-minute average winds) for the NWS ASOS sites. The
AERMINUTE processor \101\ was developed to reduce the number of calm
and missing hours in AERMET processing by substituting standard
hourly observations with full hourly average winds calculated from
1-minute ASOS wind data.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\b\ Formerly the National Climatic Data Center (NCDC).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.4.3.2 Recommendations
a. The preferred models listed in addendum A all accept, as
input, the NWS meteorological data preprocessed into model
compatible form. If NWS data are judged to be adequately
representative for a specific modeling application, they may be
used. The NCEI makes available surface and upper air meteorological
data online and in CD-ROM format. Upper air data are also available
at the Earth System Research Laboratory Global Systems Divisions
website and from NCEI. For the latest websites of available surface
and upper air data see reference 100.
b. Although most NWS wind measurements are made at a standard
height of 10 m, the actual anemometer height should be used as input
to the preferred meteorological processor and model.
c. Standard hourly NWS wind directions are reported to the
nearest 10 degrees. Due to the coarse resolution of these data, a
specific set of randomly generated numbers has been developed by the
EPA and should be used when processing standard hourly NWS data for
use in the preferred EPA models to ensure a lack of bias in wind
direction assignments within the models.
d. Beginning with year 2000, NCEI began archiving 2-minute
winds, reported every minute to the nearest degree for NWS ASOS
sites. The AERMINUTE processor was developed to read those winds and
calculate hourly average winds for input to AERMET. When such data
are available for the NWS ASOS site being processed, the AERMINUTE
processor should be used, in most cases, to calculate hourly average
wind speed and direction when processing NWS ASOS data for input to
AERMOD.\99\
e. Data from universities, FAA, military stations, industry and
pollution control agencies may be used if such data are equivalent
in accuracy and detail (e.g., siting criteria, frequency of
observations, data completeness, etc.) to the NWS data, they are
judged to be adequately representative for the particular
application, and have undergone quality assurance checks.
f. After valid data retrieval requirements have been met,\110\
large number of hours in the record having missing data should be
treated according to an established data substitution protocol
provided that adequately representative alternative data are
available. Data substitution guidance is provided in section 5.3 of
reference 110.\110\ If no representative alternative data are
available for substitution, the absent data should be coded as
missing using missing data codes appropriate to the applicable
meteorological pre-processor. Appropriate model options for treating
missing data, if available in the model, should be employed.
8.4.4 Site-Specific Data
8.4.4.1 Discussion
a. Spatial or geographical representativeness is best achieved
by collection of all of the needed model input data in close
proximity to the actual site of the source(s). Site-specific
measured data are, therefore, preferred as model input, provided
that appropriate instrumentation and quality assurance procedures
are followed, and that the data collected are adequately
representative (free from inappropriate local or microscale
influences) and compatible with the input requirements of the model
to be used. It should be noted that, while site-specific
measurements are frequently made ``on-property'' (i.e., on the
source's premises), acquisition of adequately representative site-
specific data does not preclude collection of data from a location
off property. Conversely, collection of meteorological data on a
source's property does not of itself guarantee adequate
representativeness. For help in determining representativeness of
site-specific measurements, technical guidance \110\ is available.
Site-specific data should always be reviewed for representativeness
and adequacy by an experienced meteorologist, atmospheric scientist,
or other qualified scientist in consultation with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
8.4.4.2 Recommendations
a. The EPA guidance \110\ provides recommendations on the
collection and use of site-specific meteorological data.
Recommendations on characteristics, siting, and exposure of
meteorological instruments and on data recording, processing,
completeness requirements, reporting, and archiving are also
included. This publication should be used as a supplement to other
limited guidance on these subjects.5 97 111 112 Detailed
information on quality assurance is
[[Page 72856]]
also available.\113\ As a minimum, site-specific measurements of
ambient air temperature, transport wind speed and direction, and the
variables necessary to estimate atmospheric dispersion should be
available in meteorological datasets to be used in modeling. Care
should be taken to ensure that meteorological instruments are
located to provide an adequately representative characterization of
pollutant transport between sources and receptors of interest. The
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) is available to
help determine the appropriateness of the measurement locations.
i. Solar radiation measurements. Total solar radiation or net
radiation should be measured with a reliable pyranometer or net
radiometer sited and operated in accordance with established site-
specific meteorological guidance.110 113
ii. Temperature measurements. Temperature measurements should be
made at standard shelter height (2m) in accordance with established
site-specific meteorological guidance.\110\
iii. Temperature difference measurements. Temperature difference
(DT) measurements should be obtained using matched thermometers or a
reliable thermocouple system to achieve adequate accuracy. Siting,
probe placement, and operation of DT systems should be based on
guidance found in Chapter 3 of reference 110 and such guidance
should be followed when obtaining vertical temperature gradient
data. AERMET may employ the Bulk Richardson scheme, which requires
measurements of temperature difference, in lieu of cloud cover or
insolation data. To ensure correct application and acceptance,
AERMOD users should consult with the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) before using the Bulk Richardson scheme for their
analysis.
iv. Wind measurements. For simulation of plume rise and
dispersion of a plume emitted from a stack, characterization of the
wind profile up through the layer in which the plume disperses is
desirable. This is especially important in complex terrain and/or
complex wind situations where wind measurements at heights up to
hundreds of meters above stack base may be required in some
circumstances. For tall stacks when site-specific data are needed,
these winds have been obtained traditionally using meteorological
sensors mounted on tall towers. A feasible alternative to tall
towers is the use of meteorological remote sensing instruments
(e.g., acoustic sounders or radar wind profilers) to provide winds
aloft, coupled with 10-meter towers to provide the near-surface
winds. Note that when site-specific wind measurements are used,
AERMOD, at a minimum, requires wind observations at a height above
ground between seven times the local surface roughness height and
100 m. (For additional requirements for AERMOD and CTDMPLUS, see
addendum A.) Specifications for wind measuring instruments and
systems are contained in reference 110.
b. All processed site-specific data should be in the form of
hourly averages for input to the dispersion model.
i. Turbulence data. There are several dispersion models that are
capable of using direct measurements of turbulence (wind
fluctuations) in the characterization of the vertical and lateral
dispersion (e.g., CTDMPLUS or AERMOD). When turbulence data are used
to directly characterize the vertical and lateral dispersion, the
averaging time for the turbulence measurements should be 1-hour. For
technical guidance on processing of turbulence parameters for use in
dispersion modeling, refer to the user's guide to the meteorological
processor for each model (see section 8.4.2(a)).
ii. Stability categories. For dispersion models that employ P-G
stability categories for the characterization of the vertical and
lateral dispersion, the P-G stability categories, as originally
defined, couple near-surface measurements of wind speed with
subjectively determined insolation assessments based on hourly cloud
cover and ceiling height observations. The wind speed measurements
are made at or near 10 m. The insolation rate is typically assessed
using observations of cloud cover and ceiling height based on
criteria outlined by Turner.\77\ It is recommended that the P-G
stability category be estimated using the Turner method with site-
specific wind speed measured at or near 10 m and representative
cloud cover and ceiling height. Implementation of the Turner method,
as well as considerations in determining representativeness of cloud
cover and ceiling height in cases for which site-specific cloud
observations are unavailable, may be found in section 6 of reference
110. In the absence of requisite data to implement the Turner
method, the solar radiation/delta-T (SRDT) method or wind
fluctuation statistics (i.e., the [sigma]E and
[sigma]A methods) may be used.
iii. The SRDT method, described in section 6.4.4.2 of reference
110, is modified slightly from that published from earlier work
\114\ and has been evaluated with three site-specific
databases.\115\ The two methods of stability classification that use
wind fluctuation statistics, the [sigma]E and
[sigma]A methods, are also described in detail in section
6.4.4 of reference 110 (note applicable tables in section 6). For
additional information on the wind fluctuation methods, several
references are available.116 117 118 119
c. Missing data substitution. After valid data retrieval
requirements have been met,\110\ hours in the record having missing
data should be treated according to an established data substitution
protocol provided that adequately representative alternative data
are available. Such protocols are usually part of the approved
monitoring program plan. Data substitution guidance is provided in
section 5.3 of reference 110. If no representative alternative data
are available for substitution, the absent data should be coded as
missing, using missing data codes appropriate to the applicable
meteorological pre-processor. Appropriate model options for treating
missing data, if available in the model, should be employed.
8.4.5 Prognostic Meteorological Data
8.4.5.1 Discussion
a. For some modeling applications, there may not be a
representative NWS or comparable meteorological station available
(e.g., complex terrain), and it may be cost prohibitive or
infeasible to collect adequately representative site-specific data.
For these cases, it may be appropriate to use prognostic
meteorological data, if deemed adequately representative, in a
regulatory modeling application. However, if prognostic
meteorological data are not representative of transport and
dispersion conditions in the area of concern, the collection of
site-specific data is necessary.
b. The EPA has developed a processor, the MMIF,\108\ to process
MM5 (Mesoscale Model 5) or WRF (Weather Research and Forecasting)
model data for input to various models including AERMOD. MMIF can
process data for input to AERMET or AERMOD for a single grid cell or
multiple grid cells. MMIF output has been found to compare favorably
against observed data (site-specific or NWS).\120\ Specific guidance
on processing MMIF for AERMOD can be found in reference 109109. When
using MMIF to process prognostic data for regulatory applications,
the data should be processed to generate AERMET inputs and the data
subsequently processed through AERMET for input to AERMOD. If an
alternative method of processing data for input to AERMET is used,
it must be approved by the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)).
8.4.5.2 Recommendations
a. Prognostic model evaluation. Appropriate effort by the
applicant should be devoted to the process of evaluating the
prognostic meteorological data. The modeling data should be compared
to NWS observational data or other comparable data in an effort to
show that the data are adequately replicating the observed
meteorological conditions of the time periods modeled. An
operational evaluation of the modeling data for all model years
(i.e., statistical, graphical) should be completed.\64\ The use of
output from prognostic mesoscale meteorological models is contingent
upon the concurrence with the appropriate reviewing authority
(paragraph 3.0(b)) that the data are of acceptable quality, which
can be demonstrated through statistical comparisons with
meteorological observations aloft and at the surface at several
appropriate locations.\64\
b. Representativeness. When processing MMIF data for use with
AERMOD, the grid cell used for the dispersion modeling should be
adequately spatially representative of the analysis domain. In most
cases, this may be the grid cell containing the emission source of
interest. Since the dispersion modeling may involve multiple sources
and the domain may cover several grid cells, depending on grid
resolution of the prognostic model, professional judgment may be
needed to select the appropriate grid cell to use. In such cases,
the selected grid cells should be adequately representative of the
entire domain.
c. Grid resolution. The grid resolution of the prognostic
meteorological data should be considered and evaluated
appropriately, particularly for projects involving complex terrain.
The operational evaluation of the modeling data should consider
whether a finer grid resolution is needed to ensure that the data
are representative. The use of output from prognostic mesoscale
meteorological
[[Page 72857]]
models is contingent upon the concurrence with the appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) that the data are of
acceptable quality.
8.4.6 Marine Boundary Layer Environments
8.4.6.1 Discussion
a. Calculations of boundary layer parameters for the marine
boundary layer present special challenges as the marine boundary
layer can be very different from the boundary layer over land. For
example, convective conditions can occur in the overnight hours in
the marine boundary layer while typically over land, stable
conditions occur at night. Also, surface roughness in the marine
environment is a function of wave height and wind speed and less
static with time than surface roughness over land.
b. While the Offshore and Coastal Dispersion Model (OCD) is the
preferred model for overwater applications, there are applications
where the use of AERMOD is applicable. These include applications
that utilize features of AERMOD not included in OCD (e.g.,
NO2 chemistry). Such use of AERMOD would require
consultation with the Regional Office and appropriate reviewing
authority to ensure that platform downwash and shoreline fumigation
are adequately considered in the modeling demonstration.
c. For the reasons stated above, a standalone pre-processor to
AERMOD, called AERCOARE \47\ was developed to use the Coupled Ocean
Atmosphere Response Experiment (COARE) bulk-flux algorithms \48\ to
bypass AERMET and calculate the boundary layer parameters for input
to AERMOD for the marine boundary layer. AERCOARE can process either
measurements from water-based sites such as buoys or prognostic
data. To better facilitate the use of the COARE algorithms for
AERMOD, EPA has included the COARE algorithms into AERMET thus
eliminating the need for a standalone pre-processor and ensuring the
algorithms are updated as part of routine AERMET updates.
8.4.6.2 Recommendations
a. Measured data. For applications in the marine environment
that require the use of AERMOD, measured surface data, such as from
a buoy or other offshore platform, should be processed in AERMET
with the COARE processing option following recommendations in the
AERMET User's Guide \100\ and AERMOD Implementation Guide.\81\ For
applications in the marine environment that require the use of OCD,
users should use the recommended meteorological pre-processor MPRM.
b. Prognostic data. For applications in the marine environment
that require the use of AERMOD and prognostic data, the prognostic
data should be processed via MMIF for input to AERMET following
recommendations in paragraph 8.4.5.1(b) and the guidance found in
reference 109.
8.4.7 Treatment of Near-Calms and Calms
8.4.7.1 Discussion
a. Treatment of calm or light and variable wind poses a special
problem in modeling applications since steady-state Gaussian plume
models assume that concentration is inversely proportional to wind
speed, depending on model formulations. Procedures have been
developed to prevent the occurrence of overly conservative
concentration estimates during periods of calms. These procedures
acknowledge that a steady-state Gaussian plume model does not apply
during calm conditions, and that our knowledge of wind patterns and
plume behavior during these conditions does not, at present, permit
the development of a better technique. Therefore, the procedures
disregard hours that are identified as calm. The hour is treated as
missing and a convention for handling missing hours is recommended.
With the advent of the AERMINUTE processor, when processing NWS ASOS
data, the inclusion of hourly averaged winds from AERMINUTE will, in
some instances, dramatically reduce the number of calm and missing
hours, especially when the ASOS wind are derived from a sonic
anemometer. To alleviate concerns about these issues, especially
those introduced with AERMINUTE, the EPA implemented a wind speed
threshold in AERMET for use with ASOS derived
winds.99 100 Winds below the threshold will be treated as
calms.
b. AERMOD, while fundamentally a steady-state Gaussian plume
model, contains algorithms for dealing with low wind speed (near
calm) conditions. As a result, AERMOD can produce model estimates
for conditions when the wind speed may be less than 1 m/s, but still
greater than the instrument threshold. Required input to AERMET for
site-specific data, the meteorological processor for AERMOD,
includes a threshold wind speed and a reference wind speed. The
threshold wind speed is the greater of the threshold of the
instrument used to collect the wind speed data or wind direction
sensor.\110\ The reference wind speed is selected by the model as
the lowest level of non-missing wind speed and direction data where
the speed is greater than the wind speed threshold, and the height
of the measurement is between seven times the local surface
roughness length and 100 m. If the only valid observation of the
reference wind speed between these heights is less than the
threshold, the hour is considered calm, and no concentration is
calculated. None of the observed wind speeds in a measured wind
profile that are less than the threshold speed are used in
construction of the modeled wind speed profile in AERMOD.
8.4.7.2 Recommendations
a. Hourly concentrations calculated with steady-state Gaussian
plume models using calms should not be considered valid; the wind
and concentration estimates for these hours should be disregarded
and considered to be missing. Model predicted concentrations for 3-,
8-, and 24-hour averages should be calculated by dividing the sum of
the hourly concentrations for the period by the number of valid or
non-missing hours. If the total number of valid hours is less than
18 for 24-hour averages, less than 6 for 8-hour averages, or less
than 3 for 3-hour averages, the total concentration should be
divided by 18 for the 24-hour average, 6 for the 8-hour average, and
3 for the 3-hour average. For annual averages, the sum of all valid
hourly concentrations is divided by the number of non-calm hours
during the year. AERMOD has been coded to implement these
instructions. For hours that are calm or missing, the AERMOD hourly
concentrations will be zero. For other models listed in addendum A,
a post-processor computer program, CALMPRO \121\ has been prepared,
is available on the EPA's SCRAM website (section 2.3), and should be
used.
b. Stagnant conditions that include extended periods of calms
often produce high concentrations over wide areas for relatively
long averaging periods. The standard steady-state Gaussian plume
models are often not applicable to such situations. When stagnation
conditions are of concern, other modeling techniques should be
considered on a case-by-case basis (see also section 7.2.1.2).
c. When used in steady-state Gaussian plume models other than
AERMOD, measured site-specific wind speeds of less than 1 m/s but
higher than the response threshold of the instrument should be input
as 1 m/s; the corresponding wind direction should also be input.
Wind observations below the response threshold of the instrument
should be set to zero, with the input file in ASCII format. For
input to AERMOD, no such adjustment should be made to the site-
specific wind data, as AERMOD has algorithms to account for light or
variable winds as discussed in section 8.4.6.1(a). For NWS ASOS
data, see the AERMET User's Guide \100\ for guidance on wind speed
thresholds. For prognostic data, see the latest guidance \109\ for
thresholds. Observations with wind speeds less than the threshold
are considered calm, and no concentration is calculated. In all
cases involving steady-state Gaussian plume models, calm hours
should be treated as missing, and concentrations should be
calculated as in paragraph (a) of this subsection.
9.0 Regulatory Application of Models
9.1 Discussion
a. Standardized procedures are valuable in the review of air
quality modeling and data analyses conducted to support SIP
submittals and revisions, NSR, or other EPA requirements to ensure
consistency in their regulatory application. This section recommends
procedures specific to NSR that facilitate some degree of
standardization while at the same time allowing the flexibility
needed to assure the technically best analysis for each regulatory
application. For SIP attainment demonstrations, refer to the
appropriate EPA guidance 53 64 for the recommended
procedures.
b. Air quality model estimates, especially with the support of
measured air quality data, are the preferred basis for air quality
demonstrations. A number of actions have been taken to ensure that
the best air quality model is used correctly for each regulatory
application and that it is not arbitrarily imposed.
First, the Guideline clearly recommends that the most
appropriate model be used in each case. Preferred models are
identified, based on a number of factors, for many uses.
[[Page 72858]]
Second, the preferred models have been subjected to a
systematic performance evaluation and a scientific peer review.
Statistical performance measures, including measures of difference
(or residuals) such as bias, variance of difference and gross
variability of the difference, and measures of correlation such as
time, space, and time and space combined, as described in section
2.1.1, were generally followed.
Third, more specific information has been provided for
considering the incorporation of new models into the Guideline
(section 3.1), and the Guideline contains procedures for justifying
the case-by-case use of alternative models and obtaining EPA
approval (section 3.2).
c. Air quality modeling is the preferred basis for air quality
demonstrations. Nevertheless, there are rare circumstances where the
performance of the preferred air quality model may be shown to be
less than reasonably acceptable or where no preferred air quality
model, screening model or technique, or alternative model are
suitable for the situation. In these unique instances, there is the
possibility of assuring compliance and establishing emissions limits
for an existing source solely on the basis of observed air quality
data in lieu of an air quality modeling analysis. Comprehensive air
quality monitoring in the vicinity of the existing source with
proposed modifications will be necessary in these cases. The same
attention should be given to the detailed analyses of the air
quality data as would be applied to a model performance evaluation.
d. The current levels and forms of the NAAQS for the six
criteria pollutants can be found on the EPA's NAAQS website at
https://www.epa.gov/criteria-air-pollutants. As required by the CAA,
the NAAQS are subjected to extensive review every 5 years and the
standards, including the level and the form, may be revised as part
of that review. The criteria pollutants have either long-term
(annual or quarterly) and/or short-term (24-hour or less) forms that
are not to be exceeded more than a certain frequency over a period
of time (e.g., no exceedance on a rolling 3-month average, no more
than once per year, or no more than once per year averaged over 3
years), are averaged over a period of time (e.g., an annual mean or
an annual mean averaged over 3 years), or are some percentile that
is averaged over a period of time (e.g., annual 99th or 98th
percentile averaged over 3 years). The 3-year period for ambient
monitoring design values does not dictate the length of the data
periods recommended for modeling (i.e., 5 years of NWS
meteorological data, at least 1 year of site-specific, or at least 3
years of prognostic meteorological data).
e. This section discusses general recommendations on the
regulatory application of models for the purposes of NSR, including
PSD permitting, and particularly for estimating design
concentration(s), appropriately comparing these estimates to NAAQS
and PSD increments, and developing emissions limits. This section
also provides the criteria necessary for considering use of an
analysis based on measured ambient data in lieu of modeling as the
sole basis for demonstrating compliance with NAAQS and PSD
increments.
9.2 Recommendations
9.2.1 Modeling Protocol
a. Every effort should be made by the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) to meet with all parties involved in
either a SIP submission or revision or a PSD permit application
prior to the start of any work on such a project. During this
meeting, a protocol should be established between the preparing and
reviewing parties to define the procedures to be followed, the data
to be collected, the model to be used, and the analysis of the
source and concentration data to be performed. An example of the
content for such an effort is contained in the Air Quality Analysis
Checklist posted on the EPA's SCRAM website (section 2.3). This
checklist suggests the appropriate level of detail to assess the air
quality resulting from the proposed action. Special cases may
require additional data collection or analysis and this should be
determined and agreed upon at the pre-application meeting. The
protocol should be written and agreed upon by the parties concerned,
although it is not intended that this protocol be a binding, formal
legal document. Changes in such a protocol or deviations from the
protocol are often necessary as the data collection and analysis
progresses. However, the protocol establishes a common understanding
of how the demonstration required to meet regulatory requirements
will be made.
9.2.2 Design Concentration and Receptor Sites
a. Under the PSD permitting program, an air quality analysis for
criteria pollutants is required to demonstrate that emissions from
the construction or operation of a proposed new source or
modification will not cause or contribute to a violation of the
NAAQS or PSD increments.
i. For a NAAQS assessment, the design concentration is the
combination of the appropriate background concentration (section
8.3) with the estimated modeled impact of the proposed source. The
NAAQS design concentration is then compared to the applicable NAAQS.
ii. For a PSD increment assessment, the design concentration
includes impacts occurring after the appropriate baseline date from
all increment-consuming and increment-expanding sources. The PSD
increment design concentration is then compared to the applicable
PSD increment.
b. The specific form of the NAAQS for the pollutant(s) of
concern will also influence how the background and modeled data
should be combined for appropriate comparison with the respective
NAAQS in such a modeling demonstration. Given the potential for
revision of the form of the NAAQS and the complexities of combining
background and modeled data, specific details on this process can be
found in the applicable modeling guidance available on the EPA's
SCRAM website (section 2.3). Modeled concentrations should not be
rounded before comparing the resulting design concentration to the
NAAQS or PSD increments. Ambient monitoring and dispersion modeling
address different issues and needs relative to each aspect of the
overall air quality assessment.
c. The PSD increments for criteria pollutants are listed in 40
CFR 52.21(c) and 40 CFR 51.166(c). For short-term increments, these
maximum allowable increases in pollutant concentrations may be
exceeded once per year at each site, while the annual increment may
not be exceeded. The highest, second-highest increase in estimated
concentrations for the short-term averages, as determined by a
model, must be less than or equal to the permitted increment. The
modeled annual averages must not exceed the increment.
d. Receptor sites for refined dispersion modeling should be
located within the modeling domain (section 8.1). In designing a
receptor network, the emphasis should be placed on receptor density
and location, not total number of receptors. Typically, the density
of receptor sites should be progressively more resolved near the new
or modifying source, areas of interest, and areas with the highest
concentrations with sufficient detail to determine where possible
violations of a NAAQS or PSD increments are most likely to occur.
The placement of receptor sites should be determined on a case-by-
case basis, taking into consideration the source characteristics,
topography, climatology, and monitor sites. Locations of particular
importance include: (1) the area of maximum impact of the point
source; (2) the area of maximum impact of nearby sources; and (3)
the area where all sources combine to cause maximum impact.
Depending on the complexities of the source and the environment to
which the source is located, a dense array of receptors may be
required in some cases. In order to avoid unreasonably large
computer runs due to an excessively large array of receptors, it is
often desirable to model the area twice. The first model run would
use a moderate number of receptors more resolved near the new or
modifying source and over areas of interest. The second model run
would modify the receptor network from the first model run with a
denser array of receptors in areas showing potential for high
concentrations and possible violations, as indicated by the results
of the first model run. Accordingly, the EPA neither anticipates nor
encourages that numerous iterations of modeling runs be made to
continually refine the receptor network.
9.2.3 NAAQS and PSD Increments Compliance Demonstrations for New or
Modifying Sources
a. As described in this subsection, the recommended procedure
for conducting either a NAAQS or PSD increments assessment under PSD
permitting is a multi-stage approach that includes the following two
stages:
i. The EPA describes the first stage as a single-source impact
analysis, since this stage involves considering only the impact of
the new or modifying source. There are two possible levels of detail
in conducting a single-source impact analysis with the model user
beginning with use of a screening model and proceeding to use of a
refined model as necessary.
[[Page 72859]]
ii. The EPA describes the second stage as a cumulative impact
analysis, since it takes into account all sources affecting the air
quality in an area. In addition to the project source impact, this
stage includes consideration of background, which includes
contributions from nearby sources and other sources (e.g., natural,
minor, distant major, and unidentified sources).
b. Each stage should involve increasing complexity and details,
as required, to fully demonstrate that a new or modifying source
will not cause or contribute to a violation of any NAAQS or PSD
increment. As such, starting with a single-source impact analysis is
recommended because, where the analysis at this stage is sufficient
to demonstrate that a source will not cause or contribute to any
potential violation, this may alleviate the need for a more time-
consuming and comprehensive cumulative modeling analysis.
c. The single-source impact analysis, or first stage of an air
quality analysis, should begin by determining the potential of a
proposed new or modifying source to cause or contribute to a NAAQS
or PSD increment violation. In certain circumstances, a screening
model or technique may be used instead of the preferred model
because it will provide estimated worst-case ambient impacts from
the proposed new or modifying source. If these worst case ambient
concentration estimates indicate that the source will not cause or
contribute to any potential violation of a NAAQS or PSD increment,
then the screening analysis should generally be sufficient for the
required demonstration under PSD. If the ambient concentration
estimates indicate that the source's emissions have the potential to
cause or contribute to a violation, then the use of a refined model
to estimate the source's impact should be pursued. The refined
modeling analysis should use a model or technique consistent with
the Guideline (either a preferred model or technique or an
alternative model or technique) and follow the requirements and
recommendations for model inputs outlined in section 8. If the
ambient concentration increase predicted with refined modeling
indicates that the source will not cause or contribute to any
potential violation of a NAAQS or PSD increment, then the refined
analysis should generally be sufficient for the required
demonstration under PSD. However, if the ambient concentration
estimates from the refined modeling analysis indicate that the
source's emissions have the potential to cause or contribute to a
violation, then a cumulative impact analysis should be undertaken.
The receptors that indicate the location of significant ambient
impacts should be used to define the modeling domain for use in the
cumulative impact analysis (section 8.2.2).
d. The cumulative impact analysis, or the second stage of an air
quality analysis, should be conducted with the same refined model or
technique to characterize the project source and then include the
appropriate background concentrations (section 8.3). The resulting
design concentrations should be used to determine whether the source
will cause or contribute to a NAAQS or PSD increment violation. This
determination should be based on: (1) The appropriate design
concentration for each applicable NAAQS (and averaging period); and
(2) whether the source's emissions cause or contribute to a
violation at the time and location of any modeled violation (i.e.,
when and where the predicted design concentration is greater than
the NAAQS). For PSD increments, the cumulative impact analysis
should also consider the amount of the air quality increment that
has already been consumed by other sources, or, conversely, whether
increment has expanded relative to the baseline concentration.
Therefore, the applicant should model the existing or permitted
nearby increment-consuming and increment-expanding sources, rather
than using past modeling analyses of those sources as part of
background concentration. This would permit the use of newly
acquired data or improved modeling techniques if such data and/or
techniques have become available since the last source was
permitted.
9.2.3.1 Considerations in Developing Emissions Limits
a. Emissions limits and resulting control requirements should be
established to provide for compliance with each applicable NAAQS
(and averaging period) and PSD increment. It is possible that
multiple emissions limits will be required for a source to
demonstrate compliance with several criteria pollutants (and
averaging periods) and PSD increments. Case-by-case determinations
must be made as to the appropriate form of the limits, i.e., whether
the emissions limits restrict the emission factor (e.g., limiting
lb/MMBTU), the emission rate (e.g., lb/hr), or both. The appropriate
reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and appropriate EPA guidance
should be consulted to determine the appropriate emissions limits on
a case-by-case basis.
9.2.4 Use of Measured Data in Lieu of Model Estimates
a. As described throughout the Guideline, modeling is the
preferred method for demonstrating compliance with the NAAQS and PSD
increments and for determining the most appropriate emissions limits
for new and existing sources. When a preferred model or adequately
justified and approved alternative model is available, model
results, including the appropriate background, are sufficient for
air quality demonstrations and establishing emissions limits, if
necessary. In instances when the modeling technique available is
only a screening technique, the addition of air quality monitoring
data to the analysis may lend credence to the model results.
However, air quality monitoring data alone will normally not be
acceptable as the sole basis for demonstrating compliance with the
NAAQS and PSD increments or for determining emissions limits.
b. There may be rare circumstances where the performance of the
preferred air quality model will be shown to be less than reasonably
acceptable when compared with air quality monitoring data measured
in the vicinity of an existing source. Additionally, there may not
be an applicable preferred air quality model, screening technique,
or justifiable alternative model suitable for the situation. In
these unique instances, there may be the possibility of establishing
emissions limits and demonstrating compliance with the NAAQS and PSD
increments solely on the basis of analysis of observed air quality
data in lieu of an air quality modeling analysis. However, only in
the case of a modification to an existing source should air quality
monitoring data alone be a basis for determining adequate emissions
limits or for demonstration that the modification will not cause or
contribute to a violation of any NAAQS or PSD increment.
c. The following items should be considered prior to the
acceptance of an analysis of measured air quality data as the sole
basis for an air quality demonstration or determining an emissions
limit:
i. Does a monitoring network exist for the pollutants and
averaging times of concern in the vicinity of the existing source?
ii. Has the monitoring network been designed to locate points of
maximum concentration?
iii. Do the monitoring network and the data reduction and
storage procedures meet EPA monitoring and quality assurance
requirements?
iv. Do the dataset and the analysis allow impact of the most
important individual sources to be identified if more than one
source or emission point is involved?
v. Is at least one full year of valid ambient data available?
vi. Can it be demonstrated through the comparison of monitored
data with model results that available air quality models and
techniques are not applicable?
d. Comprehensive air quality monitoring in the area affected by
the existing source with proposed modifications will be necessary in
these cases. Additional meteorological monitoring may also be
necessary. The appropriate number of air quality and meteorological
monitors from a scientific and technical standpoint is a function of
the situation being considered. The source configuration, terrain
configuration, and meteorological variations all have an impact on
number and optimal placement of monitors. Decisions on the
monitoring network appropriate for this type of analysis can only be
made on a case-by-case basis.
e. Sources should obtain approval from the appropriate reviewing
authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and the EPA Regional Office for the
monitoring network prior to the start of monitoring. A monitoring
protocol agreed to by all parties involved is necessary to assure
that ambient data are collected in a consistent and appropriate
manner. The design of the network, the number, type, and location of
the monitors, the sampling period, averaging time, as well as the
need for meteorological monitoring or the use of mobile sampling or
plume tracking techniques, should all be specified in the protocol
and agreed upon prior to start-up of the network.
f. Given the uniqueness and complexities of these rare
circumstances, the procedures can only be established on a case-by-
case basis for analyzing the source's emissions data and the
measured air quality monitoring data, and for projecting with a
reasoned basis
[[Page 72860]]
the air quality impact of a proposed modification to an existing
source in order to demonstrate that emissions from the construction
or operation of the modification will not cause or contribute to a
violation of the applicable NAAQS and PSD increment, and to
determine adequate emissions limits. The same attention should be
given to the detailed analyses of the air quality data as would be
applied to a comprehensive model performance evaluation. In some
cases, the monitoring data collected for use in the performance
evaluation of preferred air quality models, screening technique, or
existing alternative models may help inform the development of a
suitable new alternative model. Early coordination with the
appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)) and the EPA
Regional Office is fundamental with respect to any potential use of
measured data in lieu of model estimates.
10.0 References
1. Code of Federal Regulations; Title 40 (Protection of
Environment); part 51; Sec. Sec. 51.112, 51.117, 51.150, 51.160.
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1990. New Source Review
Workshop Manual: Prevention of Significant Deterioration and
Nonattainment Area Permitting (Draft). Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
3. Code of Federal Regulations; Title 40 (Protection of
Environment); part 51; Sec. Sec. 51.166 and 52.21.
4. Code of Federal Regulations; Title 40 (Protection of
Environment); part 93; Sec. Sec. 93.116, 93.123, and 93.150.
5. Code of Federal Regulations; Title 40 (Protection of
Environment); part 58 (Ambient Air Quality Surveillance).
6. Code of Federal Regulations; Title 40 (Protection of
Environment); part 50 (National Primary and Secondary Ambient Air
Quality Standards).
7. Baker, K.R., Kelly, J.T., 2014. Single source impacts estimated
with photochemical model source sensitivity and apportionment
approaches. Atmospheric Environment, 96: 266-274.
8. ENVIRON, 2012. Evaluation of Chemical Dispersion Models using
Atmospheric Plume Measurements from Field Experiments. ENVIRON
International, Corp., Novato, CA. Prepared under contract No. EP-D-
07-102 for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research
Triangle Park, NC.
9. McMurry, P.H., Shepherd, M.F., Vickery, J.S., 2004. Particulate
matter science for policy makers: A NARSTO assessment. Cambridge
University Press.
10. Baker, K.R., Foley, K.M., 2011. A nonlinear regression model
estimating single source concentrations of primary and secondarily
formed PM2.5. Atmospheric Environment, 45: 3758-3767.
11. Bergin, M.S., Russell, A.G., Odman, M.T., Cohan, D.S.,
Chameldes, W.L., 2008. Single-Source Impact Analysis Using Three-
Dimensional Air Quality Models. Journal of the Air & Waste
Management Association, 58: 1351-1359.
12. Zhou, W., Cohan, D.S., Pinder, R.W., Neuman, J.A., Holloway,
J.S., Peischl, J., Ryerson, T.B., Nowak, J.B., Flocke, F., Zheng,
W.G., 2012. Observation and modeling of the evolution of Texas power
plant plumes. Atmospheric Chemistry and Physics, 12: 455-468.
13. Chen, J., Lu, J., Avise, J.C., DaMassa, J.A., Kleeman, M.J.,
Kaduwela, A.P., 2014. Seasonal modeling of PM 2.5 in California's
San Joaquin Valley. Atmospheric Environment, 92: 182-190.
14. Russell, A.G., 2008. EPA Supersites program-related emissions-
based particulate matter modeling: initial applications and
advances. Journal of the Air & Waste Management Association, 58:
289-302.
15. Tesche, T., Morris, R., Tonnesen, G., McNally, D., Boylan, J.,
Brewer, P., 2006. CMAQ/CAMx annual 2002 performance evaluation over
the eastern US. Atmospheric Environment, 40: 4906-4919.
16. Fox, D.G., 1984. Uncertainty in air quality modeling. Bulletin
of the American Meteorological Society, 65(1): 27-36.
17. Bowne, NE, 1981. Validation and Performance Criteria for Air
Quality Models. Appendix F in Air Quality Modeling and the Clean Air
Act: Recommendations to EPA on Dispersion Modeling for Regulatory
Applications. American Meteorological Society, Boston, MA; pp. 159-
171. (Docket No. A-80-46, II-A-106).
18. Fox, D.G., 1981. Judging Air Quality Model Performance. Bulletin
of the American Meteorological Society, 62(5): 599-609.
19. Simon, H., Baker, K.R., Phillips, S., 2012. Compilation and
interpretation of photochemical model performance statistics
published between 2006 and 2012. Atmospheric Environment, 61: 124-
139.
20. Burton, C.S., 1981. The Role of Atmospheric Models in Regulatory
Decision-Making: Summary Report. Systems Applications, Inc., San
Rafael, CA. Prepared under contract No. 68-01-5845 for the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. (Docket
No. A-80-46, II-M-6).
21. Olesen, H.R., 2001. Ten years of Harmonisation activities: Past,
present and future. Introductory address and paper presented at the
7th International Conference on Harmonisation within Atmospheric
Dispersion Modelling for Regulatory Purposes, May 28-31, 2001,
Belgirate, Italy.
22. Weil, Sykes, and Venkatram, 1992. Evaluating Air-Quality Models:
Review and Outlook. Journal of Applied Meteorology, 31: 1121-1145.
23. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2016. Model Clearinghouse:
Operational Plan. Publication No. EPA-454/B-16-008. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
24. American Meteorological Society, 1983. Synthesis of the Rural
Model Reviews. Publication No. EPA-600/3-83-108. Office of Research
and Development, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 84-
121037).
25. Hanna, S., M. Garrison and B. Turner, 1998. AERMOD Peer Review
report. Prepared by SAI, Inc. under EPA Contract No. 68-D6-0064/1-14
for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle
Park, NC. 12pp. & appendices. (Docket No. A-99-05, II-A-6).
26. Scire, J.S. and L.L. Schulman, 1981. Evaluation of the BLP and
ISC Models with SF6 Tracer Data and SO2 Measurements at
Aluminum Reduction Plants. APCA Specialty Conference on Dispersion
Modeling for Complex Sources, St. Louis, MO.
27. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2003. AERMOD: Latest
Features and Evaluation Results. Publication No. EPA-454/R-03-003.
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle
Park, NC.
28. ASTM D6589: Standard Guide for Statistical Evaluation of
Atmospheric Dispersion Model Performance. (2010).
29. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1992. Protocol for
Determining the Best Performing Model. Publication No. EPA-454/R-92-
025. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle
Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 93-226082).
30. Hanna, S.R., 1982. Natural Variability of Observed Hourly
SO2 and CO Concentrations in St. Louis. Atmospheric
Environment, 16(6): 1435-1440.
31. Pasquill, F., 1974. Atmospheric Diffusion, 2nd Edition. John
Wiley and Sons, New York, NY; 479pp.
32. Rhoads, R.G., 1981. Accuracy of Air Quality Models. Staff
Report. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle
Park, NC. (Docket No. A-80-46, II-G-6).
33. Hanna, S.R., 1993. Uncertainties in air quality model
predictions. Boundary-Layer Meteorology, 62: 3-20.
34. Hanna, S.R., 1989. Confidence limits for air quality model
evaluations, as estimated by bootstrap and jackknife resampling
methods. Atmospheric Environment, 23(6): 1385-1398.
35. Cox, W.M. and J.A. Tikvart, 1990. A statistical procedure for
determining the best performing air quality simulation model.
Atmospheric Environment, 24A(9): 2387-2395.
36. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2016. Technical Support
Document (TSD) for AERMOD-Based Assessments of Long-Range Transport
Impacts for Primary Pollutants. Publication No. EPA-454/B-16-007.
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle
Park, NC.
37. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2021. AERSCREEN User's
Guide. Publication No. EPA-454/B-21-005. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
38. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2011. AERSCREEN Released
as the EPA Recommended Screening Model. Memorandum dated April 11,
2011, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC.
39. Perry, S.G., D.J. Burns and A.J. Cimorelli, 1990. User's Guide
to CTDMPLUS:
[[Page 72861]]
Volume 2. The Screening Mode (CTSCREEN). Publication No. EPA-600/8-
90-087. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle
Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 91-136564).
40. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1992. Screening Procedures
for Estimating the Air Quality Impact of Stationary Sources,
Revised. Publication No. EPA-454/R-92-019. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 93-
219095).
41. Burns, D.J., S.G. Perry and A.J. Cimorelli, 1991. An Advanced
Screening Model for Complex Terrain Applications. Paper presented at
the 7th Joint Conference on Applications of Air Pollution
Meteorology (cosponsored by the American Meteorological Society and
the Air & Waste Management Association), January 13-18, 1991, New
Orleans, LA.
42. Mills, M.T., R.J. Paine, E.A. Insley and B.A. Egan, 1987. The
Complex Terrain Dispersion Model Terrain Preprocessor System--User's
Guide and Program Description. Publication No. EPA-600/8-88-003.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC.
(NTIS No. PB 88-162094).
43. Environmental Research and Technology, 1987. User's Guide to the
Rough Terrain Diffusion Model (RTDM), Rev. 3.20. ERT Document No. P-
D535-585. Environmental Research and Technology, Inc., Concord, MA.
(NTIS No. PB 88-171467).
44. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. AERMOD Model
Formulation. Publication No. EPA-454/B-23-008. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
45. Cimorelli, A., et al., 2005. AERMOD: A Dispersion Model for
Industrial Source Applications. Part I: General Model Formulation
and Boundary Layer Characterization. Journal of Applied Meteorology,
44(5): 682-693.
46. L.L. Schulman, D.G. Strimaitis and J.S. Scire, 2002. Development
and evaluation of the PRIME plume rise and building downwash model.
Journal of the Air & Waste Management Association, 50: 378-390.
47. U.S. EPA, 2012: User's Manual AERCOARE Version 1.0. EPA-910-R-
12-008. U.S. EPA, Region 10, Seattle, WA.
48. Fairall, C.W., E.F. Bradley, J.E. Hare, A.A. Grachev, and J.B.
Edson, 2003: ``Bulk Parameterization of Air-Sea Fluxes: Updates and
Verification for the COARE Algorithm.'' Journal. Of Climate, 16,
571-591.
49. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1992. Guideline for
modeling carbon monoxide from roadway intersections. Publication
number EPA-454/R-92-005. Office of Air Quality Planning & Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
50. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1997. Guidance for Siting
Ambient Air Monitors around Stationary Lead Sources. Publication No.
EPA-454/R-92-009R. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 97-208094).
51. LEADPOST processor: https://gaftp.epa.gov/Air/aqmg/SCRAM/models/preferred/aermod/leadpost.zip.
52. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1993. Lead Guideline
Document. Publication No. EPA-452/R-93-009. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 94-
111846).
53. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2014. Guidance for 1-Hour
SO2 Nonattainment Area SIP Submissions. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
54. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2016. SO2 NAAQS
Designations Modeling Technical Assistance Document. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
55. Turner, D.B., 1964. A Diffusion Model for an Urban Area. Journal
of Applied Meteorology, 3(1):83-91.
56. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2015. Technical Support
Document (TSD) for NO2-Related AERMOD Options and
Modifications. Publication No. EPA-454/B-15-004. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
57. Podrez, M., 2015. An Update to the Ambient Ratio Method for 1-h
NO2 Air Quality Standards Dispersion Modeling.
Atmospheric Environment, 103: 163-170.
58. Cole, H.S. and J.E. Summerhays, 1979. A Review of Techniques
Available for Estimation of Short-Term NO2
Concentrations. Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association,
29(8): 812-817.
59. Hanrahan, P.L., 1999. The Polar Volume Polar Ratio Method for
Determining NO2/NOX Ratios in Modeling--Part
I: Methodology. Journal of the Air & Waste Management Association,
49: 1324-1331.
60. Carruthers, D.J.; Stocker, J.R.; Ellis, A.; Seaton, M.D.; Smith,
SE, 2017. Evaluation of an explicit NOX chemistry method
in AERMOD; Journal of the Air & Waste Management Association. 2017,
67 (6), 702-712; DOI:10.1080/10962247.2017.1280096.
61. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. Technical Support
Document (TSD) for Adoption of the Generic Reaction Set Method
(GRSM) as a Regulatory Non-Default Tier-3 NO2 Screening Option,
Publication No. EPA-454/R-23-009. Office of Air Quality Planning &
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
62. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2004. The Particle
Pollution Report. Publication No. EPA-454/R-04-002. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
63. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2022. Guidance for Ozone
and PM2.5 Permit Modeling. Publication No. EPA-454/R-22-
005. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle
Park, NC.
64. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2018. Modeling Guidance
for Demonstrating Attainment of Air Quality Goals for Ozone,
PM2.5, and Regional Haze. Publication No. EPA 454/R-18-
009. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle
Park, NC.
65. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2015. Transportation
Conformity Guidance for Quantitative Hot-Spot Analyses in
PM2.5 and PM10 Nonattainment and Maintenance
Areas. Publication No. EPA-420-B-15-084. Office of Transportation
and Air Quality, Ann Arbor, MI.
66. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1987. PM10 SIP
Development Guideline. Publication No. EPA-450/2-86-001. Office of
Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
(NTIS No. PB 87-206488).
67. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2012. Haul Road Workgroup
Final Report Submission to EPA-OAQPS. Memorandum dated March 2,
2012, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC.
68. Seinfeld, J.H., Pandis, S.N., 2012. Atmospheric chemistry and
physics: from air pollution to climate change. John Wiley & Sons.
69. Simon, H., Baker, K.R., Phillips, S., 2012. Compilation and
interpretation of photochemical model performance statistics
published between 2006 and 2012. Atmospheric Environment, 61, 124-
139.
70. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2016. Guidance on the use
of models for assessing the impacts of emissions from single sources
on the secondarily formed pollutants ozone and PM2.5.
Publication No. EPA 454/R-16-005. Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
71. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2019. Guidance on the
Development of Modeled Emission Rates for Precursors (MERPs) as a
Tier 1 Demonstration Tool for Ozone and PM2.5 under the
PSD Permitting Program. Publication No. EPA-454/R-19-003. Office of
Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
72. U.S. Department of the Interior, 2010. Federal Land Managers'
Air Quality Related Values Work Group (FLAG) Phase I Report--Revised
2010. Natural Resource Report NPS/NPRC/NRR-2010/232.
73. National Acid Precipitation Assessment Program (NAPAP), 1991.
Acid Deposition: State of Science and Technology. Volume III
Terrestrial, Materials, Health and Visibility Effects. Report 24,
Visibility: Existing and Historical Conditions--Causes and Effects.
Edited by Patricia M. Irving. Washington, DC, 129pp.
74. National Research Council, 1993. Protecting Visibility in
National Parks and Wilderness Areas. National Academy Press,
Washington, DC, 446pp.
75. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1992. Workbook for plume
visual impact screening and analysis (revised). Publication No. EPA-
454/R-92-023. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 93-223592).
[[Page 72862]]
76. Nilsson, J., Grennfelt, P., Ministerr[aring]d, N., 1988.
Critical Loads for Sulphur and Nitrogen: Report from a Workshop Held
at Skokloster, Sweden, 19-24 March, 1988. Nordic Council of
Ministers.
77. Turner, D.B., 1969. Workbook of Atmospheric Dispersion
Estimates. PHS Publication No. 999-AP-26. U.S. Department of Health,
Education and Welfare, Public Health Service, Cincinnati, OH. (NTIS
No. PB-191482).
78. McElroy, J.L. and F. Pooler, Jr., 1968. St. Louis Dispersion
Study, Volume II-- Analysis. National Air Pollution Control
Administration Publication No. AP-53, U.S. Department of Health,
Education and Welfare, Public Health Service, Arlington, VA. (NTIS
No. PB-190255).
79. Irwin, J.S., 1978. Proposed Criteria for Selection of Urban
Versus Rural Dispersion Coefficients. (Draft Staff Report).
Meteorology and Assessment Division, U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. (Docket No. A-80-46, II-B-8).
80. Auer, Jr., A.H., 1978. Correlation of Land Use and Cover with
Meteorological Anomalies. Journal of Applied Meteorology, 17(5):
636-643.
81. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. AERMOD
Implementation Guide. Publication No. EPA-454/B-23-009. Office of
Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
82. Pasquill, F., 1976. Atmospheric Dispersion Parameters in
Gaussian Plume Modeling, Part II. Possible Requirements for Change
in the Turner Workbook Values. Publication No. EPA-600/4-76-030b.
Office of Research and Development, Research Triangle Park, NC.
(NTIS No. PB-258036/3BA).
83. Stull, R.B., 1988. An Introduction to Boundary Layer
Meteorology. Kluwer Academic Publishers, Boston, MA. 666pp.
84. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1987. Analysis and
Evaluation of Statistical Coastal Fumigation Models. Publication No.
EPA-450/4-87-002. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 87-175519).
85. Wesely, M.L, P.V. Doskey, and J.D. Shannon, 2002: Deposition
Parameterizations for the Industrial Source Complex (ISC3) Model.
ANL Report ANL/ER/TRB01/003, DOE/W-31-109-Eng-38, Argonne National
Laboratory, Argonne, Illinois 60439.
86. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1981. Guideline for Use of
Fluid Modeling to Determine Good Engineering Practice (GEP) Stack
Height. Publication No. EPA-450/4-81-003. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 82-
145327).
87. Lawson, Jr., R.E. and W.H. Snyder, 1983. Determination of Good
Engineering Practice Stack Height: A Demonstration Study for a Power
Plant. Publication No. EPA-600/3-83-024. Office of Research and
Development, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 83-207407).
88. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1985. Guideline for
Determination of Good Engineering Practice Stack Height (Technical
Support Document for the Stack Height Regulations), Revised.
Publication No. EPA-450/4-80-023R. Office of Air Quality Planning
and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 85-225241).
89. Snyder, W.H. and R.E. Lawson, Jr., 1985. Fluid Modeling
Demonstration of Good Engineering-Practice Stack Height in Complex
Terrain. Publication No. EPA-600/3-85-022. Office of Research and
Development, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 85-203107).
90. Briggs, G.A., 1975. Plume Rise Predictions. Chapter 3 in
Lectures on Air Pollution and Environmental Impact Analyses.
American Meteorological Society, Boston, MA; pp. 59-111.
91. Hanna, S.R., G.A. Briggs and R.P. Hosker, Jr., 1982. Plume Rise.
Chapter 2 in Handbook on Atmospheric Diffusion. Technical
Information Center, U.S. Department of Energy, Washington, DC; pp.
11-24. DOE/TIC-11223 (DE 82002045).
92. Weil, J.C., L.A. Corio and R.P. Brower, 1997. A PDF dispersion
model for buoyant plumes in the convective boundary layer. Journal
of Applied Meteorology, 36: 982-1003.
93. L.L. Schulman, D.G. Strimaitis and J.S. Scire, 2002. Development
and evaluation of the PRIME plume rise and building downwash model.
Journal of the Air & Waste Management Association, 50: 378-390.
94. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1995. Compilation of Air
Pollutant Emission Factors, Volume I: Stationary Point and Area
Sources (Fifth Edition, AP-42: GPO Stock No. 055-000-00500-1), and
Supplements A-D. Volume I can be downloaded from EPA's website at
https://www.epa.gov/air-emissions-factors-and-quantification/ap-42-compilation-air-emission-factors.
95. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2017. Emissions Inventory
Guidance for Implementation of Ozone and Particulate Matter National
Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) and Regional Haze Regulations.
Publication No. EPA-454/B-17-002. Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
96. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. Draft Guidance on
Developing Background Concentrations for Use in Modeling
Demonstrations. Publication No. EPA-454/P-23-001. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
97. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1987. Ambient Air
Monitoring Guidelines for Prevention of Significant Deterioration
(PSD). Publication No. EPA-450/4-87-007. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 90-
168030).
98. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2011. Additional
Clarification Regarding Application of Appendix W Modeling Guidance
for the 1-hour NO2 National Ambient Air Quality Standard.
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle
Park, NC.
99. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2013. Use of ASOS
meteorological data in AERMOD dispersion modeling. Memorandum dated
March 8, 2013, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
100. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. User's Guide for
the AERMOD Meteorological Preprocessor (AERMET). Publication No.
EPA-454/B-23-005. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
101. U.S Environmental Protection Agency. 2023. AERMINUTE User's
Guide. Publication No. EPA-454/B-23-007. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
102. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1993. PCRAMMET User's
Guide. Publication No. EPA-454/R-96-001. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 97-
147912).
103. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1996. Meteorological
Processor for Regulatory Models (MPRM). Publication No. EPA-454/R-
96-002. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 96-180518).
104. Paine, R.J., 1987. User's Guide to the CTDM Meteorological
Preprocessor Program. Publication No. EPA-600/8-88-004. Office of
Research and Development, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB-
88-162102).
105. Perry, S.G., D.J. Burns, L.H. Adams, R.J. Paine, M.G. Dennis,
M.T. Mills, D.G. Strimaitis, R.J. Yamartino and E.M. Insley, 1989.
User's Guide to the Complex Terrain Dispersion Model Plus Algorithms
for Unstable Situations (CTDMPLUS). Volume 1: Model Descriptions and
User Instructions. Publication No. EPA-600/8-89-041. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS
No. PB 89-181424).
106. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2020. User's Guide for
AERSURFACE Tool. Publication No. EPA-454/B-20-008. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
107. Brode, R., K. Wesson, J. Thurman, and C. Tillerson, 2008.
AERMOD Sensitivity to the Choice of Surface Characteristics. Paper
#811 presented at the 101st Air & Waste Management Association
Annual Conference and Exhibition, June 24-27, 2008, Portland, OR.
108. Ramboll, 2023. The Mesoscale Model Interface Program (MMIF)
Version 4.1 User's Manual.
109. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. Guidance on the Use
of the Mesoscale Model Interface Program (MMIF) for AERMOD
Applications. Publication No. EPA-454/B-23-006. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
110. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2000. Meteorological
Monitoring Guidance for Regulatory Modeling Applications.
Publication No. EPA-454/
[[Page 72863]]
R-99-005. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 2001-103606).
111. ASTM D5527: Standard Practice for Measuring Surface Winds and
Temperature by Acoustic Means. (2011).
112. ASTM D5741: Standard Practice for Characterizing Surface Wind
Using Wind Vane and Rotating Anemometer. (2011).
113. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1995. Quality Assurance
for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume IV--Meteorological
Measurements. Publication No. EPA600/R-94/038d. Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC. Note:
for copies of this handbook, you may make inquiry to ORD
Publications, 26 West Martin Luther King Dr., Cincinnati, OH 45268.
114. Bowen, B.M., J.M. Dewart and A.I. Chen, 1983. Stability Class
Determination: A Comparison for One Site. Proceedings, Sixth
Symposium on Turbulence and Diffusion. American Meteorological
Society, Boston, MA; pp. 211-214. (Docket No. A-92-65, II-A-7).
115. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1993. An Evaluation of a
Solar Radiation/Delta-T (SRDT) Method for Estimating Pasquill-
Gifford (P-G) Stability Categories. Publication No. EPA-454/R-93-
055. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle
Park, NC. (NTIS No. PB 94-113958).
116. Irwin, J.S., 1980. Dispersion Estimate Suggestion #8:
Estimation of Pasquill Stability Categories. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC. (Docket No. A-80-46, II-B-10).
117. Mitchell, Jr., A.E. and K.O. Timbre, 1979. Atmospheric
Stability Class from Horizontal Wind Fluctuation. Presented at 72nd
Annual Meeting of Air Pollution Control Association, Cincinnati, OH;
June 24-29, 1979. (Docket No. A-80-46, II-P-9).
118. Smedman-Hogstrom, A. and V. Hogstrom, 1978. A Practical Method
for Determining Wind Frequency Distributions for the Lowest 200 m
from Routine Meteorological Data. Journal of Applied Meteorology,
17(7): 942-954.
119. Smith, T.B. and S.M. Howard, 1972. Methodology for Treating
Diffusivity. MRI 72 FR-1030. Meteorology Research, Inc., Altadena,
CA. (Docket No. A-80-46, II-P-8).
120. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2018. Evaluation of
Prognostic Meteorological Data in AERMOD Applications. Publication
No. EPA-454/R-18-002. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
121. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1984. Calms Processor
(CALMPRO) User's Guide. Publication No. EPA-901/9-84-001. Office of
Air Quality Planning and Standards, Region I, Boston, MA. (NTIS No.
PB 84-229467).
Addendum A to Appendix W of Part 51--Summaries of Preferred Air Quality
Models
Table of Contents
A.0 Introduction and Availability
A.1 AERMOD (AMS/EPA Regulatory Model)
A.2 CTDMPLUS (Complex Terrain Dispersion Model Plus Algorithms for
Unstable Situations)
A.3 OCD (Offshore and Coastal Dispersion Model)
A.0 Introduction and Availability
(1) This appendix summarizes key features of refined air quality
models preferred for specific regulatory applications. For each
model, information is provided on availability, approximate cost
(where applicable), regulatory use, data input, output format and
options, simulation of atmospheric physics, and accuracy. These
models may be used without a formal demonstration of applicability
provided they satisfy the recommendations for regulatory use; not
all options in the models are necessarily recommended for regulatory
use.
(2) These models have been subjected to a performance evaluation
using comparisons with observed air quality data. Where possible,
the models contained herein have been subjected to evaluation
exercises, including: (1) statistical performance tests recommended
by the American Meteorological Society, and (2) peer scientific
reviews. The models in this appendix have been selected on the basis
of the results of the model evaluations, experience with previous
use, familiarity of the model to various air quality programs, and
the costs and resource requirements for use.
(3) Codes and documentation for all models listed in this
addendum are available from the EPA's Support Center for Regulatory
Air Models (SCRAM) website at https://www.epa.gov/scram. Codes and
documentation may also be available from the National Technical
Information Service (NTIS), https://www.ntis.gov, and, when
available, are referenced with the appropriate NTIS accession
number.
A.1 AERMOD (AMS/EPA Regulatory Model)
References
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. AERMOD Model
Formulation. Publication No. EPA-454/B-23-010. Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
Cimorelli, A., et al., 2005. AERMOD: A Dispersion Model for
Industrial Source Applications. Part I: General Model Formulation
and Boundary Layer Characterization. Journal of Applied Meteorology,
44(5): 682-693.
Perry, S., et al., 2005. AERMOD: A Dispersion Model for Industrial
Source Applications. Part II: Model Performance against 17 Field
Study Databases. Journal of Applied Meteorology, 44(5): 694-708.
Heist, D., et al., 2013. Estimating near-road pollutant dispersion:
A model inter-comparison. Transportation Research Part D: Transport
and Environment, 25: pp 93-105.
Heist, D., et al., 2023. Integration of RLINE dispersion model into
EPA's AERMOD: updated formulation and evaluations. Journal of the
Air & Waste Management Association, Manuscript submitted for
publication.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. User's Guide for the
AMS/EPA Regulatory Model (AERMOD). Publication No. EPA-454/B-23-008.
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle
Park, NC.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. User's Guide for the
AERMOD Meteorological Preprocessor (AERMET). Publication No. EPA-
454/B-23-005. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, NC.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2018. User's Guide for the
AERMOD Terrain Preprocessor (AERMAP). Publication No. EPA-454/B-18-
004. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
Schulman, L.L., D.G. Strimaitis and J.S. Scire, 2000. Development
and evaluation of the PRIME plume rise and building downwash model.
Journal of the Air & Waste Management Association, 50: 378-390.
Schulman, L.L., and Joseph S. Scire, 1980. Buoyant Line and Point
Source (BLP) Dispersion Model User's Guide. Document P-7304B.
Environmental Research and Technology, Inc., Concord, MA. (NTIS No.
PB 81-164642).
Availability
The model codes and associated documentation are available on
EPA's SCRAM website (paragraph A.0(3)).
Abstract
AERMOD is a steady-state plume dispersion model for assessment
of pollutant concentrations from a variety of sources. AERMOD
simulates transport and dispersion from multiple point, area,
volume, and line sources based on an up-to-date characterization of
the atmospheric boundary layer. Sources may be located in rural or
urban areas, and receptors may be located in simple or complex
terrain. AERMOD accounts for building wake effects (i.e., plume
downwash) based on the PRIME building downwash algorithms. The model
employs hourly sequential preprocessed meteorological data to
estimate concentrations for averaging times from 1-hour to 1-year
(also multiple years). AERMOD can be used to estimate the
concentrations of nonreactive pollutants from highway traffic.
AERMOD also handles unique modeling problems associated with
aluminum reduction plants, and other industrial sources where plume
rise and downwash effects from stationary buoyant line sources are
important. AERMOD is designed to operate in concert with two pre-
processor codes: AERMET processes meteorological data for input to
AERMOD, and AERMAP processes terrain elevation data and generates
receptor and hill height information for input to AERMOD.
[[Page 72864]]
a. Regulatory Use
(1) AERMOD is appropriate for the following applications:
Point, volume, and area sources;
Buoyant, elevated line sources (e.g., aluminum
reduction plants);
Mobile sources;
Surface, near-surface, and elevated releases;
Rural or urban areas;
Simple and complex terrain;
Transport distances over which steady- state
assumptions are appropriate, up to 50 km;
1-hour to annual averaging times,
Continuous toxic air emissions; and,
Applications in the marine boundary layer environment
where the effects of shoreline fumigation and/or platform downwash
are adequately assessed or are not applicable.
(2) For regulatory applications of AERMOD, the regulatory
default option should be set, i.e., the parameter DFAULT should be
employed in the MODELOPT record in the COntrol Pathway. The DFAULT
option requires the use of meteorological data processed with the
regulatory options in AERMET, the use of terrain elevation data
processed through the AERMAP terrain processor, stack-tip downwash,
sequential date checking, and does not permit the use of the model
in the SCREEN mode. In the regulatory default mode, pollutant half-
life or decay options are not employed, except in the case of an
urban source of sulfur dioxide where a 4-hour half-life is applied.
Terrain elevation data from the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) 7.5-
Minute Digital Elevation Model (DEM), or equivalent (approx. 30-
meter resolution and finer), (processed through AERMAP) should be
used in all applications. Starting in 2011, data from the 3D
Elevation Program (3DEP, https://apps.nationalmap.gov/downloader),
formerly the National Elevation Dataset (NED), can also be used in
AERMOD, which includes a range of resolutions, from 1-m to 2 arc
seconds and such high resolution would always be preferred. In some
cases, exceptions from the terrain data requirement may be made in
consultation with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph
3.0(b)).
b. Input Requirements
(1) Source data: Required inputs include source type, location,
emission rate, stack height, stack inside diameter, stack gas exit
velocity, stack gas exit temperature, area and volume source
dimensions, and source base elevation. For point sources subject to
the influence of building downwash, direction-specific building
dimensions (processed through the BPIPPRM building processor) should
be input. Variable emission rates are optional. Buoyant line sources
require coordinates of the end points of the line, release height,
emission rate, average line source width, average building width,
average spacing between buildings, and average line source buoyancy
parameter. For mobile sources, traffic volume; emission factor,
source height, and mixing zone width are needed to determine
appropriate model inputs.
(2) Meteorological data: The AERMET meteorological preprocessor
requires input of surface characteristics, including surface
roughness (zo), Bowen ratio, and albedo, as well as, hourly
observations of wind speed between 7zo and 100 m (reference wind
speed measurement from which a vertical profile can be developed),
wind direction, cloud cover, and temperature between zo and 100 m
(reference temperature measurement from which a vertical profile can
be developed). Meteorological data can be in the form of observed
data or prognostic modeled data as discussed in paragraph 8.4.1(d).
Surface characteristics may be varied by wind sector and by season
or month. When using observed meteorological data, a morning
sounding (in National Weather Service format) from a representative
upper air station is required. Latitude, longitude, and time zone of
the surface, site-specific or prognostic data (if applicable) and
upper air meteorological stations are required. The wind speed
starting threshold is also required in AERMET for applications
involving site-specific data. When using prognostic data, modeled
profiles of temperature and winds are input to AERMET. These can be
hourly or a time that represents a morning sounding. Additionally,
measured profiles of wind, temperature, vertical and lateral
turbulence may be required in certain applications (e.g., in complex
terrain) to adequately represent the meteorology affecting plume
transport and dispersion. Optionally, measurements of solar and/or
net radiation may be input to AERMET. Two files are produced by the
AERMET meteorological preprocessor for input to the AERMOD
dispersion model. When using observed data, the surface file
contains observed and calculated surface variables, one record per
hour. For applications with multi-level site-specific meteorological
data, the profile contains the observations made at each level of
the meteorological tower (or remote sensor). When using prognostic
data, the surface file contains surface variables calculated by the
prognostic model and AERMET. The profile file contains the
observations made at each level of a meteorological tower (or remote
sensor), the one-level observations taken from other representative
data (e.g., National Weather Service surface observations), one
record per level per hour, or in the case of prognostic data, the
prognostic modeled values of temperature and winds at user-specified
levels.
(i) Data used as input to AERMET should possess an adequate
degree of representativeness to ensure that the wind, temperature
and turbulence profiles derived by AERMOD are both laterally and
vertically representative of the source impact area. The adequacy of
input data should be judged independently for each variable. The
values for surface roughness, Bowen ratio, and albedo should reflect
the surface characteristics in the vicinity of the meteorological
tower or representative grid cell when using prognostic data, and
should be adequately representative of the modeling domain. Finally,
the primary atmospheric input variables, including wind speed and
direction, ambient temperature, cloud cover, and a morning upper air
sounding, should also be adequately representative of the source
area when using observed data.
(ii) For applications involving the use of site-specific
meteorological data that includes turbulences parameters (i.e.,
sigma-theta and/or sigma-w), the application of the ADJ_U* option in
AERMET would require approval as an alternative model application
under section 3.2.
(iii) For recommendations regarding the length of meteorological
record needed to perform a regulatory analysis with AERMOD, see
section 8.4.2.
(3) Receptor data: Receptor coordinates, elevations, height
above ground, and hill height scales are produced by the AERMAP
terrain preprocessor for input to AERMOD. Discrete receptors and/or
multiple receptor grids, Cartesian and/or polar, may be employed in
AERMOD. AERMAP requires input of DEM or 3DEP terrain data produced
by the USGS, or other equivalent data. AERMAP can be used optionally
to estimate source elevations.
c. Output
Printed output options include input information, high
concentration summary tables by receptor for user-specified
averaging periods, maximum concentration summary tables, and
concurrent values summarized by receptor for each day processed.
Optional output files can be generated for: a listing of occurrences
of exceedances of user-specified threshold value; a listing of
concurrent (raw) results at each receptor for each hour modeled,
suitable for post-processing; a listing of design values that can be
imported into graphics software for plotting contours; a listing of
results suitable for NAAQS analyses including NAAQS exceedances and
culpability analyses; an unformatted listing of raw results above a
threshold value with a special structure for use with the TOXX model
component of TOXST; a listing of concentrations by rank (e.g., for
use in quantile-quantile plots); and a listing of concentrations,
including arc-maximum normalized concentrations, suitable for model
evaluation studies.
d. Type of Model
AERMOD is a steady-state plume model, using Gaussian
distributions in the vertical and horizontal for stable conditions,
and in the horizontal for convective conditions. The vertical
concentration distribution for convective conditions results from an
assumed bi-Gaussian probability density function of the vertical
velocity.
e. Pollutant Types
AERMOD is applicable to primary pollutants and continuous
releases of toxic and hazardous waste pollutants. Chemical
transformation is treated by simple exponential decay.
f. Source-Receptor Relationships
AERMOD applies user-specified locations for sources and
receptors. Actual separation between each source-receptor pair is
used. Source and receptor elevations are user input or are
determined by AERMAP using USGS DEM or 3DEP terrain data. Receptors
may be
[[Page 72865]]
located at user-specified heights above ground level.
g. Plume Behavior
(1) In the convective boundary layer (CBL), the transport and
dispersion of a plume is characterized as the superposition of three
modeled plumes: (1) the direct plume (from the stack); (2) the
indirect plume; and (3) the penetrated plume, where the indirect
plume accounts for the lofting of a buoyant plume near the top of
the boundary layer, and the penetrated plume accounts for the
portion of a plume that, due to its buoyancy, penetrates above the
mixed layer, but can disperse downward and re-enter the mixed layer.
In the CBL, plume rise is superposed on the displacements by random
convective velocities (Weil, et al., 1997).
(2) In the stable boundary layer, plume rise is estimated using
an iterative approach to account for height-dependent lapse rates,
similar to that in the CTDMPLUS model (see A.2 in this appendix).
(3) Stack-tip downwash and buoyancy induced dispersion effects
are modeled. Building wake effects are simulated for stacks subject
to building downwash using the methods contained in the PRIME
downwash algorithms (Schulman, et al., 2000). For plume rise
affected by the presence of a building, the PRIME downwash algorithm
uses a numerical solution of the mass, energy and momentum
conservation laws (Zhang and Ghoniem, 1993). Streamline deflection
and the position of the stack relative to the building affect plume
trajectory and dispersion. Enhanced dispersion is based on the
approach of Weil (1996). Plume mass captured by the cavity is well-
mixed within the cavity. The captured plume mass is re-emitted to
the far wake as a volume source.
(4) For elevated terrain, AERMOD incorporates the concept of the
critical dividing streamline height, in which flow below this height
remains horizontal, and flow above this height tends to rise up and
over terrain (Snyder, et al., 1985). Plume concentration estimates
are the weighted sum of these two limiting plume states. However,
consistent with the steady-state assumption of uniform horizontal
wind direction over the modeling domain, straight-line plume
trajectories are assumed, with adjustment in the plume/receptor
geometry used to account for the terrain effects.
h. Horizontal Winds
Vertical profiles of wind are calculated for each hour based on
measurements and surface-layer similarity (scaling) relationships.
At a given height above ground, for a given hour, winds are assumed
constant over the modeling domain. The effect of the vertical
variation in horizontal wind speed on dispersion is accounted for
through simple averaging over the plume depth.
i. Vertical Wind Speed
In convective conditions, the effects of random vertical updraft
and downdraft velocities are simulated with a bi-Gaussian
probability density function. In both convective and stable
conditions, the mean vertical wind speed is assumed equal to zero.
j. Horizontal Dispersion
Gaussian horizontal dispersion coefficients are estimated as
continuous functions of the parameterized (or measured) ambient
lateral turbulence and also account for buoyancy-induced and
building wake-induced turbulence. Vertical profiles of lateral
turbulence are developed from measurements and similarity (scaling)
relationships. Effective turbulence values are determined from the
portion of the vertical profile of lateral turbulence between the
plume height and the receptor height. The effective lateral
turbulence is then used to estimate horizontal dispersion.
k. Vertical Dispersion
In the stable boundary layer, Gaussian vertical dispersion
coefficients are estimated as continuous functions of parameterized
vertical turbulence. In the convective boundary layer, vertical
dispersion is characterized by a bi-Gaussian probability density
function and is also estimated as a continuous function of
parameterized vertical turbulence. Vertical turbulence profiles are
developed from measurements and similarity (scaling) relationships.
These turbulence profiles account for both convective and mechanical
turbulence. Effective turbulence values are determined from the
portion of the vertical profile of vertical turbulence between the
plume height and the receptor height. The effective vertical
turbulence is then used to estimate vertical dispersion.
l. Chemical Transformation
Chemical transformations are generally not treated by AERMOD.
However, AERMOD does contain an option to treat chemical
transformation using simple exponential decay, although this option
is typically not used in regulatory applications except for sources
of sulfur dioxide in urban areas. Either a decay coefficient or a
half-life is input by the user. Note also that the Generic Reaction
Set Method, Plume Volume Molar Ratio Method and the Ozone Limiting
Method (section 4.2.3.4) for NO2 analyses are available.
m. Physical Removal
AERMOD can be used to treat dry and wet deposition for both
gases and particles. Currently, Method 1 particle deposition is
available for regulatory applications. Method 2 particle deposition
and gas deposition are currently alpha options and not available for
regulatory applications
n. Evaluation Studies
American Petroleum Institute, 1998. Evaluation of State of the
Science of Air Quality Dispersion Model, Scientific Evaluation,
prepared by Woodward-Clyde Consultants, Lexington, Massachusetts,
for American Petroleum Institute, Washington, DC 20005-4070.
Brode, R.W., 2002. Implementation and Evaluation of PRIME in AERMOD.
Preprints of the 12th Joint Conference on Applications of Air
Pollution Meteorology, May 20-24, 2002; American Meteorological
Society, Boston, MA.
Brode, R.W., 2004. Implementation and Evaluation of Bulk Richardson
Number Scheme in AERMOD. 13th Joint Conference on Applications of
Air Pollution Meteorology, August 23-26, 2004; American
Meteorological Society, Boston, MA.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2003. AERMOD: Latest Features
and Evaluation Results. Publication No. EPA-454/R-03-003. Office of
Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
Heist, D., et al., 2013. Estimating near-road pollutant dispersion:
A model inter-comparison. Transportation Research Part D: Transport
and Environment, 25: pp 93-105.
Heist, D., et al., 2023. Integration of RLINE dispersion model into
EPA's AERMOD: updated formulation and evaluations. Journal of the
Air & Waste Management Association, Manuscript submitted for
publication.
Carruthers, D.J.; Stocker, J.R.; Ellis, A.; Seaton, M.D.; Smith, SE
Evaluation of an explicit NOx chemistry method in AERMOD; Journal of
the Air & Waste Management Association. 2017, 67 (6), 702-712;
DOI:10.1080/10962247.2017.1280096.
Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. Technical Support Document
(TSD) for Adoption of the Generic Reaction Set Method (GRSM) as a
Regulatory Non-Default Tier-3 NO2 Screening Option. Publication No.
EPA-454/R-23-009. Office of Air Quality Planning & Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
A.2 CTDMPLUS (Complex Terrain Dispersion Model Plus Algorithms for
Unstable Situations)
References
Perry, S.G., D.J. Burns, L.H. Adams, R.J. Paine, M.G. Dennis, M.T.
Mills, D.G. Strimaitis, R.J. Yamartino and E.M. Insley, 1989. User's
Guide to the Complex Terrain Dispersion Model Plus Algorithms for
Unstable Situations (CTDMPLUS). Volume 1: Model Descriptions and
User Instructions. EPA Publication No. EPA-600/8-89-041. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. (NTIS
No. PB 89-181424).
Perry, S.G., 1992. CTDMPLUS: A Dispersion Model for Sources near
Complex Topography. Part I: Technical Formulations. Journal of
Applied Meteorology, 31(7): 633-645.
Availability
The model codes and associated documentation are available on
the EPA's SCRAM website (paragraph A.0(3)).
Abstract
CTDMPLUS is a refined point source Gaussian air quality model
for use in all stability conditions for complex terrain
applications. The model contains, in its entirety, the technology of
CTDM for stable and neutral conditions. However, CTDMPLUS can also
simulate daytime, unstable conditions, and has a number of
additional capabilities for improved user friendliness. Its use of
meteorological data
[[Page 72866]]
and terrain information is different from other EPA models;
considerable detail for both types of input data is required and is
supplied by preprocessors specifically designed for CTDMPLUS.
CTDMPLUS requires the parameterization of individual hill shapes
using the terrain preprocessor and the association of each model
receptor with a particular hill.
a. Regulatory Use
CTDMPLUS is appropriate for the following applications:
Elevated point sources;
Terrain elevations above stack top;
Rural or urban areas;
Transport distances less than 50 kilometers; and
1-hour to annual averaging times when used with a post-
processor program such as CHAVG.
b. Input Requirements
(1) Source data: For each source, user supplies source location,
height, stack diameter, stack exit velocity, stack exit temperature,
and emission rate; if variable emissions are appropriate, the user
supplies hourly values for emission rate, stack exit velocity, and
stack exit temperature.
(2) Meteorological data: For applications of CTDMPLUS, multiple
level (typically three or more) measurements of wind speed and
direction, temperature and turbulence (wind fluctuation statistics)
are required to create the basic meteorological data file
(``PROFILE''). Such measurements should be obtained up to the
representative plume height(s) of interest (i.e., the plume
height(s) under those conditions important to the determination of
the design concentration). The representative plume height(s) of
interest should be determined using an appropriate complex terrain
screening procedure (e.g., CTSCREEN) and should be documented in the
monitoring/modeling protocol. The necessary meteorological
measurements should be obtained from an appropriately sited
meteorological tower augmented by SODAR and/or RASS if the
representative plume height(s) of interest is above the levels
represented by the tower measurements. Meteorological preprocessors
then create a SURFACE data file (hourly values of mixed layer
heights, surface friction velocity, Monin-Obukhov length and surface
roughness length) and a RAWINsonde data file (upper air measurements
of pressure, temperature, wind direction, and wind speed).
(3) Receptor data: receptor names (up to 400) and coordinates,
and hill number (each receptor must have a hill number assigned).
(4) Terrain data: user inputs digitized contour information to
the terrain preprocessor which creates the TERRAIN data file (for up
to 25 hills).
c. Output
(1) When CTDMPLUS is run, it produces a concentration file, in
either binary or text format (user's choice), and a list file
containing a verification of model inputs, i.e.,
Input meteorological data from ``SURFACE'' and
``PROFILE,''
Stack data for each source,
Terrain information,
Receptor information, and
Source-receptor location (line printer map).
(2) In addition, if the case-study option is selected, the
listing includes:
Meteorological variables at plume height,
Geometrical relationships between the source and the
hill, and
Plume characteristics at each receptor, i.e.,
--Distance in along-flow and cross flow direction
--Effective plume-receptor height difference
--Effective [sigma]y & [sigma]z values, both flat terrain and hill
induced (the difference shows the effect of the hill)
--Concentration components due to WRAP, LIFT and FLAT.
(3) If the user selects the TOPN option, a summary table of the
top four concentrations at each receptor is given. If the ISOR
option is selected, a source contribution table for every hour will
be printed.
(4) A separate output file of predicted (1-hour only)
concentrations (``CONC'') is written if the user chooses this
option. Three forms of output are possible:
(i) A binary file of concentrations, one value for each receptor
in the hourly sequence as run;
(ii) A text file of concentrations, one value for each receptor
in the hourly sequence as run; or
(iii) A text file as described above, but with a listing of
receptor information (names, positions, hill number) at the
beginning of the file.
(5) Hourly information provided to these files besides the
concentrations themselves includes the year, month, day, and hour
information as well as the receptor number with the highest
concentration.
d. Type of Model
CTDMPLUS is a refined steady-state, point source plume model for
use in all stability conditions for complex terrain applications.
e. Pollutant Types
CTDMPLUS may be used to model non- reactive, primary pollutants.
f. Source-Receptor Relationship
Up to 40 point sources, 400 receptors and 25 hills may be used.
Receptors and sources are allowed at any location. Hill slopes are
assumed not to exceed 15[deg], so that the linearized equation of
motion for Boussinesq flow are applicable. Receptors upwind of the
impingement point, or those associated with any of the hills in the
modeling domain, require separate treatment.
g. Plume Behavior
(1) As in CTDM, the basic plume rise algorithms are based on
Briggs' (1975) recommendations.
(2) A central feature of CTDMPLUS for neutral/stable conditions
is its use of a critical dividing-streamline height (Hc)
to separate the flow in the vicinity of a hill into two separate
layers. The plume component in the upper layer has sufficient
kinetic energy to pass over the top of the hill while streamlines in
the lower portion are constrained to flow in a horizontal plane
around the hill. Two separate components of CTDMPLUS compute ground-
level concentrations resulting from plume material in each of these
flows.
(3) The model calculates on an hourly (or appropriate steady
averaging period) basis how the plume trajectory (and, in stable/
neutral conditions, the shape) is deformed by each hill. Hourly
profiles of wind and temperature measurements are used by CTDMPLUS
to compute plume rise, plume penetration (a formulation is included
to handle penetration into elevated stable layers, based on Briggs
(1984)), convective scaling parameters, the value of Hc,
and the Froude number above Hc.
h. Horizontal Winds
CTDMPLUS does not simulate calm meteorological conditions. Both
scalar and vector wind speed observations can be read by the model.
If vector wind speed is unavailable, it is calculated from the
scalar wind speed. The assignment of wind speed (either vector or
scalar) at plume height is done by either:
Interpolating between observations above and below the
plume height, or
Extrapolating (within the surface layer) from the
nearest measurement height to the plume height.
i. Vertical Wind Speed
Vertical flow is treated for the plume component above the
critical dividing streamline height (Hc); see ``Plume
Behavior.''
j. Horizontal Dispersion
Horizontal dispersion for stable/neutral conditions is related
to the turbulence velocity scale for lateral fluctuations, [sigma]v,
for which a minimum value of 0.2 m/s is used. Convective scaling
formulations are used to estimate horizontal dispersion for unstable
conditions.
k. Vertical Dispersion
Direct estimates of vertical dispersion for stable/neutral
conditions are based on observed vertical turbulence intensity,
e.g., [sigma]w (standard deviation of the vertical velocity
fluctuation). In simulating unstable (convective) conditions,
CTDMPLUS relies on a skewed, bi-Gaussian probability density
function (pdf) description of the vertical velocities to estimate
the vertical distribution of pollutant concentration.
l. Chemical Transformation
Chemical transformation is not treated by CTDMPLUS.
m. Physical Removal
Physical removal is not treated by CTDMPLUS (complete reflection
at the ground/hill surface is assumed).
n. Evaluation Studies
Burns, D.J., L.H. Adams and S.G. Perry, 1990. Testing and Evaluation
of the CTDMPLUS Dispersion Model: Daytime Convective Conditions.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC.
Paumier, J.O., S.G. Perry and D.J. Burns, 1990. An Analysis of
CTDMPLUS Model Predictions with the Lovett Power Plant Data Base.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC.
[[Page 72867]]
Paumier, J.O., S.G. Perry and D.J. Burns, 1992. CTDMPLUS: A
Dispersion Model for Sources near Complex Topography. Part II:
Performance Characteristics. Journal of Applied Meteorology, 31(7):
646-660.
A.3 OCD (Offshore and Coastal Dispersion) Model
Reference
DiCristofaro, DC and S.R. Hanna, 1989. OCD: The Offshore and Coastal
Dispersion Model, Version 4. Volume I: User's Guide, and Volume II:
Appendices. Sigma Research Corporation, Westford, MA. (NTIS Nos. PB
93-144384 and PB 93-144392).
Availability
The model codes and associated documentation are available on
EPA's SCRAM website (paragraph A.0(3)).
Abstract
(1) OCD is a straight-line Gaussian model developed to determine
the impact of offshore emissions from point, area or line sources on
the air quality of coastal regions. OCD incorporates overwater plume
transport and dispersion as well as changes that occur as the plume
crosses the shoreline. Hourly meteorological data are needed from
both offshore and onshore locations. These include water surface
temperature, overwater air temperature, mixing height, and relative
humidity.
(2) Some of the key features include platform building downwash,
partial plume penetration into elevated inversions, direct use of
turbulence intensities for plume dispersion, interaction with the
overland internal boundary layer, and continuous shoreline
fumigation.
a. Regulatory Use
OCD is applicable for overwater sources where onshore receptors
are below the lowest source height. Where onshore receptors are
above the lowest source height, offshore plume transport and
dispersion may be modeled on a case-by-case basis in consultation
with the appropriate reviewing authority (paragraph 3.0(b)).
b. Input Requirements
(1) Source data: Point, area or line source location, pollutant
emission rate, building height, stack height, stack gas temperature,
stack inside diameter, stack gas exit velocity, stack angle from
vertical, elevation of stack base above water surface and gridded
specification of the land/water surfaces. As an option, emission
rate, stack gas exit velocity and temperature can be varied hourly.
(2) Meteorological data: PCRAMMET is the recommended
meteorological data preprocessor for use in applications of OCD
employing hourly NWS data. MPRM is the recommended meteorological
data preprocessor for applications of OCD employing site-specific
meteorological data
(i) Over land: Surface weather data including hourly stability
class, wind direction, wind speed, ambient temperature, and mixing
height are required.
(ii) Over water: Hourly values for mixing height, relative
humidity, air temperature, and water surface temperature are
required; if wind speed/direction are missing, values over land will
be used (if available); vertical wind direction shear, vertical
temperature gradient, and turbulence intensities are optional.
(3) Receptor data: Location, height above local ground-level,
ground-level elevation above the water surface.
c. Output
(1) All input options, specification of sources, receptors and
land/water map including locations of sources and receptors.
(2) Summary tables of five highest concentrations at each
receptor for each averaging period, and average concentration for
entire run period at each receptor.
(3) Optional case study printout with hourly plume and receptor
characteristics. Optional table of annual impact assessment from
non-permanent activities.
(4) Concentration output files can be used by ANALYSIS
postprocessor to produce the highest concentrations for each
receptor, the cumulative frequency distributions for each receptor,
the tabulation of all concentrations exceeding a given threshold,
and the manipulation of hourly concentration files.
d. Type of Model
OCD is a Gaussian plume model constructed on the framework of
the MPTER model.
e. Pollutant Types
OCD may be used to model primary pollutants. Settling and
deposition are not treated.
f. Source-Receptor Relationship
(1) Up to 250 point sources, 5 area sources, or 1 line source
and 180 receptors may be used.
(2) Receptors and sources are allowed at any location.
(3) The coastal configuration is determined by a grid of up to
3600 rectangles. Each element of the grid is designated as either
land or water to identify the coastline.
g. Plume Behavior
(1) The basic plume rise algorithms are based on Briggs'
recommendations.
(2) Momentum rise includes consideration of the stack angle from
the vertical.
(3) The effect of drilling platforms, ships, or any overwater
obstructions near the source are used to decrease plume rise using a
revised platform downwash algorithm based on laboratory experiments.
(4) Partial plume penetration of elevated inversions is included
using the suggestions of Briggs (1975) and Weil and Brower (1984).
(5) Continuous shoreline fumigation is parameterized using the
Turner method where complete vertical mixing through the thermal
internal boundary layer (TIBL) occurs as soon as the plume
intercepts the TIBL.
h. Horizontal Winds
(1) Constant, uniform wind is assumed for each hour.
(2) Overwater wind speed can be estimated from overland wind
speed using relationship of Hsu (1981).
(3) Wind speed profiles are estimated using similarity theory
(Businger, 1973). Surface layer fluxes for these formulas are
calculated from bulk aerodynamic methods.
i. Vertical Wind Speed
Vertical wind speed is assumed equal to zero.
j. Horizontal Dispersion
(1) Lateral turbulence intensity is recommended as a direct
estimate of horizontal dispersion. If lateral turbulence intensity
is not available, it is estimated from boundary layer theory. For
wind speeds less than 8 m/s, lateral turbulence intensity is assumed
inversely proportional to wind speed.
(2) Horizontal dispersion may be enhanced because of
obstructions near the source. A virtual source technique is used to
simulate the initial plume dilution due to downwash.
(3) Formulas recommended by Pasquill (1976) are used to
calculate buoyant plume enhancement and wind direction shear
enhancement.
(4) At the water/land interface, the change to overland
dispersion rates is modeled using a virtual source. The overland
dispersion rates can be calculated from either lateral turbulence
intensity or Pasquill-Gifford curves. The change is implemented
where the plume intercepts the rising internal boundary layer.
k. Vertical Dispersion
(1) Observed vertical turbulence intensity is not recommended as
a direct estimate of vertical dispersion. Turbulence intensity
should be estimated from boundary layer theory as default in the
model. For very stable conditions, vertical dispersion is also a
function of lapse rate.
(2) Vertical dispersion may be enhanced because of obstructions
near the source. A virtual source technique is used to simulate the
initial plume dilution due to downwash.
(3) Formulas recommended by Pasquill (1976) are used to
calculate buoyant plume enhancement.
(4) At the water/land interface, the change to overland
dispersion rates is modeled using a virtual source. The overland
dispersion rates can be calculated from either vertical turbulence
intensity or the Pasquill-Gifford coefficients. The change is
implemented where the plume intercepts the rising internal boundary
layer.
l. Chemical Transformation
Chemical transformations are treated using exponential decay.
Different rates can be specified by month and by day or night.
m. Physical Removal
Physical removal is also treated using exponential decay.
n. Evaluation Studies
DiCristofaro, D.C. and S.R. Hanna, 1989. OCD: The Offshore and
Coastal Dispersion Model. Volume I: User's Guide. Sigma Research
Corporation, Westford, MA.
Hanna, S.R., L.L. Schulman, R.J. Paine and J.E. Pleim, 1984. The
Offshore and Coastal Dispersion (OCD) Model User's Guide, Revised.
OCS Study, MMS 84-
[[Page 72868]]
0069. Environmental Research & Technology, Inc., Concord, MA. (NTIS
No. PB 86-159803).
Hanna, S.R., L.L. Schulman, R.J. Paine, J.E. Pleim and M. Baer,
1985. Development and Evaluation of the Offshore and Coastal
Dispersion (OCD) Model. Journal of the Air Pollution Control
Association, 35: 1039-1047.
Hanna, S.R. and D.C. DiCristofaro, 1988. Development and Evaluation
of the OCD/API Model. Final Report, API Pub. 4461, American
Petroleum Institute, Washington, DC.
[FR Doc. 2023-22876 Filed 10-20-23; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P